SelfServ 6623_6627-B006-7265-B000 (1)

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs
Service Manual
B006-7265-B000
v6
NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
Use pursuant to Company Instructions
COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS
Information to User
The product described in this book is a licensed product of NCR
This equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance Corporation.
with the manufacturer’s instructions. However, there is no
guarantee that interference to radio communications will not The software products described in this document are
occur in a particular commercial installation. If this equipment copyrighted works of NCR Corporation.
does cause interference, which can be determined by turning the
NCR, Cx, Kalpana, Authentic, and APTRA are trademarks of
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult an NCR
NCR Corporation.
service representative immediately.
CAUTION Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
NCR Corporation is not responsible for any radio or
television interference caused by unauthorized Android and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
modifications of this equipment or the substitution or
attachment of connecting cables and equipment iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the United
other than those specified by NCR. Such States and/or other countries.
unauthorized modifications, substitutions, or IOS is a trademark of Cisco, registered in the United States
attachments may void the user’s authority to and/or other countries and is used under license.
operate the equipment. The correction of
interference caused by such unauthorized All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
modifications, substitutions, or attachments will be
the responsibility of the user. Disclaimer:
It is the policy of NCR Corporation to improve products as

technology, components, software and firmware become
available. NCR therefore reserves the right to change
specifications without prior notice.
All features, functions and operations described herein may not

be marketed by NCR in all parts of the world. In some instances,
photographs are of equipment prototypes.
Therefore, before using this document, consult with your NCR

representative or NCR office for information that is applicable
and current.
© 2018
By NCR Corporation, Atlanta, Georgia, USA.
www.ncr.com
All Rights Reserved

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual i
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
C o n te n ts
1. INTRODUCTION
NCR SelfServ 23 27 Reference Document and Safety Information 2
Reference Documents 2
Safety Information 2
Electronics Boards 2
ATM Cash Security 2
Access 3
Barcode Reader 3
Fluorescent Lamps 3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Overview 6
Overall System Checks 6
Lubrication 6
Lubricants 7
Test Tools 7
Cleaning Materials 8
Customer Responsibility 8
6623 ATM Schedule 9

Introduction 9
Power On Checks 9
Power Off Checks 10
Fluiditi Checks 13
Post Preventive Maintenance Checks 14
Security Enclosure 17
General Checks 17
Door Hinge Lubrication 17
Security Enclosure Heaters 18

Security Enclosure Heater Test 18
Pre–requisite 18
Test Frequency and Timing 18
Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure 18
Room Heater Test 19
Room Heat Low 19
Room Heat Timed 19
Room Heat Faulty 19
Room Heat OK 19

ii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
USB 2D Barcode Reader (UBAR) 20

Cleaning 20
Card Readers 21
Dip Card Readers 21
Swipe Card Readers 21
USB IMCRW 22
Clean Read Heads and Smart Contacts 22
Clean Rollers 22
USB Receipt Printer 23

Transport Sensors 23
Thermal Print Head 24
S1 Currency Dispenser 25
Summary checklist 25
Inspect the Pick Module 25
Single Pick Module 25
Double Pick Module 26
Pick Module Internal Timing (D Wheel Timing) 28
Pick Module to Pick Module Timing 30
Inspect the Presenter 30
S1 Front Access sensors 31
S1 Rear Access sensors 31
Inspect Cassettes 31
Diagnostics 33
Vacuum 33
Belt alignment 33
Note skew 33
Facia alignment 33
Shutter 33
Summary Checklist 34
Cleaning Materials 34
Inspect the Pick Module 34
Pick Module to Pick Module Timing 36
Inspect the Presenter 36
Inspect the Cassettes 37
Diagnostics 37
Pick Valve 37
Belt Alignment 37
Note Skew 37
Bunch Splay 38
Facia Alignment 38
Shutter 38

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual iii
CONTENTS
3. DIAGNOSTICS
Overview 40
Introduction 40
System Application 40
Entering System Application 40
USB Service Key 41
Functions on System Application Main Menu 42
Device Diagnostics 43
Control Menu 43
Hardware Information and Recovery 44
Device Self Tests 46
Event Logs 46
Service Tallies 47
Device Status List 48
CE Second Line Support Utility 48
Clearing a Device State 49
Device Servicing 50
Save Module Life Counts 50
Self Service Configuration 50
Display Hardware Details 51
Display Software Details 51
Set Device Configuration 51
Set Date and Time 52
Set Active Language 52
Set ATM Properties 52
Service Manual 52
Transaction Counters 52
Level 0 Diagnostics 53
Power-up Diagnostics 53
Initial Processor Diagnostics 53
System Test And Initialization 53
System Configuration Verification 54
Extended Rom Bios Diagnostics 54
Switch Selectable Diagnostics 54
Extended Diagnostics 54
Test Tools 54
Bootable System Application 54
Key System Application Menus 55
4. PRODUCT CABLING
6623 Product Cabling 57
Introduction 57
Distribution Diagrams 57
Pre-May 2017 Distribution Diagrams 57
AC Distribution with S1 Dispenser 57
AC Distribution with S2 Dispenser 58
DC Distribution with S1 Dispenser 59

iv NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
DC Distribution with S2 Dispenser 60
USB Distribution with Hub 61
USB Distribution without HUB 62
May 2017 Onwards Distribution Diagrams 63
Main Interconnection and Control Diagram 63
AC Distribution 63
Front Access DC Distribution 64
Rear Access DC Distribution 65
Pre-Estoril Core Front Access USB Distribution 66
Estoril Core Front Access USB Distribution 67
Pre-Estoril Core Rear-Access USB Distribution 68
Estoril Core Rear Access USB Distribution 69
Physical Layout of PC Core USB Connections 70
Riverside PC Core 70
Estoril PC Core 70
Common Harnesses 71
AC Harness Assembly 71
Auto Supervisor Safe Harness 72
Alarms Harness 73
Audio 74
Private Audio Athena Cab Harness 74
Private Audio Harness 74
Dip DC Decoupler Harness 75
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly 75
Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly 76
DVI-D Single Link Cable Assembly 77
Facia Harness (View 1 of 2) 78
GPS Tracker 80
DC Harness for GPS 80
Dual DC Power Harness 80
LVDS 81
LVDS Harness 81
LVDS Power Harness 81
Mode Switch Harness 82
PSU Intel Harness 82
RIO 83
MID MISC RIO Enable Harness 83
MIDI MISCto RIO Harness 83
S1 Dispenser Harness (View 1 of 2) 84
S1 Dispenser Harness (View 2 of 2) 85
S2 Dispenser Harness 86
Speaker Harness 87
SPS Harnesses 88
Dual DC Power 88
IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness 88
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness 89
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness 89
IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness 90
USB Alpha Keyboard Cable Assembly 90
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly 91

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual v
CONTENTS
Portrait Camera 91
Front Access (FA) Harnesses 92
DC/USB Tray FA Harness (View 1 of 2) 92
DC/USB Tray FA Harness (View 2 of 2) 93
Rear Access (RA) Harnesses 94
Auto Supervisor Harnesses 94
MEI Extension Harness 94
DC/USB Tray RA Harnesses (View 1 of 3) 95
Revision 98

Introduction 99
Distribution Diagrams 99
Pre-May 2017 Distribution Diagrams 99
AC Distribution 99
DC Distribution 100
USB Distribution 101
May 2017 Onwards Distribution Diagrams 102
Main Interconnection and Control Diagram 102
AC Distribution 102
DC Distribution 103
Pre-Estoril Core USB Distribution 104
Estoril Core USB Distribution 105
Physical Layout of the USB Ports 106
Riverside PC Core 106
Estoril PC Core 106
Harnesses 1 107
AC Harness Assy 107
Alarms 108
Alarms to Midimisc Harness 108
Alarms Harness 109
Audio 110
Private Audio Athena Cab Harness 110
Private Audio Harness 110
Auto Supervisor 111
Auto Supervisor Harness 111
Auto Supervisor Safe harness 111
DC/USB Tray Harness (View 1 of 3) 112
Dip DC Decoupler Harness 116
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly 117
Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly 118
DVI-D Single Link Cable Assembly 119
Heaters Harness 119
Harnesses 2 120

vi NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
LVDS 120
LVDS Harness 120
LVDS Power Harness 121
MEI Extension Harness 121
Mode Switch Harness 121
PSU Intel Harness 122
RIO 122
MIDI MISC RIO Harness 122
RIO Enable RA Harness 123
S2 Dispenser Harness 124
Speaker Harness 125
SPS Harnesses 125
Dual DC Power 125
IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness 126
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness 126
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness 126
IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness 127
Upper Advert Harness 127
USB Alpha Keyboard Cable Assembly 128
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly 128
Portrait Camera 128
Revision 129
5. POWER SUPPLIES
Standard Power Supply (300W) 131
Introduction 131
Description 131
Power Requirements 132
PSU AC Input Connector 132
Input Specification 132
DC Output Specifications 133
Troubleshooting 133
Restart after Shutdown 133
Error Messages 133
Diagnostics 133
Strapping 134
Adjustments 134
FRU Removal and Replacement 134
Cabling 134
Connector Assignment/Pinouts 134
Input/Output Pins 134
Test/Adjustment Tools 134
UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 135

Introduction 135
Description 135
XTREME Power Conversion® - Compact 1U 1K 135

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual vii
CONTENTS
Specification 135
Button Operation 135
Indicators 136
Storing the UPS 136
Eaton® - Rack Mounted with USB HID 137
Definitions 137
Specification 137
Indicators 137
Indications During Operation 138
Storing the UPS 139
Troubleshooting 139
1150VA Module 140
Diagnostics 141
Level 0 141
Level 1 141
Test 141
Report 141
Level 3 141
S_DATA 141
Tallies 141
Strapping 141
Adjustments 142
Configuring The UPS 143
Normal Operation 143
Short Term Outage Or Voltage Variation 143
Long Term Outage Or Voltage Variation 143
Restart After Controlled Shut down 143
UPS Self Test 143
Module Removal and Replacement 144
Cabling 144
6. CORE AND COMMUNICATIONS

USB 7 Port Hub 146
Introduction 146
Description 146
Power Requirement 146
Maximum Cable Lengths 147
Troubleshooting 148
Diagnostics 149
Strapping 150
Adjustments 150

viii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Top Box Mounted Hub 150
Safe Mounted Hub 150
Cabling 150
Connector Assignment 151
Hub Board 151
ATM Interface 151
Mini PC Core 153

INTRODUCTION 153
DESCRIPTION 154
Motherboards 154
Security (Estoril Only) 156
Mandatory Passwords 156
SATA White List 156
PCI PCCM (Optional. Not supported on Estoril) 158
Riser Board (Optional) 158
Lanier 945GSE, Lanier II NM10 or Kingsway GL40 motherboards PCI. 158
Riverside Q67 motherboard PCI. 158
Estoril Q87 motherboard PCI. 159
Estoril Q87 motherboard PCIe. 159
Trusted Platform Module 1.2 (Riverside Optional) 159
Trusted Platform Module 1.2 (Estoril Optional) 160
Trusted Platform Module 2.0 (Estoril Optional) 160
Primary Disk Drives 160
Secondary Disk Drives (Optional) 161
SATA Optical Drives (Optional) 161
Lithium Battery 161
TROUBLESHOOTING 162
DIAGNOSTICS 165
Estoril Motherboard 165
PCI PCCM Board 165
STRAPPING 166
Lanier Motherboard 166
Lanier II Motherboard 167
Kingsway Motherboard 168
Riverside Motherboard 169
Falcon Monte Carlo Motherboard 170
Estoril Motherboard 171
Display port configuration 172
Motherboard Jumpers 172
Serial Port Power Jumpers 172
CLR CMOS 174
A_ON1–Auto Power On Jumper 174
RSD/FSD Strap 175
Falcon Monte Carlo USB Breakout Configuration 175
Riverside USB Breakout Configuration 176
Estoril USB Breakout Configuration 177
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 178
Removing the PC Core Lid 178

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual ix
CONTENTS
System Core Fan 178
PCCM Board (Optional Feature) 179
PCI Riser Card (Optional Feature) 180
External SATA DVD 181
Audio Breakout Cable 182
USB Breakout Assembly 182
Primary Disk Drive 183
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) 183
Solid State Drive (SSD) 184
Secondary 2.5" Disk Drive (with Standard Primary Disk) 184
Secondary 2.5" Disk Drive (with 2.5" Primary Disk) 185
Motherboard 186
Memory Board (SODIMM) 187
Lanier and Lanier II Motherboards 187
Kingsway, Riverside, Falcon Monte Carlo and Estoril Motherboards 188
CPU Cooler 189
Processor 190
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 193
I/O Shield 193
CABLING 194
Interconnection Diagrams 194
Lanier Motherboard 194
Lanier II NM10 Motherboard 195
Kingsway GL40 Motherboard 196
Riverside Q67 Motherboard 197
Falcon Monte Carlo 198
Estoril Q87 Motherboard 199
Cables 199
Audio Breakout Header Assembly (Not applicable to Estoril) 199
Panel Mount Motherboard Power 200
SATA Data and Power Cable 200
USB 2.0 Breakout Assembly 201
VGA Panel Mount Cable (Falcon Monte Carlo Motherboard Only) 202
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS 202
Lanier, Kingsway and Riverside Motherboard Connectors 202
Video - Analogue (VGA) 202
Video - Digital (DVI) 203
Audio 203
Serial Ports 204
Network Connector 204
USB 205
SATA 205
HDDs and Optical Drive SATA Connector 206
Trusted Platform Module (1.2) Header 206
Estoril Motherboard Connectors 207
Display Ports 207
DC Power 207
LCD Backlight Power 207
LVDS Header 208
Serial Port Internal Headers 208
PS/2 Header 208

x NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
SATA Power Connectors 209
Audio 209
Trusted Platform Module (2.0) Header 210
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS 211
Revision 212
7. CARD READERS
USB IMCRW 214
Introduction 214
Description 214
UIMCRW Firmware 215
Card Detection and Pre-head Detection 215
Card Transport 215
Card Return/Capture 215
Security - Long and Short Card Detection 215
Reading and Writing to Magnetic Stripe Cards 215
Digital Decoding 216
Writing Magnetic Data 216
Reading and Writing to Smart Cards 216
Smart Card Standards 216
Sensor Locations 217
Optional Features 217
Card Return on Power Failure or System Escape 217
CROPF Battery 217
CROPF Operation 217
CROSE 217
Latchfast Card Capture 218
CIM/MM Validation 218
Media Entry Indicators 219
Card Clamping 219
Anti-Eavesdropping Kit 219
Troubleshooting 220
Removing Clamped Cards 224
Diagnostics 224
Switch Settings 225
TEST REPORTING 226
TEST DESCRIPTIONS 226
Test 01H - Motor 227
Test 02H - Smart Card Signal 227
Test 03H - SAM1 Signal 227
Test 04H - Clear F-ROM 228
Test 05H - Shutter (Including Throat Sweep) 228
Test 06H - IC Block Solenoid and Sensor 229
Test 07H - PD Sensor Threshold Level Adjust 229
Test 08H - Motor Speed Test 230
Test 09H - Adjustment Start Sentinel Position 230
Test 0AH - Single Cycle Test Mode 230

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xi
CONTENTS
Test 0EH - Repeat Cycle Test Mode 231
All UIMCRW Variants 231
Run to Run Tests 232
3-Track Write UIMCRW 233
Smart Card UIMCRW 234
With Tamper Indication 234
With CIM 235
With MM 235
S_DATA 235
Tallies 235
Strapping 237
Adjustments 238
Pre-head 238
Heartbeat 239
Card Detect Microswitch 239
FRU Module Removal and Replacement 240
MEIs 243
IC Contact Block 244
Throat 245
Battery 246
Base Transport 246
Card Clamping Module 246
Card Clamping PCB 246
Card Clamper 249
PCB Slides and Ribbon Cable Edge Protector 250
Cabling 252
CIM Harness 252
MM Harness 252
Card Capture BIN Harness 253
Connectors 253
Main Control Board 254
CIM/MM PCB 257
CIM/MM with Security PCB 258
IC Block PCB 260
Card Clamping PCB 260
CIM/MM Turnaround Plug 262
Cards 262
USB Smart Dip Card Reader 263

Introduction 263
Description 263
Magnetic Stripe Reading 263
Smart Card Reading 264
Security Feature 264
Troubleshooting 264
Diagnostics 265

xii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
S_DATA 265
TALLIES 266
Strapping 266
Adjustments 266
Cabling 267
USB mini-B connector 267
Power connector 267
Preventive Maintenance 267
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 268

Introduction 268
Description 269
Operation 269
Power 269
Interface Connections 269
LED 269
Error Messages 269
Diagnostics 270
Strapping 270
Adjustments 270
FRU Removal And Replacement 270
Cabling 270
Connector Assignment/pinouts 270
USB connector (J10) 270
DC power supply connector (J6) 270
USB Contactless Card Reader 272

Introduction 272
Description 272
Antenna Unit Connectors 273
Control Unit Connectors 274
Troubleshooting 274
Diagnostics 275
HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property 275
HW_SELF_TEST Property 275
HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY 276
HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY 276
Strapping 276
LEDs and MEEIs 276
Control Board 277
Adjustments 277
Cabling 277
Harnesses 277

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xiii
CONTENTS
USB Contactless Card Reader LED Control 277
USB Contactless Card Reader RF 277
Connector Assignments/Pinouts 278
+24V Power 278
USB 278
AUX 278
R.F. Out 279
LED/Buzzer 279
Card Recycler Module 280

Introduction 280
Description 280
Specifications 280
LED Status Indicator 281
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 281
Maintenance and Configuration 281
Strapping and Adjustments 281
Captured Card Removal 282
Cabling 286
CRM Power Harness 286
Connector assignment/Pinouts 286
8. KEYBOARDS AND ENCRYPTORS

UEPP II 288
Introduction 288
Description 288
Keyboard 288
USB Mainboard 289
Removal Switches 289
USB Interface 289
Troubleshooting 289
Diagnostics 290
Key Detect Test 290
Communications Echo Test 290
Identify Command Test 291
Report Status Test 291
PC Keyboard Test 291
S_DATA 291
Tallies 292
Self Tests 292
Configuration 292
Configuration Options 292
Transfer Firmware Files 292
Display Version Number 292

xiv NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Select Country Version 293
Delete All User Keys 293
Strapping 293
Adjustments 293
Assembly Replacement 293
Defective Assembly Disposal 294
Cabling 294
Test and Adjustment tools 294
Revision 295
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 296

Introduction 296
Description 296
Keyboard 296
USB Main board 297
USB Interface 297
Mechanical Characteristics 298
Error Messages 298
Diagnostics 298
USBCPIN 299
Key Detect Test 299
Delete all User Keys 300
Report Status Test 300
PCI Audit Information Test 300
Authorize EPP for Removal 301
Authorize EPP for installation 301
Device Self Test 301
USBCPIN 301
USBCPIN Self Test 301
Tallies 301
Configuration 301
USBCPIN 302
Delete all User Keys 302
Strapping 302
Adjustments 302
Fru Removal And Replacement 302

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xv
CONTENTS
Cabling 303
USB mini B 304
Heater 304
Test/adjustment Tools 304
Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) 305

Introduction 305
Description 305
Keyboard 306
USB Mainboard 306
USB Interface 306
Troubleshooting 307
Diagnostics 307
Level 0 diagnostics 307
Key Detect Test 308
Report Status 309
Reset Removal Switches 309
PCI Audit Information 309
Tallies 310
Strapping 310
Adjustments 310
Transfer Firmware Files 311
Select Country Version 311
Damaged Assembly Disposal 312
Key Loading 312
Cabling 313
9. DISPLAYS
Backlight Displays 315
INTRODUCTION 315
DESCRIPTION 315

xvi NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Interface Connections 315
7.0 inch Display 315
10.4 inch Display 316
ERROR MESSAGES 316
DIAGNOSTICS 316
STRAPPING 316
ADJUSTMENTS 316
CABLING 316
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS 317
7.0 Inch Display 317
LVDS Connector 317
Backlight Connector 317
10.4 Inch Display 317
LVDS Connector 317
LED Driver Connector 318
Light Bar Connector 318
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 318
15 Inch Dynamo Displays 319

INTRODUCTION 319
DESCRIPTION 319
Thermal Management Module (TMM) 320
Warm-up Time 320
CONFIGURATION 321
Dynamo Display 321
ERROR MESSAGES 321
DIAGNOSTICS 321
STRAPPING 321
ADJUSTMENTS 321
Dynamo Display 321
Thermal Management Module (TMM) 322
Dynamo Display 324
Mini B USB Port 325
Type A USB Single Connector 325
Type A USB Dual Connector 325
VGA Connector 326
DVI-I Connector 326
Temperature Sensor 1 327
Temperature Sensor 2 327
Fan Control 1 327
Fan Control 2 327
Heater 328
Power Input 328

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xvii
CONTENTS
CABLING 328
15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch 329

Introduction 329
Description 329
Glass Sensor 329
Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board) 330
Controller Board 331
A/D Board 331
Projected Capacitive Technology 331
USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver 332
Error Messages 332
Diagnostics 332
Strapping 334
Adjustments 334
Touch Screen Configuration 334
Touch Screen Glass 335
Configuration A 335
Configuration B 336
Controllers 338
Configuration A 338
Configuration B 340
Cabling 342
Flex Circuit - 10 Circuit Cable 342
Glass Sensor 343
Single Flex Connector 343
Dual Flex Connector 344
Controllers 345
A/D Board 347
19 inch Wide Viewing Angle Display 349

Introduction 349
Description 349
Temperature Control 349
USB Connectivity 350
Troubleshooting 350
Diagnostics 350
Strapping 350
Adjustments 350

xviii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Warm–up 350
On–Screen Display (OSD) 350
Cabling 351
Power Connector 351
Digital Video Interface (DVI) Connector 352
19 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen 353

Introduction 353
Description 353
Glass Sensor 354
Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board) 354
A/D Board 355
Projected Capacitive Technology 355
USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver 356
Error Messages 356
Diagnostics 356
Strapping 358
Adjustments 358
Touch Screen Configuration 358
Cabling 359
Flex Circuit 359
Controllers 359
A/D Board 360
10. CAMERAS
USB Cash Exit Slot Camera 362
Introduction 362
Description 362
Troubleshooting 362
Diagnostics 363
Strapping 364
Adjustments 364

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xix
CONTENTS
Configuration 364
Cabling 365
Colour Portrait Camera (USB) 367

INTRODUCTION 367
DESCRIPTION 367
USB Video Camera 367
TROUBLESHOOTING 367
DIAGNOSTICS 368
Self Test 368
CONFIGURATION 369
STRAPPING 369
ADJUSTMENTS 369
CABLING 370
USB Harness 370
MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 370
USB Video Camera Replacement 371
USB Video Camera Harness Replacement 371
DView Camera 372

INTRODUCTION 372
DESCRIPTION 373
Dimensions 373
Camera 373
Dual Power Board 373
Camera Specifications 374
Lens Properties 374
Lens Focus 375
Temperature Requirements 376
ERROR MESSAGES 376
DIAGNOSTICS 376
STRAPPING 376
ADJUSTMENT 376
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACeMENT 376
CABLING 377
Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe 377
Harness Camera Power Top Box 377
Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia 377
Harness 24V EXT 377
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUT 378
Camera 378
Dual Power Board 378

xx NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
11. PRINTERS
USB Journal Printer 380
Introduction 380
Description 380
Environmental Requirements 380
Paper Specification 381
Paper Roll 381
Printable Area 381
Journal Paper Low 381
Troubleshooting 382
LEDs Location and Meaning 382
Module Error Messages 382
General Checks 383
Diagnostics 384
Start-up Tests 384
LED Diagnostic Displays 384
Test Selected By Dip Switch 384
Switch and LED Locations 385
How to Enter a Test 385
Rolling ASCII Print Tests 385
“H” Print Test 386
Dot Check Pattern Test 386
Sensor Level Adjustment 387
Printer Configuration Printout 387
Sensor Test 387
Print Quality Test 387
Winding Motor Test 387
Paper Feed Motor Test 388
S_Data 388
Tallies 388
Strapping 388
Switches 388
Adjustments 389
Head Assembly 390
Cabling 392
Pin Assignments 392

Introduction 393
Description 394

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxi
CONTENTS
Paper Specification 394
Printable area 394
Black Mark Alignment 394
Receipt Paper Low 394
One-sided Single Roll 395
Two-sided Single Roll 395
One-sided Dual Roll 395
Two-sided Dual Roll 396
Troubleshooting 397
LEDs Location and Meanings 397
Module Error Messages 398
General Checks 400
Diagnostics 400
LED Diagnostic Displays 401
Sensor Test 401
Print Quality Test 401
Print Quality Test - Front Hopper 402
Print Quality Test - Rear Hopper 402
Print Alignment Test 402
Slew Test 402
Transport Forward Test 402
Paper Feed Motor(s) Test 402
Knife Cut Test 402
Fascia Alignment Test 402
Slew To Black Mark Test 402
Cut And Capture Test 403
Service Tallies 403
Strapping 404
Fuse 404
Adjustments 404
Printer Configuration Printout 404
Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure 405
One–sided (1ST) Single Roll with or without Capture 405
One–Sided (1ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture 405
Two–Sided (2ST) Single Roll with or without Capture 407
Two–Sided (2ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture 408
Transport 410
Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard) 410
Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp) 411
Print Engine 412
One-sided 412
Two-sided 414
Fuse 415
One-sided Printer 415
Two-sided Printer 415
Front Hopper 415

xxii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Single Roll 415
Dual Roll 416
Rear Hopper 417
Hopper Low Sensor Harness 418
Logic Board 419
One Sided 419
Two Sided 420
Pin Assignments - USB connector (J6) 420
Single Roll Drive Board 421
One-sided 421
Two Sided 421
Dual Roll Control Board 422
Cabling 422
12. SCANNERS
Barcode Scanner 424
Introduction 424
Safety Compliance 424
Description 424
Troubleshooting 426
Module States 426
Cleaning Viewing and Illumination Windows 426
Diagnostics 426
Reporting 426
Self Test 426
Strapping 427
Adjustments 427
Cabling 428
UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board 429
Connector J1 429
Connector J2 (Power) 429
Connector J3 429
Connector J4 429
UBAR Interface PCB 430
Connector J3 430
Connector J2 430

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxiii
CONTENTS
13. DISPENSERS
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser 432
Introduction 432
S1 Variants 432
Pick Modules 432
Single and Dual Configuration 433
Operational Environment 433
Variants 433
Containers 433
Currency Cassettes 434
Purge Bins 434
Specifications 434
Weight 435
Dispenser Dimensions 435
Description 435
Path of Notes 436
Forming the Stack 436
Present 437
Reject 437
Purge 438
Sensors 439
Pick Module 439
Presenter Module 439
Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT) 440
Main Timing Disk 441
Bill Alignment Assembly 442
Note Clamp 443
Note Clamp Sensors 444
Presenter Transport 444
Presenter Timing Disk 446
Transport Sensors 446
Exit Sensor 447
Purge Bin Location Components 447
Purge Transport 448
Purge Sensor 448
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump 448
Voltage and Current 451
Compatibility 451
Dispensers Security Switch 451
Configuration Switches 451
Diagnostic LEDs 451
Firmware Description 452
Troubleshooting 453
Module State Table 453
Troubleshooting Procedures 456
M_Status 3 - Pick Failure 456
M_Status 5 - Sensor Failure/Currency Jam in Main Transport 457

xxiv NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
M_Status 12 - Presenter Clamp/Alignment Mechanism Failure or Jam 457
M_Status 13/14 - Shutter Jammed Open/Closed 457
M_Status 18 - Currency Jam in Presenter Transport/Sensor Failure 457
M_Status 29 - Timing Disk/Motor Failure 457
Diagnostics 458
Level 0 Tests and Result Codes 459
Clear 460
Set Notes 460
Stack 461
Present 461
Dispense 461
Main Motor 461
Self Test 461
Exit Shutter 461
Sensor/Switch Status 461
Presenter Bill Drive 461
Learn Bill Parameters 461
Presenter Clamp 462
Pick Valve 462
Run-To-Run 462
Tamper Indication 462
Get Serial Numbers 462
Serial Number Read Sensors Status 462
Actual To Virtual Cassette Mapping 463
Example 1 463
Example 2 463
S_DATA 464
Tallies 464
Strapping 467
Currency Dispenser Control Board 467
Adjustments 468
Drive Belt Tension 468
Drive Belt Arrangement - Rear Access 468
Drive Belt Arrangement - Front Access 468
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure 468
Calibrating the Dispenser 469
Establishing Singularity and Size 471
Calculation of Reject Rate 474
Error Messages 474
Dispenser Clear Transport Error 474
Change Parameter Errors 475
Learn Parameter Errors 476
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras 477
Authorization and Authentication Procedure 477
Parts Validation 477
Authentication 478
Dispense Protection Configuration 479

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxv
CONTENTS
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access) 480
Replacing the Electronics Box 484
Removing the Control Board 484
Removing the Main Motor 487
Removing the LVDT 488
Replacing the LVDT 490
Pick Module Timing 490
Cabling 490
Internal Cables 490
Dispenser Main Motor 490
Dispenser Interconnection Diagram 491
Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) 492
Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4) 492
Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4) 495
Connector Assignments 497
USB Connector 497
Transport LEDS and Sensors 498
Pick Modules 498
Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT 499
Stepper Motors 499
Intelligent Cassette Interface 499
Clamp Middle Position Sensor 500
Motor Sensors 500
+24V Connector 500
+24V_Interlock Connector 500
Fascia Shutter I2C Connector 501
TTL Shutter Connector 501
Test Adjustment Tools 501
Revision 502
Aria Pick Module 503

Introduction 503
Specifications 504
Weight 504
Voltage And Current 504
Function of the Pick Module 504
Cassette Guides and Latch 505
Cassette Identity Sensors 505
Pick Module Keyplate 505
Pick Action 505
Pick Timing 505
Pick Sensor 506
Cassette Low Sensor 506
Belt Transport 507

xxvi NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump 507
Pick Interface Boards 507
Single Pick Interface Board 508
Double Pick Interface Board 509
Serial Number Read 510
Adjustments 511
Separating the Pick Units of the Aria Double Pick Module 512
Pick Unit Internal Timing 512
Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship 513
Presenter Timing 514
PIck Module to Presenter Timing 514
1 High Dispenser 514
Test Tools 516
Internal Cables 516
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2) 517
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2) 517
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2) 518
Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2) 519
Strapping 519
Fuse FS1 519
Connector J1 520
Connector J2 (Single Pick) and J5 (Double Pick) 522
Gulp Feed Detector 523
Low Temperature Thermistor 523
Connector J4 (Single Pick) And J2 (Double Pick) 524
Connector J3 (Single Pick) and J3/J4 (Double Pick) 524
Control Signals 525
Sensor and Cassette Data Bus Signals 525
Revision 526

Introduction 527
Description 527
Cassette Variances 528
1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features 528
Standard Security Currency Cassettes 529
Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes 530
Fluiditi Currency Cassettes 531
Cassette Components 532
Wide Plastic Cassette - Components 533
Tamper Indicators 533
The Cassette Body 533
The Cassette Lid 534
The Cassette Base 534

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxvii
CONTENTS
Cassette Operation 535
Pusher Operation 536
Insertion Counter 536
Cassette Identification Code 537
Cassette Body to Lid Identification 538
Troubleshooting 539
Diagnostics 540
Strapping 540
Adjustments 540
Currency Length Adjustment 540
Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers 540
Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers 541
Currency Width Adjustment 541
Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes 543
Wide Currency Cassette 543
1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette 546
Currency Loading 548
Opening The Cassette 549
Removing Unused Currency 550
Pusher Operation 550
Currency Release 551
Preparing Currency 552
Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette 552
Loading The Cassette 553
Closing The Cassette 555
Setting The Cassette Identification Code 556
Changing Cassette Identification Code 558
Mechanical 559
Currency Length Adjustment 560
Currency Width Adjustment 567
Currency Width Spacer Codes 572
Note Low Sensing Adjustment 573
Cabling 574
Tools 575
Revision 576

Introduction 577
Description 577
Weight 578
Presenter Core 578

xxviii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Nose 579
Carriage 580
Bill Aligner Module (BAM) 581
Single Note Transport (SNT) 581
Main Motor and Pump Assembly 582
Currency Cassette 583
Purge Bin 584
Status Indicator Lights 585
Vacuum System 585
5/6 Hi Expansion Board 587
Electrical System 589
5/6 Hi Expansion Board - 5 High 590
Sensors 591
Troubleshooting 591
Error Messages 591
Control Board 592
Pick Module 593
Cassette 595
Purge Bin 597
Divert Area 597
Reject Area 597
Retract Area 597
Carriage 598
Single Note Transport 602
Presenter 604
Exit Shutter 606
Suction Cups 607
Media Aligner 607
Vacuum System 608
Carriage Alignment 609
Carriage Motor Cover 610
Carriage Umbilical Cable 611
Carriage Plates Parallel When Open 611
Carriage Movement 612
Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter 613
Diagnostics 614
Action Requests 616
Clear 616
Stack 617
Present 617
Retract 617
Self Test 618
Learn Measurement 618

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxix
CONTENTS
Set Guidance Lights 619
Prepare for Shipment 619
Enable Stack Ready 619
Calibrate Sensors 619
Diagnostics Tests 619
Pick Arm Test 620
Pick Valve Test 620
Shutter Test 622
Divert Gate Test 622
SNT Test 623
Carriage Test 623
Clamp Test 623
Media Deflector Test 624
Read Sensors Test 624
Error Codes 629
M_Status and M_Data 629
Tallies 629
Strapping 631
Adjustments 631
Pick Module Timing Procedure 631
4–High Dispenser 631
5–High Dispenser 632
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras 633
S2 Carriage Offsets for Open and Latchfast Purge Bins 633
Latchfast Bin Latch 634
Jam Clearance 635
How to move the Carriage to the Closed position 635
HETS Calibration 635
Setting Node Parameters 636
Establishing Singularity and Width 637
Error Messages 640
Authorization and Authentication Procedure 640
Parts Validation 640
Authentication 641
Carriage Umbilical Harness 643
Removing the Carriage Umbilical Harness 644
Replacing the Carriage Umbilical Harness 644
Carriage 645
Removing the Carriage 645
Replacing the Carriage 646
Nose 648
Removing the Nose 648
Replacing the Nose 649
Bill Aligner Module (BAM) 649
Removing the BAM 649
Replacing the BAM 651

xxx NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Single Note Transport (SNT) 652
Removing the SNT 652
Replacing the SNT 654
Main Motor and Pump Assembly 654
Removing the Motor and Pump Assembly 654
Replacing the Motor and Pump Assembly 655
Removing the Double Pick Module Assembly 656
Replacing the Double Pick Module Assembly 659
Removing the Single Pick Module Assembly 659
Replacing the Singe Pick Module Assembly 661
Removing the Main Control Board 661
Replacing the Main Control Board 661
5/6 Hi Expansion Board 662
Removing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board 662
Replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board 662
Pick Support Frame 662
Removing the Pick Support Frame 662
Replacing the Pick Support Frame 662
Latchfast Security Plate 663
Removing the Latchfast Security Plate 663
Replacing the Latchfast Security Plate 663
Presenter Core 663
Removing the Presenter Core 663
Replacing the Presenter Core 666
Presenter Assembly 667
Removing the Presenter Assembly 667
Replacing the Presenter Assembly 667
Cabling 668
Presenter Harness 668
Interface Harness 670
S2 Double Pick Module Harness 670
Single Pick Module Harness 673
Carriage Position Sensor Harness 675
Dual Cassette ID Harness 675
Single Cassette ID Harness 676
SNT Harness 677
BAM CIC Harness 679
Purge Bin LEDs Interface 679
Purge Bin Interface Harness 679
State of Health Harness 679
Test and Adjustment Tools 680
Glossary of terms 681
Revision 682
S2 Dispenser Cassette 683

Introduction 683

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxxi
CONTENTS
Tamper Indicator 683
Cassette Identification Code 684
Cassette Body and Lid Marking 684
Cleaning 685
Cassette Configuration 685
Cassette Height 685
Cassette Width 687
Replenishing Cassettes 690
Preparing Currency 690
Loading the Cassette 691
Shutters 693
INTRODUCTION 693
DESCRIPTION 693
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters 693
Shutter Assembly 694
Control Board 694
Solenoid Driven Shutter 694
Shutter Assembly 695
Control Board 695
TROUBLESHOOTING 695
DIAGNOSTICS 695
STRAPPING 695
ADJUSTMENTS 696
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters 696
A - Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter preset to the closed position 696
B - Refit of motor only 697
C - Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter in open position 697
CABLING 698
Stepper Motor Driven Shutter - Internal Cabling 698
Solenoid Driven Shutter - Internal Cabling 699
14. SECURITY
Alarms 701
Introduction 701
Location 701
Basic Alarm System 701
Enhanced Alarm System 702
High Security Alarm System 703
Description 703
Troubleshooting 703
Diagnostics 703
Level 0 703
Level 1 703
Level 3 704

xxxii NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Strapping 704
Adjustments 704
Cabling 705
Alarm Termination Panels 705
Basic 705
Basic and Enhanced/High Security 705
Silent Alarm Connector, J1C 705
Door Switch Connector, J2 706
Alarm Output Connector, J3 706
Vibration Sensor Connector, J4 706
Enhanced 707
Basic and Enhanced/High Security 707
Silent Alarm Connector, J1 707
Door Switch Connector, J2 707
Alarm Output Connector, J3 707
Composite Attack Connector, J4 708
I/O Panel Alarm Output Connector 708
Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader) 710

Introduction 710
Description 710
Functional Elements 710
SPS Control PCB 711
Error Messages 712
TROUBLESHOOTING 713
Diagnostics 713
Diagnostic LEDs 713
Tallies 716
Configuration 716
Post Repair Test: Re-Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1 718
Strapping 720
Adjustments 720
SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly 721
Interconnecting Harnessing 721
Drill Mat 721
SPS Control Box 722
SPS Control PCB 722
Cabling 723
SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness 724
Low Power DC Distribution Harness 724
USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly 724
Penetration Mat Harnesses 724
Short 724

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxxiii
CONTENTS
Long 724
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness 724
Bezel Assembly 725
ASM Shield Ground Harness 725
SPS Dip Bottom Electrode Harness 725
SPS Dip Top Electrode Harness 725
SPS Control PCB Connectors 726
Skimming Protection Solution 727

Introduction 727
Description 727
Capacitive Sensing 728
Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’ 728
Electrical 728
SPS Control PCB 729
SPS Daughter PCB 729
Troubleshooting 730
Module Error State Messages 730
Check for Jamming 732
Check for Detection 732
False Jammer Alert or SPS Constantly On 733
Diagnostics 733
Diagnostic LEDs 733
Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1 736
Service Tallies 739
Configuration 740
Strapping 741
Adjustments 741
SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly 742
Drill Mat 742
SPS Control Box 744
Daughter PCB 744
SPS Control PCB 746
Interconnecting Harnessing 746
SPS Control PCB Connectors 747
Daughter PCB Connectors 747
Cabling 747
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control PCB) 748
IFD2 (SPS) Harness - IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW) 748
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB) 748
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS Control PCB) 749
Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB) 749

xxxiv NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Short 749
Long 749
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB) 749
ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB) 750
Revision 751
15. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

Product Environment Heaters 753
INTRODUCTION 753
DESCRIPTION 753
Temperature Control 753
TROUBLESHOOTING 753
DIAGNOSTICS 754
STRAPPING 754
ADJUSTMENTS 754
CABLING 754
Revision 755
16. MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

SelfServ 23 Module Removal 757
ACCESS TO LOWER FACIA ITEMS 757
REMOVE KEYPAD 759
KEYPAD MEI 760
MCRW MEI/FACIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT 760
RECEIPT FACIA INSERT & MEI 763
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE 764
15 INCH TOUCHSCREEN 765
Removal 765
Replacement 769
19 INCH TOUCHSCREEN 769
Removal 769
Replacement 771
15 INCH DISPLAY 771
Removal 771
Replacement 773
19 INCH DISPLAY 773
Removal 773
Replacement 774
FDKs AND SCREEN 775
FACIA 777
FACIA SHELF 778
PC CORE 779

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxxv
CONTENTS
GPS ANTENNA & TRACKER 781
Replacement 782
DISPENSER 783
Revision 784

ACCESS TO FASCIA ITEMS 785
KEYPAD 785
KEYPAD MEI 787
MCRW MEI/FASCIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT 787
RECEIPT FASCIA INSERT & MEI 789
MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE 790
PC CORE 790
PSU 794
SHUTTER 794
CCTV Camera 795
FASCIA REMOVAL 796
DISPLAY 800
TOUCHSCREEN 802
FDK BEZEL 804
FASCIA SHELF 808
DISPENSER 809
S1 Currency Dispenser Removal and Replacement 810

Introduction 810
Presenter Options 810
Pick Modules 810
Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers 811
Removal of Lower Pick Module 811
Replacing the Lower Pick Module 812
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access) 812
Replacing the Electronics Box 817
Removing the Control Board 817
Dispenser Control Board - Rear Access 817
Removal of Fluiditi Security Module 818
Dispenser Control Board - Front Access 819
Replacing the Control Board 820
Removal of Upper Pick Module 821
Rear Access 821
Front Access 822
Replacing the Upper Pick Module 822
Removing the Presenter Module 823
Rear Access 823
Front Access 823
Replacing the Presenter Module 823
Control Board Authorisation 823
Control Board Authentication 826

xxxvi NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
Calibrating the Dispenser 830
Establishing Singularity and Size 832
Error Messages 835
Dispenser Clear Transport Error 836
Learn Parameter Errors 837
Diagnostics 838
Strapping 838
Adjustments 838
Drive Belt Tension 838
Drive Belt Arrangement - Rear Access 839
Drive Belt Arrangement - Front Access 839
17. MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES AND INTERFACES

Miscellaneous Interface and Remote Input/Output Boards 841
INTRODUCTION 841
DESCRIPTION 841
Miscellaneous Interface Board 841
Remote Input/Output (RI/O) Board 842
Night Safe Service 842
Alarms Service 842
Indicators Service 842
Board Layouts 843
TROUBLESHOOTING 844
DIAGNOSTICS 844
Diagnostic LEDs 844
Poly-Switches 845
STRAPPING 845
ADJUSTMENTS 845
CABLING 846
Interconnect Diagram 846
RIO Enable Harness 846
Miscellaneous Interface Board Connectors 847
+24V DC Power Connector (J5) 847
USB Connector (J2) 847
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1) 847
Every Unit Item Connector (J3) 847
Feature Connector (J4) 848
Remote I/O Interface Connector (J7) 849
Remote Input/Output Board Connectors 849
+24VDC Power Connector (J1) 849
Miscellaneous I/O Connector (J2) 850

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual xxxvii
CONTENTS
Alarms Status Connector (J3) 850
Reserved I/O Connector (J4) 850
Remote Relay and Remote Indicator Connector (J5) 851
Media Entry/Exit Indicators 852

Introduction 852
Description 852
Troubleshooting 852
Diagnostics 853
Strapping 854
Adjustments 854
Cabling 854
USB DVD RW Slimline Drive 855

INTRODUCTION 855
DESCRIPTION 856
Dimensions 856
Mounting Orientation 856
Disk Clamp System 856
Tray Ejecting 857
Manual Eject Button 857
Emergency Eject Hole 857
ATAPI Command 857
Supported Disk Types 857
Read and Write Speed 858
ERROR MESSAGES 859
DIAGNOSTICS 859
STRAPPING 859
ADJUSTMENTS 859
CABLING 859
USB Mini Interface 860
DC 5 V In Connector 860
Midi Miscellaneous Interface 861

INTRODUCTION 861
DESCRIPTION 861
Board Layout 861
TROUBLESHOOTING 862
DIAGNOSTICS 862
Diagnostic LED 862

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
CONTENTS
STRAPPING 862
ADJUSTMENTS 862
CABLING 863
Interconnect Diagram 863
In-Circuit Debug Cable 863
Midi-Misc Board Connectors 863
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1) 863
Public Audio (“beep”) Connector (J2) 864
MEEI (5-10) Connector (J3) 864
USB Connector (J4) 865
Private Audio Connector (J5) 865
FDK Connector (J6) 865
Alarms Status Connector (J7) 866
Auto Supervisor Connector (J10) 868
In-Circuit Debug/Programming Connector (J11) 868
TTL Card Reader Connector (J12) 868
Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive 870

INTRODUCTION 870
DESCRIPTION 870
Dimensions 870
Tray Ejecting 871
Manual Eject Button 871
Emergency Eject Hole 871
ATAPI Command 871
Supported Disk Types 872
Read and Write Speed 872
ERROR MESSAGES 873
DIAGNOSTICS 873
STRAPPING 873
ADJUSTMENTS 873
CABLING 873
Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout 874
Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA 874
REVISION

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual 1
1. INTRODUCTION
NCR SelfServ 23 27 Reference Document and Safety Information 2

2 NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
NCR SELFSERV 23 27 REFERENCE DOCUMENT AND

SAFETY INFORMATION
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
This manual covers the devices used in the SelfServ 23 ATM (class number 6623) and SelfServ 27 ATM
(class number 6627) and should be read in conjunction with the following documentation.
l B006-7237, NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Parts Identification Manual

l B006-7198, NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Operator Overview
l B006-7244, NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Site Preparation
l B006-7199, NCR SelfServ 23 ATM Installation Guide
l B006-7373, NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Parts Identification Manual

l B006-7196, NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Operator Overview
l B006-7328, NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Site Preparation
l B006-7197, NCR SelfServ 27 ATM Installation Guide
SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronics Boards
This equipment uses Lithium Batteries. There is a danger of an explosion if a battery is

incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to local environmental guidelines.
ATM Cash Security
This system uses mercury in the tilt switches located on the back of the currency
dispenser module. Care should be taken when handling the tilt switches to avoid a
spillage.

Access
To prevent strain or injury when carrying out tasks on the inner facia area of rear access
terminals adjust your position to ensure that your waist is at the level of the top of the
security enclosure, allowing your chest and abdomen to lie flat on the top of the security
enclosure. Your feet should be supported on a firm base.
Barcode Reader
The Barcode Reader Module uses a class 2 laser emitter that may be uncovered if the scanner engine is
interfered with in any way.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified

herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Fluorescent Lamps
Fluorescent Lamps in display and fascia assemblies contain small amounts of mercury.
Dispose of according to applicable laws.

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Overview 6
6623 ATM Schedule 9
Security Enclosure 17
Security Enclosure Heaters 18
USB 2D Barcode Reader (UBAR) 20
Card Readers 21

OVERVIEW
OVERALL SYSTEM CHECKS
CAUTION
Make sure that ESD precautions are observed.
l Investigate any errors that may require immediate action

l Power off the terminal and vacuum the entire inside of the unit, paying special attention to:
l Power supply unit
l Core.
l Check all fans for correct operation and clean out any accumulations of dust, especially the power
supply and core
l If the face of the display, or vandal glass is dirty, drop the monitor back from the vandal glass and
clean the display face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is present and in
good condition
l Using a vacuum cleaner, remove all accumulations of dust residue from the facia jack socket
l Ensure that camera facia windows are clean. If, for any reason, the camera is removed from the
terminal, the opportunity should be taken to clean the inside of the facia window and the camera
lens
l Use the Customer Confidence Test or Level 2 diagnostics to make sure that all modules are
functioning correctly
l Clear all Device Status List messages
l Make sure your CSS Key Disk has been removed from the unit.
LUBRICATION
Satisfactory operation of mechanical components depends upon proper lubrication.
1. Use clean lubricants from properly labeled containers.

2. Avoid excessive lubrication. Apply only that amount which will provide a thin coating on the
entire bearing area or surface, unless otherwise specified.
3. All parts to be lubricated must be free from dust, corrosion and metal chips.
4. Lubricate bearing areas and surfaces during assembly, unless conditions caused by subsequent
handling are detrimental (for example, accumulation of chips, grit, and so on) to the proper
operation of the part. In those cases lubrication should be applied after assembly.
5. Apply lubricants using the most convenient method when none is specified, that is by brushing,
dipping, or oil can. Spraying is not recommended.
6. Lubricate all spring hooks and spring studs with lubricant B.

7. Working clipped or riveted assemblies should not be lubricated before riveting but only after all
processes, handling, or storage involving exposure to dirt or serious atmospheric contamination
are past.
8. On assemblies that have shafts on which one or more moving parts are assembled, lubricate
both the shaft and the hub areas on each part with the specified lubricant.
9. Lubricants can cause serious deterioration of rubber. Avoid contamination of drive belts and
drive rolls.
Lubricants
The lubricant ID letter in the table below is referred to in the appropriate device preventive
maintenance chapters in this section.
Lubricant NCR Reference No. * Recommended Alternative(s)

ID Type
A NCR No.2 General Purpose Oil see below Shell Oil Co. Donax T-6
Mobil Oil Co. Mobile ATF 220
Exxon Oil Co. ATF or Esso ATF
B Synthetic Lubricating Grease 009-0004618 None
(100gm containers)
C NCR No.3 Special Purpose Grease 603-8000150 None
D Solid Lubricant Paste 009-0009020 Molykote DXTM paste
E General Electric Silicone Fluid, SF-96 603-8000482 None
(50) ™
F Head Cleaning Fluid 603-8000539 None
The NCR Reference Numbers in the above table are quoted from publication RM0300, NCR Tool
Catalogue.
TEST TOOLS
The following pin extraction tool is suitable for power connectors.
Manufacturer Type Manufacturer’s Part No.

Molex Mini-Fit Jr. 11-03-0044 (HT 60630 B)

CLEANING MATERIALS
The following table details the recommended cleaning materials:
Cleaning Materials NCR Reference No. *

Cleaning kit 009-0004633
MCR/MCRW cleaning card 998-0052929
Cheque Processing Module cleaning pack 009-0018796
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the responsibility of the customer to clean the following modules (refer to the relevant Operator
Manual).
l Cash Deposit Module Sensors

l Keyboard surfaces
l Monitor surface
l MCRW/MCR
l Printers.

6623 ATM SCHEDULE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance schedule for the NCR SelfServ 23 and SelfServ 27
ATMs.
Preventive maintenance should be carried out during repair calls.
POWER ON CHECKS
GENERAL CHECKS
Every Visit Discuss performance of the ATM with the custodian/operator/first line maintainer and
make notes of any entries in the logbook, which require resolution. Inspect for vandalism
and damage and advise the customer or customer representative of any findings requiring
repair.
Every Visit Visually check for FRAUD/TAMPERING around the Keyboard, Fascia and Card Reader.
Check for foreign devices and extra wires or harnessing. Report such activities to your
Territory or Service Account Manager. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE A DEVICE, THERE
MAY BE PERSONAL RISK - PLACE THE ATM OUT OF SERVICE.
Every Visit For remote sites, check for lighting around the building area. NCR is not responsible for
building lighting but does need to inform the proper persons (help desk or branch persons)
of any safety infractions or issues.
Every Visit Report poor installation of Alarms/Comms cables to your territory manager. For example
excess cable loops lying in base of safe or cables interfering with moving parts etc. Where
possible tidy the installation to avoid ongoing interference with moving parts.
Every Visit Remove media stored within both top-box and security enclosures (paper rolls, envelopes,
statement paper etc.) Remove currency storage bags and any rubbish lying inside the ATM.
Every Visit Once the machine has been opened visually inspect the modules before you get started.
Check the cables and rails on all modules to ensure smooth operation.
Every Visit Review error and tally logs either on-screen or printed and investigate any errors that may
require attention. Always print the tally logs and keep the last copy in the logbook. There
may be many Track 3 read errors on the MCRW and many communication errors; these do
not require any action.
Yearly If the ATM is replenished by branch staff, ask them to remove all currency containers and
the currency from the currency cassettes, and return cassettes for examination. Check
correct operation of the cassette doors, brushes, spring fingers, pusher plate, and pusher
plate pressure. Check cassette note height and width guide settings are correct, check for
high spots in the settings.

CABINETRY & FACIA

Every Visit Observe the general appearance of the ATM cabinet and clean as necessary
Every Visit Verify all fans are operating correctly and are not noisy, including the safe, LCD and power
supply fans.
Yearly Clean CD/DVD-ROM drive with cleaning CD.
Yearly Verify correct operation of AC interlock switches; ensure there is not excessive float on
the door when in the closed position that would allow the switch to operate intermittently.
Yearly If fitted verify correct operation of auto supervisor by opening/closing of fascia, security
enclosure or top-box as appropriate. Listen for the click, verify that there is not excessive
float on the fascia or cabinetry when in the home position that would allow the switch to
operate intermittently.
POWER OFF CHECKS

GENERAL CHECKS
Yearly Where it is safe (incoming power to the ATM from the building supply is switched off, and
there is no danger to yourself or others from the electrical power), carefully check the
tightness of the power ground connection at the ATM.
Yearly Check the power ground (and polarity) at the wall outlet using a Circuit Tester (if available).
The outlet cover should not be removed - any issues should be escalated to the customer
for resolution. This is normally outside the scope of NCR Service Contracts, but it is
important for ATM performance.
CABINETRY & FACIA

Yearly Using a vacuum cleaner and (if necessary) air can, vacuum ALL internal surfaces of the ATM
including the PC core and fan, power supply, fans, and filters (where applicable).
Yearly Verify correct operation of the fascia and appearance door locks, verify locks are securely
fastened and locking nuts have not backed off. Ensure fascia is latching into position and
door latch plates are adjusted correctly.
Yearly Ensure all fascia mounted shutter doors are aligned and move freely, clean if necessary. Be
sure that the shutters have a covering over the circuit board portion of the shutter. Ensure
shutter assemblies are fully tightened onto the fascia.
Yearly Lubricate the safe door hinges with lubricant A (or similar low viscosity oil) as described in
the Preventive Maintenance Overview.
Yearly Verify harnessing is not being snagged/damaged during door opening/closing operations
and ensure harnessing has been tied back properly after part replacement. Make sure all
ground straps are fitted to shutter assemblies, facias and to keyboards. Check harnessing is
not being snagged/damaged during module racking.
Yearly Ensure retract and slide assemblies are securely bolted in place.
Yearly If applicable, check condition of rain management components, ensure Mylar guides aren't
torn.

S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER
Every Visit Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.
Every Visit Replace all suction cups (277-0009574). Check pick line for broken nozzles. Replace the
pick line if broken, cracked, or bent. Clean all sensor and LED board assemblies.
Every Visit Check for worn or broken gears or belts. If worn or broken belts are found, module
replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.
Every Visit Verify that the pick and presenter modules are correctly timed (D Wheel, Pick - Pick). If
you do re-time the dispenser, check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing
on any gears and timing stays true. As each pick module "D" lines up with the sensor, check
that the half round wheel is ready to contact the full circular wheel inside the pick module.
Worn or broken gears may warrant pick module replacement.
Yearly Ensure that the note flicker at the purge bin is present, replace broken flickers or cable ties
with a new flicker.
Yearly Disconnect the vacuum tube from the bottom pick solenoid; replace the vacuum filter
(445-0612449). When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing be
sure to clean this out.
Yearly Clean the LVDT sensor wheels with cotton buds and alcohol.
Yearly Check the stacker wheels for damage and schedule module replacement if required.
Yearly Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Yearly Ensure pick frame cassette latches operate correctly and lock cassette into position.
Yearly Check presenter to safe door cam ramp height setting.
N/A Lubrication - Lubrication is only required on 66XX dispenser products when components
are being replaced.
Every Visit Remove any foreign objects, note fragments or paper clips.
Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the dispenser.
Remove note debris throughout the transport.
Every Visit Remove obvious dust build-up on any optical sensors and prisms in the following areas:
l Pick Sensors
l Width Sensor
l Stack Entry Sensor
l Divert Entry Sensor
l Carriage Bunch, Pre-Exit and Exit Sensors
l Carriage positions sensor and flags
l Purge Sensor (Reject Bin)
l Retract from Present (RFP) Entry Sensor
l Media deflector sensors
Every Visit Check pick line for broken nozzles.
Check pick line and replace if broken, cracked, or bent.

Every Visit Check belts are correctly seated.
Check belts for wear and damage. If worn or damaged belts are found, module
replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log book.
Every Visit Check gears for tooth damage.
Every Visit Clean HETS rollers and line 2 if required.
Every Visit Inspect, and if required, clean the cassettes.
Check the holes in the cassette pusher plate are clear of debris.
Yearly Check suction cups and replace if necessary.
Yearly Check that the pick modules are correctly timed. If you need to re-time the dispenser,
check timing several times to be sure no teeth are missing on any gears and timing stays
true.
Worn or damaged gears may require a pick module replacement.
Yearly Check the SNT Flicker Pads and SNT Note Deflector for damage or wear.
Yearly Disconnect the vacuum tube from just below the air filter to prevent dust from dropping
down into the tubing and replace the filter.
If some dust does drop down into the tubing it must be cleaned out.
Yearly Check the HETS rollers for debris build-up and clean if necessary.
Yearly Check purge bin micro switch for damage.
Yearly Check the smooth insertion of cassettes and purge bins and that latches engage easily.
Yearly Check the nose and carriage metalwork is not damaged or bent.
Yearly Check harnesses and parts that may contact the safe for damage.
Yearly Look at tallies, SOH and enhanced diagnostics telemetry to see if any FRUs are out of spec.
Yearly Run appropriate diagnostics for actions performed.
Yearly Check BAM edge register slides freely and BAM rack slides without interference.
Yearly Check carriage umbilical for wear or damage.
Yearly Clean scanner in serial note read transport using compressed air or a soft thin brush or
cotton bud. A build-up of dirt can be removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy
water or with an alcohol free wipe. Cleaning should be more frequent in units with high
note volume or which are installed in dusty locations.
MOTORIZED CARD READER/WRITERS

Every Visit The shutter and pre-head are the most vulnerable parts of the card reader and subject to
the most dirt ingress and wear. These parts should be inspected and cleaned as required
on each service visit. Pre-head wear will not be visible without removal of the pre-head
from the card reader mouth. If Customer Failure reports that 'cards are not accepted,' then
replacement of the card reader would be appropriate.
Every Visit The shutter mechanism should be checked and adjusted for the shutter open and width
switch positions.


Every Visit Verify MCRW transport aligns correctly at fascia.
Every Visit Clean dip reader. Check that the dip debris access through the dip chassis is clear and can
allow the passage of dust and debris to clear the transport.
Yearly The MCRW is to be replaced after every 383K transactions to minimize downtime and
improve reliability. This value should be reduced if the MCRW is located in a "dirty hostile
environment." If the MCRW was not swapped on the previous PM (refer to log book), swap
it with one that has been thoroughly refurbished.
PRINTERS
Every Visit Ensure receipt/statement slots are free from obstruction, paint, moulding flash, burrs etc.
Every Visit Ensure receipt/statement/passbook transports align correctly with fascia.
Every Visit Ensure printer PCB covers are fitted.
Yearly Clean receipt printer thermal print head. (More frequently if stamp media used).
Yearly Use an air can and vacuum to remove dust from all areas of the printers.
Yearly Check that the customer keyboard is centrally aligned in the aperture and no obvious
damage or leaks are present, this should be checked at installation or repair of a keyboard
and on each visit.
Yearly If the face of the LCD or the vandal glass is dirty drop monitor back from the vandal glass
and clean the LCD face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is
present and in good condition.
LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS

Every Visit Check that the customer keyboard is centrally aligned in the aperture and no obvious
damage or leaks are present, this should be checked at installation or repair of a keyboard
and on each visit.
Yearly If the face of the LCD or the vandal glass is dirty drop monitor back from the vandal glass
and clean the LCD face and the inside of the vandal glass. Ensure that the dust seal is
present and in good condition.
FLUIDITI CHECKS
The Yearly PM checks/tests for Fluiditi require ATM power to be both on and off. Every visit check can
be completed with the system armed however any repairs require the system to be disarmed.
l Power on to disconnect the battery

l Power off to disarm the system
l Power on the run tests
l Power off to arm the system
l Power on to reconnect the battery

FLUIDITI - ICS & CS

Before completing the yearly checks/tests or any repairs, disconnect the battery and
disarm the system as described in the SAMM Fluiditi ATM Security and Fluiditi
Replenishment Security documents.
Every Visit Check (and repair if necessary):
Wiring Harnesses
All connectors on Alarm and PDS boards to see if cables are seated properly
Check battery voltage: under normal conditions 8.7 Volt minimum when the ATM is
switched on and minimum 11.2 when switched off. If the voltages are lower than these
limits when the ATM has been operating in normal conditions (i.e no prolonged period
without power), the battery pack should be replaced. On ICS solutions, check the metal
tangs or holding points on the cassette latches are intact
Yearly Check Switching Internal to External Status Led indicators, Shunt Switch, Door Timer.
Yearly Perform the following tests:
Test cassette position
Test ICS servos
Test cassette tamper position
Test battery
Test penetration mats
Test tilt switches
POST PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS

GENERAL CHECKS
Every Visit Let the custodian/operator/first-line maintainer run a test transaction.
CABINETRY & FASCIA

Every Visit On units that have Audio feature, ensure that the feature is working by using a head phone
set.
Every Visit Ensure that all Media Entry Indicators are operational.
Every Visit Check that all interlock switches operate properly.
Every Visit Perform the SOH task saying the suction cups have been replaced.
Every Visit Load the ATM with customer engineer test currency.
Test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense modules.

Every Visit Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.
Every Visit If there have been many rejected amounts or complaints about ATM keeping money,
dispense 40 bills to ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter.
If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter.
If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log
book.
If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for
proper dispensing out the ATM.
Every Visit Check that all interlock switches operate properly.
Every Visit Perform the SOH task.
Every Visit Load the ATM with customer engineer test currency.
Test dispensers to ensure proper operation of all dispense modules.
Every Visit Dispense 1 bill to the front of the ATM; ensure proper delivery and firm grip.
Every Visit If there have been excessive purged notes or incorrect amounts dispensed, dispense 40
bills to ensure no bills are catching on (clipping) the shutter.
If clipping has occurred, verify correct operation of the shutter.
If clipping persists, then a module replacement should be scheduled and noted in the log
book.
If applicable, adjust the presenter height guide within the safe or on the safe door for
correct dispensing.

Every Visit Using the appropriate speed test card, run card reader speed test.
Every Visit Ensure speed is 24 +/-3%. -(not appropriate on VE or IMCRW Card Reader).
Every Visit Where applicable check reading of track 1, 2 & 3 using diagnostics. - No Errors reported.
Every Visit Where applicable check Smart card operation using diagnostics.
PRINTERS
Every Visit Check print quality for fully formed and legible characters and that receipts and statements
are delivered correctly, check knife operation and black dot being correctly cut. Check for
correct operation of paper low switch.
Every Visit Clear fitness. Clear SOH and ensure that state of health indicates "Terminal Healthy".
LCD MONITOR & KEYBOARDS

Every Visit Verify touch-screen calibration accuracy within diagnostics.
Every Visit Check that all keys on both the fascia and FDK keyboard assemblies are functioning
properly.

FINAL CHECK
Every Visit Mark the completed activities in the log book, and schedule any follow-up module
replacements required.

SECURITY ENCLOSURE
GENERAL CHECKS
l Check the security enclosure interlock switch function by closing the security enclosure door and
running a motor test in diagnostics. Pull the security enclosure door handle firmly while the motor
is running
l If applicable, lubricate door hinges.
DOOR HINGE LUBRICATION

Lubricate the security enclosure door hinges with lubricant C, or a similar Special Purpose Grease, at
each (annual) preventive maintenance call.
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the security enclosure door.

2. Raise the door to the full height of the adjustment screw located in the hinge block. Care must
be taken when raising the door as damaged pins could fracture during this process.
3. Clean the hinge pins. All corrosion or old lubricant should be removed from the pins.
4. Apply a small amount of grease to the hinges and wipe off the excess. Raise and lower the door
on the Allen screw to spread the lubricant over the surface of the hinge pin.
Realign the door to the security enclosure body. Make sure that there is an equal gap between the door
and the body at both the top and bottom of the door.

SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATERS

Terminals that are installed through the wall (TTW) into the outside world, are fitted with a heater in the
security enclosure. This heater is designed to keep the internal temperature of the terminal above 10°
Celsius or 50° Fahrenheit.
The terminal room is required to be at or above 10° Celsius, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, as defined by
the NCR Site Preparation and Requirements.
NCR recommends that an annual check of security enclosure heaters and terminal room heating
systems is performed and reported back to the account support team.
SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TEST

Pre–requisite
A Non–Flammable Freezer Aerosol propellant.
Below is a typical product, a local variant can be acquired to reduce cost.
Product Description Manufacturer Details

Ambersil, Freezer Spray—Fault Detection on AMBERSIL
Electronics Tel: +44 (0) 1278 727200
Fax: +44 (0) 1278 425644
E–mail:sales.uk@crcind.com
Web: www.ambersil.com
Test Frequency and Timing

Perform the security enclosure heater test annually, 2 months prior to the start of normal cold
temperature period.
Security Enclosure Heater Test Procedure

Perform the procedure below during a regular service visit in which the security enclosure door is
required to be opened, typically this would be on a Currency Dispenser service visit:
1. Open the security enclosure door.

2. Retract the currency dispenser module or BNA to gain access to the security enclosure heater,
typically, this is mounted on either the back wall or the floor of the security enclosure.
3. Ensure that the AC Interlock is overridden, ensuring that the heater has mains power applied.
4. Locate the security enclosure heater thermostat, normally close to the heater assembly.
5. Using your hand or fingers, check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heaters are not on.
6. Spray the freezer aerosol onto the thermostat for 10 seconds.
7. Check the airflow above the heater to ensure the heater comes on.
8. In a few minutes it should get too hot to touch.

9. Record this in the WO remarks as SECURITY ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED OK.

10. If the heater does not function. Does not come on or gets warm but not hot. Record SECURITY
ENCLOSURE HEATER TESTED FAIL. This action permits the material to be ordered and a future
WO set-up to investigate and correct the issue.
ROOM HEATER TEST

The air surrounding the terminal is required to be at a minimum temperature of 10° Celsius 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week. Assuming the terminal operates for this same period.
Use the remarks below for an existing Work Order to indicate the site conditions to the account team.
These remarks permit the account team to address any room heater issues with the customer.
Room Heat Low

Use this remark to describe installations that set down the room heat to 1° to 3° Celsius in order to
protect against water freezing level. This temperature is not enough to ensure that our products operate
correctly.
Room Heat Timed

Use this remark to describe installations with timed heaters to ensure Branch Staff are warm during
their working hours. This system is good and correct, but the heater switches off at 17:00, and the
temperature drops off during the evening and early morning.
Room Heat Faulty

Use this remark to describe installations where the room heater occasionally fails and the estates
management team is unaware of this.
Room Heat OK
Use this remark to describe a site where the heating system operates at 24 hours a day, seven days a
week with the temperature continuously at or above 10° Celsius.

USB 2D BARCODE READER (UBAR)
CLEANING
On every service visit clean the viewing window on the outside of the facia with a soft cloth or lens
tissue dampened with water (or a mild detergent - water solution). If a detergent solution is used, rinse
with clean lens tissue dampened with water only.
CAUTION
Do not touch the imager lens. If necessary, only use compressed air to clean the lens.

CARD READERS
DIP CARD READERS

If required, prepare the cleaning card (998-0052929) by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid (603-
8000539).
1. Insert the cleaning card, with the felt side down, into the card reader.
2. Remove the card from the card reader.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 five times.
Note: Before using the card reader, wait five minutes for the cleaning fluid on the reading head to
evaporate.
SWIPE CARD READERS

If required, prepare the cleaning card (998-0052929) by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid (603-
8000539).
Swipe the cleaning card through the reader five times.

If the cleaning card you have is single sided, swipe it through the reader five times with the cleaning face
to the right and five times with the cleaning face to the left.
Note: Before using the card reader, wait five minutes for the cleaning fluid on the reading head to
evaporate.

USB IMCRW
At each service call, the read heads and the rollers should be cleaned (see below). In addition, perform
the following tasks as needed:
l Remove the shutter assembly and clean the housing thoroughly

l Check throat to main transport alignment and adjust where necessary
l Check the width switch and shutter switch operation
l Make sure that the shutter operates freely
l Clean all sensors and LEDs
l Clean drive belt with alcohol and swabs.
Clean Read Heads and Smart Contacts

The read heads, and smart contacts where configured, should be cleaned at every UIMCRW service call.
Use the MCRW cleaning card (NCR part number 998-0052929 or equivalent) to clean the heads, as
follows:
1. If required, prepare the cleaning card by spraying lightly with head cleaning fluid (such as part
numbers 603-8000539 or 603-9014721).
2. Select the Maintenance option from the System Application Main Menu.
3. Select the MCRW option from the Maintenance Menu.
4. Select the Cleaning Cycle Test option.
5. Insert the card to start the cleaning cycle.
6. When the cycle is finished, remove the cleaning card. If it is not removed, the card is captured.
7. If the card readers supports smart cards, select the SC Cleaning Cycle Test option and repeat the
procedure.
Clean Rollers
At each service call, use a cloth moistened with iso-propyl alcohol to clean the three rubber rollers
indicated in the following illustration.

USB RECEIPT PRINTER

Perform the following tasks as necessary:
l Clean transport sensors

l Clean thermal print head
TRANSPORT SENSORS
Clean the two pairs of transport sensors using compressed air to remove dust from the surface of each
sensor.
CAUTION
Sensors should not be removed from chassis for cleaning. If for any reason sensors needs
to be removed, they must be re-calibrated.

THERMAL PRINT HEAD

Clean the print head by wiping the black strip five times with a cleaning pen.
Description Part Number

Thermal Head Cleaner (box of 10) 497-0472684
When the printer is loaded with stamp sheets or other adhesive media, the thermal print head should
be cleaned on a regular basis as the adhesive may cause a build up of dust on the head.
CAUTION
Do not clean the print head or any other area inside the printer with detergent or
alcohol as this may damage the print head and electronics.

SUMMARY CHECKLIST
Perform the following at each service call:
1. Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:

l Pick cups and pick arm assembly
l Vacuum hoses and T-connections
l Vacuum filter
l Gears and belts
l Ribbon cables to pick interface boards
l Sensors
l Reed switches.
2. Check D wheel timing within each pick module.
3. Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.
4. Inspect the presenter for wear/accumulation of dirt on:
l Sensors
l Belts
l Rollers.
5. Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.
6. Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE

Single Pick Module
Suction cups
Pick sensor
Pick arm
Keyplate
Timing disk
D wheels
Vacuum hose
Pick valve

Double Pick Module
Suction cups
Pick sensor D wheels
Pick arm
Keyplate
Timing disk
Pick valve
Vacuum hose
T connector
l Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent.

l Measure the vacuum at each pick valve and at the filter (see Vacuum test in Diagnostics section). It
should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held for more than 60 seconds after the motor stops.
l Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.
l Check the vacuum filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy dust
contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis-picks.
Notes:
l When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest pick module.
Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the dust from the tube and valve.

l Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a good fit with the
vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the connection with a cable tie, or by
cutting approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off the end of the tube (leaving a little of the flared end
of the tube makes it easier to fit over the new filter). Do not use heat or chemicals to soften the
pipe on top of the filter in order to fit the tube over it: this will result in leaks.
Cable tie
l Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.
l Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per pick module:
replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed.
The 66XX threshold is 103 000 bills.
l Check for worn or broken gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module. Replace if
necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft are in place. Circlips
which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts, accelerating gear wear).
l To prolong gear life, the pick module orientation can be swapped. i.e. on the four high dispenser,
the top and bottom modules can change places, as should the middle two modules.
l Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to each other
and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.
l Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.
l Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling with pick sensor
or bent keyplate.

l Check that the cassette low sensor reed switch housing on the pick arm is not cracked. Replace if
necessary, a damaged housing can lead to a Note Low condition not being identified.
Keyplate
Reed Switch
and Pick LED
Assembly
PICK MODULE INTERNAL TIMING (D WHEEL TIMING)

To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units by removing
the timing belt shown in the following figure. Retain the timing belt for refitting at the end of the
adjustment.
Timing belt
Timing disk
The relationship to be set within the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam driven vacuum
arm line.
Note: In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first.

1. Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper tooth of the
drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.
2. Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the module looking
from the currency cassette).
3. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its mating tension
wheel.
4. Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing disk lines
up with the timing sensor body.
5. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D wheels is
away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of 0.5 mm 0.5 mm (0.02 in. 0.02 in.) exists
between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the tension wheels as shown in the first
figure above.
6. Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.
7. Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit in a double pick or on the next single pick module.

8. Check the D wheel timing by inserting a note between the D wheel and drive roller then, using
finger pressure, pull on the note to test the pinch. Check both sides: if there is a difference in the
pinch is could indicate a bent frame which requires the pick module to be replaced. If the pinch
is equal but not sufficient for drive, replace the pick line.
PICK MODULE TO PICK MODULE TIMING

When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module has been set, the pick units have to
be locked in a fixed timing relationship:
1. Rotate the gear train of the first (top) pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise direction
until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
CAUTION
Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing disks should
turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and forwards.
1. Rotate the gear train of the second pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive cluster timing
disk lines up with the timing sensor body. Continue as necessary, setting the timing disk to 3 on
the third pick unit and to 4 on the fourth.
2. Replace the timing belt removed earlier around the pulley wheel of the lower pick position
and put it on as many teeth as possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick position, taking
care not to dislodge the settings. Turn the upper gear train in the normal direction of travel
(see Caution above) to ride the timing belt fully on to the pulley wheel.
Note: The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick
modules and the presenter.
INSPECT THE PRESENTER

l Check for worn or broken belts. Replace if necessary.
l Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.
l Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust using
compressed air.

S1 Front Access sensors

Exit
Transport Sensor TS4
Sensor Stack Sensor TS2
Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A
From Pick
Modules LVDT
Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
S1 Rear Access sensors

Transport Sensor TS4
Exit Stack Sensor TS2
Sensor Transport Sensor TS3 & TS3A Purge Overfill Sensor TS1
LVDT From Pick

Modules
INSPECT CASSETTES
l Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Replace damaged cassettes. Clean
inside and out if they are dirty, paying particular attention to the cassette door and note height
guide.
l Check that the pusher plate and the truck door sliding guides move freely.
l Check that the cassette id magnets, note width guides and cassette height spacers are correct for
the notes being dispensed.

l Inspect how well cash has been loaded. Poorly loaded or over-stuffed cassettes will result in mis-
picks and dispenser jams. The maximum stack size is indicated by the label on the inside of the
cassette.
Max. Stack
Check for obvious defects such as:
l Adhesive tape on the surface of the currency

l Staples, pins, clips or any foreign matter attached to the currency
l Torn or limp notes with pin holes or missing sections in the body of the currency
l Tears exceeding 13mm (0.5 in.) from any edge of the currency
l Damage or tears to the leading edge (direction of travel) of the note
l Two or more notes stuck together
l Corner folds more than 13mm (0.5 in.) along any edge (straighten as required)
l Folded notes
Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
l Check for bowed notes caused by elastic bands or other packaging on currency which can cause
the notes to jam in the dispenser. Notes bowed across the width have been specifically identified
as causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser and it is recommended that these notes should be
processed through a counting machine where possible or at least manually fanned and flattened
several times. Notes should be loaded in bundles of 100 notes, alternating the orientation of the
bundles from side to side.
20
20

Note: If the effective picking of the notes is compromised by the note design or bowing, the
bundle orientation should alternate from front to rear facing as well as from side to side.
DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser.
Vacuum
l Perform a Diagnostic Clear command System Application to run the main motor and drive the
vacuum pump. Measure the vacuum with a gauge at each pick valve in turn, starting at the lowest.
The vacuum should measure >800mb (23.5 InHg) and be held for more than 60 seconds after the
motor stops. If the vacuum is below this level, measure again at connections progressively higher
up the vacuum hose until the section with the leak is isolated (it will be directly below where you
first get a good vacuum reading). Replace the damaged hose then test again.
l Perform the test again at the air filter. If it fails at the filter, the problem is either the pump or one
of the tube connections between it and the air filter.
Belt alignment
Mark the dispenser drive belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to see if the belts
are still in alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary. Check for wear and replace as
necessary.
Note skew
Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note skew in the
stacking area. If notes are skewing, inspect the belts and roller in the pick module and the presenter. If
they are clean but the test continues to fail, the presenter needs to be replaced.
Facia alignment
Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the safe door
opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.
Shutter
Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50 times with the
facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the shutter.

SUMMARY CHECKLIST
Perform the following at each service call:
Inspect the pick module for wear or damage to:

- Pick cups and pick arm assembly
- Vacuum hoses and T-connections
- Air filter
- Gears and belts
- Sensors
Check pick to pick timing between pick modules.
Inspect the SNT for wear/accumulation of dirt on sensors, belts and rollers.
Inspect the carriage for wear/accumulation of dirt on sensors, belts and rollers.
Inspect cassettes and check how well cash is loaded.
Perform diagnostics to verify correct operation.
CLEANING MATERIALS
The following cleaning materials are the only authorized materials for use on the S2 Currency Dispenser:
l Canned air (10 oz. NCR stock number 526487), or a soft brush.
l Damp, lint-free cloth.
Only use these approved cleaning methods as use of other cleaners could damage the module. Cleaners
containing alcohol or other solvents and degreaser (such as Fedron) can damage the plastics used in the
sensor lenses and in the belts. This results in clouding of the sensor covers and prisms, and also degrades
the belts causing them to become sticky.
INSPECT THE PICK MODULE

Refer to the S2 Dispenser service chapter for sensor location diagrams.
l Check pick vacuum hoses, replace if broken, cracked or bent.

l Carry out a Pick Valve Diagnostic Test.
l Check the hose T connectors for leaks, replace if damaged.

l Check the air filter above the top pick module and clean out if necessary: heavy dust
contamination of the filter could reduce the vacuum and cause mis-picks.
Note: When you disturb the air filter some dust will drop down the tubing to the lowest pick module.
Disconnect the tube from the lowest pick valve and clean out the dust from the tube and valve.
Note: Annual replacement of the filter is recommended. When replacing the filter, a good fit with the
vacuum hose tube can be achieved by either securing the connection with a cable tie, or by cutting
approximately 8 mm (0.3 to 0.4 in.) off the end of the tube (leaving a little of the flared end of the tube
makes it easier to fit over the new filter). Do not use heat or chemicals to soften the pipe on top of the
filter in order to fit the tube over it: this will result in leaks.
Cable tie
l Check the pick arm assembly for cracks or wear, replace if necessary.
l Check the pick suction cups. Replacement is based on the number of bills picked per pick module:
replace when SOH Replace Soon message is displayed. The threshold is 1 800 000 bills.
l Check for worn or damaged gears and belts on the side and rear of the pick module. Replace if
necessary. (If gears are worn, check that all circlips on the associated shaft are in place. Circlips
which may have fallen off can cause lateral movement of shafts, accelerating gear wear).
l If gears on the upper pick module appear worn, gear life can be prolonged by swapping the two
the pick modules, i.e., on the four high dispenser, the two pick modules can change places.
l Check for wear in the ribbon cables connecting the pick module interface boards to each other
and to the presenter control board. Replace if necessary.
l Check the alignment of the pick sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust.
l Check that the cassette inserts fully and latches into place. If not, check for fouling with pick sensor
or bent keyplate.
Note: After cleaning the sensors, use SysApp to reset all pick, SNT, carriage and presenter sensors.
Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Calibrate Sensors.

Pick Module to Pick Module Timing

When the internal timing of both pick units of a double pick module have been set, the pick units have to
be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Follow the S2 Double Pick Module Timing Procedure as
described in the S2 Dispenser service chapter.
Note: The S2 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick
modules and the presenter.
INSPECT THE PRESENTER

Refer to the S2 Dispenser service chapter for sensor location diagrams.
l Remove obvious dust build-up on the following:

l Carriage Position Sensor
l Purge Bin Sensors
l Pick Sensors
l Stack Entry Sensor
l Width Sensor
l Divert Entry Sensor
l Media Deflector Sensors
l Carriage Bunch, Pre-Exit and Exit sensors
l Carriage Position Flag
l Check for worn or damaged belts. Replace if necessary.
l Check for worn or dirty rollers. Replace or clean if necessary.
l Check the alignment of the presenter sensors and clean any accumulations of dirt/dust using
compressed air.
Note: After cleaning the sensors, use SysApp to reset all pick, SNT, carriage and presenter sensors.
Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Calibrate Sensors.

INSPECT THE CASSETTES

Refer to the S2 Dispenser Cassette service chapter for cassette cleaning, currency preparation and
currency loading instructions.
l Replace damaged cassettes.

l Inspect the cassettes for damage, dirt, sticky tape or residue. Clean inside and out if they are dirty.
l Inspect how well cash has been loaded.
DIAGNOSTICS
Perform the following diagnostic tests to verify proper operation of the dispenser:
Pick Valve
Refer to the S2 Currency Dispenser service chapter for the Pick Valve Diagnostics Test instructions.
Belt Alignment
There are three sets of drive belts:
l Pick Transport Belts

l SNT Transport Belts
l Carriage Belts.
Mark the belts with a straight line, run a note dispense test then check to see if the belts are still in
alignment. If not, check for dirt and clean as necessary.
Check for wear and replace as necessary.
Note Skew
Run a single dispense test from each pick module repeatedly while checking for note skew in the
stacking area.
If notes are skewing, inspect the following areas and replace if necessary:
l Cassettes
l Pick Modules
l SNT
l BAM
l Carriage.

Bunch Splay
Dispense a maximum bunch size from the lower cassette.
If the bunch is purged or an issue with purged notes has been reported, this may be due to excessive
splay detected in the bunch and the following areas must be inspected:
l BAM
l Carriage links
l SNT exit.
If there is an unacceptable amount of splay when the bunch is presented, possibly preventing all the
notes from being taken, check the nose for a concave lower plate or damage to the interface bridge.
Facia Alignment
Run a 40 bill dispense test through the facia to verify alignment of the dispenser to the safe door
opening and shutter. If the test fails, check the presenter to facia alignment.
Shutter
Run the dispenser shutter test with halt on error enabled in the control menu, looping 50 times with the
facia closed to verify shutter alignment. If the test fails, replace the shutter.

3. DIAGNOSTICS
Overview 40

OVERVIEW
INTRODUCTION
Note: This chapter provides an overview of the diagnostic aids available on terminals running APTRA XFS
software. For terminals running APTRA Base software, refer to the APTRA Base User Guide (B006-7071)
for ATM diagnostics.
The main route to fault finding and diagnosis is System Application, which is described in general terms
in this chapter. The details of the tests available for each device are described in the device chapters of
this manual. Also refer to the Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6237) for M_STATUS and M_DATA
test results.
System Application also provides other functions, such as pro-active device servicing and configuration
of the terminal and devices, which are described in detail in Self Service Support - System Application
User Guide (B006-6167).
This overview chapter covers the following areas of diagnostics:
l System Application, including:

l CE Second Line Support Utility
l Level 0 Diagnostics
l Test Tools, including:
l Bootable System Application
SYSTEM APPLICATION
The APTRA XFS System Application provide access to the functions required to carry out runtime
configuration, diagnostics and maintenance. See the illustration at the end of the chapter showing the
some of the key menus in System Application.
Entering System Application

Access to diagnostic routines is only offered if a valid NCR USB Service Key is inserted when System
Application (Sys App) is started.
To enter diagnostics, proceed as follows:
1. From the Supervisor menu, select Diagnostics (or the owning organisation’s equivalent).
2. Insert your NCR USB Service Key in the PC module.
3. Select System Application.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts and enter your 6-digit PIN.

The system application main menu will appear as shown below.
USB Service Key

Access to the various areas of System Application is determined by the level of permission on the
individual’s Service Key. For example a key could allow access to Diagnostics and Self Tests only or could
allow access to all areas of Sys App, except the ability to validate the replacement of certain spare parts.
The functions to which a key does not provide access, will either not appear on the System Application
menus, or will appear but be unavailable.
If System Application is started without a USB key, or three unsuccessful attempts at entering a key PIN
have been made, the main menu screen will appear as shown below: with certain options not available
and the option ‘Maintenance’ in place of ‘Diagnostics’. The Maintenance option gives access to card
reader cleaning tests and UEPP2 details such as firmware version.

Functions on System Application Main Menu

The following functions on the System Application main menu are accessed through FDKs or areas on
the touchscreen.
Transfer Interface -
transfers the System Application interface between the operator panel and the front interface on a rear
access terminal.
After the transfer option has been selected at the rear, press any key at the front interface, then at the
prompt enter the password 2468 and press OK. This is to ensure that only authorised users can access
the System Application from the front interface. A password is not required to transfer from the front to
the rear interface.
Save NT Information -
saves the Windows application, system and security Event Logs to a removable memory device. A
prompt will be displayed if more than one storage device is needed to store this information.

System Shutdown -
initiates the Windows operating system shutdown process. Once the system has written unsaved data to
the disk, a message appears indicating shutdown is complete. The terminal can then be powered off.
If the user does not have the access rights to perform an operating system shutdown then a prompt will
be displayed indicating this and the Sys App main menu is re-displayed.
Exit -
terminates System Application and returns control to the software that was running when Sys App was
started.
Device Diagnostics
The Device Diagnostics option on the Sys App main menu provides access to all device diagnostic test
functions via the menu shown below. When this option is selected, an information log entry is made to
record the fact that diagnostics has been accessed.
Select the touchscreen area or numeric key for a device to access its diagnostic tests. See the
appropriate device chapter in this manual for details of the tests possible for each device.
Control Menu
The Control Menu can be accessed from the Device Diagnostics menu or from the individual device tests
menus. It permits you to view or modify the current control settings. The following settings are
provided:

Control Option Description Possible Values Default

Halt On Error Determines whether or not a test ON/OFF OFF
continues regardless of any error
returned from any action (loop mode or
run-to-run only)
Delay Test Times Delays each test for a duration defined 0 - 99 seconds 0
by the operator when run in loop or run-
to-run mode (the individual device tests
are run sequentially as one test).
Log Updates and Tallies Used to enable/disable log and tally ON/OFF ON
updating during the operation of
diagnostic tests.
Hardware Information and Recovery

The functions under this Sys App main menu option are:
Replace Device (Power Devices Down) -

This option allows all devices to be powered down except the PC core, so that a device can be replaced
without re-booting the whole terminal. After selecting this option, you will be prompted to confirm you
wish to power down all devices, and you can then do so using the CE service switch, located behind a

cover beside the main on/off switch. A narrow probe, such as the shaft of a screwdriver, is required to
access the button. On powering the devices back on, a result screen will display which devices are still
present from before the power down, and which devices have been added.
Replacing one of the following devices will trigger a status of “Device not authorised” on the device
status list:
l USB EPP2
l USB PPD
l USB iMCRW
l USB Smart Dip Card Reader
l USB Cash Dispenser
l USB GBRU
The ‘Device not authorised’ status can be cleared from the list as usual provided a USB Service Key with
Parts Replacement permission is present in the PC core.
Reset Device (Cycle Power) -

This powers down all devices except the PC core, and then immediately restores power, effectively
resetting all devices. When the devices are powered back on, a results screen displays which devices
are still present from before the power down, and which devices have been recovered by the reset.
Reset USB Ports -

This resets all USB ports, and displays a results screen listing which devices are still present from before
the reset and which devices have been recovered. This function allows recovery of USB functionality,
without re-booting the terminal, in situations where a USB connection is lost for an undetermined
reason while the device is still physically connected.
USB Viewer -
Lists all devices with functioning USB connections, and to which port they are attached on which hub.
Selecting a device from the list displays the detail of the connection, allowing the USB cable to be
identified and the connection to be traced from device to hub(s) to core. This option provides an initial
check whether or not the system is ‘seeing’ a device. Physical removal and replacement of a USB
connector will be reflected in USB Viewer almost immediately./
Device Manager -
Similar to Microsoft Windows Device Manager, this option allows the user to view the status of the PC
devices attached to the system, such as modems, comms ports and networks cards.
Troubleshooting Example -
a device is reporting a loss of USB communications:
1. Check the USB connections at the device, the hub and the pc core. Re-connect the cables if they
are disconnected. If they are connected correctly, proceed to the next step.
2. Use USB Viewer to determine if the terminal is ‘seeing’ the device, now that the cables have
been checked. If not, proceed to next step. If the terminal has found the device but the fault is
still being reported, proceed to step 4.
3. Use Reset USB Ports to attempt to recover the USB connection. If this does not work, proceed to
next step.

4. Use Reset Device to attempt to recover the device driver. If this does not work, proceed to next
step.
5. Use Replace Device to power off all devices without re-booting the pc core. Replace the faulty
FRU (field replaceable unit) on the device.
Device Self Tests

This option from the Sys App main menu provides access to device self tests which can be run to check
whether or not a device is operational, or to diagnose the cause of a fault.
Use either the touchscreen or keypad to select one or more test, or choose the ‘Select All’ option. Tests
can be de-selected by pressing the touchscreen area or numeric key again. Then select ‘Run Test(s)’ to
run the chosen test(s).
The self tests are run in the order in which they appear on the Device Self Tests menu. During some self
tests, prompts may be displayed requesting that an action is performed. If these actions are not
performed the test may not be completed successfully.
After the tests have been run, a screen will display the results, showing which tests failed, passed or
were incomplete.
Event Logs
The Event Logs which can be selected from this option are:
l Software
l Communications
l Device.

A summary screen is displayed, listing all events in the selected log. From this screen, detailed
information can be displayed by selecting an event in the log, or the whole log can be saved to a
removable memory device.
Choosing the option ‘Filter’, allows you to display only the events for a particular device or reason code,
as appropriate.
The software events include:
l Sequence Number and Date/Time

l Source File Name
l Line Number
l Physical Process Name
l Logical Process Name
l Logical Thread Name
l String Data.
The communications events include:

l Service Name
l Severity
l M_Status.
The device events include:

l Service Name
l Device Name
l M_Status
l M_data
l T_code.
Service Tallies
The Service Tallies function provides access to a menu where a list of Tallies can be displayed, cleared
and saved to a removable memory device.

Device Status List

This function displays a list of all device states requiring attention.
The following information is provided for each device state:
l Device Name - the name of the device that requires attention.

l Description - a short description of the problem.
l Attention - whether the state requires attention “now” or will require attention “soon”.
l User category - this specifies what type of user is able to deal with the state, a Customer Engineer
or an Operator. (A user category of “CE may be required” indicates that an operator can attempt
to deal with the state and if the operator fails to clear it a CE should be called).
l Self Clearing - whether the device state is self-clearing or not. A self-clearing device state is
automatically removed from the list when the user takes the required action. For a non-self-
clearing device state the user must indicate to System Application that action has been taken, by
clearing the state.
l Status ID - the unique status id identifies the status at a system level and can be useful when
reporting and tracking faults.
CE Second Line Support Utility

If the CE Second Line Support Utility DVD (product id G531-1040-0000) is present in the disk drive,
selecting an individual item from the device status list will display a summary screen, prompting the user
to choose to either clear the state or to see more details.

The ‘More Details’ options displays a list of possible root causes for the device state, in order of
probability, from highest to lowest.
Selecting a root cause displays a summary screen giving the recommended isolation and resolution
procedures for that cause. Certain root causes have enhanced leadthrough, which provides detailed
resolution instructions, and graphics to illustrate them.
Some root causes can be cleared by routine actions such as replenishment or jam clearance, in which
case first line maintenance (FLM) leadthrough will be displayed with step by step instructions and video.
Clearing a Device State

The user can choose to clear individual device states or to clear all the states at once. A device state
should only be cleared after the user has performed the actions required to clear the device state.
Clearing an Individual State

1. Select the device state to be cleared.
2. If the selected device state can be cleared by more than one action, a screen will be displayed
for the user to indicate which action has been performed to clear the state.
3. If clearing a device state affects a device’s life counts then a prompt is displayed asking the user
to confirm that the action has been performed.
4. The device self test is run to check that the device is operational.
5. Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.

Clear All
The Clear All option should only be used if all of the reported device states have been dealt with.
1. Select the ‘Clear All’ FDK.

2. The device self tests are now run to check that the devices are operational.
3. Select the ‘Previous’ FDK to return to the Device Status List screen.
Device Servicing
This menu option should be used to report that a device servicing action (for example replacing the cash
handler suction cups) has been performed when the Device Status List is not reporting that the action is
required.
The user should only select an action on the menu after they have actually performed that servicing
action. Selecting an action will run a self test on the device, to check that the action has been
successfully performed and that the device is operational.
Save Module Life Counts

The Save Module Life Counts option saves the following module variable types to a removable memory
device:
l Tallies with no thresholds

l Life counts with single thresholds
l Life counts with double thresholds.
For each module variable, a record containing the following information is saved:
l Device Name
l Module Name
l Variable Name
l Variable Value
l Threshold 1 Value (only if variable has single or double thresholds)
l Threshold 2 Value (only if variable has a double threshold).
Self Service Configuration

Provides a set of options that are used to configure the terminal or display configuration information.
These options are:
l Display Hardware Details

l Display Software Details
l Set Device Configuration
l Set Date and Time
l Set Active Language
l Set Active Printer
l Set terminal Properties.

Display Hardware Details

Select the Display Hardware Details option to display the hardware configuration. This information
includes:
l Product Class
l Serial Number
l A list of all the fitted devices fitted.
This information can be saved to a removable memory device.
Display Software Details

Select the Display Software Details option to display the software configuration. This information
includes:
1. The Operating System name, version and build numbers.

2. The Self Service software name, version and build numbers.
This information can be saved to a removable memory device.
Set Device Configuration

Select the Set Device Configuration option to configure devices. A list of devices which can be
configured is displayed. See NCR publication “Self Service Support ‐ System Application User Guide”,
B006-6167 for details of the configuration of devices.
The following devices have only a basic configuration parameter:
l Alarms
l Remote Relay
l Remote Status Indicator
l Proximity Detector
l Advert light
l Fascia Light.
These basic configuration parameters can be toggled between PRESENT and NOT PRESENT for each
device. Setting the parameter to NOT PRESENT will “hide” the presence of a device from any software
which requests details of the devices fitted to the terminal. Setting the parameter to PRESENT will allow
any software which requests details of the devices to be made aware that this device is present.
Changes to the parameters for any of the devices require the terminal to be reset before the changes
take effect.
The following further options are available under Set Device Configuration:
Hardware Information and Recovery -

displays the following menu choices:
l Firmware version - displays device firmware versions

l Device Recovery Wait Time - allows the user to configure how long Sys App waits for devices to be
seen after power is either cycled or switched off and on, using Reset Devices or Replace Device
from Hardware Information and Recovery option under the Device Diagnostics menu. Default
value is 90 seconds.

l PC Information - allows the user to perform PC troubleshooting by displaying PC hardware and

network information, such as details of bios, core, operating system, disk drive, disk space
remaining, communication ports.
l GBRU Power Off - allows the user to specify whether or not the GBRU power supply is included in
the 24V power down or reset functions in the Hardware Information and Recovery option under
the Device Diagnostics menu. This option is only displayed if a GBRU is configured in the terminal.
General Device Configuration -

allows device start-up error logging to be enabled or disabled. Disabling logging reduces the number of
unnecessary event log entries, however, temporarily enabling device startup error logging can be
useful, for example to debug a startup error.
Set Date and Time

Modifies the settings of the operating system date and time. The date format is DDMMYYYY and the time
format is HHMMSS.
If the user does not have Windows access rights to change the operating system date and time, then a
prompt will be displayed indicating this and the user will be returned to the Self-Service Configuration
menu.
Set Active Language

All terminals are supplied with at least one language, used by the System Application for all text which it
displays and saves to a removable memory device. Select the Set Active Language option to view or
modify the language used.
Set ATM Properties

The following properties are displayed:
l Product Class
l Manufacturing Plant Code
l Serial Number
l Tracer Number
l Geographic Address
l Location of Operator Panel.
Service Manual
When a service key with the appropriate access permission is in use and the encrypted CE Second Line
Support Utility DVD is present in the disk drive, this option from the Sys App main menu displays the
appropriate service manual. Individual chapters can be selected and are displayed in pdf format.
Transaction Counters
The transactions on certain devices (dispensers, depositories, printers) are logged every hour. These
counters can either be viewed or saved to removable memory device via this menu option, providing
data for analysis by second level support, e.g. tracking transaction trends and service level agreements.

The information displayed includes:
l Device name and id number

l Instance - how many of this device have been installed
l Variable - what is being counted
l Current Device Value - transaction count for this instance of the device
l Number of Previous Devices
l Previous Devices Value - total number of transactions counted for all previous instances of the
device.
LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS
The Level 0 Diagnostics are contained in EPROM/ROM on most of the devices. The tests are grouped into
three types as follows:
l Power-up diagnostics
l Switch selectable diagnostics
l Extended diagnostics.
The diagnostics tests for each device are detailed in the relevant device chapter in this manual.
Power-up Diagnostics
The central processing unit has diagnostic routines stored in an area of on-board ROM. These tests run at
power-up or reset and any errors found are indicated by beeper tones on the speaker, messages on the
monitor screen, and hexadecimal codes on a bank of LEDs. The diagnostics are completed before
loading the operating system and there is no way of changing the order of the tests or of selecting
individual tests.
Power-up diagnostics are found on:
l Processor boards
l PC Communications Module
l Dispenser Control Board
l Depository Control Board.
The tests operate in four phases:
Initial Processor Diagnostics

Initial processor diagnostics make basic checks on the timers, the system I/O port, ROM and RAM
memory, the bus logic, DMA, Interrupt Controller and Peripheral Interface ICs to verify that the board is
functioning properly.
System Test And Initialization

After the initial diagnostics, the routines determine what system hardware is installed and test and
initialize that hardware. Progress is shown by test messages.

System Configuration Verification

When initialization is complete, the routines compare actual hardware found with the definition of
expected hardware held in battery-protected CMOS memory. If these agree then the level 0 phase is
complete. If they differ, an error message is displayed and the SETUP message is given.
Extended Rom Bios Diagnostics

Checks each of the boards present within the PC core to ensure that it is functional.
Switch Selectable Diagnostics

Switch selectable diagnostics can be accessed by operating a switch. This type of test is found on the
printers.
Extended Diagnostics
Extended diagnostics can be selected to run individually and the mode of operation can also be selected
by switches.
Some electronics boards are provided with an extended diagnostics test facility. ROM resident diagnostic
routines can be accessed by setting on-board switches to select individual tests. Test results are given in
hexadecimal codes displayed on LEDs on the boards.
TEST TOOLS
The following tools are required for diagnostic testing:
l NCR USB Service Key - Product ID G531-1004-0000

l NCR CE Second Line Support Utility - Product ID G531-1040-0000
l Bootable System Application - Product ID G531-1050-0000
l Card reader test cards:
l Cleaning card (Sanac) - 998-0052929
l Test track 1/2/3 - 009-0003479
l Passbook.
Bootable System Application

The purpose of the Bootable System Application for APTRA is:
l To allow the diagnosis of hardware or APTRA XFS software faults, if System Application cannot be
accessed from within Supervisor or the terminal is in a persistent restart state.
l To provide a reliable and consistent software platform to speed up analysis and issue resolution,
when it is not clear if the problem is caused by a hardware or a software fault
l To provide diagnostics without using software on the hard disk.

Device Diagnostics Hardware Information & Recovery
0 Page Up 0 Page Up
1 Hardware Information & Recovery 1 Replace Device
2 Monitor 2 Reset Device
3 Alarms 3 Reset USB Port s
4 Advert Light 4 USB Viewer
5 USB Cash Dispenser 5
6 USB Cash Dispenser 02 6
7 Cheque Processing Module 3 7
8 USB Receipt Printer 8

System Application Main Menu 9 Page Down
9 Page Down
0 Page Up
1 Device Diagnostics
2 Device Self T ests Device S tatus List

Product Class 6634.2
3 Event Logs Event Logs
4 Service T allies 0 Page Up
0 Page Up
5 Device S tatus List
1 Software Log USB Cash Dispenser
Device Servicing Top Cassette Removed
6 1 Attention required now
2 Device Log Operator required
7 Save Module Life Count s State is self-clearing
3 Communications Log Status ID:155.1.6.7.0.65
KEY SYSTEM APPLICATION MENUS
8 Self-Service Confirguration
Clear
4
9 Page Down USB Receipt Printer
5 Paper Not Loaded
Attention required now
2
6 Operator required More CE
System Application Main Menu State is self-clearing Details Leadthrough
7 Status ID:138.0.4.10.0.12
0 Page Up
8
9 Page Down
1 Service Manual
9 Page Down
2 Transaction Counters

3

5
6
Self Service Configuration Set Device Configuration Hardware Information & Recovery
7
0 Page Up 0 Page Up 0 Page Up
8
1 Display Hardware Det ails 1 USB Integrated Motorised Card Reader/W riter 1 Firmware V ersion
9 Page Down
2 Display Sof tware Det ailsr 2 USB Graphical Operator Panel 2 Device Recovery W ait T ime
3 Set Device Configuration 3 USB Receipt Printer 3 PC Information
4 Set Date & T ime 4 Sound 4 GBRU Power Off
5 Set Active Language 5 USB Touch Screen 5
6 Set Active Printer 6 HID UPS Device 6
7 Set ATM Properties 7 Hardware Information and Recovery 7
8 8 General Device Configuration 8
9 Page Down 9 Page Down 9 Page Down

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs Service Manual
55
4. PRODUCT CABLING
Revision 98
Revision 129

6623 PRODUCT CABLING
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional Electrical Drawings.
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS
The system architecture implemented on the 23 ATMs differ according to the manufacturing dates.
There are two sections of the distribution diagrams that reflect the different system architectures:
l Pre-May 2017 Distribution Diagrams — show the system architecture implemented on ATMs
manufactured before May 2017. These ATMs only have one USB hub.
l May 2017 Onwards Distribution Diagrams — show the system architecture implemented on
ATMs manufactured from May 2017 onwards. These are either front access or rear access variants
and can have one or two USB hubs depending on the devices configured in the ATM.
Pre-May 2017 Distribution Diagrams

AC Distribution with S1 Dispenser

AC Distribution with S2 Dispenser

DC Distribution with S1 Dispenser

DC Distribution with S2 Dispenser

USB Distribution with Hub

USB Distribution without HUB

May 2017 Onwards Distribution Diagrams

Main Interconnection and Control Diagram
AC Distribution

Front Access DC Distribution

Rear Access DC Distribution

Pre-Estoril Core Front Access USB Distribution

Estoril Core Front Access USB Distribution
Date Change Description

March 2018 Added device "U" - Centran Interconnect Box

Pre-Estoril Core Rear-Access USB Distribution

Estoril Core Rear Access USB Distribution

Physical Layout of PC Core USB Connections

Riverside PC Core
Estoril PC Core

COMMON HARNESSES
AC Harness Assembly

Auto Supervisor Safe Harness

Alarms Harness

Audio
Private Audio Athena Cab Harness
Private Audio Harness

Dip DC Decoupler Harness
Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly

Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly

DVI-D Single Link Cable Assembly

Facia Harness (View 1 of 2)


GPS Tracker
DC Harness for GPS
Dual DC Power Harness

LVDS
LVDS Harness
LVDS Power Harness

Mode Switch Harness
PSU Intel Harness

RIO
MID MISC RIO Enable Harness
MIDI MISCto RIO Harness

S1 Dispenser Harness (View 1 of 2)

S1 Dispenser Harness (View 2 of 2)

S2 Dispenser Harness

Speaker Harness

SPS Harnesses
Dual DC Power
IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness

IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness

IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness
USB Alpha Keyboard Cable Assembly

USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly
Portrait Camera

FRONT ACCESS (FA) HARNESSES

DC/USB Tray FA Harness (View 1 of 2)

DC/USB Tray FA Harness (View 2 of 2)

REAR ACCESS (RA) HARNESSES

Auto Supervisor Harnesses
MEI Extension Harness

DC/USB Tray RA Harnesses (View 1 of 3)



REVISION
Date Revision Description of Change
February 2018 A.1 New format
March 2018 A.2 Added Centran Interconnect Box to Front Access Estoril USB distribution diagram
For problems with this publication please email:

FinancialHWL3.Support@ncr.com
For technical queries please contact your local NCR support.

6627 PRODUCT CABLING
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the Power Distribution, Interconnect Diagrams and Functional Electrical Drawings.
DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAMS
The system architecture implemented on the 6627 ATMs differ according to the manufacturing dates.
There are two sections of the distribution diagrams that reflect the different system architectures:
l Pre-May 2017 Distribution Diagrams — show the system architecture implemented on ATMs
manufactured before May 2017. These ATMs only have one USB hub.
l May 2017 Onwards Distribution Diagrams — show the system architecture implemented on
ATMs manufactured from May 2017 onwards. These are either front access or rear access variants
and can have one or two USB hubs depending on the devices configured in the ATM.
Pre-May 2017 Distribution Diagrams

AC Distribution

DC Distribution

USB Distribution

May 2017 Onwards Distribution Diagrams

Main Interconnection and Control Diagram
AC Distribution

DC Distribution

Pre-Estoril Core USB Distribution

Estoril Core USB Distribution
Date Change Description

March 2018 Added Device "U" - Centran Interconnect Box

Physical Layout of the USB Ports

Riverside PC Core
Estoril PC Core

HARNESSES 1
AC Harness Assy

Alarms
Alarms to Midimisc Harness

Alarms Harness

Audio
Private Audio Athena Cab Harness
Private Audio Harness

Auto Supervisor
Auto Supervisor Harness
Auto Supervisor Safe harness

DC/USB Tray Harness (View 1 of 3)




Dip DC Decoupler Harness

Display Port to DVI-D Cable Assembly

Display Port to VGA Cable Assembly

DVI-D Single Link Cable Assembly
Heaters Harness

HARNESSES 2
LVDS
LVDS Harness

LVDS Power Harness
MEI Extension Harness
Mode Switch Harness

PSU Intel Harness
RIO
MIDI MISC RIO Harness

RIO Enable RA Harness

S2 Dispenser Harness

Speaker Harness
SPS Harnesses
Dual DC Power

IFD2 Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness
IFD2 Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness

IFD2 MCRW Short Linker Harness
Upper Advert Harness

USB Alpha Keyboard Cable Assembly
USB Touch Screen Cable Assembly
Portrait Camera

REVISION
March 2018 A.2 Added Centran Interconnect box to Estoril USB distribution diagram


5. POWER SUPPLIES
Standard Power Supply (300W) 131
UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 135

STANDARD POWER SUPPLY (300W)
INTRODUCTION
This is a switch mode power supply, with +24V DC output and a maximum output power rating of 300W.
DESCRIPTION
The power supply is capable of operating with a single phase input voltage; 90Vrms min, 264Vrms max,
47 to 63 Hz. The power supply auto ranges - external voltage range selection switching is not required.
The unit can withstand power line transients as specified in CES 2-11-02 and EN61000-4-11 without
degradation of performance. It also incorporates Power Factor Correction circuitry meeting the
requirements of EN61000-3-2 to Class A limits for the harmonic content of the input current, and
EN61000-3-3, for magnitude of voltage fluctuations.
Note: There is no on/off switch, or fuse, within the power supply. They are product specific and may be
located either close to the supply or elsewhere in the product.

Power Requirements
PSU AC Input Connector
The ac is connected to the PSU via the three screw terminals: Live, Neutral and Ground.
AC Input
+V -V N L
Live
Ground Neutral
Input Specification
Voltage
The PSU can operate with a single phase input voltage ranging from 90 V to 264 V rms and 47 Hz to 63
Hz. Voltage range selection is automatic.
Input Current
The maximum input current under normal operating conditions is as follows:
Range Input Voltage Range (Vrms) Frequency Range (Hz) Maximum Input Current (A)
115 90 - 136 47 - 63 5.0
230 180 - 264 47 - 63 2.5
Inrush Current
The inrush current, measured at full output load (during a cold or warm start and for a max of one
cycle):
l 40 A peak maximum at 257 Vrms input; warm start, measured at TA = 20 deg C

DC Output Specifications
The following table defines the dc output specification of the PSU:
Performance Requirements
Nominal Voltage +24 Vdc
Current Static - Continuous Minimum 0A dc, Maximum 13 A dc
Maximum Output Power 300W
Voltage Dropout
A 100% input voltage drop out for 16.6mS at full load will not cause the output voltage to go outwith
specified limits.
Subsequent to any input under voltage, outage, dip or interruption the power supply will automatically
restart and function normally when the input voltage returns to within its operating range.
Overload Protection
The PSU will shut down to prevent damage in the event of:
l Overvoltage: trigger level is 27.6V min, 33V max

l Overcurrent
l Short circuit
l Overpower
l Abnormal temperature rise.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Restart after Shutdown
If the power supply shuts down due to overcurrent, short circuit or overpower protection, it will
automatically attempt to restart. If the fault condition continues; the power supply will go into "tick
mode" and will continue to shut down and attempt to restart until the power or the fault is removed.
If the power supply shuts down due to overvoltage protection it will stay shut down until input power is
cycled.
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
FRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

There are no field replaceable parts in the power supply.
CABLING
None.
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUTS
Input/Output Pins
DC Output AC Input
+V -V N L
Live
DC +V DC -V Ground Neutral
TEST/ADJUSTMENT TOOLS
None.

UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes both the Eaton® and XTREME Power Conversion® Uninterruptible Power Supply
(UPS) units, including: Operation, Setup and Storage.
The UPS monitors the mains supply and provides a stabilised supply to the ATM. If the mains supply fails,
the UPS will supply the ATM from its integral battery-backed power supply. This supply duration is
limited and is intended to provide for orderly termination of any active transactions before the ATM
shuts down.
DESCRIPTION
XTREME Power Conversion® - Compact 1U 1K
Specification
Model: UPS 230V and UPS 120V (where different):
l Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto-selecting.

l Power Level: 1000VA, 800W
l Static Regulation (Battery Mode): ±1% of nominal
Button Operation
l To turn the UPS ON, press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds
l To turn the UPS OFF, press and hold the button for at least 2 seconds. The UPS will be in standby
mode when utility power is normal or transfer to bypass mode if bypass mode is enabled.

Indicators
The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the UPS front panel:
LED8 LED7 LED6 LED5 LED4
L1
L2
!
POWER ON/OFF
LED9 LED3 LED2 LED1
UPS Status LED Colour On/Flashing

Line Mode LED1 Green On
LED4 to LED7 indicate load level Green On
l LED4: >75%
l LED5: 50%~75%
l LED6:25%~50%
l LED7:0%~25%
Battery Mode LED2 Yellow Flashing
LED4 to LED7 indicate battery capacity Green On
l LED4: >26V
l LED5: >24.5V
l LED6:>23V
l LED7:>21V
Low Battery LED3 and LED7 Green Flashing
(1Hz)
Battery LED3 Red Flashing
replacement (0.5Hz)
Fault LED3 Red On
On/Off status of LED8: Indicates On/Off status of general output Green On
output receptacles receptacles
LED9: Indicates On/Off status of programmable outlet
Overload LED3:Indicates overload (line mode) Green On
LED3:Indicates overload (battery mode)
Storing the UPS

Before storing, charge the UPS for 5 hours. Store the UPS covered and upright in a cool, dry location.
During storage, recharge the battery in accordance with the following table:
Storage Temperature Recharge Frequency Charging Duration

-25°C -50°C Every 3 months 1-2 hours
50°C -55°C Every 2 months 1-2 hours

Eaton® - Rack Mounted with USB HID
Definitions
Line Boost Capability
Line Boost Capability is the minimum voltage deviation below nominal that must be handled via boosting
without going on battery, while maintaining the output voltage within the required output voltage range
Boost Mode
A shift to boost mode occurs during voltage variations in the AC input power. The boost function
maintains the output voltage supplied by the UPS within close tolerances around the rated value even if
significant voltage variations occur in the AC input power. This avoids calling on battery power.
The values defining the voltage range are preset and vary depending upon the nominal voltage selected.
Specification
Model: UPS 230V and UPS 120V (where different):
l Nominal Frequency: 50/60 Hz auto-selecting.

l Power Level: 1150VA, 770W
l Static Regulation (Battery Mode): -10% to +7% of nominal
l Boost: maintain output within 198-273V (90-153V)
l Battery Configuration: Internal batteries provided as one assembled part.
Indicators
The illustration and table below explain the functions of the indicators on the UPS front panel:

Item Description Specification Comments

1 On/Off button To start/stop the UPS Illuminated and locking button
Off-------------------------------> System off
Solid green--------------------> Power On
2 Load Protected LED Off-------------------------------> No output enabled
Solid> green------------------> Output enabled
3 Downgraded Operation Solid yellow-------------------> Mains failure
LED Flashing yellow --------------> Battery failure
4 Non Protected Load LED Off-------------------------------> Normal load
Solid red -----------------------> Overload
5 Programmable Outlet 1 Off-------------------------------> Plug #1 not powered
Solid green--------------------> Plug #1 powered
6 Programmable Outlet 2 Off-------------------------------> Plug #2 not powered
Solid green--------------------> Plug #2 powered
7 Percentage Load bar graph 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the display
LED 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
8 Battery Charge level bar 0 - 25% (LED 1 lit) LED 1 is to the left of the display
graph 26% - 50% (LEDs 1 + 2 lit)
51% - 75% (LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 lit)
76% - 100% (All four LEDs lit)
Indications During Operation

This section describes the indications of the following UPS phases of operation:
l Start-Up
l Shift to Booster Mode
l Operation on Battery Power.
The numbers in the text refer to the front panel diagram.
Start-Up (1150VA)
Start-up commences when the ON/OFF (1) button is pressed:
l The buzzer beeps and all the LEDs come on.

l The buzzer beeps two times during the self test, then button (1) remains ON, indicating that the
outlets are supplied with power.
Either:
l AC power is present, LED (2) is ON and LED (3) is not ON, and the protected equipment is supplied
by the AC power source.
or:

l AC power is absent, LED’s (2) and (3) are ON, and the protected equipment is supplied by the UPS
operating on battery power.
l All the connected equipment is supplied with power.
If button (1) is not ON, or if LED (4) is ON, there is a fault (see “Troubleshooting”).
Note: The battery is charging as soon as the UPS is connected to the ac power source, even if button (1)
is in the OFF position.
Boost Mode
When the boost mode is in operation the LED’s do not change to indicate that the operation is active to
show that there is a significant voltage variation in the ac input power.
Operation on Battery Power

Operation on battery power takes place when AC input power has failed or is outside the Boost range.
Transfer to Battery Power (1150VA)

While operating on battery power:
l LED (3) is illuminated

l The equipment connected to the UPS is supplied by the battery.
Threshold for the Low Battery Warning

The low battery warning threshold (Battery Low Threshold) is set via the self service configuration menu
and shows that there is very little battery backup time remaining . The indications that the threshold has
been reached are:
l The ATM application specification will close because UPS does not have automatic shut down.
When the battery reaches the end of its backup time:
l The UPS shuts down and all the LEDs go OFF

l Equipment connected to the UPS is no longer supplied with power.
Storing the UPS

If UPS is stored for a long period, recharge them every 6 months by plugging the UPS into a power
outlet. The batteries charge to 90% in approximately 3 hours.However, it is recommended that the
batteries charge for 6 to 24 hours after long time storage.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Possible Cause Action
The mains supply is The AC input is not connected Reinsert or push the connector
normal but no LED firmly into the receptacle
indication. The AC input is connected to the UPS output Connect the AC input to the correct
receptacle

Symptom Possible Cause Action

The mains supply is The internal or external battery connection is Re-connect the batteries to the
normal but Red LED is wrong. correct polarity
flashing.
LED 3 (Green) is on. UPS is overloaded Remove excess loads from the UPS
output
After repetitive overloads, the UPS is locked in Remove excess loads from the UPS
the Bypass Mode. Connected devices are fed output then shut down and restart
directly by the mains supply. the UPS.
The mains supply is The battery is not fully charged Charge the battery for at least 5
normal, but the unit is hours. If the battery is still low level
in Battery Mode. then replace the battery
The battery is defective Replace the UPS
Red LED is on. UPS fault Replace the UPS
Low Battery Check battery charge level and if Red
light persists then replace UPS

The LED numbers in the following table appear on the diagram in the “Indicators” section.
1150VA Module
Indication Meaning Action
All LED’s go ON The Remote Power Off contact has been Set the contact to normal position and restart .
and LED (3) activated to shut down the UPS.
remains ON. Preventing a restart.
LED’s (2) and (3) The percent load greater than set Check power drawn by connected devices and
are ON and LED overload or UPS capacity. disconnect non priority devices. Check the
(7) flash. overload setting.
LED (4) goes ON UPS overload. The power drawn by the If LED (4) goes on permanently, check the power
Solid Red and LED connected equipment exceeds UPS drawn by the attached devices and disconnect
(7) flashing. capacity. any non priority devices.
LED (4) ON and A battery fault was detected during the Replace the battery module.
LED (8) flashing. automatic battery test.
LED (4) goes ON. UPS internal diagnostics have detected an Replace the UPS.
internal fault. The connected devices are
no longer supplied.

DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None
Level 1
Level 1 diagnostics tests available on the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
Test
Selection of TEST from the UPS diagnostic test menu tests the UPS and reports its status.
Report
The REPORT test returns the present status of the UPS.
Level 3
S_DATA
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
S_Data Meaning
00 Good (Operation successful)
01 Routine (Command not supported, RS232 turnaround failure)
02 Warning (Battery low)
04 Fatal (Device failure, Battery failure, Command failure, Comms error, Device inoperative)
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the Uninterruptible Power Supply are:
Tally Mnemonic
OUTAGES Number of times the UPS reported a power outage.
MSKD OUT Number of times that a power outage exceeded the time specified by the outage mask time.
STRAPPING
None.

ADJUSTMENTS
The Self Service Configuration Menu for the UPS enables adjustment of following UPS parameters:
l Mode
l Voltages
l Shut down Delay
l Startup Delay
l Battery Low Threshold
l Outage Mask time
l Battery Test Day
l Battery Test Hour
A description of each parameter, together with the permitted range of inputs and the default settings, is
shown in the table below.
Parameter Description Range Default

Name Value
Mode This string identifies the mode (Control or Data) of the UPS and the device type. 000 “000” -
or Control
001 “001” -
Data
Voltages Identifies the level of the control voltages for serial control lines, in order, CTS 000 - 111
(Power Fail), DCD (Battery Low), DTR (Shut down). “0” means negative voltage “1” 111
means positive voltage Note: “Voltages” has no effect for USB UPS.
Shut This specifies the delay time in seconds of the interval between the issue of a shut 0- 120
down down command and the shut down of the UPS. 999 seconds
Delay
Startup If mains has returned during shut down the Startup Delay is introduced after the 0- 15
Delay Shut down Delay. If mains is not present during the Shut down Delay then the UPS 999 seconds
will restart as soon as mains returns.
Battery This is the capacity remaining threshold that indicates a low battery condition. If the 0 - 900
Low reported charge remaining is less than or equal to this value then the Battery Low 1000 (90%)
Threshold indicator is True. The parameter is given in 1/10 percent units.
(BL)
Outage This is the duration that the mains outage must exceed before the supply out 0 - 99 15
Mask indicator is set true. seconds
Time
Battery This specifies the day on which the weekly battery test should be performed. 0-6 1
Test Day (Monday)
Battery This specifies the hour at which the weekly battery test should be performed. 00 - 04 (4am)
Test Hour 23

Configuring The UPS

Normal Operation
Under normal operation, the UPS will supply standard mains power to the terminal. Supply voltage
deviations within the line boost will result in the UPS boosting (stepping up) of the voltage via its internal
transformer. This ensures that the voltage supply to the rest of the product remains within the
acceptable ranges of 198 - 273 V for 230 V units or 90 - 136 V for 120 V units. If necessary, the UPS
internal batteries will be charging to maintain 100% charge.
Short Term Outage Or Voltage Variation

In the event of a short term outage or input voltage variation (lasting less than the configured Outage
Mask Time), the UPS will automatically switch to supplying the terminal from its integral batteries. On
restoration of the normal mains supply the UPS will automatically switch back to supplying a stabilised
supply to the terminal from mains power. The internal batteries will be charged to maintain 100%
capacity when mains is present.
Long Term Outage Or Voltage Variation

In the event of an outage or input voltage variation (outside the line boost and buck capability) lasting
longer than the Outage Mask Time, the UPS will automatically switch to supplying the terminal from its
integral batteries. At this point, under the control of the application program, the terminal will take one
of the following actions:
l Immediately initiate a shut down

l Go into standby mode until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls below the Battery Low
Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down
l Continue offering transactions until mains returns or until the battery capacity falls below the
Battery Low Threshold, at which point it will initiate a shut down.
The shut down is controlled, terminating any active transactions and leaving the terminal in a safe and
secure state. A control message is sent to the UPS to disengage.
Restart After Controlled Shut down

On restoration of the mains supply and restart of the terminal, the customer application may either
bring the terminal immediately back into service or wait until the battery capacity is above the Battery
Low Threshold before doing so.
A Low Battery condition will be displayed until the calculated battery capacity is equal to the Battery Low
Threshold
UPS Self Test

The UPS will carry out a self test on demand by selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the System Application
Menu and UPS from the Device Self Test Menu.
If the battery is fully charged this test will verify battery health and that it is correctly connected. If the
battery capacity is less than 100% then the test will only verify the connection.

MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

No replaceable modules

No replaceable modules
CABLING
None.
No Information Available.
No Information Available.

6. CORE AND COMMUNICATIONS
USB 7 Port Hub 146
Mini PC Core 153
Revision 212

USB 7 PORT HUB
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives the information required to service the USB 7 Port Hub fitted in NCR SelfServ ATMs.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Hub increases the number of USB ports connected to the PC core. It provides the following
functionality:
l Operation from a single 24V power supply

l 1 upstream facing port
l 7 powered downstream facing ports
l Power management for each port
l Device connect/disconnect detection
l Bus fault detection and recovery
l High, full and low-speed device support
l Transaction translator for each port to provide full unshared bandwidth for USB1.1 devices.
Power Requirement
The Hub requires the following dc voltage and currents:
Quiescent Current Continuous Current

+24 V±10% 125 mA min. + 125 mA for each used downstream port 1.0 A max.
The +24 V supply is sourced from the ATM power supply. The current rating in the table represents a
total load which includes the current sourced for the following voltages:

l +5 V ±5% is derived from the 24 V using a Sipex SP7652 Power Blox switcher
l +3.3 V ±0.3V is derived from the 5 V using a low drop-out linear regulator
l +1.8 V ±10% is derived from the 3.3 V using a low drop-out linear regulator.
Maximum Cable Lengths

Port Speed Maximum Cable Length
Upstream All 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream High 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream Full 5.0 m (16.40 ft.)
Downstream Low 3.0 m (9.84 ft.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
The system has a USBViewer option which allows the user to verify which module is allocated to which
USB port and is accessed as follows:
Note: The user requires a USB Service Key to perform this function.
1. Select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.
2. Select HARDWARE INFORMATION AND RECOVERY option.
3. Select the USBViewer option.
4. The system will then display the following screen showing the module to port allocation for NCR
modules or USB Hubs which have a working USB connection.
Note: Modules or USB Hubs are dynamically shown on the screen. If a Module or USB Hub is removed
while screen is displayed the information relating to it will also be removed from the screen.

5. The user can select a specific module and the system will then display the following screen
showing port details.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1 Diagnostics
There are two LEDs for each port, which indicate the port status. The definitions of the LEDs are shown
below:
LED Colour Status

Green All OK
Amber Error condition
Off Non operational
Green (blinking On/Off) Software attention
Amber (blinking On/Off) Hardware attention
Green/Amber (blinking On/Off) Reserved
There is one LED positioned close connector J9 that indicates power on or off.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

Note: Cables should be replaced into the same port from which they were removed.
Top Box Mounted Hub

1. Remove the screws holding USB mounting tray to the module tray.
2. Note the positions of all USB cables.
3. Unplug all cables from the hub.
4. Remove the hub assembly.
5. Replace the hub assembly.
6. Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 2.
7. Refit and secure USB mounting tray.
Safe Mounted Hub

1. Note the positions of all USB cables.
2. Unplug all cables from the hub.
3. Remove the screws holding the cover to the safe.
4. Remove the hub assembly.
5. Replace the hub assembly.
6. Replace the cover.
7. Refit cables into the same ports noted in step 1.
CABLING
None.

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
Hub Board
The diagram below shows the Hub Board connectors.
** Indicates the two LEDs for each port.
Upstream Port J8
*
J1 *
*
*
J2
*
*
J3
*
Downstream Ports *
J4
*
*
J5
*
*
J6
*
*
J7
**
Power J9
Power LED Downstream

Port LEDs
ATM Interface
The Hub has two interfaces with the host ATM and up to seven interfaces with modules in the ATM:
l Power
l Upstream connector
l Downstream connectors.
Power Interface
Power is obtained from the host ATM via a 2-pin right angled mini-fit junior connector (J9) on the
connector board, with the following pinout:

Pin Signal
1 +24 V
2 0V
Upstream Connector
Communication to and from the host ATM is via a 5-pin mini-B connector (J8) on the connector board,
with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 N.C.
5 GND
Shell SHIELD
Downstream Connectors
Communication to and from the modules is via seven 4-pin upright type A connectors (J1- J7) on the
connector board, with the following pinout:
Pin Signal
Shell SHIELD
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Shell SHIELD
None.

MINI PC CORE
INTRODUCTION
The Mini PC Core is design to accommodate the following mini-ITX form factor motherboards:
l Lanier 945GSE motherboard providing Intel® ATOM N270 processor

l Kingsway GL40 motherboard providing either Celeron 900- 2.2GHz/800/1M Cache or
Performance Core 2 Duo T7500-2.2 GHz/800MHz/4M Cache processors
l Riverside Q67 motherboard providing either Intel® Core i3–2120T, Core i5–2500T, Core i5–2390T,
or Celeron G530T processors
l Lanier II NM10 motherboard providing an Intel® ATOM D2550 processor
l Falcon Monte Carlo Q87 motherboard providing an Intel® Core i3-4350T
l Estoril Q87 motherboard an Intel® Haswell platform supporting LGA1150 Intel ® Processors.
(Celeron G1820TE, Core™ i3-4350T & Core™ i5-4590T).
Note: The I/O panel and components present in the core may vary depending on the
motherboard used and optional core features configured for the ATM.

DESCRIPTION
Motherboards
The Mini PC Core consists of a PC processor on the following motherboards with additional Self Service
functionality:
Features Lanier 945GSE Kingsway GL40

Processor ATOM 1.6 GHz l N270 Celeron 900
l Core 2 Duo T7500
Chipset Intel 945GSE Intel GL40
Memory One DDR2 SO–DIMM Two DDR3 SO–DIMM
Video Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA outputs
SATA Two SATA ports Three SATA ports
Expansion One PCI connector for PCCM l One PCI connector for PCCM
Slots l One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)
Serial Two RS 232 interfaces Two RS 232 interfaces
USB l Four USB ports on rear IO l Four USB ports on rear IO
l Four on breakout l Four on breakout
LAN One Ethernet 10/100 Base–T network interface One Ethernet 10/100 Base–T network interface
support
Audio Line out for embedded audio
DVD-ROM Optional external DVD ROM Optional external DVD ROM
PCCM Optional PCCM communications system on Optional PCCM communications system on
separate plug–in card separate plug–in card
Features Riverside Q67 Lanier II NM10

Processor l Core i3–2120T ATOM D2550
l Core i5–2500T
l Core i5–2390T
l Celeron G530T
Chipset Intel Q67 Intel NM10 with Intel 82NM10 PCH
Memory Two DDR 3 SO–DIMM Two DDR 3 SO–DIMM
Video Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA outputs
SATA l One SATA 2 port Two SATA 2 ports
l Two SATA 3 ports

Features Riverside Q67 Lanier II NM10

Expansion l One PCI connector for PCCM l One PCI connector for PCCM
Slots l One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed) l One PCIe x1 connector (riser needed)
Note: The PCIex8 slot operates at x4 bandwidth
only. It does not support cards that are unable
to operate x4 or x1 speeds
Serial Two RS 232 interfaces
USB l Four USB ports on rear IO
l Four on breakout
LAN One Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base–T network One Ethernet 10/100 Base–T network interface
support interface
Audio Line out for embedded audio
DVD-ROM Optional external DVD ROM
PCCM Optional PCCM communications system on separate plug–in card
Security Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support to enable
Microsoft Bitlocker encryption software -
available with Windows 7 Ultimate and Enterprise
editions only.
Features Falcon Monte Carlo Estoril Q87

Processor Core i3–4350T l Core i3–4350T
l Core i5–4590T
l Celeron G1820TE
Chipset Intel Q87
Memory Two DDR3 SO–DIMM
Video Integrated display adapter, DVI, VGA outputs l LVDS LCD Header
l 2 x Dual Mode Display Ports supporting
HDMI/DVI
SATA Three SATA 3 ports
Expansion l One PCI Connector
Slots l One PCIex8 (operates at x4 bandwidth only)
Serial Two RS 232 headers
USB l Four USB 3.0 ports on rear IO l Six USB 3.0 ports on rear IO
l Four USB 2.0 on breakout l Four USB 2.0 on breakout
LAN One Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base–T network Dual Ethernet 10/100Gb
support interface

Features Falcon Monte Carlo Estoril Q87

Audio Line out for embedded audio Six 3.5mm jack sockets:
l Jack 1 - Stereo headphone out
l Jack 2 - Stereo speaker out
l Jack 3 - Handset mic in
l Jack 4 - Handset hookswitch in
l Jack 5 - Handset speaker out
l Jack 6 - Private Audio/ Volume Control
PDM Digital Microphone Input (separate
connector)
DVD-ROM Optional external DVD ROM
PCCM Not Available Optional PCCM communications system on
separate plug–in card
Security Not Available Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support to enable
Microsoft Bitlocker encryption software -
available with Windows 7 Ultimate and Enterprise
editions only.
AMT Not Available Supports Intel® Active Management Technology
9.5 (processor SKU dependent)
Security (Estoril Only)

Mandatory Passwords
The Estoril motherboard has the additional functionality and security requirement of entering
mandatory passwords for accessing the following:
l Admin - BIOS Setup Configuration Utility (SCU)

l BBS - BIOS Boot Specification
If the customer has no password management solution then use the factory set passwords:
l Admin: ncrTEMP123
l BBS: ncrTEMP456
Note: The factory set passwords are not intended to provide any additional security as these are
commonly available. There is no restriction on distribution of these passwords.
For non-factory set BIOS passwords please refer to the customer’s password management solution.
SATA White List

SATA White List Devices
Estoril BIOS implements a SATA white list. This prevents the use of SATA devices unless they have been
added to the BIOS Setup Configuration Utility (SCU) Whitelist.
To ensure that the intended SATA device/drive is available, please follow the steps below within the
Setup Configuration Utility (SCU):

1. Press F2 during the boot process, and enter the BIOS Admin password.
2. Navigate to the “Advanced” tab and select “NCR Configuration” then “White list management”.
3. Select "Clear White List and Add all Connected Devices" option.
InsydeH20 Setup Utility Rev. 5.0

Advanced
White list management
Serial ATA Port 0 (Avant NCSC51AD240M4P) ( )

Serial ATA Port 1 (ST500DM002-1BD142 ) ( )
Serial ATA Port 2 (TEAC DV-W5600A ) ( )
Clear White List and Add all Connected devices

Clear White List
Do you want to Add all Connected devices to White List??
(Yes) (No)
4. Once this setup is complete press F10 to save changes and exit. This will cause the PC to reboot.
Assign Boot Devices

The Estoril BIOS requires a single permanent boot device to be selected from the BBS as part of the
initial setup. When the PC reboots following the BIOS upgrade, and after the Admin/BBS passwords have
been set, it will automatically enter the BBS menu to request that the user select the boot device.
1. Enter the BBS password then select the HDD that contains the default O/S image for the system
to boot to.
Boot Manager
Boot Option Menu
Legacy Hard Drive

Serial ATA Port 1 ST500DM002-1BD142
Serial ATA Port 0 Avant NCSC51AD240M4P
Legacy CD ROM
Serial ATA Port 2 TEAC DV-W5600A
↑ and ↓ to change option, ENTER to select an option. ESC to exit
2. Selecting the boot device means that the system will automatically boot to that device and that
device only.
Note: Only a HDD/SSD can be used as a permanent boot device. In order to boot from a
USB or DVD drive the BBS menu must be used.
3. Press F8 during POST and enter the BBS password to display the BBS menu, then select the
desired boot device.

Note: The BBS menu must be used on every boot to an alternate device, otherwise the
BIOS will default to the permanent boot device.
PCI PCCM (Optional. Not supported on Estoril)

The PCI PC Communications Module (PCCM) board is an add-in adapter that provides a Band 3
communications interface. The PCI PCCM board has a level 0 diagnostic LED (green).
Green LED
J1
J3
Riser Board (Optional)

Lanier 945GSE, Lanier II NM10 or Kingsway GL40 motherboards PCI.
A1
J1
B1
Riverside Q67 motherboard PCI.

Estoril Q87 motherboard PCI.
Estoril Q87 motherboard PCIe.
Trusted Platform Module 1.2 (Riverside Optional)

This board is connected to the Riverside Q67 motherboard providing secure storage of artefacts used to
authenticate the platform.
Top Bottom

Trusted Platform Module 1.2 (Estoril Optional)

This board is connected to the Estoril Q87 motherboard providing secure storage of artefacts used to
Top
Bottom
Trusted Platform Module 2.0 (Estoril Optional)

This board is connected to the Estoril Q87 motherboard providing secure storage of artefacts used to
Top Bottom
Primary Disk Drives

The primary Disk Drive can be an industry standard 3.5-inch HDD, 2.5-inch HDD or 2.5-inch SSD. All
supporting the ATA interface standard and operate on a SATA interface. Solid State Disks are not
certified with the Estoril motherboard.
The table below lists the power requirements of the SATA Disk Drives.
SATA Disk Drive Voltage Current

3.5 inch HDD +12 Vdc 0.56 A
+5 Vdc 0.72 A
2.5 inch SDD +5 Vdc 1.00 A

Secondary Disk Drives (Optional)

The Secondary Disk Drive can be an industry standard 2.5 inch HDD or 2.5 inch SSD. Both support the
ATA interface standard and operate on a SATA interface. Solid State Disks are not certified with the
Estoril motherboard.
Note: The secondary disk drives are only available as options on the Kingsway GL40, Riverside Q67 and
Estoril Q87 motherboards.
The table below lists the power requirements of the SATA Disk Drives.
SATA Disk Drive Voltage Current

2.5 inch SDD +5 Vdc 1.00 A
SATA Optical Drives (Optional)

Two types are available and described below:
l Half height SATA DVD-RW drive.
The drive is a DVD-RW and CD-RW drive and has a SATA interface supporting ATAPI
commands. The drive has DVD video and CD audio playback capability. The drive can play
any standard DVD-ROM and CD-ROM disks complying with the ECMA-130, 267, 279, 337,
338, 349, 359 and 371 standard.
l Slim SATA DVD-RW.
The drive is a DVD+RW, DVD-Multi-recorder and CD-RW drive and has a SATA interface
supporting ATAPI commands.
The table below lists the power requirements of the SATA DVD–ROM Optical Drive.
SATA Optical Drive Voltage Current

Half height +5 Vdc 2.0 A
+12Vdc 1.0 A
Slim +5 Vdc 1.0 A
Lithium Battery
WARNING
Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the battery. A short circuit
between the battery’s positive and negative terminals can cause it to explode.

The PC Core motherboards all use a lithium coin cell battery to power CMOS. (BR2032, 3.0V (nominal)
195mAh).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
Loss of configuration Motherboard battery The system date and time are excessively Replace
data failure inaccurate. battery.
Error Possible root Isolation Resolution

causes
No HDD failure Use BIOS Setup Utility to Replace.
boot determine disk’s presence.
up Loose or Check power and SATA cables. Reconnect or properly connect cables to correct sockets.
incorrectly Replace if worn.
connected
cabling
RAM not Check RAM Re-seat correctly
seated
correctly
RAM not Check RAM is configured through
configured BIOS Setup.
Estoril only BIOS will only enable SATA ports See 'SATA White Listed Device' instructions.
HDD/SSD that contain white-listed devices Note: If the new HDD/SSD is the planned boot drive, then
not White- at serial number level. when the system reboots you will need to set it as the
listed A non white-listed device will current boot device. See 'Assign Boot Device' instructions.
generate a "No Boot Device Once selected the system will automatically boot from
Found" message and the OS will the selected device on every reboot.
not boot.
System does not Memory refresh timer error Reseat the memory, or replace with known
start up Parity error in base memory (first good modules
64Kb block)
Base memory read/write test error


causes
System Motherboard Fatal error indicating a serious problem with the system. Before replacing the
does timer not motherboard, eliminate the possibility of interference by a malfunctioning add-
not operational in card. Remove the expansion card then insert it back into the system. If this
start does not solve the problem, the cause may be a malfunctioning card.
up
System Processor error

does not 8042 Gate A20 test error
start up (cannot switch to
protected mode)
General exception error
(processor exception
interrupt error)
AMIBIOS ROM checksum
error
CMOS shutdown register
read/write error
Cache memory test
failed
Display memory error If the system video adapter is an add-in card, replace or reseat the
(system video adapter) video adapter. If the video adapter is an integrated part of the
system board, the board may be faulty.

System Motherboard has Has the system fan Check that pins 1 & 2 at JP3 are at power on. If they are then
does not powered on started? check the short circuit pins 2 - 4 on PANEL header for 1
not second to see if the fan starts and the motherboard powers
start up up.
Estoril
Check that pins 1 & 2 at A_ON are at power on. If they are
then check the short circuit pins 6 - 8 on PIRAT header for 1
second to see if the fan starts and the motherboard powers
up
Applies to Kingsway Could be the fan is Replace the fan or processor.
GL40 Motherboard blocked and the
only. Processor processor is
faulty. overheating.

Error Possible Isolation Resolution

root
causes
The Trusted Platform Module (TPM) in this TPM is Check if TPM is damaged. To verify that the TPM is
system has been disabled. You must supply fitted Inform the customer that the faulty:
a BitLocker recovery key to restart this but not hard drive needs to be 1. Ask the customer to
system until TPM is re–enabled. working. decrypted to install a new TPM decrypt the hard drive
Enable TPM from the system BIOS setup or and verify that the TPM is the using their bitlocker
from the TPM management console. problem. recovery key.
2. Fit a new TPM to the
motherboard.
3. Ask the customer to
attempt to re–encrypt
the hard drive.
Note: The re–
encryption process
would also generate a
new recovery key.
If encryption is
successful, then the
problem was the TPM.
If the system is still not
working, then the
problem is likely to be
the customer’s
software.

causes
Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption key The TPM has Check if TPM is fitted or Replace the TPM
needed. Insert key Storage Media. been removed. properly seated. and reboot.

No display on main or service display. No power Power source disconnected Reconnect power source


No signal to primary No display signal Display cable Reconnect display cable
or service display. from motherboard disconnected
Display dongle Latched dongle connection may be loose or
disconnected disconnected. Push fully home or reconnect.
(applies to Estoril
motherboards only)

No service Display(s) connected to wrong See 'Estoril Display Ports' Correct port
display ports information connections
DIAGNOSTICS
For general diagnostic information see the Diagnostics Overview chapter in the Diagnostics Overview
section.
Estoril Motherboard
There are two diagnostic LEDs present on the motherboard.
VS_POWER SB_POWER
LED Description
VS_POWER The motherboard has power connected
SB_POWER The motherboard has power connected and the processor is running
PCI PCCM Board

The PCI PCCM board has a level 0 diagnostic LED (green).

STRAPPING
Lanier Motherboard
Diagram 1 H A D E
I
G
F
B
C
F F
Diagram 2 3
COM 2 5 7
1
2
COM 1
4 6
Diagram 1 - Plan view of the Motherboard

Key Description Key Description
A Processor G RSD/FSD mode strap
B SODIMM Slots H A_ON1 - Auto power on strap
C PCI Slot (1 off) I CMOS clear strap
D Lithium battery J USB headers
E Internal audio header - line out
F Powered serial port strap x 4
Diagram 2 - Side View of External Ports
1 LAN 5 Serial x 2
2 Front USB (2 ports) 6 Front USB (2 ports)
3 VGA display output 7 Audio - line out
4 DVI display output

Lanier II Motherboard
Diagram 1 H I G D E
A J
F
B
F F
Diagram 2 3
COM 2 5 7
1
2
COM 1
4 6

1 LAN 5 Serial x 2

Kingsway Motherboard
Diagram 1 A E
I
B D
G
F
F F
Diagram 2
3 COM 2 5 7
1
2
COM 1
4 6

1 LAN 5 Serial x 2

Riverside Motherboard
Diagram 1 G H B E
I
J
D
K
F
Diagram 2 3 COM 2 5 7
1
2
COM 1
4 6

E Internal audio header - line out K Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
1 LAN 5 Serial x 2

Falcon Monte Carlo Motherboard

Diagram 1
B E G
I
H
J
F L
Diagram 2 3 9
COM 2
5
1
COM 1
6 7 8

C I CMOS clear strap
E Internal audio header - line out K
F Powered serial port strap x 4 L VGA internal header
1 LAN 5 Serial x 2
4

Estoril Motherboard
A B C D
2 1 0 E
F
G
P
L
O
H
N I
J
K

A A Front Panel Reset I PCI
B SATA III power J COM1 VSET 7 COM2 VSET
C SATA III (2) - DVD K DC in
SATA III (1) - 2nd Drive
SATA III (0) - Primary Drive
D A_ON L RS232 headers
E CMOS Clear M Processor
F Chassis Fan N CPU fan
G USB 2.0 breakout header O DDR3 SODIMM
H Trusted Platform Module (TPM) P PS/2 header
Q1 R1 U1 U2 U3
IN OUT
V
ETHERNET DISPLAY PORT
OUT OUT
2 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 DIGITAL
MIC
IN MIC
1
SS
Q2 R2 T2 U6 U5 U4


Q1 LAN 2 (Blanked - Do Not Use) U2 Private Audio Headset (Line Out to MISC IF)
Q2 LAN 1 U3 Public Audio Speaker
R1 Display Port 2 U4 Handset Microphone In (MIC In from MISC IF)
R2 Display Port 1 U5 Handset Speaker Out
T2 USB 3.0 U6 Private Audio jack detect and volume button signal input
U1 Handset Hookswitch Signal Input V Public Digital MIC
CAUTION
The ATM internal LAN cable MUST be connected to the LAN 1 port.
The LAN cable(s) cannot be swapped between the two ports.
Take care if replacing the core to reconnect the ATM internal LAN cable into the LAN 1
port. Failure to follow this guidance will result primarily in the loss of AMT support.
Secondly, as the ports have now been switched the core Media Access Control (MAC)
address will need re-configured.
Display port configuration
Display Port11 Display Port 2
ATM with a separate service display Service Display (GOP/COP) Main Display
ATM without a separate service display Main Display2 N/C
1 - OS install instructions shown on here when booting from an optical drive or booting to DOS
2 - The main display is used as the service display.
Motherboard Jumpers
Serial Port Power Jumpers
Lanier, Kingsway and Falcon Monte Carlo Motherboards
The table below lists the serial port power jumpers for the Lanier, Lanier II, Kingsway and Falcon Monte
Carlo board.
Serial Port Lanier Kingsway Lanier II Falcon

COM1 JP1 JCOM A J7 JCOM 1
COM2 JP2 JCOM B J8 JCOM 2
COM3 JP3 JCOM C J15 JCOM 3
COM4 JP4 JCOMD J16 JCOM 4

The table below list the strapping settings of the serial power port jumpers.
Function Jumper on Pins

5V 1 and 2
12V 3 and 4
RI (default) 5 and 6
The jumpers on the serial power ports must be positioned on Pin 5 and Pin 6 as shown below.
Pin 1 Pin 2
Pin 3 Pin 4
Pin 5 Pin 6
Riverside Motherboard
The J39 header provides the strapping options for the serial power ports of the Riverside board.
The table below lists the strapping settings of the serial power port jumper, J39.
Function Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins Jumper on Pins

COM D COM C COM B COM A
5V 3 and 6 9 and 12 15 and 18 21 and 24
12V 2 and 5 8 and 11 14 and 17 20 and 23
RI (default) 1 and 4 7 and 10 13 and 16 19 and 22
The jumpers in the J39 header must be positioned on pins 1 and 4, 7 and 10, 13 and 16, 19 and 22 as
shown below.
5V 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
12V 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23
RI 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22
COMD COMC COMB COMA
Estoril Motherboard
The two headers provide the strapping options for the serial power ports.
Function Jumpers on pins Jumpers on pins

COM1 VSET COM2 VSET
5V 1 and 2 1 and 2
12V 3 and 4 3 and 4
RI 5 and 6 5 and 6

COM1 VSET
2
6
4
3
5
1
12V
5V
RI
COM2 VSET
5V 1 2
12V 3 4
RI 5 6
CLR CMOS
CAUTION
Ensure that the core is powered off before moving this jumper.
The table below lists the jumper settings for the CLR CMOS jumper on the motherboards.
Function Lanier Lanier Kingsway Riverside Falcon Estoril

II
Clear CMOS memory (jumper must be returned to normal 2&3 2&3 1&2 1&2 2&3 1&2
position before power-on)
Normal operation (default) 1&2 1&2 2&3 2&3 1&2 2&3
WARNING
Do not use a metal or conductive implement to remove the battery. A short circuit
between the battery’s positive and negative terminals can cause it to explode.
A_ON1–Auto Power On Jumper
Financial terminals do not provide an external power button for the motherboard. The Auto Power–On
jumper allows the motherboard to automatically power–on when power is applied.
The table below lists the strapping settings of the auto power–on jumper.
Jumper on Pins Function

1 and 2 Auto power–on enable (FSD default)
2 and 3 Auto power–on disable

RSD/FSD Strap
The RSD/FSD Strap indicates whether the motherboard is installed in a Retail or Financial system. The
table below lists the strap settings of the RSD/FSD strap.
Jumper on Pins Function

1 and 2 FSD mode (default)
2 and 3 RSD mode
With strap in correct position, enter BIOS setup and load defaults.
Falcon Monte Carlo USB Breakout Configuration

The Falcon Monte Carlo motherboard supports one 2.0 USB breakout cable that provides four USB ports
with port assignments shown in the illustration below.
Note: The USB breakout port assignments shown in this section is based on the Falcon Monte Carlo
firmware and is shown in the USB Viewer in SysApp.
6 5 2 1 USB breakout
ports
Motherboard I/O
DVD

The breakout cable is connected to the USB 1 and USB 2 motherboard internal headers.
l USB breakout ports 1 and 2 are connected to the USB 1 internal header
USB breakout ports Motherboard I/O

1 2 5 6
USB 2
USB 1
Mini PC Core Top View
USB 2 header
1 2
3 4
To USB To USB
5 6
port 5 port 6
7 8
10
1 2
3 4
To USB 5 6 To USB
port 1 port 2
7 8
10
USB 1 header
USB Internal Header Pin Out Assignments
Riverside USB Breakout Configuration

The Riverside motherboard supports one 2.0 USB breakout cable that provides four USB ports with port
assignments shown in the illustration below.
Note: The USB breakout port assignments shown in this section is based on the Riverside firmware and
is shown in the USB Viewer in SysApp.
1 2 4 3 USB breakout
ports
Motherboard I/O
DVD

The breakout cable is connected to the USB 1 and USB 2 motherboard internal headers.
USB breakout ports Motherboard I/O

3 4 2 1
USB 2
USB 1
Mini PC Core Top View
USB 2 header
1 2
3 4
To USB To USB
5 6
port 2 port 1
7 8
10
1 2
3 4
To USB 5 6 To USB
port 3 port 4
7 8
10
USB 1 header
USB Internal Header Pin Out Assignments
Estoril USB Breakout Configuration

The Estoril motherboard supports one USB 2.0 breakout cable that provides four USB ports with port
assignments shown in the illustration below.
6 7 8 9
IN OUT
ETHERNET DISPLAY PORT

OUT OUT
2 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 DIGITAL
MIC
IN MIC
1
SS

The breakout cable is connected to the motherboard internal headers P2 and P3.
l USB breakout ports 6 and 7 are connected to the internal header P3

l USB breakout ports 8 and 9 are connected to the internal header P2
USB2.0
USB 8 USB 6
USB 9 P2 P3 USB 7

The field replaceable units in the Mini PC Core are:
l System core fan

l Riser card and PCCM (optional feature)
l Disk Drives
l Audio breakout cable
l USB breakout assembly
l External DVD
l Motherboard
l Memory (SO-DIMM)
l I/O shield
l Processor (Kingsway, Riverside, Falcon Monte Carlo and Estoril boards only)
l CPU Fan (Kingsway, Riverside, Falcon Monte Carlo and Estoril boards only)
l Trusted Platform Module (TPM).
Removing the PC Core Lid

To remove the PC core lid, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the lid to the core chassis. Keep the screws for replacement
of the lid.
2. Slide the lid towards the I/O panel and lift up from the chassis.
System Core Fan

To remove and replace the core fan, disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the power harness from the motherboard.

2. Take note of the connection of the fan harness on the motherboard and disconnect the harness.

3. Remove and retain the two screws that secure the fan to the back of the core chassis.
4. Remove the existing fan from the chassis.
CAUTION
The correct direction of the air flow is out of the PC box. To replace the fan in the correct
position use the arrow marked on one of the sides of the fan to make sure the air is
blowing out of the PC box.
5. Locate the airflow arrow mark on the new fan and make sure it points out of the PC core chassis.
6. Use the two screws to secure the fan to the core chassis
7. Connect the fan harness to the header on the motherboard.
PCCM Board (Optional Feature)

To remove and replace the riser card and PCCM board, disassemble in the following order:

1. Disconnect the external cable from the PCCM board.

2. Insert a screwdriver through the hole at the side of the pc core chassis and remove the screw
securing the board to the chassis. Keep the screw for the replacement of the PCCM board.
Screw PCCM Board
Riser Card
Hole
3. Pull the PCCM board out, detaching it from the riser card.
4. Insert the new PCCM board to the PCI slot on the riser card. Make sure that the tab on the PCCM
board bracket is inserted into the slot on the chassis.
PCCM board and bracket Bracket slot on core chassis
5. Secure the board to the chassis with the screw.
PCI Riser Card (Optional Feature)

To remove and replace the PCIriser card, perform the steps below.
1. Remove PCCM board as described above.

2. Remove the screw that secures the riser card bracket to the back of the core chassis. Keep the
screw for the replacement of the riser card.
Screw

3. Carefully detach the existing riser card from the PCI slot on the motherboard and remove the
card and bracket from the chassis.
4. Connect the new riser card to the PCI slot on the motherboard.
5. Secure the riser card bracket to the core chassis with the screw.
External SATA DVD

To remove and replace the external DVD, disassemble in the following order:
1. Disconnect the SATA harness from the DVD drive.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the DVD bracket to the core chassis. Keep the screws for
replacement.
Screws
(Half Height SATA DVD)
Screws
(Slim SATA DVD)
3. Slide the DVD backward to release the tangs of the DVD bracket.
4. Remove the screws that secure the brackets to the DVD. There are two screws for each bracket.
5. Secure each bracket to the sides of the new DVD drive.
6. Fit the tangs of the left–hand DVD bracket to the slots on the core chassis and slide the DVD
forward to secure the left–hand bracket to the core chassis.
7. Use two screws to secure the right–hand DVD bracket to the core chassis.

Audio Breakout Cable

Not applicable to Estoril Motherboard. The audio out port is incorporated in the motherboard on the I/O
panel (lime green)
To remove and replace the audio breakout cable, disassemble in the following order:
1. Take note of the connection of the audio cable on the motherboard and disconnect it from the
header. Loosen the nut that secures the audio cable to the I/O panel and then remove the cable.
Audio nut
2. Fit the new audio connector to the hole in the rear I/O panel and secure it with the nut.
3. Connect the audio breakout cable header to the appropriate header on the motherboard.
USB Breakout Assembly

To remove and replace the USB breakout assembly, disassemble in the following order:
1. If fitted, remove the PCCM board.

2. Remove the three screws that secure the breakout assembly to the front of the core chassis.
Keep the screws for the replacement of the breakout assembly.
Screws
3. Note the positions and connections of all the USB cables.

4. Disconnect the cables then remove the USB breakout assembly.

5. Connect the headers of the new USB breakout assembly to the appropriate headers on the
motherboard.
Note: The plastic key in the USB breakout headers should be at the bottom when connected to
the motherboard headers.
Note: For more information on the USB breakout configuration of the Riverside and Falcon
Monte Carlo motherboards, refer to the following sections:
lRiverside USB Breakout Configuration

lFalcon Monte Carlo USB Breakout Configuration
6. Use three screws to secure the USB breakout assembly to the front of the core chassis in the
orientation shown in the illustration below.
Plastic tab with pins are

in upper part of the port
Primary Disk Drive

Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
To replace and replace the hard disk drive, perform the steps below.

2. Remove the USB breakout cable.
3. Remove the external DVD.
4. Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the HDD.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the existing HDD to the bottom side of the core chassis.
Keep the screws for the replacement of the HDD.
Screws
6. If fitted, remove and retain the second disk mounting brackets and screws. Refit to the new
primary HDD.
7. Fit the new HDD to the core chassis and secure it using the four screws.

Note: If the new HDD/SSD is the planned boot drive, then when the system reboots you will need to set
it as the current boot device. See 'Assign Boot Device' instructions.
Once selected the system will automatically boot from the selected device on every reboot.
Solid State Drive (SSD)

To remove and replace the solid state drive, perform the steps below.

3. Remove the external DVD.
4. Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the SSD.
5. Remove the four screws that secure the SSD mounting bracket to the bottom side of the core
chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of the SSD.
6. Secure the new SSD to the mounting bracket and connect the harnesses.
Secondary 2.5" Disk Drive (with Standard Primary Disk)

To remove and replace the secondary drive, perform the steps below.

3. Remove the external DVD drive.
4. Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the disk drive. Remove four screws that
secure the disk drive to the bottom of the core chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of
the disk drive.
Screws

5. Loosen the four screws (two on each side) of the disk drive that needs replacement.
Secondary HDD Screws

Secondary HDD
Primary HDD
Primary HDD Screws
6. Slide out the disk drive along the key hole slots and remove.
7. Slide in the new disk drive along the key hole slots and secure it to the brackets with two screws
on each side.
8. Fit the disk drives to the core chassis and secure it with four screws.
Note: When replacing the disk drives, make sure to connect hard disk 1 into SATA 1 and if dual disk,
hard disk 2 into SATA 2. Tidy up all cables using rivet ties where necessary.
Secondary 2.5" Disk Drive (with 2.5" Primary Disk)

To remove and replace the secondary drive, perform the steps below.

3. Remove the external DVD drive.
4. Disconnect the SATA power and data harness from the disk drive. Remove four screws that
secure the disk drive to the bottom of the core chassis. Keep the screws for the replacement of
the disk drive.
Screws

5. Remove the screws securing the disk drive(s) that need replacement.
Primary
2.5" HDD/SSD
Secondary 2.5" HDD/SSD
6. Remove the disk drive(s).

7. Secure the replacement disk drive(s) to the bracket.
8. Fit the disk drives to the core chassis and secure it with four screws.
Note: When replacing the disk drives, make sure to connect hard disk 1 into SATA 1 and if dual disk,
hard disk 2 into SATA 2. Tidy up all cables using rivet ties where necessary.
Motherboard
To remove and replace the motherboard, disassemble in the following order:
Note: The following illustrations show the Lanier motherboard, however the method of removal is the
same for other motherboards.
1. Disconnect the internal and external cabling from the existing motherboard.
2. Remove the memory modules from the defective motherboard. If re–usable, fit the memory
modules to the new motherboard. Refer to the “Memory Board (SODIMM)” section of this
chapter for the removal and replacement procedure.
3. For the Riverside and Kingsway board, remove the following modules from the defective
mother board and fit them to the new motherboard if they are still re–usable:
l CPU cooler, refer to the “CPU Cooler” section for the removal and replacement procedure
l Processor refer to the “Processor” section for the removal and replacement procedure
Note: Make sure to fit the processor socket protector of the new motherboard to the defective
motherboard socket to prevent damage to the socket pins during handling or shipping.

4. Remove the four screws that secure the motherboard to the core box, then remove the board
by moving it back towards the fan before lifting clear of the I/O shield.
CAUTION
When removing and re-fitting the motherboard, do not use the heatsinks to leverage the
board into the I/O shield. Handle the board by the edges or LAN and PCI slot only.
Screws x 2
Screws x 2
5. Fit the new motherboard to the core chassis and I/O shield and secure it with the four screws.
Ensure that the IO shield metal fingers are in contact with the motherboard for good ESD
immunity.
6. Fit the necessary modules and connect the necessary cables to their appropriate connectors on
the new motherboard.
Memory Board (SODIMM)
CAUTION
Hold the memory modules at the sides only. Never hold more than one module at a time.
Never bend or twist the memory modules as this can seriously damage the contacts.
Lanier and Lanier II Motherboards

To remove and replace the memory board on the Lanier and Lanier II motherboards, proceed as
follows:

1. Pull the plastic retention clips outwards to unlock and release the existing memory board from
the SO–DIMM slot.
2. Remove the existing memory board from the motherboard.

3. Match the notch on the new memory module with the notch on the SO–DIMM connector.
Notch
4. Insert the memory module at an angle towards the connector.

5. Lightly press down each end of the memory board until the plastic retention clips snap and lock
the memory module in place.
Note: It may be necessary to manually close the clips.
Kingsway, Riverside, Falcon Monte Carlo and Estoril Motherboards

To remove and replace the memory board on the Kingsway, Riverside and Estoril motherboards,
proceed as follows:
1. Flip open the plastic retention clips outwards and remove the memory board.

2. Match the notch on the new module to the notch on the SO–DIMM slot.
Notch
3. Insert the module without using undue pressure. Use the fingers of both hands to press down on
each end of the module until the plastic retention clips snap shut, (it may be necessary to
manually close the clips).
CPU Cooler
To remove and replace the CPU cooler, perform the steps below.
1. Loosen the four spring–loaded captive screws that secure the existing cooler to the
motherboard.
Note: Follow a sequential rotating pattern when loosening the spring–loaded screws. Gradually loosen
each screw to evenly raise the CPU cooler.
Screws Screws Screws
Riverside Cooler Kingsway Cooler
2. Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor spreader plate with a
tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or screwdriver as this could damage the surface of the
spreader plate.

3. Apply thermal grease to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.
thermal
grease
Riverside/Estoril Processor
(Apply approximately one-half of the Kingsway Processor
contents of the thermal grease syringe)
CAUTION
Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much grease could degrade the
performance of the cooler.
4. Fit the new cooler to the mounting holes with the back plate on the motherboard and secure
with the spring–loaded captive screws.
5. Connect the cooler power cable to the CPU fan connector on the motherboard.
Note: Make sure that the cooler cable does not obstruct the fan blades.
Processor
To remove and replace the processor, perform the steps below.
1. Remove the CPU Cooler from the motherboard.

2. Remove all old thermal grease from the cooler heat sink and processor spreader plate with a
tissue or paper towel. Do not use a knife or screwdriver as this could damage the surface of the
spreader plate.
3. Unlock and remove the processor from its mounting as shown below.
CAUTION
Hold the processor by the edges only. Take care not to drop anything into the processor
socket. The pins are very delicate and are easily damaged. If the pins are damaged, the
motherboard will have to be replaced.

a. For the Riverside and Estoril processor, unlatch the arm of the metal frame that
secures the processor to the motherboard, raise the metal frame, and remove
the processor.
Processor
Metal Frame
Metal Arm
b. For the Kingsway processor, rotate the lock to the unlock position as shown below
then remove the processor.
Lock
Processor
Kingsway Processor

4. Match the arrow on the new processor to the arrow on the motherboard and carefully place the
processor into the socket. Lock the processor in its mounting plate once it is properly seated.
Riverside/Estoril Processor Kingsway Processor
5. Apply thermal grease to the processor spreader plate in the pattern shown below.
thermal
grease
Riverside/Estoril Processor
(Apply approximately one-half of the Kingsway Processor
contents of the thermal grease syringe)
CAUTION
Do not use the entire contents of the syringe. Too much grease could degrade the
performance of the cooler.
6. Fit the cooler to the mounting holes on the motherboard and cooler back plate.
7. Secure the cooler with the spring–loaded captive screws.

Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

To remove and replace the TPM, perform the steps below.
1. To remove the TPM from the motherboard, hold the TPM board on both sides near the
connector with your thumb and forefinger, then pull up evenly on both sides until the TPM is
removed.
2. To fit the TPM to the motherboard, hold the TPM board at both sides near the connector with
your thumb and forefinger, insert the TPM in the TPM1 header on the motherboard and
carefully push down until the TPM is fitted properly.
I/O Shield
To remove and replace the I/O shield, perform the steps below.
1. Remove the motherboard. (See 'Motherboard' removal instructions).

2. From the outside of the core, push on the outside edges of the I/O shield and remove from the
core chassis.
To replace the I/O shield, reverse the instructions above.

CABLING
Interconnection Diagrams
Lanier Motherboard
System
Fan
Serial ATA
Lanier 945GSe
Hard Disk
Motherboard
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
Com 1
Com 2
Processor VGA
DVI-D
Ethernet
DDR2 Audio Line Out
SO- DIMM
Slot USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX
1 PCI

Lanier II NM10 Motherboard
System
Fan
Serial ATA
Lanier II NM10
Motherboard Hard Disk
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
Processor
Com 1
Com 2
VGA
DDR3 DVI-D
SO- DIMM Ethernet
Slots
Audio Line Out
USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX
1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1

Kingsway GL40 Motherboard

System 2nd Serial ATA
Fan Hard Disk
Serial ATA
Kingsway GL 40
Hard Disk
Motherboard
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
Com 1
Processor
Fan Com 2
VGA
Processor DVI-D
Ethernet
Audio Line Out
DDR3
SODIMM
Slots USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX

1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1

Riverside Q67 Motherboard
System
Fan 2nd Serial
ATA Hard Disk
Riverside Q67 Serial ATA

Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
CPU Fan
Processor
Com 1
Com 2
VGA
DVI-D
DDR3
SO- DIMM Ethernet
Slots Audio Line Out
USB 0
USB 1
TPM USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7
Extender Card ATX

1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1

Falcon Monte Carlo
2nd Serial
System ATA Hard Disk
Fan
Serial ATA
Falcon_MonteCarlo Q87
Serial ATA
DVD RW
+24V
CPU Fan
Processor Com 1
Com 2
VGA
HDMI
DDR3 Display Port
SO- DIMM Ethernet
Slots
Audio Line Out
USB 0
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
USB 7

Estoril Q87 Motherboard

System
Fan
Estoril Q87 Dual Ethernet

Motherboard Ethernet
Display Port 1
+24V Display Port 2
PIRAT
CPU Fan LVDS LCD
USB 2.0 (0)
Processor USB 2.0 (1)
On breakout header
USB 2.0 (2)
Serial ATA III USB 2.0 (3)
Primary Disk Drive USB 3.0 (0)
USB 3.0 (1)
Serial ATA III DDR3
SO- DIMM USB 3.0 (2)
Secondary Disk Drive Slots On I/O
USB 3.0 (3)
USB 3.0 (4)
Serial ATA II USB 3.0 (5)
DVD RW
Stereo headphone output
Stereo speaker output
Handset microphone in
TRUSTED
PLATFORM Handset hookswitch input
MODULE Handset speaker out
ATM headphone signal input
Handset speaker out
COM 1
On breakout header
COM 2
Extender Card ATX
1 PCI
1 PCIe x 1
Cables
Audio Breakout Header Assembly (Not applicable to Estoril)

Panel Mount Motherboard Power
Chassis Con Motherboard Con
Chassis Con Motherboard Con
1 Positive (+) (white) 3

2 Return (-) (black) 1
2
4
SATA Data and Power Cable
SERIAL
Data
ATA
SATA
Power
Data
1 Drain 1 1
2 2 Pin 1
3 3
4 Drain 2 4
Drain 3 Pin 7
5 5
Pin 1(a)
6 6
Pin 7(a) 7 Drain 4 7
Pin 15(b) 1
2 (yellow) 1 Power
3
4
Pin 1
5 (black) 2
Pin 1(b)
6
7 Pin 4
8 (red) 3
9
10
11 (black) 4
12
13
14
15

USB 2.0 Breakout Assembly
P5
1 2
P1
P2 9 10 Keyed
P3 P6
1 2
P4
9 10 Keyed
1 Vbus red 1
2 Data - white 3
P1 Data +
3 green 5
Power Ground P5
4 black 7
1 2
1 Vbus red 2 9 10 Keyed

2 Data - white 4
P2
3 Data + green 6
4 Power Ground black 8
1 Vbus red 1
2 Data - white 3
P3 Data +
3 green 5
4 Power Ground black 7 P6
1 2
1 Vbus red 2
2 Data - white 4 9 10 Keyed
P4
3 Data + green 6
4 Power Ground black 8

VGA Panel Mount Cable (Falcon Monte Carlo Motherboard Only)
P1 P2
1 Red 1
2 GND 6
P1 Green
P2
3 2
4 GND 7
2 1
5 Blue 3
6 GND 8 15 5
12 11 7 H Sync 13
8 GND 5
10 11 1
9 V Sync 14
10 VCC 9
11 SDA 12
12 SCK 15
Lanier, Kingsway and Riverside Motherboard Connectors
Video - Analogue (VGA)
The table below lists the pinout assignments for a standard DB-15 connector on the rear IO for a
standard VGA monitor.
Pin Signal
1 RED
2 GREEN
3 BLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 R_GND
7 G_GND
8 B_GND
9 5V Supply
10 GND
11 NC

Pin Signal
12 DDC DATA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 DDC CLK
Video - Digital (DVI)

The table below lists the pin assignments for a standard DVI–D connector on the rear IO for a standard
DVI monitor.
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TDMS DATA 2- 13 NC
2 TDMS DATA 2+ 14 +5V POWER
3 TDMS DATA 2/4 SHIELD 15 GND
4 NC 16 HOT PLUG DETECT
5 NC 17 TDMS DATA 0-
6 DDC CLOCK 18 TDMS DATA 0+
7 DDC DATA 19 TDMS DATA 0/5 SHIELD
8 NC 20 NC
9 TDMS DATA 1- 21 NC
10 TDMS DATA 1+ 22 TDMS CLOCK SHIELD
11 TDMS DATA 1/3 SHIELD 23 TDMS CLOCK+
12 NC 24 TDMS CLOCK-
C1 NC
C2 NC
C3 NC
C4 NC
C5 NC
Audio
Line Out Header on Motherboard
The table below lists the pin assignments for the audio line out internal header.
Pin Signal
1 Right
2 Jack Detect

Pin Signal
3 Audio Ground
4 Left
5 Audio Ground
Audio Output Connector

3.5mm stereo jack socket - no colour coding.
Pin Signal
1 Audio Left
2 Audio Right
3 GND
Serial Ports
Standard RS–232 DB–9
Pin Signal
1 CD
2 RX-
3 TX-
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
Network Connector
Standard RJ45 Ethernet network 10/100/1000 Base-T connection.
Pin Signal
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 NC
5 NC
6 RD-
7 NC
8 NC

USB
USB on Rear I/O
USB 2.0 compatible standard USB ports
Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 DATA-
3 DATA+
4 GND
USB Internal Headers

The tables below list the pin out assignments of the internal USB headers on the motherboard. Each
header provides two USB ports.

1 +5V 2 +5V
3 DATA- 4 DATA-
5 DATA+ 6 DATA+
7 GND 8 GND
9 NC 10 NC
SATA
SATA Data Connectors
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A-
4 GND
5 B-
6 B+
7 GND
SATA Power Connectors
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A-
4 GND

HDDs and Optical Drive SATA Connector

SATA DC Power Segment
DC power is supplied through a SATA 15 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 3.3 V
2 3.3 V
3 3.3 V
4 GND
5 GND
6 GND
7 5V
8 5V
9 5V
10 GND
11 Reserved
12 GND
13 12V
14 12V
15 12V
SATA Signal Segment

Signals are supplied through a SATA 7 pin connector.
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 A+
3 A-
4 GND
5 B-
6 B+
7 GND
Trusted Platform Module (1.2) Header

1 PCI_CLK_33MHz 11 LPC_AD0
2 GND 12 GND


3 LPC_FRAME# 13 N/C
4 N/C 14 N/C
5 LPC_RST# 15 3.3VSB
6 5V 16 SER_IRQ
7 LPC_AD3 17 GND
8 LPC_AD2 18 N/C
9 3.3V 19 SUS_STAT#
10 LPC_AD1 20 N/C
Estoril Motherboard Connectors

Display Ports
Reference the product cabling chapter for the supported display cabling pinouts.
CAUTION
The display ports on the Estoril motherboard are latched. The release button on top of
the plug must be pressed in order to safely disconnect
DC Power
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 +24v
4 +24v
LCD Backlight Power

Pin Signal
1 12V
2 GND
3 Enable
4 PWM
5 GND

LVDS Header
1 PANEL_ID0 2 PANEL_ID1
3 GND 4 GND
5 LVDSA_0N 6 LVDSA_1N
7 LVDSA_0P 8 LVDSA_1P
9 GND 10 GND
13 LVDSA_2P 14 LVDSA_0P
15 GND 16 GND
19 LVDS_3P 20 LVDSA_2P
21 GND 22 GND
23 LVDSB_1N 24 LVDSB_2N
25 LVDSB_1P 26 LVDSB_2P
27 GND 28 GND
29 LVDSB_CLKN 30 LVDSB_3N
31 LVDSB_CLKP 32 LVDSB_3P
33 PANEL_ID2 34 GND
35 DDC_CLK 36 GND
37 DDC_DATA 38 VCC_LCD
39 LCDPWRSEL 40 VCC_LCD
Serial Port Internal Headers

1 DCD# 6 CTS#
2 DSR# 7 DTR#
3 RXD 8 RI#
4 RTS# 9 GND
5 TXD 10 GND
PS/2 Header
Pin Signal
1 DCD#
2 DSR#
3 RXD
4 RTS#

5 TXD
Pin Signal
SATA Power Connectors

Pin Signal
1 +12V
2 GND
3 GND
4 +5V
Audio
Jack 1 - Stereo Headphone Output (lime green)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 HP_LINE_OUT_L
3 AGND
4 JACK_DETECT_SENSE_on_codec
5 HP_LINE_OUT_R
Jack 2 - Stereo Speaker Output (light blue)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 SPEAKER_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 SPEAKER_OUT_R
Jack 3 - Handset Microphone In (pink)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 MIC_LINE_IN_L
3 AGND
5 MIC_LINE_IN_R

Jack 4 - Handset Hookswitch Input (black)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 GND
5 HOOKSWITCH_ACTIVE (to GPIO)
Jack 5 - Handset Speaker Out (orange)
Pin Signal
1 AGND
2 HANDSET_OUT_L
3 AGND
5 HANDSET_OUT_R
Jack 6 - ATM Headphone Signal Input (grey)
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 HP_JACK_DETECT# (to GPIO)
3 GND
5 HP_VOL_ADJUST# (to GPIO)
DMIC - PDM DMIC Input
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 VCC3
4 DMIC_CLK
5 DMIC_DATA
Trusted Platform Module (2.0) Header

1 BIOS_VPP 2 BIOS_CS1
3 BIOS_CS2 4 3.3V


5 BIOS_MISO 6 BIOS_HOLD
7 BIOS_WP 8 BIOS_CLK
9 GND 10 BIOS_MOSI
11 [pin missing] 12 BIOS_RST
13 TPM_CS2 14 TPM_PP
15 TPM_SIRQ 16 TPM_STB
17 GND 18 TPM_RST
19 TPM_PIRQ 20 NC
There are no special test or adjustment tools required.

REVISION


7. CARD READERS
USB IMCRW 214
USB Smart Dip Card Reader 263
USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 268
USB Contactless Card Reader 272
Card Recycler Module 280

USB IMCRW
INTRODUCTION
Standard
Latchfast
Card Capture Bin
Card Capture Bin
The USB Integrated Motorised Card Reader Writer (UIMCRW) is capable of supporting all current
financial card technologies, both Magnetic and Smart (excluding Watermark) and has the flexibility to be
able to interface with future card technologies.
DESCRIPTION
The following illustration shows the main functional elements of the UIMCRW:
DC Motor
IC Contact Block
PCB (Main Control Board)
MEIs (Option)
Pre-head
Stage 1 PCB Option
(Attached to Underside)
Available variants of the UIMCRW are as follows:
l Track 2 - Read Only

l Track 1/2/3 - Track 1/2 Read, Track 3 Read/Write
l 3 Track - Track 1/2/3 Read/Write (HiCo).
The above variants are available in the following configurations:
l With or without Smart Card Reader (except HiCo which is Smart only)
l With or without Card Return On Power Fail and/or System Escape (CROPF/SE)

l With or without MEI (in throat)

l With or without Card Clamping.
The following options are available on Track 1/2/3 readers (Germany only):
l Card Identification Module (CIM)

l MM Security Module.
UIMCRW Firmware
The UIMCRW firmware contains code for all current software and hardware features, such that if the
hardware is available and is “switched on” by the software, it will automatically operate.
On start-up, the UIMCRW compares a downloadable software component on the ATMs hard drive to its
on-board firmware and automatically performs the download if a difference is found.
Card Detection and Pre-head Detection

Control of the UIMCRW shutter is by means of a microswitch which detects the physical presence and
width of a card in the entry position and a pre-head detection feature which detects the presence of a
magnetic stripe on the card. When the microswitch is activated and the pre-head detector recognizes a
magnetic stripe a signal is applied to the shutter solenoid to open the shutter and permit the card to
enter the UIMCRW.
Card Transport
Movement of the card in the UIMCRW transport, and eject and capture instructions, are controlled by
the UIMCRW firmware in response to commands from the host application.
Card Return/Capture
Under normal conditions, when the card is presented to the user at the end of a transaction, the card
will protrude a minimum of 25mm (except for warped cards) fromthe throat of the UIMCRW. From this
position, the card can still be captured by the UIMCRW.
Security - Long and Short Card Detection

The UIMCRW automatically detects long or short cards and notifies the host that an abnormal card has
been inserted into the UIMCRW. Abnormal cards are ejected immediately and can not enter the reader.
Reading and Writing to Magnetic Stripe Cards

The UIMCRW is equipped with four analogue methods of reading the magnetic track and, in the event of
a read error, will try a total of five times to read the card.

Digital Decoding
A digital method of reading poor quality cards is included in the UIMCRW. The customer’s application has
to be specially written to select digital decoding. If this is enabled, the card read time will be longer
because of the extra cycle which occurs after the analogue read attempts.
Writing Magnetic Data

The Track 1/2/3 Read/Write (HiCo) UIMCRW has two write currents (High-co and Lowco). The
appropriate current is set by the UIMCRW using HiCoLoCo software detection. In the event of a write
error verified by a read after write, the UIMCRW will attempt a further two times to write to the card
and to verify the result.
Reading and Writing to Smart Cards
When a Smart Card IC Contact Block is fitted, the card is moved to the “Set” position (PDI in the above
illustration), the contact block lowered and Power (VCC), Clock (CLK) and Reset (RST) applied. The ATR
chip data from a successful read is sent to the host. Any excess current on VCC while the Smart card is
activated will result in an error signal being generated.
UIMCRWs with the Smart facility permit reading and writing to Smart cards with contacts in the ISO
position and are provided with the electrical interface to one SAM card mounted on the IC and SAM1
Contact Block.
Smart Card Standards

The UIMCRW with Smart Card facility complies with the following Smart card standards:
l EMV - Europay, Mastercard and Visa

l GIECB - Carte Bancaire
l ZKA - German Banking Organisation
l Latest version of ISO 7816 part 3 and 4
l Memory Cards (For example: GPM896 & Siemens 4442 as supported by ICM300).
Hardware and software facilities are provided on the UIMCRW for the future introduction of Contactless
Smart Cards, Proximity Card and multiple SAM slots for CEPS (Common Electronic Purse Scheme).

Sensor Locations
PD-3 PD-2 PD-4 PD-1

Shutter
Card Detect SW, Pre HD
Magnetic Card
IMCRW
Optional Features
Card Return on Power Failure or System Escape
Card Return on Power Failure (CROPF) and Card Return on System Escape (CROSE) are provided as one
optional feature on the UIMCRW. The combined feature is referred to as CROPF/SE.
CROPF Battery
The CROPF option is provided with a re-chargeable battery located on the module tray below the
UIMCRW.
The CROPF circuit is contained on the control board and the battery plugs into connector J11. The
battery is attached to the baseplate by two cable ties.
CROPF Operation
In the event of a power failure the battery will provide the power necessary to complete the present
magnetic or smart card transaction and then attempt to return the card to the input slot and offer it to
the user for recovery. If the user does not take the card within 30 seconds, the card will be captured. If a
card jams during a CROPF operation, sufficient battery power is provided for three attempts to clear the
jam and present the card to the user, or capture the card, if not taken.
CROSE
In the event of a System Escape command being generated, while a card is in the UIMCRW, the CROSE
firmware will determine whether or not the Escape command was generated due to a power up
situation. If not, the card is presented to the user. If the user does not take the card within 30 seconds,
the card will be captured. In the event of an Escape command being generated following a prolonged
shutdown period, any card in the UIMCRW will not be moved to the entry slot. Instead, the card will be
captured.

Latchfast Card Capture
A Latch Fast Card Capture (LFCC) bin with electronic tamper indication is provided as an option with the
UIMCRW. The tamper indication system is automatically set up when hardware interrogation reports the
presence of the LFCC harness to the device firmware. A microswitch on the bin cradle detects the
presence of the bin. In the event of Card Capture command being generated when a card is in the
UIMCRW, the LFCC system will check that the LFCC bin is present before depositing the card in the bin.
A photodetector on the bin cradle looks through holes in the sides of the bin at an LED attached to the
other side of the cradle. If the beam between the photodetector and LED is broken by the cards stacking
up from the base of the bin this indicates a FULL SOON condition. A count is started in software, and
incremented for each card captured. Whenever the count reaches 12 cards a FULL signal is sent by the
LFCC to the host and the UIMCRW is made inoperable with a severity of FATAL.
The tamper switch on the LFCC bin detects any attempt to remove the bin from the UIMCRW. Once the
bin is removed, the cradle can be unclipped from the lugs in the base by squeezing the sides inwards.
CIM/MM Validation
CIM Module
Bracket Securing
Screw
An optional CIM86/MM optical detection and identification feature can be fitted to the UIMCRW
enabling reading of the card optical track using an optical head reader and either CIM86 or MM
technologies.
The CIM 86 PCB is located in a metal box on the top of the UIMCRW with the optical detector located
above the card transport path. The metal box and optical detector are screwed to a bracket that hooks
under the rear cross tie of the UIMCRW and is secured by a single screw (shown in the above
illustration).

If an MM PCB is fitted (Germany, Austria & Switzerland), it is located in the ATM safe and connected to
the UIMCRW via a current loop to RS232 interface board and an RS232 interface. The successful
correlation between the optical and Track 3 magnetic track of the card confirms the authenticity of the
card, otherwise the card is rejected.
When CIM86/MM is enabled and all magnetic tracks have been read successfully, the card is moved to
the front position, with the shutter open. In this position the card doesn’t protrude from the throat. The
CIM86/MM optical head is enabled and the card driven back into the card reader and Track 3 read.
Media Entry Indicators

Media Entry Indicator (MEI) printed circuit boards and green indicators located inside the plastic
moulding of the throat of the UIMCRW are available. The MEI indicators may be selected by the
application to be on continuously or to be flashed at a frequency of 0.25Hz, 0.5Hz, 1Hz, 2Hz, or 4Hz.
Card Clamping
A card clamping device may be fitted for additional security measures from card jamming fraud
techniques. The card clamper locks the card in the throat when the reader detects a card jam, thus
prevents fraudsters from taking and using the jammed card.
Note: The card clamping feature cannot be installed together with the CIMM/MM feature.
Anti-Eavesdropping Kit
An Anti-Eavesdropping Kit may be fitted for additional security measures to prevent eavesdropping in
ATM product configurations consisting of IMCRW or NU-IMCRW modules.
Note: The AEK Kit cannot be installed in product configurations with CIM/MM feature.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Device USB cable Check USB cable. Reconnect cable.
disconnected disconnected from
MCRW
USB cable Check USB cable. Reconnect cable.
disconnected from
hub
Power cable Check power cable. Reconnect cable.
disconnected from
MCRW
Power cable Check power cable. Reconnect cable.
disconnected from
power supply
Power supply fault. Check power supply voltage. Repair power supply.
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and retest. Replace cable
Power cable faulty Replace power cable and retest. Replace cable.
Read head Dirt on magnetic Clean MCRW head. Retest.
fault head
Read head faulty Fault still present following cleaning cycle. Replace MCRW transport.
Write head Dirt on magnetic Clean MCRW head. Retest.
fault head
Read head faulty Fault still present following cleaning cycle. Replace MCRW transport.
Shutter jam Jammed card or Check for jammed card or foreign object. Clear jam, clean and
foreign object retest.
obstructing shutter
Check if card clamping module is fitted and if it Release the clamped card,
is activated. Check for clamped card. clean, and retest.
Glue or gum on Check shutter and sensors. Shutter may move Use NCR approved
shutter or shutter but switch is not working, or shutter may move cleaning solution to
sensors slowly. remove substance.


Solenoid/gear Run HW_DIAG looped Shutter/Sensor test. If shutter not activated,
failure Observe shutter activation. replace MCRW throat.
Sensor failure Run HW_DIAG looped Shutter/Sensor test. If sensor faulty replace
Observe shutter switch sensor Byte 2 Bit 0 MCRW throat.
(Jammed Open) or Byte 2 Bit 1 (Jammed
Closed). Verify sensor changes.
PCB faulty Run HW_DIAG looped Shutter/Sensor test. If shutter not activated,
Observe shutter activation. replace MCRW transport.
Card jam Jammed card or Check for jammed card or foreign object. Clear jam, clean and
foreign object retest.
obstructing card Check if card clamping module is fitted and if it Release the clamped card,
path is activated. Check for a clamped card. clean and retest.
Dirt on rollers Check rollers. Use air spray to remove
dirt.
Moisture on rollers Check rollers. Dry rollers
Oil/grease/glue/gum Check rollers. Use NCR approved
on rollers cleaning solution to
remove substance.
Rollers damaged Check rollers. Replace MCRW transport.
Card detect switch Check switch for wear. If switch is worn, replace
damaged MCRW throat.
Motor/gear failure Run HW_DIAG Run to Run Sequence 3. If not, replace MCRW
Observe motor/gear operate correctly. transport.
Belt failure Run HW_DIAG Run to Run Sequence 3. If belt slipping, replace
Observe belt to determine if slipping. MCRW transport.
Sensor failure Run HW_DIAG loope Shutter/Sensor test. Cover If sensor faulty, replace
and uncover PD1, 1 PD2 and PD3 sensors. MCRW transport.
Verify sensor changes. (Byte 3 bit 0 = PD1
blocked, bit 1 = PDS2 blocked, bit 2 = PD3
blocked)
PCB faulty Run HW_DIAG Run to Run sequence 3. Observe If not activated, replace
motor/gear to determine activation. MCRW.


Invalid Card Dirt/grease/oil on Clean MCRW read head.
card
Dirt/grease/oil on Check rollers. Run cleaning cycle and
rollers hold cleaning card at
throat for 3 seconds to
ensure pinch is cleaned
thoroughly.
Error still reported after cleaning cycle. Run If error still reported,
HW_DIAG Run to Run Sequence 3 on loop. replace MCRW transport.
Customer Jammed card or Check for jammed card or foreign object. Clear jam, clean read head
tampering foreign object and retest.
obstructing throat. Check if card clamping module is fitted and if it Release the clamped card,
is activated. Check for a clamped card. clean, and retest.
Card detect switch Check switch for wear. If switch is worn, replace
damaged. MCRW throat.
Error still reported after cleaning Replace MRCW.
CROPF CROPF failure Replace battery.
failure
Capture bin Capture bin not Check capture bin. Insert capture bin.
removed inserted or not
inserted correctly.
Harness Check harness. Connect harness
disconnected.
Harness faulty. Bin is present and harness is connected but bin Replace harness.
removed error is still reported.
MCRW PCB faulty Run HW_DIAG looped shutter/sensor test. Replace MCRW transport.
Observe shutter activation.
Capture bin Bin full. Check bin. Empty bin.
full/ full soon Harness not Bin full error reported when bin empty. Check Connect harnessing.
connected. harness is connected. Check connectors on bin
full sensors.
Harness faulty. Bin full error reported when bin empty and Replace harness.
harness and sensors are connected correctly.
Bin full receiver or Bin full error reported when bin empty, Replace bin.
transmitter sensor harnessing checked.
faulty
MCRW PCB faulty. Bin full still reported when empty. Replace MCRW transport.


SC Faulty IC block. Run HW_DIAGS Run to Run Sequence 1. Replace ICC block.
stopper/Pin Observe IC contact block movement.
contacts
SCIF error Faulty IC block. Run HW_DIAGS Run to Run Sequence 1. Replace ICC block.
Observe IC contact block movement.
Switch pack Switches set Check switches - should all be off. (See Set all switches to off.
error incorrectly. Strapping.)
CIM/M /I/F CIM PCB defective Replace CIM/MM interface and retest. Replace CIM/MM interface
comms error board (stage 1 PCB)
(M_Status = Sensor dirty or LED on CIM/MM module is flashing. Clean sensor on CIM
90) obstructed. module.
Communications LED on CIM/MM block is off. Run HW_DIAGS CIM or
fault. MM Turnaround test.
CIM/MM/I/F CIM harness not Check harness. Run HW_DIAGS CIM-86 Connect harness.
comms error connected. turnaround test.
(M_Status = Sensor dirty or LED on CIM/MM module is flashing. Clean sensor on CIM/MM
Communications CIM LED off. Run HW_DIAGS CIM or
fault. MM Turnaround test.
Harness faulty Replace harness and run CIM-86 turnaround Replace harness.
test.
CIM/MM interface Harness checked or replaced, CIM-86 Replace CIM/MM interface
faulty turnaround test run and error still reported. board (stage 1 PCB)
CIM/MM interface Harness checked or replaced, CIM-86 Replace CIM module
comms error turnaround test run, CIM/ MM interface
replaced and error still reported.
MCRW PCB faulty Harness checked, CIM module replaced, CIM- Replace MCRW transport
86 test run and error still reported.
CIM/MM CIM/MM defective Replace CIM module and retest. Replace CIM module.
comms error Sensor dirty or Check harness. Run HW_DIAGS CIM-86 Clean sensor on CIM
M_Status = obstructed. turnaround test. module.
88)
Communications LED on CIM module is flashing. Run HW_DIAGS CIM or
fault. MM turnaround test.


CIM/MM Harness faulty Replace harness and run HW_DIAGS CIM-86 Replace harness.
comms error turnaround test.
M_Status = Sensor dirty or LED on CIM module is flashing. Clean sensor on CIM
Communications CIM LED off. Run CIM or MM
fault. turnaround test.
CIM/MM interface Harness checked or replaced, CIM-86 Replace CIM/MM interface
faulty turnaround test run and error still reported. (stage 1 PCB).
CIM/MM interface Harness checked or replaced, CIM-86 Replace CIM module.
comms error turnaround test run, CIM/ MM interface
replaced and error still reported.
MCRW PCB faulty Harness checked, CIM module replaced, CIM- Replace MCRW transport
86 test run and error still reported.
Removing Clamped Cards

To remove clamped cards from the reader, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the green gear on the card clamper and rotate it in the direction of the arrow to loosen
the grip of the clamper.
Release
2. Gently pull the card out from the green bezel of the reader.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on the IMCRW control board at start-up. The tests run in either of two modes
determined by the setting on the diagnostic switchpack on the board. The location of the switchpack is
shown in the illustration below:

External View
Diagnostic
LED`s
LD1
LD2
Red Green
Diagnostic
4 3 2 1 Switches
ON
The two diagnostic modes are:
l Power On Self Test (POST) mode - all switches off - five tests execute once without repeat at
system start-up (see table below)
l Selected Test mode - switchpack set to test number - selected test runs until the unit receives a
reset.
Switch Settings
The table shows the list of tests that can be selected and the tests that run at normal start-up and their
sequence.
Test ID Switch Setting Test Description Start-Up Selected

SW4 SW3 SW2 SW2 (and order)
00 0 0 0 0 Normal boot-up (POST)
01 0 0 0 1 Motor Test 1 X
02 0 0 1 0 Smart Card Signal Test* 4 X
03 0 0 1 1 SAM1 Signal Test* 5 X
04 0 1 0 0 Clear F-ROM X
05 0 1 0 1 Shutter Test (including Throat Sweep)* 2 X
06 0 1 1 0 IC Block Solenoid and Sensor Test 3
07 0 1 1 1 PD Sensor Slice Level Adjust Test X
08 1 0 0 0 Motor Speed Test X
09 1 0 0 1 Adjustment Start Sentinel Position X
0A 1 0 1 0 Single Cycle Test Mode X
0B 1 0 1 1 Reserved
0C 1 1 0 0 Reserved
0D 1 1 0 1 Reserved

Test ID Switch Setting Test Description Start-Up Selected

0E 1 1 1 0 Cycle Test Mode (Sankyo) X
0F 1 1 1 1 Reserved
Note: * These tests only run if the hardware is present.
The following notes describe the UIMCRW’s behaviour during POST and Selected Test Mode:
Note
1 At power on, both LEDs are on. The green LED remains on during boot up, while the red LED only remains
on for 100 ms.
2 If there is no user code in Flash ROM (F-ROM) the card reader must wait for a host download. During this
time the red light remains off while the green LED flashes (on 500 ms, off 500 ms).
3 During initial power on any test number set on the switches is ignored except if set for the "Clear F-ROM"
test and, in this case, the test is performed.
4 During execution of the Clear F-ROM test the red LED flashes at a rate of 0.5 Hz and the green LED is off.
This test can take up to 10 seconds to complete, after which the LEDs report the test result. A pass is shown
by a flashing red LED with the green LED on. A fail is shown by the red LED on constantly with the green
LED flashing at 0.5 Hz. At this stage the LEDs are unable to flash the test and failure codes described below.
5 During all other selected tests the red LED flashes at 0.5 Hz and the green LED reports the test result (see
“Test Results”).
6 The UIMCRW performs the Power On Self Tests (POST) as listed in the section "Switch Settings". If the
UIMCRW fails during POST, then the red LED is lit constantly and the green LED flashes a sequence to
indicate a failure (See "Test Results").
7 If boot up completes normally (that is, the UIMCRW runs user code), then both LEDs are turned off. During
normal operation no LEDs should be on.
8 If the switches have illegal settings, both the red and green LEDs flash at a constant rate of 3 Hz.
9 During download to F-ROM, the red and green LEDs flash together at 0.5 Hz
TEST REPORTING
Two LEDs on the control board, one red and one green, report the progress of level 0 diagnostics as
follows:
Condition Red LED Green LED

Pass Flashes On for 2 seconds, then flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the test id number (1 flash
for test 1, 2 flashes for test 2 and so on).
Fail Constant On for 2 seconds. Flashes at 0.25 second intervals to indicate the test id number (1 flash for
test 1, 2 flashes for test 2 and so on). Off for 1 second. Flashes at 0.25 second intervals to
indicate the error code (1 flash for code 1, 2 flashes for code 2 and so on). Off for 1 second.
Sequence is repeated.
TEST DESCRIPTIONS
The following sections describe each test in turn.

Test 01H - Motor

Purpose - To test the IMCRW motor.
Description - The following sequence is repeated until a failure occurs:
1. Motor forwards 190 mm/s for 1 second approximately.

2. Motor backwards 190 mm/s for 1 second approximately.
3. Motor stopped for 2 seconds.
Note: This test can not be performed with a card in the reader.
Note: If a card is detected (width switch and shutter both open) when this test is running in normal start-
up then the test will not fail.
Test Results:
Error Code Red Green Meaning

00 flashing off Pass
01 constant 1 flash CPU can not get encoder pulse
02 constant 2 flashes Card jammed
03 constant 3 flashes A card is in the reader
Test 02H - Smart Card Signal

Purpose - To test the smart card signal level.
Description - The following sequence is repeated until failure:
l I/O line, Reset, and VCC, of ICC are toggled.
l VCC (5 V mode) ON (1 second)

l All OFF (1 second)
l All OFF (1 SECOND)
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Short circuit
Note: The CPU can detect only the excess current. The I/O, Reset, and VCC signal levels are not checked.
Test 03H - SAM1 Signal

Purpose - To test the SAM1 signal level.

l I/O line, Reset, and VCC, of SAM are toggled.

l All OFF (1 second).
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Short circuit SAM1
02* constant 2 flashes Short circuit SAM2
Note: The CPU can detect only the excess current. The I/O, Reset, and VCC signal levels are not checked.
Note: * These codes can occur only if SAM2-5 PCB is fitted.
Test 04H - Clear F-ROM

Purpose - To clear all F-ROM contents except NCR file.
Description - The program area (0x8000 - 0x7FFF) of the F-ROM is cleared. On the next boot the IMCRW
enters download mode which returns the Flash ROM to the original shipping condition.
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Unable to clear
Test 05H - Shutter (Including Throat Sweep)

Purpose - To test the IMCRW shutter.
1. Open shutter for 2 seconds

2. Close shutter for 2 seconds.
If the high security throat is present then a full pre-sweep cycle is executed. In normal start-up mode
this test will only produce a twitch of the shutter.
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Shutter open


02* constant 2 flashes Shutter closed
03* constant 3 flashes Sweep error 1
Note: This test can not be performed with a card in the reader.
Note: This test must not be run with a card in the throat of the IMCRW (width switch and shutter both
open).
Note: * These codes can occur only if the high security throat is fitted.
Test 06H - IC Block Solenoid and Sensor

Purpose - To test the IMCRW IC block solenoid and sensor.
1. IC Block down 2 seconds.

2. IC Block up 2 seconds.
In normal start-up mode the time is reduced to 0.5 seconds.
Test Results:

06 constant 6 flashes Movement error
Test 07H - PD Sensor Threshold Level Adjust

Purpose - To measure the threshold voltage of each PD sensor and store the value in F-ROM.
Description - The following sequence is executed once:
1. Turn on all position PD (photo-diode) sensor LEDs with half power.

2. Measure the voltage of each PD sensor.
3. Calculate each PD threshold voltage and write them into F-ROM.
Test Results:



02* constant 2 flashes Shutter closed
Test 08H - Motor Speed Test

Purpose - To measure speed of card movement.
1. Accept card entry.

2. Speed of card movement measured.
Test Results:

02 constant 2 flashes Card jammed
03 constant 3 flashes Unable to measure (out of range)
Test 09H - Adjustment Start Sentinel Position

Purpose: To measure the start sentinel position and store the value in F-ROM.
Description: The following sequence is executed once:
1. Accept card entry

2. Measure start sentinel position
3. Write adjustment data to F-ROM
Test Results:

01 constant 1 flash Not standard card or read error
02 constant 2 flashes Card jam
03 constant 3 flashes Unable to adjust (out of range)
06 constant 6 flashes Unable to save the data to F-ROM normally
Test 0AH - Single Cycle Test Mode

Purpose - To cycle the IMCRW.

1. Accept card entry (the card must have magnetic stripes).

2. Perform bit check on magnetic tracks 1, 2 and 3.
3. Set smart card position.
4. Turn smart card power on and receive ATR.
5. Turn smart card power off and release.
6. Eject card.
Test Results:

02 constant 2 flashes Shutter closed
07 constant 7 flashes Card jam
Test 0EH - Repeat Cycle Test Mode

Purpose - To cycle the IMCRW.
Description - The same sequence as test 0AH (above) is repeated until failure.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following table shows level 1 diagnostic tests which are available on all UIMCRWs. Additional tests
for specific variants are shown in the subsequent tables.
Note: Test results (contained in M_STATUS, M_DATA and T_DATA) are given in the NCR publication
B006-6273-A000, Self-Service Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code Notebook.
All UIMCRW Variants

Test Description
MENU Displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow the user to select.
ENTER Accepts card entry. If the Accept fails then the rest of the test is skipped. The test times out if
no card is inserted within 10 seconds. On timeout the reader is disabled and a late event is
checked for.
READ ISO TRACK Performs an ISO Track 1 read and displays all the data on the track (or up to any detected
1 error, if one exists). (Track 123 MCRW only).

Test Description
2 error, if one exists).
3 error, if one exists). (Track 123 MCRW only).
WRITE ISO TRACK Performs a read of ISO Track 3 and if successful the original track image is stored. Performs a
3 write to ISO track 3 of two different patterns of 104 characters. If the first write is
unsuccessful then the second write is not attempted. Two patterns are necessary to ensure
that the write capability is operational. If the original track image read and both writes were
successful then a write with the original card image is performed to restore track 3. If a read
or write error occurs during this test then track 3 of the test card may be corrupted. Rewrite
of the original data is not attempted if the test write fails. (Track 123 MCRW only) Note:The
first pattern is all ASCII zeros and the second pattern is '0123456789=' repeated until the
track (104 characters) is filled.
EJECT Returns the card to the exit position of the card reader and waits 10 seconds for it to be
removed.
CAPTURE Captures the card from the reader.
SPEED TEST This test is present for compatibility with the MCRW and always returns success. The card
must already be in the reader when the test is initiated.
SHUTTER/SENSOR Opens and closes the shutter to check the shutter switch for correct operation. Also reports
TEST the static state of the sensors.
RELAY AND Operates the relays and shows the state of the battery (CROPF variants only).
BATTERY TEST
CLEANING CYCLE Opens shutter and accepts card inputs. Cycles cleaning card 5 times, then ejects card and
closes shutter. The test times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds.
DISPLAY DEVICE Displays the UIMCRW serial number which is obtained from the registry DWORD value
SERIAL NUMBER %ULYBASEKEY%/DeviceImage/USBIMCRW/MCRW-01- USBMotorised/Serial Number.
Run to Run Tests

Every UIMCRW variant offers a set of run to run tests:

Test Description
RUN TO RUN The following sequence of tests is executed: SHUTTER/SENSOR TEST
SEQUENCE 1 ENTER READ ISO TRACK 1 (if configured)
READ ISO TRACK 2 READ ISO TRACK 3 (if configured) CIM VERIFY (if configured)
SMART CARD STAGE (if configured)
SMART CARD RESET (if configured)
SMART CARD RELEASE (if configured)
WRITE ISO TRACK 3 (if configured)
EJECT CAPTURE
Note that the SMART CARD RESET will check T-DATA not T-CODE to ensure the Smart Card
is functioning correctly.
RUN TO RUN The following sequence of tests is executed:
SEQUENCE 2 ENTER
CAPTURE
RUN TO RUN The following sequence of tests is executed: ENTER READ ISO TRACK 1 (if configured)
SEQUENCE 3 READ ISO TRACK 2 READ ISO TRACK 3 (if configured) CIM VERIFY (if configured)
SMART CARD STAGE (if configured)
SMART CARD RESET (if configured)
SMART CARD RELEASE (if configured)
EJECT
Note that the SMART CARD RESET will check T-DATA not T-CODE to ensure the Smart Card
is functioning correctly.
RUN TO RUN This test is only provided if CIM is configured. The following sequence of tests is executed:
SEQUENCE 4 ENTER SERVICE
CIM SERVICE
EJECT
Note: In a RUN TO RUN test, (with or without Looping), if no card is detected on an ENTER then the RUN
TO RUN test is terminated. If no card is present on a CAPTURE then the CAPTURE test is skipped.
3-Track Write UIMCRW

The following additional tests are available on 3-track write UIMCRWs:

Test Description
WRITE The data from the specified track is read and saved. The first test pattern is written to the
BUFFER appropriate buffer, and then is written to the magnetic card. If both commands give good responses
TRACK 1 then the second test pattern is written to the card in the same way. If good responses are received
WRITE and the original data was saved successfully then the original card data is written back to the card.
TRACK The first pattern is all ASCII zeros and the second pattern is 0123456789=" for tracks 2 and 3 and
BUFFER 2 0123456789=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ" for track 1 repeated to maximum length as
WRITE follows:
TRACK 76 for Track 1
BUFFER 3 37 for Track 2
104 for Track 3
If at any point a Write Buffer or Write Card command fails then the rest of the test is aborted.
WRITE 3 The data from all three tracks is read and saved. The first test pattern of ASCII zeroes is written to all
BUFFER three buffers. If successful, the buffers are written to the card. If successful, the second test pattern
TRACKS (see above) is written to all three buffers. If successful the buffers are written to the card. If
successful, the original track data is written to the buffers and then back to the card. Only the track
data that was successfully saved is restored.
Smart Card UIMCRW

The following additional tests are available on smart card UIMCRWs:
Test Description
SMART Moves the card which is in the UIMCRW transport into the Smart Card Reader Writer (SCRW) and
CARD brings the contacts down onto the card.
STAGE
SMART Power is applied to the card under the contacts and the 'Answer to Reset' message is read from the
CARD card. The card is then powered off. Note that this test will check T-DATA not T-CODE to ensure the
RESET Smart Card is functioning correctly.
SMART Raises the contacts and moves the card out of the SCRW back into the UIMCRW transport.
CARD
RELEASE
SMART The device controller switches into SCRW mode. Any card present is powered off. The controller
CARD switches to MCRW mode.
INITIALISE
SCIF The Smart Card contact solenoid is energised and de-energised in sequence.
SOLENOID
SCIF The Smart Card Interface (SCIF) firmware identity number is read and displayed as T-DATA.
IDENTIFY
SC Opens the shutter to accept a SmartCard cleaning card. The card is inserted then staged and released
CLEANING 5 times then ejected. The test times out if no card is inserted within 10 seconds.
CYCLE
With Tamper Indication

The following additional test is available for all UIMCRW variants with tamper indication:

Test Description
TAMPER INDICATION The status of the UIMCRW tamper indicator is displayed.
With CIM
The following additional test is available for CIM UIMCRWs:
Test Description
CIM Performs a functional check on the CIM Interface Module, the CIM- 86 security module and the
TURNAROUND connecting harness. Test characters are sent to the CIM-86 via the interface and are echoed
back unmodified. Alternatively the interface only can be tested by connecting the receive and
send lines together on the CIM harness connector. Note: The connection or disconnection of the
CIM harness must only be done while the ATM is powered off.
With MM
The following additional test is available for MM UIMCRWs:
Test Description
MM Performs a functional check on the MM Interface Module, the MM security module and the
TURNAROUND connecting harness. Test characters are sent to the MM via the interface and are echoed back
unmodified. Alternatively the interface only can be tested by connecting the receive and send
lines together on the MM harness connector. Note: The connection or disconnection of the MM
harness must only be done while the ATM is powered off.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The Level 3 Diagnostics returned for the UIMCRW are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the IMCRW are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault).
02 WARNING (May require attention).
03 SUSPEND (Possible tampering)
04 FATAL (Device inoperative)
Tallies
The tallies recorded for the IMCRW are:

Tally Description
CARDTRAN A card enters the transport.
SHTR JAM When a shutter jam (open or closed) is detected on accep or eject.
SHTR SEN On accept when card enters reader but shutter is not seen to open.
OVER LEN A card length error is detected, e.g multiple cards
READ OPS A read is attempted for the first time.
READ ERR A track cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.
BLANKTRK A blank track is detected.
WRTE OPS A write is attempted for the first time.
WRTE ERR When track 3 read after write check fails after a full set of retries.
WRTE RTY A read after write check fails on the first attempt but is successful on a retry.
COM FAIL A read or write failed due to comms failure.
COMM RTY A successful read or write retry resulted from a comms failure.
EJCT OPS An eject attempted for the first time.
EJCT JAM An eject attempt fails e.g. due to card jam or shutter jammed closed.
REMOVED The card is removed after a successful eject (including cleaning cycle eject). If another command is
received before the card is taken the tally will not be incremented.
CAPT OPS A capture is attempted for the first time.
CAPTURED A card is captured.
CAPT N-D A capture was attempted but the card was removed during capture.
CAPT JAM A capture attempt failed e.g. card jam.
CAPT RTY A capture failed on the first attempt but is successful on a retry.
HEADPASS A card traverses the transport in one direction.
CARD JAM A card jam cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.
JAM RTY A card jam is cleared by retries or error recovery.
WDTH JAM Width switch is permanently blocked during accept.
NO RDTK1 Track 1 cannot be read correctly after a full set of retries.
AJAMTHRT A card jams in the throat during the accept cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
AJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the accept cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
EJAMTHRT A card jams in the throat during the eject cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error recovery.

Tally Description
EJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the eject cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
CJAMTHRT A card jams in the throat during the capture cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
CJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the capture cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
RJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the read cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
WJAMTRAN A card jams in the transport during the write cycle and cannot be cleared by retries or error
recovery.
NOWRTTK1 A read after write check fails after a full set of retries on track 1.
FRDTTOPS The fraud throat is actuated, either during execution of a THROAT SWEEP command or during card
entry when a Pre-sweep is enabled.
FRDTTERR The fraud throat reports an error during operation.
NONSCDET The card present is detected not to be a smart card, during execution of the command to power
on the smart card.
SCDETECT The card present is detected to be a smart card, during execution of the command to power on
the smart card.
NONMCARD A non-magnetic card is entered.
CIM VRFY A CIM Verify is attempted for the first time, (not Incremented for retries).
MM ATMPT The MM sensor is activated to read the optical stripe on an ec card.
STRAPPING
The diagnostic switches on the main control board should all be set to OFF for normal operation of the
UIMCRW.

External View
Diagnostic
LED`s
LD1
LD2
Red Green
Diagnostic
4 3 2 1 Switches
ON
ADJUSTMENTS
Pre-head
The Pre-Head position should set as follows:
1. Check that the Pre-Head is set as shown in the illustration below, with distance A equal to
distance B.

2. If necessary, loosen screw (e) shown below. and move the Pre-Head until A = B.
3. Tighten screw (e).
Heartbeat
If the card reader is being subjected to repeated resets (i.e. disconnects and reconnects) then the
heartbeat functionality should be disabled in Self Service Configuration menu in Sys App, to eliminate it
as the possible cause.
Card Detect Microswitch

The microswitch can be tested using ST-SW Card (Sankyo EGCMC0119).
1. Insert the ST-SW Card slowly into the card throat.

2. Listen for a click sound from the switch when position B on the card contacts the microswitch
actuator. This sound indicates that the microswitch has detected the card and switched ON.
3. Draw out the ST-SW Card slowly and again listen for the click sound when position A is detected
by the microswitch. This sound indicates that the microswitch has detected removal of the card
and has switched OFF.
4. Check that the microswitch operates correctly at each ST-SW card position.
5. If necessary, loosen the microswitch adjusting screws and adjust the microswitch until it
operates correctly.

6. If the sound of the microswitch changing from ON to OFF and vice versa cannot be heard,
replace the bezel assembly.
FRU Module Removal and Replacement

The following modules are field replaceable items:
l Anti-Eavesdropping Kit
l MEIs
l IC contact block
l Throat
l Battery
l Base transport
l Card Clamping:
l Card Clamping PCB
l Card Clamper

Anti-Eavesdropping Kit
If fitted, AEK parts should be removed as required for FRU replacement as follows
1. Remove MCRW module from ATM detaching all the necessary cables.
2. Loosen the M3 Hex Pozdriv screw from the protective bracket as shown.
3. De-align the hooks on AEK protective bracket and slide the AEK protective bracket from front to
back as shown, and remove it from the MCRW.
Bottom location of
Protective Bracket hooks.
Slide and remove Protective cover from MCRW
4. Remove the support bracket assembly by removing one M3 THF Comb Pozi screw and one M4
M/C Screw.
M4 M/C Screw
Support Bracket Assembly
M3 THF Comb Pozi Screw

5. Loosen the M3 X 12 screw and self locking nut to remove the PCB (if fitted) and bottom cover
assembly.
6. Loosen the two M3 Hex Pozdriv 6.0 screws and remove the bottom cover.
7. Loosen the two screws and remove the Anti Drill Plate by carefully manipulating the existing
‘Z’shaped ribbon membrane.

8. Replace the required AEK parts.
9. Re-install the MCRW assembly on the module tray connecting all the required cables to MCRW.
Also tie up the cables using cable tie straps at appropriate positions.
MEIs
1. Disconnect the MEI harness from the main control board (CN4).
2. Unclip the tang at each side holding the MEI cover to the throat, and lift off the cover.
3. Lift the upper MEI PCB out from the groove behind the card entry slot.
MEI Cover
Upper MEI

4. Remove the three screws securing the lower MEI assembly to the underside of the throat.
Securing Screws
Lower MEI
5. When replacing the MEI cover, make sure that the extension arm makes a good grounding
contact with the metal surface of the UIMCRW above the throat.
IC Contact Block
1. If CIM/MM is fitted, remove the screw securing the CIM/MM module to the top of the card
reader, and lift off the module.
CIM Module
Bracket Securing
Screw

2. Lift the clear plastic mylar strip and disconnect the ribbon cable from the main control board.
Remove the two screws securing the IC contact block, which are accessed through the control
board. Remove the IC contact block.
Throat
1. Undo the pre-head connector at J22 on the LED board.
2. Remove the screws securing the throat to the UIMCRW base transport: 2 on the lefthand side
and 2 on the right.

3. Disconnect the MEI harness from the outside of the main control board, and the solenoid
connector from the inside surface.
Battery
1. Remove the screw securing the UIMCRW to the module tray.
2. Unplug the battery connector J11 on the control board.
3. Slide the UIMCRW off the module tray.
4. Snip the cable ties securing the battery to the tray.
5. Remove and replace the battery and cable ties.
Note: When fitting new cable ties, the fastening end should be kept under the module tray so that it
doesn’t interfere with the seating of the UIMCRW.
Base Transport
To remove and replace the base transport, remove and replace all the other UIMCRW modules as
detailed in this section, and fit them onto a replacement base transport.
Card Clamping Module

Card Clamping PCB
To remove the card clamping PCB, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the reader upside down.

2. Move the securing clips upward to release the two ribbon cables from the main card reader
PCB.

3. Disconnect the two ribbon cables then feed them through the side frame of the card reader.
4. Disconnect the two power harnesses from the card clamping PCB.
5. Remove and retain the card clamping PCB retaining screw.
Screw
6. Slide the PCB out of the card reader.
To replace the card clamping PCB, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the card reader upside down.

2. Partially slide the PCB into the guide rails.

3. Thread the ribbon cables through the side frame and over the card reader PCB.
4. Connect the power harnesses to the PCB.

5. Push the PCB the rest of the way into the card reader until the hole in the rear of the PCB lines
up with the card reader frame.
6. Secure the PCB with one screw.
7. Connect the ribbon cable to the card reader PCB.

8. Lock the ribbon cables by pushing down the securing clips.
Card Clamper
CAUTION
The lock blade protrudes from the main body of the card clamper. Take care when
handling the device.
To remove the card clamper, perform the following steps:
1. Ensure that the card clamping PCB is disconnected. If it is still connected, perform the following
steps:
a. Turn the card reader upside down.
b. Disconnect the two power harnesses.
2. Turn the card reader the right way up.
3. Remove and retain the M4 Pan head screw securing the card clamper to the card reader.
4. Remove the card clamper from the card reader.
To replace the card clamper, perform the following steps:

1. Line–up the slot in the front of the clamper with the shaft in the card reader.
2. Align the notch on the clamper with the side frame of the card reader.
3. Secure the clamper with one M4 pan head screw.
PCB Slides and Ribbon Cable Edge Protector

These items are not field replaceable units. When a card reader fitted with a card clamping device is
damaged, a replacement card reader cannot be ordered with card clamping. All parts of the card
clamping module (including screws, guide rails, and the edge protector) have to be moved from the
damaged card reader to the new card reader.
To remove the slides and ribbon cable edge protector, perform the following steps:

1. Using a pair of pliers, release the poppers securing the PCB guide rails to the side frames of the
card reader. Remove and retain the guide rails.
2. Remove and retain the ribbon cable edge protector from the card reader side frame.
Ribbon Cable
Edge Protector
To replace the PCB slides and ribbon cable edge protector, perform the following steps.
1. Push the poppers in each guide rail into the two holes in the card reader side frames.

2. Push the edge protector over the side frame where the ribbon cables are routed.
CABLING
CIM Harness
The illustration below shows the schematic of the harness for the CIM Stage 1 PCB to the CIM Module.
CN11
1 +5V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1
2 2
RESET
3 3
TXD RXD 4
4
RXD TXD 5
5
GND
CIM Module
CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB
6 6
CIM SENSING
7 7
GND
8 8
B AUD 1
9 9
B AUD 2
10 10
+5V 11
11
+5V 12
12
13 GND 13
GND 14
14
15
16
MM Harness
The illustration below shows the schematic of the harness for the CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB to the MM Box.

CN11
1 +5V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
1
MM SENSING
2 2
RESET
3 3
TXD RXD 4
4
RXD TXD 5
5
GND
CIM/MM Stage 1 PCB

6 6
MM Box
7 7
GND
8 8
OPEN 9
9
OPEN
10 10
+5V 11
11
+5V 12
12
13 GND 13
GND 14
14
15
16
Card Capture BIN Harness
P7 +5V P3
V V V
8 1
V V
LED
PCB
GND
6 3
UIMCRW Base PCB J110
P2
1
V V V
Sensor
PCB
3
OVERFILL_DET
V
4 2
SW1
V V
Switch
3
Present
Bin
7 TICC_DET
V
CONNECTORS
The following diagram shows the connections between the modules of the UIMCRW.

USB Photo-Transistors
Communication J4 PDI, PD1, PD2,
with PC Core PD3, PD4
J801
LEDs - Pre head,
+24V DC J5 J21 LED J22 HDS1, HDS2,
J2 HDS3
Read/Write
J6
Head
J7 Motor
UIMCRW Main Control Board

J11 CROPF
Battery
12V
CN51
Regulator
CIM/MM PCB
5V
J101 CN101 CN52 Regulator
CIM/MM
CN11
Module
Latchfast Card
Capture Bin
J110 (Full Soon Sensor &
Bin Present Switch)
Card Width Switch

J301
IC Block PCB Shutter Solenoid
J2 Contacts
J302 J1
J3 Solenoid
MEI PCB
J31 CN4
Main Control Board

The position of connectors on the main control board is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts
are given in the following table:
J11
J302
J7 J2
J301
J801
J9
J5 J4
CN4 J110
CN1
J102 J101 J201 J6

J31
Connector Number Pin No. Signal Name

J801 (USB I/F) 1 VBUS (Power +5V DC)
(Connects to PC Core) 2 D- (USB Data (-))


3 D+ (USB Data (+))
4 ID (NC)
5 SGN (Signal Ground)
J2 (Power) (Connects to Power Supply via Uniharness) 1 +24V DC
2 PGN (Power Ground)
J4 (Photo Transistor) 1 SGN (Signal Ground)

2 PD3 (Card Sensing)
4 PDI (Card Sensing)
7 +5V VCC
J5 (Card SENS.LED) 1 +12V VCC

2 HFLT (LED Half Light)
3 LEDON (LED On/Off)
4 PHD- (Pre Head-)
5 PHD+ (Pre Head+)
6 FG2 (Frame Ground)
7 SGN (Signal Ground)
8 HDS1 (Head Detect1)
J6 (Read/Write Head) 14-way connector
J7 (Motor) 1 LED+ (Motor Revolution Sensing)
2 PTR (Motor Revolution Sensing)
3 GND
4 Motor+
5 Motor-
J9 (Spare Port) 10-way connector
J11 (Battery) (Connects to CROPF Battery) 1 BAT+ (Battery+)
2 BAT- (Battery-)


J31 (MEI Power and Control) 1 +24V VCC
2 MEI
CN4 (Upper and Lower MEIs) 1 +12V VCC
2 MEI A
3 MEI B
4 L-back
5 SGN
J101 (Stage 1 CON1) (Connects to Stage 1 CIM PCB) 1 FG (Frame Ground)
2 GND
3 to 6 N/C
7 +24V VCC
8 N/C
9 CIMDT (CIM Detect)
10 MMDT (MM Detect)
11 SMTXD (CIM MM Transmit Data)
12 SMRXD (CIM MM Receive Data)
13 +24V VCC
14 SMRST (CIM MM Reset)
15 GND
16 to 19 N/C
J102 (Stage 1 CON2) 8-way N/C
J110 (Card Bin) (Connects to latchfast card capture bin harness) 1 CUS (Capture Unit Sensing)
2&3 N/C
4 EFS (Early Full Sensing)
5&6 N/C
7 CBES (Capture Box Exist Sensing)
8 +5V VCC
J201 (Stage 2 CON) 1 to 6 Contactless IC Card PCB Interface

8 to 22 CIM2-5 PCB Interface
J301 (Shutter SOL Card Throat Switch) 1 +24V VCC
2 Shutter SOL
3 GND


4 PI1 (Shutter Motion Sensor)
5 GND
6 SW1 (Card Throat SW)
CN1 (TK2 Read Head) 3-way connector
J302 (IC Card Block) 19-way connector
(Connects to J1 on IC Block PCB)
CIM/MM PCB
The position of connectors on the CIM/MM PCB, located on the underside of the UIMCRW, is as shown in
the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following table:
Note: Connector CN101 is on the rear of the board.

CN51 (12V Reg.) 1 Reg.IN (24V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (12V)
CN 52 (5V Reg) 1 Reg.IN (12V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (5V)
CN11 1 +5V
(Connects to CIM Module) 2 MMDT (MM Detect)
3 Reset
4 TXD (Transmit Data)
5 RXD (Receive Data)
6 GND

8 GND
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 +5V
12 +5V
13 GND
14 GND
15 N/C
16 N/C
CN101 (Ribbon cable to J101 on Base PCB)
CIM/MM with Security PCB

The position of connectors on the CIM/MM with security PCB, located on the underside of the UIMCRW,
is as shown in the diagram below and their pinouts are given in the following table:
CN22 CN21 CN51 CN52 CN23
CN32
CN11 CN31

CN51 (12V Reg.) 1 Reg.IN (24V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (12V)
CN 52 (5V Reg) 1 Reg.IN (12V)
2 GND
3 Reg.OUT (5V)
CN11 1 +5V
(Connects to CIM Module) 2 MMDT (MM Detect)
3 Reset
4 TXD (Transmit Data)
5 RXD (Receive Data)
6 GND

8 GND
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 +5V
12 +5V
13 GND
14 GND
15 N/C
16 N/C
CN21 (P.EJ Sensor) 1 P.LED1 (Home sensor LED)
2 P.SEN1 (Home Sensor Tr.)
3 GND
4 P.LED2 (End Sensor LED)
5 P.SEN2 (End Sensor Tr.)
6 GND
CN22 (P.EJ. Motor) 1 PPH1
2 PPH2
3 PPH3
4 PPH4
5 +24V
6 +5V
7 PED (Power Eject Detect)
CN23 (Alge V Detect) 1 AVD (Algerian V Detect)
2 GND
CN31 (Throat Sweep Sensor) 1 SW3
2 LED3
3 LED4
4 GND
5 LED1
6 SW1
7 LED2
8 SW2
9 GND
10 SW4

CN32 (Throat Sweep Motor) 1 TPH1

2 TPH2
3 TPH3
4 TPH4
5 +12v
IC Block PCB
The position of connectors on the IC contact block PCB is as shown in the diagram below and their
pinouts are given in the following table:

J1 (19-way ribbon cable to Base PCB connector J302)
J2 (14-way ribbon cable to contact PCB)
J3 1 ICSOL+ (IC Contact SOL)
2 ICSOL- (IC Contact SOL)
Card Clamping PCB

The illustration below shows the connectors of the card clamping PCB.
CN32
CN31
CN101 CN102
The table below lists the pin and signal assignments of the connectors.


CN31(Card Clamper) 1 FS1
2 N/C
3 N/C
4 GND
5 N/C
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C
9 GND
10 HEGDCT (Unit connection detect (loop back))
CN32 (Card Clamper Motor) 1 PH1
2 PH2
3 PH3
4 PH4
5 COM
CN101 (19–way ribbon cable to Base PCB connector 1 N/C
J101)
2 GND
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 N/C
7 + 23 V
8 N/C
9 N/C
10 N/C
11 N/C
12 N/C
13 +23 V
14 N/C
15 GND
16 N/C
17 N/C

18 N/C
19 N/C
CN102 (8–way ribbon to Base PCB connector J102) 1 FSCK (motor pulse)
2 FSAT (motor CW/CCW select)
3 FSEN (motor enable)
4 FS1 (unit SW signal)
5 N/C
6 HEGDCT (unit connection detect (loop back))
7 N/C
8 N/C
CIM/MM Turnaround Plug
A turnaround plug (NCR Part No. 009-0018452) is required to run the CIM/MM diagnostic turnaround
test.
Connection or disconnection of the CIM or MM harness must only be done with the ATM powered off.
The plug has the following components and arrangement:
l Wire-PVC, UL Style 1061 24 AWG (7 x 30AWG), White, 006-5830041

l Connector, 14-way (2x7) Universal Ejection Style Pinless Headers, 006-0088037
l Heat shrink.
Cards
The following cards are used to maintain and adjust the UIMCRW:
l Cleaning card (Sankyo No. EGCMC01881, NCR No. 998-0052929)

l ST-SW Card (throat microswitch SW1 adjustment) (Sankyo EGCMC0119)
l ISO Contact Position Smart Card Test Card (NCR No. 009-0017008)

USB SMART DIP CARD READER
INTRODUCTION
The USB Smart Dip Card Reader is capable of reading cards with ISO magnetic tracks in compliance with
ISO/IEC 7810, 7811, 7813 standards and from smart cards to the ISO/IEC 7816-3 I.C. card standard (Icc:
60mA mac). The card reader is also EMV compliant.
DESCRIPTION
The functions performed by the dip card reader are:
l Detects the insertion of a card (front position microswitch)

l Detects the card when fully inserted into the card reader (rear position microswitch)
l Reads data from track 1, 2 and 3 as the card is inserted into the reader or when the card is
removed from the reader
l Reads data from the smart chip on the card when the card is fully inserted and latched
l Communicates with the PC Core through a USB port.
The card reader is located on the rear of the facia panel of ATMs.
There are no card capture, eject or power failure features fitted to the card reader.The customer
removes the card when the transaction is completed and after the card latch has been released.
Magnetic Stripe Reading

The card is manually inserted into the card reader. During the insertion or removal the magnetic stripe is
read as it moves over the magnetic heads. If selecting either of the diagnostic test options:
l Run to Run Sequence 1 - Insert and remove card
or
l Run to Run sequence 2 - Insert card and leave
then the card must be inserted fully until it is latched.

The card reader is capable of reading cards inserted at speeds between 10 cm/s and 100 cm/s (3.94
in./s and 39.4 in./s).
Note: A read failure will occur if the insertion/removal movement is stopped or jerked during the
insertion/removal action.
Smart Card Reading

The card is manually inserted into the smart dip card reader until the card is latched.
The data is read once the card is latched and power is applied to the smart card.
Security Feature
Provision is made on the Smart DIP PCB for future incorporation of a Security Access Module (SAM) PCB.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error message Possible Root Isolation Procedure Resolution Procedure
Cause
Communications Failure USB cable Inspect USB connections at Insert USB plug.
Inspect_Now removed. hub, PC core and card reader
Card reader Inspect power connections at Switch off the power before
power cable PC core and card reader inserting power connector.
removed
Card reader Check for card reader Reset ATM
firmware hung response
Card reader fault Card reader not appearing Replace card reader
Magnetic Read Head Fault Read head is dirty. Clean the card reader heads.
Clean_Soon
Magnetic Reader Magnetic reader Replace card reader
Mechanism Failure mechanism fault
Replace_Now
Latch Mechanism Failure Magnetic reader Replace card reader
Replace_Soon mechanism fault
Smart Reader Mechanism Smart reader Replace card reader
Failure - Replace_Now mechanism fault

DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
The only level 0 diagnostic self test performed at power up is on the solenoid operation of the lock
lever.
If the solenoid operation is not correct, i.e. jammed or similar, then a RED LED on the card reader blinks
0.25s on, 0.25s off.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following tests are provided:
Test Description
MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 1 The following sequence of tests is executed:
ENTER CARD AND REMOVE (READ_ON_WITHDRAWAL)
READ ISO TRACK 1
READ ISO TRACK 2
READ ISO TRACK 3
RUN TO RUN SEQUENCE 2
FIRMWARE IDENTIFY The USBSDR driver revision and firmware identity numbers are read and displayed
as t-data.
CLEANING CYCLE The following sequence of tests is executed:
ENTER CARD
SMART CARD RELEASE
EJECT CARD
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the smart dip card reader are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
01 ROUTINE (Minor fault)
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering)
04 FATAL (Device inoperative, USB comms error).

TALLIES
The tallies recorded for the smart dip card reader are:
Tally Description
CARDTRAN A card is fully inserted during accept.
NO DATA No data was read from the card during accept.
READ OPS Data verification is attempted.
READ ERR On read fails due to parity, or LRC.
BLANKTRK Card data has no start sentinel.
COMM_ An attempt to send a command to, or get a response from the card reader driver, is made across
OPS the USB interface.
COMM_ A USB comms retry is successful.
RTY
COMM_ A USB comms failure occurs.
ERR
NONSCDET The card present is detected not to be a smart card, during the execution of the command to power
on the smart card.
SCDETECT The card present is detected to be a smart card, during the execution of the command to power on
the smart card.
SCRESETS A smart card reset is carried out, during the execution of the command to power on the smart card
SCRSTERR An error is found in the answer to reset, during the execution of the command to power on the
smart card.
SCCOMATT A communication is attempted between the card reader and the smart card.
SCCOMRTY A communication retry was successfully carried out, during the execution of a smart card related
command.
SCRSPTIM The card reader reports that the smart card has failed to respond within the specified timeout
period.
UDIP INI Attempts to re-initialise the device following a USB disconnect.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
There are no field adjustments.

None.

CABLING
No internal cabling.
USB mini-B connector
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Vcc
2 D-
3 D+
4 N/C
5 Gnd
Power connector
Pin No. Signal Name
1 24V
2 0V
The following test cards are required to perform level 1 diagnostic testing on the smart dip card reader:
l ISO test card - NCR part numbers 009-0009494 (old) and 009-0017008 (new)
l Cleaning Card - NCR part number 998-0052929.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB Smart Dip Card
Reader (Sankyo), refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

USB SMART DIP CARD READER (SANKYO)
INTRODUCTION
Security Access Module (SAM)
LED
The USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) is a Sankyo ICM330-3R1395 Card Reader.
The card reader is capable of reading cards to the following standards:
Magnetic card
l ISO/IEC 7810
l ISO/IEC 7811
l ISO/IEC 7813
IC card
l ISO/IEC 7816/1-3 (Icc: 60mA max)

l EMV ‘96 Ver 3.1.1
l EMV2000 Ver 4.0
Memory card
l GPM896
l SLE4442
l SLE4428
l I2C (24C01~24C256)
The card reader is encryption supported (triple DES and single DES).

DESCRIPTION
Operation
Manual insert and pull out operation. Once inserted a card becomes latched and cannot be removed
until unlatched by the card reader.
Simultaneous read on ISO Tracks 1, 2 and 3.
Power
Power requirement:
Voltage DC 12V ±10%

Ripple <100 mVp-p
Power impedance <1 omega
Current consumption:
Waiting (LED off) <100 mA

Solenoid on <400 mA
Rush (ICC on) <700 mA within 3ms
Interface Connections
1 15
J7
1 3 4
J1 1
CN1
1 2 2 1
LED
There is a single LED located at the front of the card reader.
ERROR MESSAGES
None.

DIAGNOSTICS
For diagnostics, refer to the Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

None.
CABLING
None.
USB connector (J10)
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Vbus
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND (signal)
DC power supply connector (J6)

Pin No. Signal Name I/O Function
1 +12V I +12V dc (main power supply)
2 PGN O Power ground (0V)
None.

For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB Smart Dip Card
Reader (Sankyo), refer to Card Readers in the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

USB CONTACTLESS CARD READER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives servicing information for the USB Contactless Card Reader (USB CCR).
Antenna Unit LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4
Card
‘Landing Zone’
Antenna Overlay
DESCRIPTION
The USB CCR consists of two hardware components:
l An antenna unit (antenna, buzzer, 4 LED indicators and RF shield) housed in a plastic case,
mounted on the card orientation area of the facia (see illustration above).
Note: By default the buzzer is disabled in the software.
l A control unit (power supply, digital and RF circuits) housed in a plastic moulded case mounted
inside the ATM.
The contactless interface is based on the industry standard ISO 14443 13.56MHz RFID protocols, and
supports a wide variety of contactless payment applications such as:
l MasterCard® PayPass™
l Visa Wave
l ExpressPay from American Express®
l MIFARE®
l Discover®
l JCB.
The USB CCR can be updated and upgraded in the field to add new contactless payment applications.

For magnetic data type applications, customers wave or tap their contactless card, key fob or other
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) enabled device on the front of the 'landing zone' indicated by the
symbol shown below:
Both audio and visual acknowledgements can be returned to indicate to the customer that their
transaction is being authorized.
Note: Transactions requiring larger data sizes and/or transactions that require writing to the card may
require the card to be left on the 'landing zone' for longer, with audio and visual indication specific to
the application.
The USB CCR supports 24V operation and has USB 2.0 full-speed communication interfaces.
Antenna Unit Connectors

Control Unit Connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING
USB CCR Cable disconnected from USB CCR Check cable Reconnect cable
disconnected
USB cable disconnected from USB hub Check cable Reconnect cable
Power cable disconnected from USB Check power cable Reconnect power
CCR cable
Power cable disconnected from power Check power cable Reconnect power
supply cable
Power supply fault Check power supply actual Repair power
voltage supply
USB CCR firmwear hung Check for card reader Reset ATM
response
USB CCR faulty Check for USB CCR response Replace USB CCR
USB cable faulty Replace cable and reset Replace cable
Power cable faulty Replace power cable and Replace cable
reset
Not authorized USB CCR requires to be authorized None Authorize USB CCR

DIAGNOSTICS
HW_DIAGNOSTICS Property
The USB CCR provides multiple diagnostic test Applets.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests.
Applet Test Description

ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 Identification The following information is displayed:
1. Device Type: USB
2. Serial Number
3. Firmware Version
2 Detect Card The following sequence of tests is executed
1. Start Transaction
2. Detect Card & Display either one of the following card types:
l ISO 14443-4 Type A
l ISO 14443-4 Type B
l Mifare Type A (Standard)
l Mifare Type A (Ultralight)
l ISO 14443 Type A
l ISO 14443 Type B
3. Stop Transaction
If no card is present within 10 seconds then display “Card Not Tapped” and the test will
terminate.
HW_SELF_TEST Property
The USB CCR offers the following Applets for this property.

ID
1 Device The deivce self test.
Self Test 1. The USBCCR is activated using Start Transaction to detect a card - if this is unsuccessful
then the test is terminated and a ‘Fail’ Status returned.
2. The USBCCR is activated using Start Transaction to detect a card - if this is unsuccessful

HW_MAINTENANCE PROPERTY
The USB CCR supports two Applets for this property.
Applet ID Test Description

1 Identification The following information is displayed:
1. Device Type: USB
2. Serial Number
3. Firmware Version
HW_CONFIGURATION PROPERTY
This feature supports device specific configuration and therefore provides a configuration dialogue.

ID
1 Report Device Type This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for what type of device is
present.
l Device Type: USB
2 Report This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for the Device Serial
Serial Number Number.
l Device Serial Number
3 Report Firmware This Applet allows the operator to interrogate the device for information relating
Versions to the device firmware.
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
4 Set Device This Applet allows the operator to adjustconfiguration parameters.
Configuration
Note: If the Applet terminates due to a device fault then “Device Failure” will be displayed.
STRAPPING
LEDs and MEEIs
The 4 LEDs on the antenna unit are dual purpose and act either as MEEIs or as transaction progress
indicators. An MEEI input on the control unit allows connection to the Universal Misc I/F board to
synchronize flashing with other MEEIs on the ATM.
Software on the control unit decides whether the LEDs are controlled by transaction or by external
MEEI input. If a transaction is taking place, the external MEEI input is ignored and the LEDs indicate
transaction progress as specified by the standards of the card system being used.

Control Board
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts within the device.
CABLING
Harnesses
USB Contactless Card Reader LED Control
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 Pin Number
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 Wire Number
USB Contactless Card Reader RF

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS/PINOUTS
+24V Power
Molex 2-way MiniFit Jnr. Pin2 MFBL.
Pin No. Signal Comment

1 +24V Vcc
2 0V 0V mates 1st
USB
USB 2.0 specification Mini-B receptacle with through-hole mounting tabs.

1 Vbus 5V
2 D- Data
3 D+ Data
4 ID N.C. (used for USB OTG)
5 Ground 0V
AUX
Connector providing additional control signals. Molex 87833-1420.

1 +24V N.C. (Alternative +24V input)
2 0V N.C. (Alternative 0V)
3 +24V N.C. (Alternative +24V input)
5 N.C.
6 /MEEI_in (See Note2)
7 B DATA+in N.C. (See Note 1)
8 B DATA-in N.C. (See Note 1)
11 TX0_232 N.C.
12 RX0_232 N.C.

13 /ISP-INPUT N.C.
14 Vbus N.C. (Alternative Vbus connection)
Note: Alternative USB D+ connection only with population option - not USB compliant.
Note: Input pin for MEEI. This pin is designed to be driven by a Universal Misc I/F MEEI output. It must be
pulled to 0V to illuminate the four MEEI LEDs. Otherwise, this pin must be allowed to float. The pin
contains an internal 10 k ohms pull-up to +24V to drive the MEEI detect circuit on the Universal Misc I/F.
R.F. Out
Molex micro fit connector providing R.F. to the antenna unit.
Note: Maximum cable length is 1.00 m (3.3 ft.).
Pin No. Signal

1 R.F.
2 Ground
LED/Buzzer
Connection between control unit and antenna unit. 8-Way Molex milli-grid.

1 +5V Supply from control unit
2 LED4 Logic 0 = LED on; Logic 1 = LED off
3 Buzzer Buzzer output from control unit
5 0V Supply from control unit
7 MOD_INDEX
None.

CARD RECYCLER MODULE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Card Recycler Module (CRM).
DESCRIPTION
Motorised Card Reader
Card Recycler Module
The CRM is attached to the rear of the standard motorised card reader and has the ability to capture
customer cards, via the motorised card reader, in an open tray which has a ten card capacity. The CRM
also has the ability to store cards presented by the customer in one of five bi-directional slots. The bi-
directional slots enable cards to be returned to customer via the motorised card reader.
Specifications
Capacity
Slot Area Supports 5 card slots, card-capture and return
Capture Tray CF66-CR1A06A 10 cards
Electrical
Supply Voltage 24V DC ±20%
Power Consumption Idle Mode 2.0W, Load 7.0W
Environment
Acoustics <60db
Operating temperature -10°C to 50°C, (-14°F to 122°F)
Storage temperature -20°C to 70°C, (-4°F to 158°F)
Operating Humidity 90% RH or less, non-condensing

Storage Humidity 10% to 90% RH

Other
USB USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Dimensions 125(L) x 102 (W) x 97(H)mm, 4.9(L) x 4.0(W) x 3.8(H)in
LED Status Indicator
Power Health Indicator
Capture Tray-Area Indicator

(OFF - no card in tray)
(ON - card in tray)
Slot Status Indicator
(OFF - no card in slot)
(ON - card in slot
TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS

None.
MAINTENANCE AND CONFIGURATION

None.
STRAPPING AND ADJUSTMENTS

None.

CAPTURED CARD REMOVAL

1. Locate the ATM Power Switch and turn to the OFF position ‘0’.
2. Disconnect the DC and USB cables from the rear of the module.
3. Remove and retain the four screws securing the CRM to the mounting plate.

4. Remove the CRM from the ATM and place on a clean flat surface.
5. Inspect the card carriage for any captured cards in the slots or the capture tray. Cards found in
the capture tray area can be removed through the access aperture in the top of the module.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to the card slots if the next two steps are not performed.

6. To permit the manual raising and lowering of the card slots, the card D-Wheel needs to be
checked that it is in the clear position. Look through the inspection hole in the frame to observe
the grub screw. If the screw is in the position shown (facing outwards) then the D-Wheel is in the
correct position.
7. If necessary, adjust the position of the grub screw using a 7mm nut runner to turn the shaft
clockwise.
Note: It is possible that a captured card is partially ejected at this point. It is therefore essential
that the card is extracted out the front of the module before moving the carriage up or down.
8. The default position of the module card tray might not have any cards captured. You may have to
adjust the card slot vertical position to align the captured card with the exit aperture in the front
of the module. To do so, turn the shaft shown using a 7mm nut runner; Clockwise to raise the
slot and counter-clockwise to lower the slot.

9. Push the card forward by hand from the rear of the module.
10. Pull the card to remove from the exit slot at the front of the module.
11. Repeat steps 8-10 for each captured card.

12. Reset the card slot to the lowest position. (Reference step 8 to adjust).
Lowest card slot
13. Refit the CRM to the ATM and reconnect the USB and DC cables.
CABLING
CRM Power Harness
P3
3 2 1
2 (Black) 1
P1 (White) P2
1 2
None.
None.

8. KEYBOARDS AND ENCRYPTORS
UEPP II 288
Revision 295
China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 296
Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) 305

UEPP II
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Encrypting PIN Pad II (U-EPP II) used in the 66xx range of terminals.
Heater Assembly
24V Power
USB Connector
The U-EPP II gives protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the keys
used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
DESCRIPTION
The U-EPP II device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an NCR PC Core and
consists of the following hardware elements.
l 16 key keyboard
l Integrated USB mainboard encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.
Note: The U-EPP II hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY keyboard.
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U-EPP II mainboard is required to store
the factory configuration information.

The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter and delete. When
hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a regular hexadecimal key pad, providing
one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key.
USB Mainboard
The U-EPP II solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot be removed
from the keyboard.
Any attempt to disassemble the U-EPP II will result in loss of all data within the security module.
Removal Switches
The U-EPP II incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the U-EPP II from the parent
ATM. The U-EPP II device monitors this switch, thus any security actions can be directly invoked by the
U-EPP II. The ATM is notified via a device status change.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and acts as a USB
Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to a
maximum of 5m.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution
Keys at end of Number of key presses detected n/a Replace U-EPP II module
life reaching end of rated life
Comms failure USB cable disconnected from U-EPP II Check USB cable Re-connect USB cable
USB cable disconnected from USB hub Check USB cable Re-connect USB cable
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and re- Connect USB cable
test
Firmware Missing, incorrect or corrupt firmware Contact software supplier Re-load firmware files
validation failed files on hard disk
Firmware Error updating firmware due to n/a Replace U-EPP II module
update failed hardware failure
Tampered U-EPP II device has detected a tamper n/a Replace U-EPP II module
condition and deleted all keys
Requires Device cleared due to firmware n/a Customer key loading
initialisation update procedure

DIAGNOSTICS
If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following level 1 diagnostic tests are
available:
l Key Detect Test

l Communications Echo Test
l PC Keyboard Test.
Looping is not allowed on the following tests:
l Key Detect Test

l Delete All User Keys
l PC Keyboard Test.
All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction. Tests will time out
in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the U-EPP II.
Level 1 Diagnostics
The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the U-EPP II.
Key Detect Test

A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs
from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This test will
terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test runs until all keys have been pressed or the test times out. The test will not complete if no key
presses have been detected. If the position codes have the correct values then this test passes,
otherwise it results in a fail.
This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service indicates that FDKs
are present.
Communications Echo Test

This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are first sent to the U-EPP II. The test then
verifies whether the U-EPP II responds with the same data bytes. If there is no response from the device
or the bytes are not correctly verified this test will return a fail.

Identify Command Test

Returns the identity of the U-EPP II module and displays:
l Name and model

l Part number and key tip configuration
l U-EPP II serial number
l Manufacturer serial number
l U-EPP II firmware identifier and version
l Hardware version
l Security number.
This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device.
Otherwise the test always results in a pass.
Report Status Test

This test displays the current status of the U-EPP II including:
l whether the U-EPP II is Good, has been Tampered or has been removed from the fascia and
requires re-activation
l reporting the current security mode only ‘Secure’ option displayed.
If the status of the U-EPP II is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a fail.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.
The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is detected the
Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the character (depending on the font
used for the display). The test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous
key press.
This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have been
detected then the test returns a fail.
Level 3 Diagnostics
S_DATA
S_DATA Meaning
00 Good (no error)
01 Routine (minor fault)
04 Fatal (requires immediate attention)

Tallies
Tally Description Tally ID Tally Mnemonic
PIN pad top key presses 0 KEYPRESS
Comms operations 1 COMM OPS
Comms retries 2 COMM RTY
Comms failures 3 REATTACH
Keys stuck 4 KEYSTUCK
Self Tests
The following tests are performed for the self test (see Level 1 Diagnostics for details of the individual
tests):
l Communications echo test

l Report status test.
l Key detect test
CONFIGURATION
The U-EPP II supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings are remotely
viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.
Configuration Options
The following options are available for configuration of the U-EPP II:
Transfer Firmware Files

A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD rom containing U-EPP II firmware files will be required for this
operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or Cd rom is inserted it is checked for U-EPP II
firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.
Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.
A shutdown and re-boot is required for the changes to take affect.
Display Version Number

Displays the following information:
l U-EPP II serial number

l MSN and the U-EPP II firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)
l Security Configuration data
l Top-level part number.

Select Country Version

Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt for transfer of
any required firmware files.
A shutdown and re-boot is required for the changes to take affect.
Delete All User Keys

This option will delete all user keys. This option should typically be used if the U-EPP II is being removed
from service. This option is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre-configuration parameter is
enabled.
A confirmation message box will be displayed indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if
the OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds the operation will be
cancelled.
Note: If this option is completed the U-EPP II will not function again until customer encryption keys are
reloaded.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The U-EPP II module is not a re-workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore any failure will
require a complete replacement module.
Assembly Replacement
When unpacking a spare U-EPP II assembly check for any signs of tampering. If tampering is suspected
then do not install the assembly.
If the assembly is tamper free:
1. Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the NCR work order system.
2. Locate the new serial number label.
3. Install the assembly exactly according to the kit instruction.
Note: Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation
instructions.
4. failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect functioning of the U-EPP II
5. Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.

Defective Assembly Disposal

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for them to dispose of as per their
disposal procedures.
CABLING
No internal cabling.
None.
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

None.

REVISION


CHINA ENCRYPTING PIN PAD (USBCPIN)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB China Encrypting PIN Pad (USBCPIN) used in the terminals. The China-EPP
hereinafter will be referred as USBCPIN.
The USBCPIN gives protection to the card holder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the keys
used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
Note: When a new USBCPIN is installed then CE must authorize the USBCPIN for installation. See
Authorise EPP for Installation.
If the CE wants to remove the USBCPIN then the CE must authorize the USBCPIN for removal. See
Authorise for EPP Removal.
DESCRIPTION
The USBCPIN device operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an NCR PC Core and
consists of the following hardware elements.
l 16 key keyboard
l Integrated USB main board encompassing Secure Cryptographic functions.
There are four possible configurations for the USBCPIN.
l W/O heater, Hong Kong Layout

l With heater, Hong Kong Layout
l W/O heater, Taiwan Layout
l With heater, Taiwan Layout
Note: The USBCPIN hardware does not support FDKs, or a PS/2 or USB QWERTY keyboard.
Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the USBCPIN main board is required to
store the factory configuration information.

The keyboard will typically have digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter and delete. When
hexadecimal data entry is required the PIN pad will operate as a regular hexadecimal key pad, providing
one of 0 to 9 and A to F on any one key. Keys are made of stainless steel with etch engraving and
coloured graphics, front plate is Zinc alloy die casting frame. All texts on the keypad is black, function
keys with coloured graphics
The two different keyboard layouts available are shown below.
HONGKONG LAYOUT TAIWAN LAYOUT
USB Main board

The USBCPIN solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot be removed
from the keyboard.Any attempt to disassemble the USBCPIN will result in loss of all data within the
security module.
Removal Switches
The USBCPIN incorporates removal switches, which detect the removal of the USBCPIN from the parent
ATM. The USBCPIN device monitors this switch, thus any security actions can be directly invoked by the
USBCPIN. The ATM is notified via a device status change.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the main board. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and acts as a USB
Full Speed device. The device uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to a
maximum of 5m.
Power Requirements
l Power supply: DC +5V ±10%, max 200mA
l DC +24V 1A for Heating; Environment temperature <0 deg C, start the highest temperature not to
exceed 50 deg C in the EPP surface (Optional).

Mechanical Characteristics
l Key lifespan: > 2,000,000 times
l Key bodies are zinc alloy and Keycaps are stainless steel, 12 keys 22 x 17mm with R8.5 corners and
4 keys 31 x 17mm with R8.5 corners, with a raised dot on the "5" key, embossing X/0/I and raised
braille on function keys for aiding visually handicapped users
l Key activation force: 2- 3N
l Key trip: >/=0.45mm
l Shell and key body material: zinc alloy
l Static load capacity <1000N
l Keycaps material: stainless steel
l Water-proof device: a watertight gasket, silica material
ERROR MESSAGES
Keys at end Number of key presses detected reaching end of n/a Replace USBCPIN
of life rated life module
Comms USB cable disconnected from USBPIN Check USB cable Re-connect USB
failure cable
USB cable disconnected from USB hub Check USB cable Re-connect USB
cable
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Connect USB cable
re-test
Tampered USBCPIN device has detected a tamper condition and n/a Replace USBCPIN
deleted all keys module
Keys at end Number of key presses detected reaching end of n/a Replace FDK Fascia
of life rated life
DIAGNOSTICS
If an alpha keyboard service only is present on the system then the following device diagnostic tests are
available:
l USBCPIN
l Key Detect Test
l PC Keyboard Test
l Key Detect Test

l PC Keyboard Test

All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction. Tests will time out
in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics for the USBCPIN.
Device Diagnostics
The following level 1 diagnostic tests are available for the USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
This displays a menu of the all the other tests to allow an operator to select one.
Key Detect Test

A message is displayed asking the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs
from top to bottom then the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code will be displayed (in hexadecimal). This test will
terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
otherwise it results in a fail.
This test can only be conducted if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service indicates that FDKs
are present.

This tests the physical and link level layers. Bytes of data are sent to the USBPIN feature which forwards
the message to the coredriver. The coredriver performs an Identify command test in order to verify that
the device is able to communicate. In that case, the coredriver simulates the echo test response which is
forwarded by the manager. Thus it can be verified that the USBCPIN is available for communication.
Additionally this test ensures that response data is twisted and therefore misinterpreted. If there is no
response from the device or the bytes do not match what are expected this test will return a fail.

This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module and displays:
l M-Status
l M-Data
l EPP Type
l Loader Version
l Manufacturer Serial Number
l USBCPIN serial number
l Application Version
l Driver Version
l Tracer Number

l Part Number
l Name\Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
This test will fail when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device.
Otherwise the test always results in a pass.
Delete all User Keys

This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure. When this test is
invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No option will return the user to the
diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message box indicating that all the keys will be deleted
irreversibly if the message box OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds
the operation will be cancelled and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.
This option should typically be used if the USBPIN is being removed from service. If this option is
selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer encryption keys are reloaded.
This test is only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre-configuration parameter is enabled and always
results in a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered not complete.
Report Status Test

This test displays the current status of the USBCPIN including:
l whether the USBCPIN is good, has been tampered or has been removed from the fascia and
requires re-activation
l reporting the current security mode either ‘Secure’ or ‘Maintenance’ option displayed
If the status of the USBCPIN is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a fail.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected.
The test will prompt for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is detected the
Unicode code point will be displayed in hexadecimal, along with the character (depending on the font
used for the display). The test will terminate if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous
key press.
This test will return a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have been
detected then the test returns a fail.
PCI Audit Information Test

This test displays the PCI Audit Information as follow:
l Name\Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
l Serial Number

Authorize EPP for Removal

This test prepares the EPP Device for a secure physical disassembly from an ATM. Key commands are
locked until the device is authorized for installation again. Following authorisation removal of the
USBCPIN will not result in tamper detection. On the other hand, it is allowed to securely remove the
device from the ATM without fearing to activate tampering detection.
Authorize EPP for installation

In order to transport an USBCPIN device, key commands have to be locked (see authorized for removal).
After assembling the device on an ATM, key commands can be reactivated by executing this test.
Device Self Test

The following device self tests are available for the USBCPIN.
USBCPIN
USBCPIN Self Test

The following tests (from the diagnostics tests) are performed for the self test:
1. A communications echo test command is sent to the ENCRYPTOR service. If this is unsuccessful
then the test is terminated and the test fails.
2. The report status test is used to identify whether there is a reason for the device to not be fully
operational. If this test fails then the test is terminated.
3. The key detect test is executed to ensure that the keyboard part of the pinpad is operational, as
the pinpad is used in the following test. The test is terminated if this test fails.
4. The encryptor test is used to simulate a transaction, testing both the encryptor and the overall
operation of the device.
Tallies
CONFIGURATION
The USBCPIN supports configuration via the system application. Configuration Settings are remotely
viewable by default. However, they cannot be modified.

The following options are available for the configuration of USBCPIN.
USBCPIN

This test ascertains the identity of the USBCPIN module displaying:
l EPP Type
l Loader Version
l Manufacturer Serial Number
l Serial Number
l Application Version
l NAME\Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
l Part Number.
Delete all User Keys

This test deletes all user keys irreversibly, but does not affect the keyspace structure. When this test is
invoked a menu will be displayed offering Yes or No options. The No option will return the user to the
diagnostic menu. The Yes option will display a message box indicating that all the keys will be deleted
irreversibly if the message box OK button is pressed. If the OK button is not pressed within 10 seconds
the operation will be cancelled and the user returned to the Yes/No menu.
This option should typically be used if the USBCPIN is being removed from service. If this option is
selected, the USBCPIN will not function again until customer encryption keys are reloaded. This test is
only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre-configuration parameter is enabled.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The USBCPIN module is not a re-workable item and has no serviceable parts therefore any failure will
require a complete replacement module.

When unpacking a spare USBCPIN assembly check for any signs of tampering. If tampering is suspected
then do not install the assembly.
If the assembly is tamper free:
1. Check and record the serial number of the new assembly in the NCR work order system.
2. Locate the new serial number label.
CAUTION
Ensure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation
instructions.
Failure to follow the installation instructions may result in incorrect functioning of the
USBCPIN module.
4. Fit the new serial number label to the ATM next to the tracer plate.

CABLING
None.
Shown below are the connection points of the USBCPIN module.

Heater
USB mini B
USB mini B
Pin Signal
1 -5V
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
5 SHIELD
Heater
Pin Signal
1 24V
2 0V
None.
None.

UNIVERSAL ENCRYPTING PIN PAD (III)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Encrypting Pin Pad III (U-EPP III).
The U-EPP III provides protection to the cardholder’s Personal Identification Number (PIN) and of the
keys used to verify and encrypt these PINs.
Heater Assembly
Labels
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The U–EPP III operates as a USB 2.0 compliant full speed device attached to an NCR PC Core, uses PCI 3.x
firmware features, and consists of the following elements:
l 16 key keyboard
l Integrated USB mainboard that provides secure cryptographic functions
l Heaters (optional)

Keyboard
The keyboard layout is configured during manufacturing and the U–EPP III mainboard is required to
store the factory configuration information.
The keyboard has digits 0 to 9 and function keys for clear, cancel, enter, and delete. When hexadecimal
entry is required the PIN pad operates as a regular hexadecimal key pad, providing one of 0 to 9 or A to
F on any one key.
USB Mainboard
The U–EPP III solution is implemented on a secure System on Chip (SoC). The board cannot be removed
from the keyboard.
Any attempt to disassemble the U–EPP results in loss of all data within the security module.
Removal Switches
The removal switches are used to detect removal of the U–EPP III from the parent terminal.
The removal switches are normally closed when the EPP is fitted in the terminal. The removal of the EPP
from the terminal changes the state of the removal switches from closed to open and automatically
deletes the user encryption keys loaded in the EPP.
When the removal switches are in open state, PIN encryption operations are rejected and PIN Entry
mode is disabled.
Note: When the EPP has no power and is removed from the terminal, the user encryption keys will be
deleted on the next power–up.
A “Reset Removal Switches” command through the system application forces the removal switches to
change state from open to closed state. A transition of the removal switches from open to closed state
automatically activates removal switches monitoring.
USB Interface
The USB interface is integrated into the mainboard. It supports USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 and acts as a USB
Full Speed device.
The U–EPP III uses a USB Mini B connector and is capable of driving USB cables up to maximum of 5m.
Power Requirements
Voltage Nominal Current Max Current
EPP Module USB 5V 140 mA 500mA
Heater 24V 1A

TROUBLESHOOTING
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections “Module Replacement”
and “Adjustments” for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de-code specific M_Status and M_Data
use the Status Code Translator Tool available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6273).

Keys at end of life Number of key presses detected reaching end n/a Replace U–EPP III
of rated life module
Comms failure USB cable disconnected from U–EPP III Check USB cable Reconnect USB cable
USB cable disconnected from hub Check USB cable. Reconnect USB cable
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable Connect USB cable
and re–test
Firmware Missing, incorrect or corrupt firmware files on Contact software Re–load firmware
validation failed hard disk supplier files
Firmware update Error updating firmware due to hardware n/a Replace U–EPP III
failed failure module
Tampered U–EPP III device has detected a tamper n/a Replace U–EPP III
condition and deleted all keys module
Requires Device cleared due to firmware update n/a Customer key loading
initialisation procedure
DIAGNOSTICS
section. To de-code M_status and M_data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6273).
Level 0 diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostic tests for the U–EPP III.
Device Diagnostics
The U–EPP III provides the following Device Diagnostic Tests:
l Key Detect Test

l Identify Command Test
l Report Status
l Reset Removal Switches
l PCI Audit Information


l PC Keyboard Test
If only an alpha keyboard service is present in the system, then only the following tests are available:
l Key detect test

l PC keyboard test
l Key detect test

l Delete all user keys
l PC keyboard test
All tests are available from the rear panel, even those which require front interaction.
Tests will time out in absence of front keyboard interaction.
Key Detect Test

Asks the user to press each of the 16 numeric keys in turn, the four left FDKs from top to bottom then
the four right FDKs from top to bottom.
After each key press is detected the matrix code displays in hexadecimal format. This test terminates if
no key press is detected within 7 seconds from the previous key press.
otherwise the test fails.
This test can only be performed if the variant of the installed alpha keyboard service indicates that FDKs
are present.

Tests the physical and link level layers of the EPP. Bytes of data are first sent to the EPP. The test then
verifies whether the U–EPP III responds with the same data bytes.
If there is no response from the device or the bytes are not correctly verified, this test returns a fail.

Displays the following identification information of the U–EPP III module:
l Name and model

l Part number and key tip configuration
l U–EPP III serial number
l Manufacturer serial number
l U–EPP III firmware identifier version
l Hardware version
l Security version

This test fails when there is no valid serial number or there is no response from the device. Otherwise,
this test always results in a pass.
Report Status
Displays the current status of the U–EPP III. This includes whether the U–EPP III is Good has been
Tampered, or has been removed form the facia and requires re–activation
If the U–EPP III is not tampered, this test attempts to report whether there are keys currently loaded
into the encryptor.
If the status for the U–EPP III is good then this test returns a pass, any other status returns a fail.
Reset Removal Switches

Forces a reset of the Removal Switches in the U–EPP III.
A confirmation window displays indicating that the removal switches have been successfully closed.
Once the switches are closed, the EPP now monitors the state of the removal switches. A transition of
the switches from closed to open state deletes the user encryption keys and blocks cryptographic
commands.
PCI Audit Information

Displays the following PCI Audit information:
l Name/Model Number
l Hardware Version
l Firmware Version
l Loader Version
l Serial Number

Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U–EPP III is being removed from service. This option is
only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is enabled.
A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the OK
button is selected.
If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.
If this operation is completed the U–EPP III will not function again until customer encryption keys are
reloaded.
This test always returns a pass, except where a timeout occurs when it is considered not complete.
PC Keyboard Test
Tests whether a PC keyboard key press can be detected or not.

This test prompts for a key on the PC keyboard to be pressed. When a key press is detected the Unicode
code point is displayed in hexadecimal format, along with the character (depending on the font used for
the display.)
The test terminates if no key press is detected within 7 seconds of the previous key press.
This test returns a pass if at least one key press has been detected. If no key presses have been detected
then test returns a fail.
Device Self Test

The USB EPP III Self Test performs the following Device Diagnostic tests:

l Report status test
l Key detect test
Refer to the “Device Diagnostic” section for details of the tests.
Tallies
The table below lists the tallies that the U–EPP provides.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
The U–EPP III supports configuration through the system application. Configuration settings are remotely
viewable by default, however they cannot be modified.
The U–EPP provides the following configuration options:
l Transfer Firmware Files

l Display Version Number

l Select Country Version

Transfer Firmware Files

A memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom containing U–EPP III firmware files is required for this
operation. After the memory stick/pen, flex disk or CD–Rom is inserted it is checked for U–EPP III
firmware. Files found are then verified before being copied.
Once files are successfully copied, country version configuration may be required.
A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.

Displays the following information:
l U–EPP III serial number

l MSN and the U–EPP III firmware version (repeated if multiple modules are present)
l Security Configuration data
l Top–level part number
Select Country Version

Allows configuration of the country specific firmware versions. The system will prompt for transfer of
any required firmware files.
A system shutdown and re–boot is required for the changes to take effect.

Deletes all user keys. This option is used if the U–EPP III is being removed from service. This option is
only displayed if the Delete All User Keys pre–configuration parameter is enabled.
A confirmation message box displays indicating that all the keys will be deleted irreversibly if the OK
button is selected.
If the OK button is not selected within 10 seconds, the operation will be cancelled.
If this operation is completed the U–EPP III will not function again until customer encryption keys are
reloaded.
This test always returns a pass, except where a time–out occurs when it is considered not complete.

The U–EPP III module is not a re–workable item and has no serviceable parts, any failure requires a
complete module replacement.

Damaged Assembly Disposal

Disassemble the faulty device removed from the terminal to activate the tamper sensors and ensure
permanent erasure of all sensitive information contained within the device.
When unpacking a spare U–EPP III assembly, check for any signs of tampering. If tampering is suspected
then do not install the assembly. Report the event to NCR, follow the escalation procedure documented
in process SSPD.2.5.1_PRO1_WCS_GLOBAL.
If the assembly is tamper free, perform the following steps:
1. Check and record the following information:
l Serial number of the new device
l Serial number of the faulty device
l Confirmation and erasure of sensitive data from faulty device
l Customer Engineer ID
2. Provide the recorded information to the key custodian.
CAUTION
Make sure that the terminal is powered off during the EPP installation until such time
the EPP is fully fitted to the terminal.
Make sure that all grounding and safety precautions are followed as per installation
instructions.
Failure to follow the installation instruction may result in incorrect functioning of the U–
EPP III.
4. Fit the new serial number label to the terminal next to the tracer plate.
Key Loading
Before loading user encryption keys, make sure that the key custodian verifies the following:

l That the Customer Engineer ID is valid by checking against a list previously provided by the
customer service organisation.
l That the service call work order was scheduled and expected.
l That the EPP serial number of the device matches the serial number provided by NCR.
If the key custodian cannot verify the CE ID, work order, or serial number, then the customer keys must
not be loaded and escalation procedure shall be implemented as per the customer security policy.
After the user encryption keys are loaded, issue a Reset Removal Switches command through System
Application to ensure that the removal switches are closed and PCI 3.x compliant firmware features are
active.
CABLING
None.
The illustration below shows the connector assignments for the U–EPP III.
USB Mini B Heater Connector

Molex 2-Way Mini-fit Junior
None.
None.

9. DISPLAYS
Backlight Displays 315
15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch 329
19 inch Wide Viewing Angle Display 349
19 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen 353

BACKLIGHT DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 7.0 inch and 10.4 inch colour backlight displays.
These TFT-LCD panels are self-contained replaceable units.
DESCRIPTION
l Signal Interface: LVDS
l Power consumption (Typical): 7 inch - 3.7W, 10 inch - 4.7W
l Display Colours: 262K/16.2M (6-bit / 6-bit + FRC)
l Input Voltage VDD (Typical): 3.3V
l Operating Temperature: -30° to 85° C
l Storage Temperature: -30° to 85° C
Interface Connections
CAUTION
Disconnect the power supply before inserting or removing the LVDS connector.
CAUTION
When inserting or removing the LVDS Connector, do not rotate or tilt the connector.
7.0 inch Display
1 LVDS Connector
20
4
1
Backlight Connector

10.4 inch Display
LED Driver
Light Bar Connector
3
Connector
1
1 5
20
1 LVDS Connector
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
For diagnostics, refer to Diagnostics Overview section of this manual.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in the displays.
CABLING
There is no field replaceable internal cabling.

7.0 Inch Display
LVDS Connector
1 VDD 11 RxIN3-
2 VDD 12 RxIN3+
3 UD 13 GND
4 LR 14 RxCLKIN-
5 RxIN1- 15 RxCLKIN+
6 RxIN1+ 16 GND
7 GND 17 SEL68
8 RxIN2- 18 NC
9 RxIN2+ 19 RxIN4-
10 GND 20 RxIN4+
Backlight Connector
Pin Signal
1 GND
2 ON/OFF (3.3V on, GND off)
3 Dimming (Analog 0-5V)
4 VDD (12V Power Input)
10.4 Inch Display

LVDS Connector
1 VDD 11 RxIN2-
2 VDD 12 RxIN2+
3 GND 13 GND
4 DPS 14 RxCLKIN-
5 RxIN0- 15 RxCLKIN+
6 RxIN0+ 16 GND


7 GND 17 RxIN3-
8 RxIN1- 18 RXIN3+
9 RxIN1+ 19 RSV
10 GND 20 SEL68
LED Driver Connector

Pin Signal
1 VCC (12V input)
2 GND
3 ON/OFF (5V on, 0V off)
4 Dimming (PWM)
5 NA
Light Bar Connector

Pin Signal
1 LED anode (red)
2 LED cathode (white)
3 LED cathode (black)
None.
None.

15 INCH DYNAMO DISPLAYS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 15 inch Dynamo Displays (Standard Bright and Sunlight Readable) and Thermal
Management Module (TMM).
DESCRIPTION
15 Inch Dynamo Displays
Dynamo 15 inch Standard Bright and Sunlight Readable displays will display at least 262,144 colours (6 bit
colour) and will automatically scale VGA, SVGA and XGA formats to fill the entire viewable area of the
display.
The key functional elements of displays are listed below.
l Video Controller Board - The video board includes a digital interface for DVI and an analog
interface for VGA. The scaling processor supports VGA, SVGA, XGA, and SXGA resolutions from the
PC Core. It also consists of LVDS and Back Light interfaces for the LCD panel.
l OSD Button Board - This is where the OSD controls can be accessed. The OSD buttons are SWB1
(Menu), SWB2(Select), SWB3(Up) and SWB4(Down).
l FSD Personality Board - The FSD personality board includes thermal management control, 4-port
USB Hub(3 ports for external use and 1port for microcontroller), DC-DC power management
system and also contains flash based C8051F387 microcontroller.
l Dynamo Display Chassis - The chassis supports the Back Light LCD Panel, Video Controller Board,
OSD Button Board and FSD personality Board. On the Sunlight Readable display it also supports the
Internal temperature sensor board.
l DC/AC Inverter Board - Sunlight Readable display only. This device is a DC-AC Inverter unit for four
CCFL lamps. It has brightness function, a sensing function for running out of lamp (alarm output)
and shutdown function.

Thermal Management Module (TMM)

The TMM is used along with Dynamo Displays to allow forced air cooling of the LCD panel when under
thermal load. The TMM firmware functionality is intended to maintain display panel temperature within
the range of 10°C to 40°C. TMM is physically 'module swap' compatible with the existing products that
use Dynamo or GDS displays. Also TMM is specific to Dynamo or GDS displays and not compatible with
each other.
When the panel is heated by the sun, air is pulled through the filter situated at the rear of the cabinet by
the fans mounted internally. The flow of air is directed over the top of the display and then down the
face of the LCD panel across the full width of the viewing area, eventually exhausting from the bottom of
the Display/TMM module when assembled in a Product with an exterior Touchscreen or FDK bezel
assembly. When the panel is cooled by low temperature, the heater ensures the panel is kept within
correct operating conditions.
Temperature values acquired from the heater, internal, & external temperature sensors are used to
trigger the heater ON/OFF for maintaining bezel within the desired temperature limits. If internal
temperature sensor fails, external temperature sensor is used to control the heater and vice versa. If all
the temperature sensors fail, the heater should never switch ON. The temperature sensors are listed
below.
l Front Sensor
l Heater Sensor
l External Sensor (present only on specific products)
Power Requirements
The Dynamo Display receives power from the external +24V DC supply with parameters +24V ±10%
tolerance, and 4.0 A current maximum. It then supplies power for the TMM and the external USB
devices.
Warm-up Time
The Dynamo Displays and TMM units shall warm up and achieve full operating specification within
twenty (20) minutes of power being applied to the unit under normal operating conditions. This time
shall apply even in the event of momentary loss of power.

CONFIGURATION
Dynamo Display
The Dynamo 15 inch display interfaces to the PC Core via two cables: a USB cable for USB upstream, and
a DVI or VGA cable for video communications. The Displays will support the configuration below:
PC Core 15in Dynamo
USB Mini-B USB
VGA Port VGA
DVI Port DVI
+24V
+24V DC Supply
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Dynamo Display
The unit is equipped with controls to allow adjustment of the picture set-up. These controls are located
on the rear of the unit and will allow the following adjustments:
l Contrast
l Phase
l Vertical Image Position
l Horizontal Image Position
l Clock


The Dynamo Displays and Thermal Management Module are "module-swap" units. These modules are
not re-workable and have no serviceable parts, therefore, any failure will require a complete
replacement module.
Thermal Management Module (TMM)

To replace TMM assembly from the Display unit which is already removed from the product.
1. Identify the 6 mounting screws securing the TMM to the Display and remove them as
appropriate.

2. Identify and remove the Internal Sensor cable connector from the Display.
Internal Sensor Cable
3. Remove the nut on the Display mounting bracket and then take out the sensor bracket.
Display Mounting Bracket
Sensor Bracket
4. Lift the TMM assembly and then detach the Fan and Heater conectors from Display assembly.
Heater
Fan
Fan

5. Replace the TMM assembly and put back all the connectors and fasteners.
Display
TMM
Display Mounting
Bracket

Damaged or defective assemblies must be returned to the customer for disposal according to their
Dynamo Display
l USB ports - The 15 inch Dynamo Display has four USB 2.0 ports. The mini USB port is reserved for
the C8051F387 microcontroller and the other three are for external USB ports each with a
capability of supplying up to 500mA.
l VGA Connector - The Video Graphics Array (VGA) connector is a three-row 15-pin DE-15
connector.
l DVI Connector - The Digital Video Interface (DVI) connector for the video board is the DVI-I
(integrated - digital and analog) connector.
l Sensor Connector - Front/Heater Sensor cable or the External Sensor cable can be attached here.
Sensor Connector
Sensor Connector
mini B USB Type A

DVI-I Dual USB
VGA Power Type A USB

l Heater Connector - This connects the heater element from TMM to Display.
l Fan Connectors - This connects the two fans in TMM to the Display.
Heater
Fan
Fan
Mini B USB Port

Pin Name Description
1 VBUS +5V
2 D- Data-
3 D+ Data+
4 ID None
5 GND Signal Ground
Type A USB Single Connector

1 USBPWR +5V
2 USBD- Data-
3 USBD+ Data+
4 USBGND Signal Ground
Type A USB Dual Connector

1 USB1PWR +5V
2 USB1- Data1-
3 USB1+ Data1+
4 USB1GND Signal Ground
5 USB2PWR +5V


6 USB2- Data2-
7 USB2+ Data2+
8 USB2GND Signal Ground
VGA Connector
1 Red Analog signal input
2 Green Analog signal input
3 Blue Analog signal input
4 Reserved NC
5 GND Ground
6 Red return Ground
7 Green return Ground
8 Blue return Ground
9 5v Supply Supply
10 GND Ground
11 Reserved NC
12 DDC DATA VGA DDC DATA
13 HS Horizontal Sync
14 VS Vertical Sync
15 DDC CLK VGA DDC CLOCK
DVI-I Connector
Pin Name Description Pin Name Description
1 CH2- ½ of Channel 2 differential pair 16 LVHPDET Hot Plug Detect
2 CH2+ ½ of Channel 2 differential pair 17 CH0- ½ of Channel 0 differential pair
3 GND TMDS Data 2/R Shield Ground 18 CH0+ ½ of Channel 0 differential pair
4 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 19 GND TMDS Data 0/5 Shield Ground
5 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 20 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link
6 DDC_CLK DVI DDC Clock 21 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link
7 DDC_Data DVI DDC Data 22 GND TMDS Clock Shield Ground
8 VS Vertical Sync / nc 23 CLOCK+ ½ of Clock differential pair
9 CH1- ½ of Channel 1 differential pair 24 CLOCK- ½ of Clock differential pair

Pin Name Description Pin Name Description

10 CH1+ ½ of Channel 1 differential pair 25 Red Red / nc
11 GND TMDS Data 1/3 Shield Ground 26 Green Green / nc
12 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 27 Blue Blue / nc
13 NC Unused 2nd DVI Link 28 HS Horizontal Sync /nc
14 +5V Power for DDC EEPROM 29 GND Ground
15 GND Ground 30 GND Ground
Temperature Sensor 1
1 +V +5V
2 GND Signal Ground
3 SCL1 I2C Clock
4 SDA1 I2C Data
Temperature Sensor 2
1 +V +5V
2 GND Signal Ground
3 SCL1 I2C Clock
4 SDA1 I2C Data
Fan Control 1
1 +24V +24V Power
2 Fan Fan Speed
Fan Control 2
1 +24V +24V Power
2 Fan Fan Speed

Heater
1 +24V +24V Power
2 Out Heater Out
Power Input
1 +24V +24V Supply
2 GND Power Ground
CABLING
None.
Vacuum cleaner for filter cleaning (optional).
None.

15 INCH USB PROJECTED CAPACITIVE TOUCH
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the 15 inch USB Projected Capacitive (USB PCAP) Touch Screen which uses
projected capacitive technology to provide accurate touch detection.
CAUTION
Make sure ESD precautions are observed.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen module is made up of the following components:
l Touch Screen Glass Sensor

l Two–Part controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)
l Flex circuit–10 circuit cable
The illustration below shows the interconnection diagram of the PCAP touch screen.
To USB HUB
CON 4
Flex Ciruit - 10 Circuit Cable CON3
CON2 CON1 Controller Board
Dual Flex
CON2
Glass Sensor
Single Flex
CON1
A/D Board
Glass Sensor
The glass sensor is a chemically toughened glass with electrodes arranged into rows and columns. Each
electrode is routed back to the controller through a trace on the glass.

The sensor uses a dual flex tail cable to connect to the controller board and a single flex tail cable to
connect to the A/D board.
The location of the flex tail connectors and the active area of the touch screen varies across products.
Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)

The USB PCAP touchscreen use a two–part controller for signal processing.
l Controller board
l A/D board
The controller and A/D board are connected to each other through a detachable Flex Circuit–10 Circuit
cable. The controllers use flex tail ZIF connectors to connect the flex tail cables from the touchscreen
and the flex circuit–10 circuit cable.
The controller board uses a 5–pin right angled header for USB connection.
Locations of the Controller board and A/D board vary across products the touch screen is fitted in. The
illustrations below show the locations of the boards in different configurations.
Dual flex cable

Flex circuit-10 circuit cable
Controller board
A/D board
USB touch cable
Single flex cable
Configuration A
Flex circuit-10 circuit cable
Dual flex cable
A/D board
Single flex cable

Controller board
Configuration B

Controller Board
The illustrations below show the front view and rear view of the controller board.
Mounitng hole Double Stick Tape
CON 1 CON 2
1 34 1 34
Mounting
CON 3 holes
1
10
1 5
CON 4
Conductive Pad or
Front View Rear View
Mounting Hole
A/D Board
The illustration below shows the front view and rear view of the A/D board.
Projected Capacitive Technology

The touchscreen controller continually scans and monitors the capacitance of the electrodes in the glass
sensor. When a finger touches the surface of the touchscreen, it pulls a small portion of charge changing
the capacitance of the electrodes. The controllers then determine the coordinates where the change in
capacitance occurred to locate the touched area.
Power Requirements
The sensor and A/D board are powered by the controller board.
The table below lists the power requirements of the PCAP touchscreen.
Input Voltage +5 Vdc (± 5%) from USB VBUS

Input Current 150 mA max. (130 mA typical)

USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver

Windows XP Operating Systems require the Touchbase UPDD driver (Tbupddwu.exe) to be installed to
support the USB PCAP Touch Screen feature. The Touchbase driver is included in the USB Touch Screen
install for third party driver support.
Windows 7 Operating Systems use native drivers.
ERROR MESSAGES
The PCAP touch screen does not send out any error messages. If no PCAP touch screen is detected in
SysApp, check the cable connections.
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics.
Device Diagnostics
To verify correct screen calibration of the touchscreen, follow the steps below.
1. Access the System Application Menu.

2. Select Device Diagnostics.
3. Select USP PCAP Touch Screen.
4. Select Display Touch Coordinates to execute the touchscreen device diagnostic test.

5. Touch the screen anywhere. The test displays the last touched point on the screen as a dot with
the X and Y coordinates.
6. Touch the Cancel area to terminate the test.
Note: If no touch is detected within 30 seconds, the test automatically terminates.
Device Self Test

To perform the device self test of the touch screen, follow the steps below.

2. Select Device Self Test.

3. Select USB PCAP Touch Screen to execute the touch screen self test. The application displays the
test screen below.
4. Touch the screen anywhere. A status message that confirms the touch is displayed.
Note: If a touch is not detected within 5 seconds, the test times out and a message that indicates the
error is displayed.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Touch Screen Configuration
To calibrate the touch screen, perform the steps below.

2. Select Self Service Configuration.
3. Select Set Device Configuration.
4. Select USB PCAP Touch Screen.
5. Select Touch Screen Calibration to execute the calibration application.
Note: The calibration test can be cancelled using the cardholder keyboard.
6. Touch the various defined screen points to complete the calibration. Once the calibration
process is complete, the calibration application displays a test screen with four buttons.

7. Touch the four buttons to test the accuracy of the calibration.

8. The calibration test returns a Pass/Fail condition of 11 (Calibration Immediate.)
Note: The calibration test always returns the Pass/Fail condition whether or not the calibration is
succesful.

The following are the field replaceable units of the USB PCAP Touch Screen:

l Controllers.
Note: The touch screen and controllers have different installation configurations across products.
Touch Screen Glass

Configuration A
The recommended way to remove the touch screen for this configuration is to remove it from the
terminal together with the display and controllers as a single assembly.
1. Disconnect the following cables:

l VGA cable from the display
l USB touch cable from the USB hub.
2. Remove the screws that secure the touch screen to the terminal as shown below.
Touch Screen Top Screws
Touch Screen Bottom Screws
3. From the front of the facia, hold the touch screen on the left and right side and push upwards to
slide the touch screen about 20-40 mm, then lift the touch screen clear from the facia moulding.
4. Place the assembly face down on a clean, flat, and non–abrasive surface.

5. Disconnect the following cables of the defective touch screen glass:

l dual flex cable from the controller board
l single flex cable from the A/D board
6. Remove the screws that secure the controllers and display assembly from the defective touch
screen glass and fit the assembly to the new touch screen.
Screws
Screws
7. Connect the flex cables of the new touch screen to the controllers.
8. Fit the new touch screen to the terminal. Make sure that there is no gap between the touch
screen and lower facia.
9. Secure the touch screen to the terminal with the screws removed earlier.
10. Connect the following cables:
l USB touch cable to the USB hub
l VGA cable to the display
11. Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure that
the touch screen functions properly.
Configuration B
1. Disconnect the following cables:
l USB touch cable from the USB hub
l dual flex cable from the controller board
l single flex cable from the A/D board
2. Remove the screws that secure the facia to the facia brackets as shown below.
Screws Screws

3. On one side, lift the facia off from the bracket and insert the screw driver through the access
hole to remove the pan head screw.
Access
Hole
4. Refit the facia to the bracket and remove the equivalent screw on the other side.
Access
Hole
5. Secure the facia to the facia brackets with the screws removed earlier.
Note: The two pan head screws removed through the holes do not need to be refitted later.

6. Remove the top and bottom screws of the touch screen.
Top Screws
Bottom Screws
7. From the front of the facia, hold the touch screen on the left and right side and push upwards to
slide the touch screen about 20–40 mm, then lift the touch screen clear from the facia
moulding.
8. Fit the new touch screen to the terminal. Make sure that the flex cables are properly inserted
through the slots in the facia frame. Make sure that there is no gap between the touch screen
and lower facia.
9. Secure the touch screen to the terminal with the screws removed earlier.
10. Connect the following cables:
l Dual flex cable to the controller board
l Single flex cable to the A/D board
l USB touch cable to the USB hub
Note: The A/D board may need to be removed from the display to have better access to
connect the flex cables as shown below.
11. Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure that
the touch screen functions properly.
Controllers
Both the controller board and A/D board will be replaced if either one of them is defective.
Configuration A
To replace the controllers, perform the steps below.

1. Take note of the routing of the flex cables from the touch screen to the controllers and the flex
circuit–10 circuit cable that connects the boards to each other.
2. Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:
l USB Touch cable
l Dual flex cable
3. Remove the screw that secures the controller board and its cover as shown below.
Screw
4. Remove the screws that secure the controller board to the cover.
Screws
Screws
5. Fit and secure the new controller board to the cover.

6. Connect the following cables to the controller board:
l dual flex cable
l flex circuit–10 ciruit cable
l USB touch cable
7. Disconnect the following cables from the A/D board:

l single flex cable
l flex circuit–10 circuit cable

8. Remove the screw that secures the A/D board and cover as shown below.
Screw
9. The A/D board is mounted using a double stick tape on the rear of the board as shown below.
Take note of the position and orientation of the board then carefully remove the board from the
cover.
Cover
A/D board
Double
stick tape
10. Attach the new A/D board to the cover.

11. Fit and secure the new board and cover to the terminal.
12. Connect the following cables to the A/D board:
l single flex cable
l flex ciruit–10 circuit cable
13. Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure the
touch screen functions properly.
Configuration B
1. Take note of the routing of the flex cables from the touch screen to the controllers and the flex
circuit–10 circuit cable that connects the boards to each other.
2. Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:
l USB Touch cable
l Dual flex cable

3. Remove the screws that secure the controller board and its cover as shown below.
Screws
4. Remove the screws that secure the controller board to the cover.
Screws
Screws
5. Fit and secure the new controller board to the cover.

6. Connect the following cables to the controller board:
l dual flex cable
l flex circuit–10 ciruit cable
l USB touch cable
7. Disconnect the following cables from the A/D board:

l single flex cable
8. Remove the screw that secures the A/D board and cover as shown below.
Screw

9. Bend the bottom part of the cover to open it and access the A/D board which is mounted using a
double stick tape on its bottom side. Take note of the position and orientation of the board then
carefully remove the board from the cover.
10. Attach the new A/D board to the cover.

11. Connect the following cables to the A/D board while the cover is still open as shown below:
l single flex cable
12. Close the cover, then fit and secure the new board and cover to the terminal.
13. Calibrate the touch screen using the Touch Screen Configuration test in SysApp to make sure the
touch screen functions properly.
CABLING
Flex Circuit - 10 Circuit Cable
The illustration below shows the flat flexible cable used to connect the controller board and A/D board.

Glass Sensor
The tables below lists the pinout assignments of the glass sensor flexi tail connectors.
Single Flex Connector

1 Y1 28 Y28
2 Y2 29 Y29
3 Y3 30 Y30
4 Y4 31 Y31
5 Y5 32 Y32
6 Y6 33 Y33
7 Y7 34 Y34
8 Y8 35 Y35
9 Y9 36 Y36
10 Y10 37 Y37
11 Y11 38 Y38
12 Y12 39 Y39
13 Y13 40 Y40
14 Y14 41 Y41
15 Y15 42 Y42
16 Y16 43 NC
17 Y17 44 NC
18 Y18 45 NC
19 Y19 46 NC
20 Y20 47 NC
21 Y21 48 NC
22 Y22 49 NC
23 Y23 50 NC
24 Y24 51 NC
25 Y25 52 NC
26 Y26 53 NC
27 Y27 54 NC

Dual Flex Connector

CON1 CON2
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal
1 GND 1 NC
2 NC 2 X28
3 NC 3 X27
4 NC 4 X26
5 NC 5 X25
6 X56 6 X24
7 X55 7 X23
8 X54 8 X22
9 X53 9 X21
10 X52 10 X20
11 X51 11 X19
12 X50 12 X18
13 X49 13 X17
14 X48 14 X16
15 X47 15 X15
16 X46 16 X14
17 X45 17 X13
18 X44 18 X12
19 X43 19 X11
20 X42 20 X10
21 X41 21 X9
22 X40 22 X8
23 X39 23 X7
24 X38 24 X6
25 X37 25 X5
26 X36 26 X4
27 X35 27 X3
28 X34 28 X2
29 X33 29 X1
30 X32 30 NC
31 X31 31 NC

CON1 CON2
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal
32 X30 32 NC
33 X29 33 NC
34 NC 34 GND
Controllers
Controller Board
The tables below list the pinout assignments of the controller board connectors.
CON 1

1 GND 18 X32
2 NC 19 X17
3 X1 20 X18
4 X2 21 X19
5 X3 22 X20
6 X4 23 X21
7 X5 24 X22
8 X6 25 X23
9 X7 26 X24
10 X8 27 X25
11 X9 28 X26
12 X10 29 X27
13 X11 30 X28
14 X12 31 X29
15 X13 32 X30
16 X14 33 X31
17 X15 34 NC
CON 2

1 NC 18 X48
2 X32 19 X49
3 X33 20 X50


4 X34 21 X51
5 X35 22 X52
6 X36 23 X53
7 X37 24 X54
8 X38 25 X55
9 X39 26 X56
10 X40 27 X57
11 X41 28 X58
12 X42 29 X59
13 X43 30 X60
14 X44 31 X61
15 X45 32 X62
16 X46 33 X63
17 X47 34 GND
CON 3
Pin Signal
1 VCD
2 NC
3 OE
4 VDD
5 Token
6 AVSS
7 Clock
8 AVSS
9 NC
10 NC
CON 4
Pin Signal
1 VUSB
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
5 Shield

A/D Board
The tables below lists the pinout assignment for the A/D board connectors.
CON 1

1 Y1 28 Y28
2 Y2 29 Y29
3 Y3 30 Y30
4 Y4 31 Y31
5 Y5 32 Y32
6 Y6 33 Y33
7 Y7 34 Y34
8 Y8 35 Y35
9 Y9 36 Y36
10 Y10 37 Y37
11 Y11 38 Y38
12 Y12 39 Y39
13 Y13 40 Y40
14 Y14 41 Y41
15 Y15 42 Y42
16 Y16 43 NC
17 Y17 44 NC
18 Y18 45 NC
19 Y19 46 NC
20 Y20 47 NC
21 Y21 48 NC
22 Y22 49 NC
23 Y23 50 NC
24 Y24 51 NC
25 Y25 52 NC
26 Y26 53 NC
27 Y27 54 NC

CON 2

1 VCD 6 AVSS
2 NC 7 Clock
3 OE 8 AVSS
4 VDD 9 NC
5 Token 10 NC
There are no test and adjustment tools required for this device.
None.

19 INCH WIDE VIEWING ANGLE DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the features and functions of the 19–inch Wide Viewing Angle Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD).
The 19–inch display is capable of displaying high resolution, high colour, computer–generated text,
graphics and video images supplied through a DVI–I connector and accepts both analogue and digital
signals. The display supports 16.2 million colours and can dynamically resize VGA (640 x 480), SVGA (800
x 600), XGA (1024 x 768), and SXGA (1280 x 1024) to fill the entire viewable area.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
Temperature Control
The display chassis is designed with ventilation holes to help regulate the temperature of the display
interior. It does not rely on any active thermal management devices for temperature control.

USB Connectivity
The 19–inch display offers connections to USB mini type B. The USB connector is not directly connected
to the PC core nor via a hub. It is only intended for programming the display with firmware during
production.
Power Requirements
The 19–inch display receives power from the external +24V DC supply with parameters +24V DC ± 10%
tolerance and 3.0A maximum current.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Warm–up
The display needs 20 minutes of power applied under normal operating conditions to warm up and
achieve full operating specification. This time period applies even in the event of momentary loss of
power.
On–Screen Display (OSD)
OSD Controls

The display is equipped with controls to allow adjustment of the picture setup. These controls are
located on the rear of the unit and will allow the following minimum adjustments:
l Contrast
l Phase
l Vertical Image Position
l Horizontal Image Position
l Clock

The display has no Field Replaceable Units and should be swapped with a working display unit in the
event of critical failure.
CABLING
None.
Connector Assignment
Power
DVI
Power Connector


1 +24V +24V Supply
2 GND Power Ground
Digital Video Interface (DVI) Connector
The Digital Video Interface connector for the video board is the DVI–I (integrated digital and analogue)
connector.
Pin Symbol Description Pin Symbol Description

1 CH2- 1/2 of Channel 2 differential pair 16 LVHPDET Hot Plug Detect
2 CH2+ 1/2 of Channel 2 differential pair 17 CH0- 1/2 of Channel 0 differential pair
3 GND TMDS Data 2/R Shield Ground 18 CH0+ 1/2 of Channel 0 differential pair
4 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link 19 GND TMDS Data 0/5 Shield Ground
5 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link 20 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link
6 DDC_CLK DVI DDC Clock 21 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link
7 DDC_Data DVI DDC Data 22 GND TMDS Clock Shield Ground
8 VS Vertical Sync/nc 23 CLOCK+ 1/2 of Clock differential pair
9 CH1- 1/2 of Channel 1 differential pair 24 CLOCK- 1/2 of Clock differential pair
10 CH1+ 1/2 of Channel 1 differential pair 25 (C1) Red Red/nc
11 GND TMDS Data 1/3 Shield Ground 26 (C2) Green Green/nc
12 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link 27 (C3) Blue Blue/nc
13 n/c Unused 2nd DVI Link 28 (C4) HS Horizontal Sync/nc
14 +5V Power for DDC EEPROM 29 (C5A) GND Ground
15 GND Ground 30 (C5B) GND Ground
None.

19 INCH USB PROJECTED CAPACITIVE TOUCH

SCREEN
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Interior and Exterior 19 inch USB Projected Capacitive (USB PCAP) Touch
Screen which uses projected capacitive technology to provide accurate touch detection.
CAUTION
Make sure ESD precautions are observed.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen module is made up of the following components:

l Two–Part controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)
l Flex circuit cable
l 10 circuit cable for Interior
l 12 circuit cable for Exterior
The illustration below shows the interconnection diagram of the PCAP touch screen.
Glass Sensor
Single Flex Dual Flex
CON1 CON2
CON1
A/D Board Controller Board
CON2 CON6
CON 4
Flex Circuit Cable
To USB HUB

Glass Sensor
The glass sensor is a chemically toughened glass with electrodes arranged into rows and columns. Each
electrode is routed back to the controller through a trace on the glass.
The sensor uses a dual flex tail cable to connect to the controller board and a single flex tail cable to
connect to the A/D board.
The location of the flex tail connectors and the active area of the touch screen varies across products.
Two–Part Controller (Controller Board and A/D Board)

The USB PCAP touchscreen uses a two–part controller for signal processing.
l Controller board
l A/D board
The controller and A/D board are connected to each other through a detachable Flex Circuit cable. The
controllers use flex tail ZIF connectors to connect the flex tail cables from the touchscreen and the flex
circuit cable.
The controller board uses a 5–pin right angled header for USB connection.
Locations of the Controller board and A/D board vary across products the touch screen is fitted in. The
illustrations below show the locations of the boards in different configurations.
Controller board
Controller board and A/D board

mounted on a single cover
A/D board
Configuration A
Configuration B

Controller Board
The location of the controller board’s ZIF connector for the Flex Circuit–10 Circuit cable varies across
products. The connector may either be CON 3 or CON6 depending on which connector is present.
The illustrations below show the front view and rear view of the controller board.
Mounitng hole Double Stick Tape
CON 1 CON 2
1 34 1 34
Mounting
CON 6 holes
10
1
1 5
CON 4

Conductive Pad
A/D Board
The illustration below shows the front view and rear view of the A/D board.
CON 1 Double Stick

Tape
CON 2
Projected Capacitive Technology

The touchscreen controller continually scans and monitors the capacitance of the electrodes in the glass
sensor. When a finger touches the surface of the touchscreen, it pulls a small portion of charge changing
the capacitance of the electrodes. The controllers then determine the coordinates where the change in
capacitance occurred to locate the touched area.
Power Requirements
The sensor and A/D board are powered by the controller board.
The table below lists the power requirements of the PCAP touchscreen.

Input Voltage +5 Vdc (± 5%) from USB VBUS

Input Current 150 mA max. (130 mA typical)
USB PCAP Touch Screen Feature Driver

Windows XP Operating Systems require the Touchbase UPDD driver (Tbupddwu.exe) to be installed to
support the USB PCAP Touch Screen feature. The Touchbase driver is included in the USB Touch Screen
install for third party driver support.
Windows 7 Operating Systems use native drivers.
ERROR MESSAGES
The PCAP touch screen does not send out any error messages. If no PCAP touch screen is detected in
SysApp, check the cable connections.
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostics.
Device Diagnostics
To verify correct screen calibration of the touchscreen, follow the steps below.

2. Select Device Diagnostics.
3. Select USP PCAP Touch Screen.
4. Select Display Touch Coordinates to execute the touchscreen device diagnostic test.

5. Touch the screen anywhere. The test displays the last touched point on the screen as a dot with
the X and Y coordinates.
6. Touch the Cancel area to terminate the test.

Note: If no touch is detected within 30 seconds, the test automatically terminates.
Device Self Test

To perform the device self test of the touch screen, follow the steps below.

2. Select Device Self Test.

3. Select USB PCAP Touch Screen to execute the touch screen self test. The application displays the
test screen below.
4. Touch the screen anywhere. A status message that confirms the touch is displayed.
Note: If a touch is not detected within 5 seconds, the test times out and a message that indicates
the error is displayed.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Touch Screen Configuration
To calibrate the touch screen, perform the steps below.

2. Select Self Service Configuration.
4. Select USB PCAP Touch Screen.
5. Select Touch Screen Calibration to execute the calibration application.
Note: The calibration test can be cancelled using the cardholder keyboard.
6. Touch the various defined screen points to complete the calibration. Once the calibration
process is complete, the calibration application displays a test screen with four buttons.
7. Touch the four buttons to test the accuracy of the calibration.

8. The calibration test returns a Pass/Fail condition of 11 (Calibration Immediate.)

Note: The calibration test always returns the Pass/Fail condition whether or not the calibration is
successful.

See the Module Removal chapter in this manual
CABLING
Flex Circuit
The illustration below shows the flat flexible cable used to connect the controller board and A/D board.
Controllers
Controller Board
The tables below list the pinout assignments of the controller board connectors.
CON 3 or CON 6
Pin Signal
1 VCD
2 NC
3 OE
4 VDD
5 Token
6 AVSS
7 Clock
8 AVSS
9 NC
10 NC

CON 4
Pin Signal
1 VUSB
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
5 Shield
A/D Board
The tables below lists the pinout assignment for the A/D board connectors.
CON 2

1 VCD 6 AVSS
2 NC 7 Clock
3 OE 8 AVSS
4 VDD 9 NC
5 Token 10 NC
There are no test and adjustment tools required for this device.
None.

10. CAMERAS
USB Cash Exit Slot Camera 362
Colour Portrait Camera (USB) 367
DView Camera 372

USB CASH EXIT SLOT CAMERA
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the cash exit slot USB camera.
Depending on the product class of the ATM, two PCB profiles of the camera are currently available.
DESCRIPTION
The USB Camera System categorizes the camera based on the mechanical position and purpose. This
single pin hole camera is categorized as Exit Slot. (Looking at the physical interface between the cash
dispenser and the card holder’s hand).
l Compatibility: USB 2.0 and UVC version 1 or later. (mini-B)

l Power requirement (Typical): 5V DC. ±0.25V @ 350mA (USB self powered)
l Supported Resolution: VGA - 640 x 480
l Focal Length: 15cm (5.9in)
l Focal range from 12cm (4.7in) to 25cm (9.8in)
l Operating Temperature: 5 to 50 °C (41 to 122 °F)
l Operating Humidity: 10 to 90 (%RH)
l Storage Temperature: -10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
l Storage Humidity: 10 to 90 (%RH).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Module State Action Possible Isolation Resolution Procedure
Description Description Root Cause Procedure
Camera Not Repair USB cable Check USB connection Reconnect USB cable
Working Communication disconnected Replace the USB
Failure cable
Replace the camera

Single Mini-B USB Connector
Pin Description
1 Vcc (5V)
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID (not used)
5 GND
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
None.
Level 1 Diagnostics
ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 IDENTIFICATION The test will display the following information:
l Module ID
l VID
l PID
l Camera Serial Number
l Camera Category [Personal; Room; Exit slot]
l Camera Class [Pinhole, Portrait, Streaming]
l Image Format[PAL, NTSC]
If module is not associated with any camera, “Not configured” error will be displayed.
2 VIEW CAMERA This applet provides cameras view.
On selection of this applet, It will display the menu with modules index. The sub-menu
will be of the format:
l CAM01
l CAM02
l CAM03
l CAM04
l ALL CAMERA
On Selection, an Image will be displayed. If image capturing has failed from specific
cameras then, an error message will be displayed and test will continue. Press Esc exit
from view.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests.

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
CONFIGURATION
ID
0 MENU This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 IDENTIFICATION The test will display the following information:
l Module ID
l VID
l PID
l Camera Serial Number
l Camera Category [Personal; Room; Exitslot]
l Camera Class [Pinhole, Portrait, Streaming]
l Image Format[PAL, NTSC]
If module is not associated with any camera, “Not configured” error will be displayed.


ID
2 CAMERA This property allows the operator to configure and de-configure the cameras.
ALLOCATION On selection of this applet , It provides a view by which operator can determine the
camera position.
If camera configured, associated module name will be displayed at the bottom centre
of the image.
If camera not configured, “Not configured” text will be displayed at the bottom centre
of the image.
Configuration: It is operator responsibility to configure the camera category and
assigning to one module.
De-configuration: This will be allowed if operator selects the configured camera. De-
configuration releases the camera and module.
Selection: On selection of this applet, view will be displayed. View contains images
from four cameras on one screen. If camera not found, that part will be displayed as
blank. On top of each image, number (1/2/3/4) will be displayed to select camera for
configuration. Press 0 to exit from the view.
3 CAMERA This property allows the operator do the camera setting of configured cameras.
DEVICE If selected camera is Pinhole camera, the menu as below will be with pinhole camera
SETTING setting.
Pinhole camera setting:
l Interlace
l YGain
l CGain
l Rotation
If selected camera is Portrait camera, the menu as below will be with portrait camera
setting.
Portrait camera setting:
l Interlace
l Shutter Speed
l White Balance
l BLC Size Horizontal
l BLC Size Vertical
l BLC Weight
l BLC Position Horizontal
l BLC Vertical
Image will be displayed following device setting to verify settings.
Streaming camera setting:
Current streaming cameras do not support any settings.
Note: Configuration Settings will be modified remotely.
CABLING
None.

None.

COLOUR PORTRAIT CAMERA (USB)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the removal and installation of the Colour Portrait Camera (USB) and Harness.
DESCRIPTION
USB Video Camera
The illustration below shows the USB Video Camera used in the NCR 663x range of ATM’s.
USB Harness Colour Portrait Camera (USB)
TROUBLESHOOTING
PC Video Camera Comms USB cable disconnected from Check USB cable Re-connect USB
Error camera cable
USB cable disconnected from USB Check USB cable Re-connect USB
hub cable
Camera requires RESET Run Self Test Run Self Test
USB cable faulty Replace USB cable and Replace USB cable
retest
Camera faulty Replace camera and Replace camera
retest

DIAGNOSTICS
Level 1 Diagnostics
Note: Looping is not allowed for any of the diagnostic tests and therefore the loop on/off button will not
be presented on the diagnostic screens.
Note: If the camera is not connected when applets 1-3 below are selected then a pop up error message
is displayed.
The following diagnostic functions are provided:

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other applets to allow an operator to select one
1 Capture A prompt is displayed for 3 seconds informing the user that a video camera output is to be
Frame displayed and that the user should press a key to capture the required frame.
The output from the video camera is then displayed in a centred window. This output will be
orientated according to the currently configured selection.
When the user presses a key the current video frame is captured and saved to disk.
2 Display Displays the current captured frame in a centred window
Capture
Frame
3 Preview A prompt is displayed for 3 seconds asking the user to verify the video camera output.
The output from the video camera is the displayed in a centered window for 7 seconds, then
the screen is cleared. This output will be orientated according to the currently configured
selection.
Self Test
Note: If the camera is not connected when applet 1 below are selected then a pop up error message is
displayed.
This feature provides the following Applets:

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other applets to allow an operator to select one
1 Device Self A prompt is displayed for 3 seconds asking the user to verify the video camera output.
Test The output from the video camera is then diplayed in a centered window for 7 seconds,
then the screen is cleared.
This output will be orientated according to the currently configured selection.

CONFIGURATION
Note: The driver is expected to maintain the configuration settings and not the generic feature.
Note: If the camera is not connected when applet 1 below are selected then a pop up error message is
displayed.
Note: The orientation functionality is only available to applications using the TakePicture command. Any
application using the device directly through Video For Windows or other API must perform any
necessary image processing themselves.

ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 Configuration Invokes the driver specification option configuration window for the Video Camera
installed. The exact appearance and function of this window is vendor dependent.
2 Orientation Allows the operator to select the desired orientation of the captured image by choosing
the appropriate rotation from the available options of 0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees of
clockwise rotation.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
None.
None.

CABLING
USB Harness
USB_CAMERA CAMERA_CNIM
1
5
Screw
Screw Camera Housing
Screws
Camera Housing USB Harness

USB Video Camera Replacement

Replace the USB Video Camera as follows:
Note: Retain all removed screws and bracket for use with the replacement USB Video Camera.
1. Loosen the screw attaching camera housing to facia, but do not remove screw.
2. Slide housing from facia.
3. Remove 4 fasteners attaching camera to housing.
Note: Care must be taken when removing harness connector from camera, to avoid damage of
connector and pins.
4. Remove harness connector from camera.

5. Connect harness connector to replacement camera.
6. Attach camera to housing with 4 retained fasteners.
7. Slide housing into position on facia and tighten screw.
USB Video Camera Harness Replacement

Replace the USB Video Camera Harness as follows:
Note: Retain all removed screws and bracket for use with the replacement USB Video Camera.
1. Loosen the screw attaching camera housing to facia, but do not remove screw.
2. Slide housing from facia.
3. Remove 4 fasteners attaching camera to housing.
Note: Care must be taken when removing harness connector from camera, to avoid damage of
connector and pins.
4. Remove harness from camera by pulling connector straight out.

5. Remove harness from ATM.
6. Connect replacement harness to hub and route harness through ATM.
7. Connect harness to camera.
8. Attach camera to housing with 4 retained fasteners.
9. Slide housing into position on facia and tighten screw.

DVIEW CAMERA
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides service information on the DView camera.
The DView camera provides security and surveillance functionality. The DView camera captures images
with 690 HTVL–E resolution through Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) capability in NTSC or PAL standards.
The camera captures images regardless of lighting condition or application, and automatically eliminates
image–compromising visual noise.
The Dual Power Board enables the camera to safely operate at 24 Vac or 12 Vdc input voltage.
CAUTION

DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
Camera
The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the DView camera.
49 mm
(1.93 in.)
42.2 mm
46 mm (1.66 in.)
(1.81 in.) 4.8 mm
(0.18 in.)
22 mm
(0.87 in.)
44 mm
(1.73 in.)
Dual Power Board

The illustrations below display the physical dimensions and measurements of the Dual Power Board.
68 mm
2.67 in.
60 mm
2.36 in.
22 mm
0.87 in.
44 mm
1.73 in.

Camera Specifications
The table below lists the functional and video specifications of the DView camera.
Functional Specifications Image Sensor 1/3 in. WDR Image Sensor

Effective Picture Element 758(H)x540(V) approximately 409K pixels
Scanning Frequency NTSC 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1575 Hz, V: 59.94 Hz
PAL 2:1 Interlace/ H: 1562 Hz, V: 50 Hz
Video Output BNC 75 Ohm unbalanced
Wide Dynamic Range 120 dB/17 bit (102 dB typical)
Wide Dynamic Range Area Fully Adjustable
Slow Shutter YES up to 32x
Electronic Shutter WDR Control (Auto)
Software Day/Night ON, OFF, AUTO
White Balance ATW, AWB, Manual
Auto White Balance Range 2000k ~ 11000k
Sync System Internal/Line Lock
AGC Boost Yes
AES 1/25-1/30, 720
Noise Reduction 3D Motion Adaptive
Privacy Zones Four (4)
Image Flip Yes
Video Specifications Resolution 690 HTVL Effective
Video Standards PAL, NTSC
Minimum Illumination 0.1 lux at F1.2
AGC Up to 50 dB
S/N Ratio Up to 53 dB
Digital PTZ Pan, Tilt, Zoom (1x-8x)
Lens Properties
The table below lists the lens specifications of the DView camera.
Property Measurement
Focal Length 2.5 mm
F–No. F2.0
Iris Range Fixed Range
Angle of View

Property Measurement
Diagonal 122.1°
Horizontal 96.6°
Vertical 71.9°
Lens Focus
CAUTION
The lens focus is pre–set in the factory. Do not adjust the focus factory settings.
The lens focus is set to capture images within an object distance of 300 mm and 1000 mm from the
lens.
White lines on the body and lens are aligned to determine that the focus is correctly set.
Power Requirements
The following table lists the power requirements for the DView camera.
Parameter Value
Power Operating Range 24VAC ±20%
12VDC ±10%
Power Consumption 4.2 W max.

Temperature Requirements
The table below lists the temperature requirements of the DView camera.
Parameter Value
Operating Temperature -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F)
Storage Temperature -30°C to 60°C (-22°F to 140°F)
ERROR MESSAGES
Device disconnected USB cable disconnected from camera Check USB cable Reconnect cable
USB cable disconnected from hub Check USB cable Reconnect cable
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENT
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in the DView camera.

CABLING
Harness – CCTV Colour Camera – Safe
I/O_CAMERA SAFE_CAMERA
I/O_POWER SAFE_POWER
Harness Camera Power Top Box
CAMERA SAFE_POWER
Harness Camera PWR 12V Fascia
I/O_POWER FASCIA_HUB_P3
Harness 24V EXT
FASCIA_HUB_P2 DC_IN
DC_I/O

CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT/PINOUT
Camera
The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the camera.
Camera Lead
Connector
Dual Power Board

The illustration below displays the connector assignments of the dual power board.
Video Output
24 VAC/12 VDC
Camera Lead Connector
None.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the Dview Camera, refer
to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

11. PRINTERS
USB Journal Printer 380

USB JOURNAL PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB journal printer, which uses a line thermal head to perform high quality,
high speed, quiet printing of characters and graphics.
DESCRIPTION
The USB journal printer has the following features:
l Supports maximum paper roll diameter of 83mm (3.2 ins)

l Resolution 203 dpi
l Downloadable firmware
l Remote diagnostics.
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ± 10%) and power consumption is up
to 6.0 A.
Environmental Requirements
Operating the printer at either extreme of its temperature or humidity ranges may degrade the print
quality and may cause the firmware to disable printing. However, the printer itself will not be damaged.
Condition Temperature Humidity Max Temp Change

Operating 5°C - 50°C (41°F - 122°F) 20 - 80% 10°C (50F)/hour
Idle 0°C - 55°C (32°F - 131°F) 10 - 95% 10°C (50F)/hour

Condition Temperature Humidity Max Temp Change

Extreme power-on 0°C - 55°C (32°F - 131°F) 10 - 95% 15°C (59F)/hour
Storage -5°C - 55°C (23°F - 131°F) 10 - 90% 15°C (59F)/hour
Dew point 26°C (78.8°F) maximum
Paper Specification
Paper Roll
l Width: 80.0 mm (3.15 in.)
l Length: 83 m (272 ft.) max
l Diameter: 83 mm (3.26 in.) or less
l Paper core inner diameter: 12 mm (0.47 in.)
Printable Area
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
2.50 mm * 75.25 mm 2.25 mm
(0.10 in.) (2.96 in.) (0.09 in.)
6.9 mm (0.27 in.)

Minimum
22 mm (0.87 in.)
Typical
5 mm (0.20 in.)
Typical
* Left Margin Adjustable area ±1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
Journal Paper Low

The paper low signal indicates when 5.8 m (19 ft.) ±40% remains on the supply roll.
Sensor Locations
Winding Wheel Thermal Head
PE Sensor
Cover Open Sensor
Paper Roll Feed

Winding Jam Sensor
Motor
Winding
Motor
Paper Low Sensor

Sensor Description
Paper Low Detects paper low.
Cover Open Detects cover open, halts operation.
PE Detects presence of paper for controlling feed motor.
Winding Jam Detects winding wheel movement and controls winding.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the control board, and by using the ATM error reporting
system.
LEDs Location and Meaning

Two pairs of LEDs are located one each side of the control board and are also visible through holes at the
bottom of the side frames. The LEDs can be used to diagnose the conditions shown in the following
table.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper out
Slow blink Off Paper low
Off On Winding jam
Slow blink Off Paper not wound
Off Fast blink Cover open / Unable to load paper
Off Off Power off
Module Error Messages

The following error messages are reported by the journal printer. Refer to the 'Module Removal and
Replacement' section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and 'Diagnostics' for details of
running diagnostic tests
Error Message Corrective Action

Printer Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power cable at the printer and at
Disconnected the power supply. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
The printer may need to be re-set. Run self test.
PCB Hardware Replace printer.
Error

Error Message Corrective Action

Printer Under ATM power harnessing may be faulty - test power from module to distribution board to ATM
Voltage power supply. Replace harnessing if necessary.
ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.
Print Head Life Replace printer.
Low/Out
Printer Over Check operating conditions against Environmental Requirements. If necessary, replace
Temperature printer if constantly over temperature.
Printer Open If open, close print mechanism.
If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty - run HW_DIAG Sensor Test, if this
reports printer open, replace printer.
Paper Not Re-load the paper if it was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.
Loaded
Printer Not Re-load paper, ensuring is correctly fed into take-up spindle.
Winding Check winding motor cable is securely connected (J4).
Print Clear jam and re-load paper.
Mechanism Jam Winding motor may be faulty - unload paper, run HW_DIAG Winding Motor test. Motor and
gears should turn. If not, replace printer.
Paper feed motor may be faulty - unload paper, run HW_DIAG Paper Feed Motor test. Motor
and gears should turn. If not, replace printer.
Paper Low/Out Re-load paper.
Run HW_DIAG Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor. If necessary, replace printer.
General Checks
The following general checks should determine the cause of the majority of errors with the journal
printer:
l Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.

l Check that the interface cable from the PC core is connected securely at both ends.
l Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected securely:
Problem Check Cable

Paper low not detected / Frequent paper empty messages Paper low sensor cable (J1)
Frequent “Unable to load paper” messages. Paper end sensor cable (J1)
Paper not feeding correctly / frequent jam messages Feed motor cable (J6)
Paper not winding correctly Winding motor cable (J4)
Poor printing or none at all Thermal head cable (J5)
Printer open message cannot be cleared Open sensor cable (J2)
l Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.
l Check that the operating temperature complies with the specifications given in section
‘Environmental Requirements’.

l Check that thermal paper is being used.

l Check that the paper is not damp, dirty or dusty.
l Check for foreign objects in the feed path or stuck to the reel guides, take-up core, drive gears or
platen.
l Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol (IPA), using a cotton bud.
l If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the diagnostic
result. If there is no change, replace the printer.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start-up and reset or on entering self test mode via dip switch DSW1.
Start-up Tests
The following tests run at start-up:
l Flash ROM CRC check

l Internal RAM check
l EEPROM test
l Microprocessor test.
In the event of an error in one of the tests the LEDs will indicate the error type. The error state will be
maintained until power is cycled or reset.
LED Diagnostic Displays

The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download )
Off Fast blink Paper empty
Slow blink Off Paper low
Off On Winding jam
Off Fast blink Unable to load paper
Slow blink Off Paper not wound
Off Off Power off
Test Selected By Dip Switch

The level 0 diagnostic tests that can be set by the logic board dip switch DSW1 are:
l Rolling ASCII print test

l ‘H’ print test

l Dot check pattern print test

l Sensor level adjustment.
Switch and LED Locations

Dip switch DSW1 on the control board is used to select the diagnostic tests. The LEDs indicate the test
selected. Switch SW1 is the reset button.
LED1 LED3 J5
J3
Fuse F3
CN2
J4
DSW1
CN1 SW1
J2
LED2 LED4 J1
How to Enter a Test

1. Ensure the printer is powered off.
2. Set bits 1 and 2 of DSW1 to ON and bit 3 to OFF.
3. Power up the printer.
4. The two LEDs should be off, indicating test mode.
5. Select the required self test by pressing the feed button briefly as follows. The LEDs will indicate
the test selected
Feed Button Presses LED Test

Green Red
x0 OFF OFF Rolling ASCII print test (continuous printing)
Mono or 2-colour options.
x1 ON OFF ‘H’ print test (continuous printing)
x2 OFF ON Dot check pattern print test
x3 ON ON Sensor level adjustment
6. Once the test is selected, push and hold the feed button and the test will be performed.
Note: For the ASCII test to start, you have to briefly press the feed button then press and hold
the feed button again to start the test.
7. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the
reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
Rolling ASCII Print Tests

These tests invoke the printer to continuously print the resident character set, in standard pitch for 23
lines, then feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test is complete, reset the dip
switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

00000012
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFG
!”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGH
”#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHI
#$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJ
00000013
$%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJK
%&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL
&’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLM
’()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN
00000014
()*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
)*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
*+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ
+,-./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
“H” Print Test

This test causes the printer to continuously print “H” characters in the standard pitch. for 23 lines, then
feed 2 lines. The page count is not stored in EEPROM. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch
settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.
00000314
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
00000315
00000316
Dot Check Pattern Test

This test causes the printer to print a dot check pattern. The 12.5% slant line dot pattern is created using
character code 05H. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power
off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer.

Sensor Level Adjustment

The following sensors can be adjusted:
l Paper low sensor

l Winding sensor.
To adjust the sensors proceed as follows:
1. Ensure there is no paper in the transport.

2. Set dip switch bits 1 and 2 to ON, then power up the printer.
3. The firmware measures the sensors levels.
4. Place a paper roll in the hopper. and feed paper to the print mechanism entry slot, then press
the feed button.
5. The paper is fed through the print mechanism. Sensor adjustment is performed automatically
during this operation. The printer stores the adjustment value into EEPROM and can be printed
on the configuration printout.
6. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the
Printer Configuration Printout

This is not a test as such but a printout of several of the current settings and functions. To perform the
test, press and hold the feed button and press the reset button. After the test is complete, reset the dip
switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the reset button (SW1) to reboot the printer. The
printout can also be peformed in online mode.
Level 1 Diagnostics
All the Level 1 diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the journal printer in the following manner:
l Margins are set to 0 and 40

l Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)
The settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all tests. Tests that
require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return a good response.
Sensor Test
The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no movement of
the printhead during this test.
Print Quality Test

The Print Quality test prints a line of LDTX in double wide then a line in single wide, followed by graphics.
This is followed by a solid black rectangle.
Winding Motor Test

The Winding Motor test drives the winding motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from the
printer for this test to run.

Paper Feed Motor Test

The Paper Feed Motor test drives the paper feed motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed from
the printer for this test to run.
LEVEL 3 DIAGNOSTICS
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the journal printer are:
S_Data
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).
Tallies
Tally Description
WIND JAM The number of winding jams.
MECH JAM The number of print mechanism jams.
HOU ON The number of hours the printer has been switched on.
PAP LEN The number of millimeters of paper that have passed under the printhead.
ERR RECO The number of error recoveries.
OVER HEA The number of times the printer has over-heated.
FLAS CYC The number of flash cycles.
HEAD OPN The number of times the head has been opened.
SUP VOLT The number of supply voltage anomalies.
USB COMM The number of USB communications faults.
STRAPPING
Switches
The following switches are found on the control board and are also accessible through gaps in the
printer frame.
l Switch SW1 is the reset switch.

l The 2-pin dip switch (DSW1) on the control board is used to enter self test mode.

bit 0 bit 1 Contents

0 0 Online mode
1 0 Self test mode
0 1 Flash download mode
1 1 Sensor adjustment mode
The following tests can be accessed in self-test mode:
l Rolling ASCII print test

l ‘H’ print test
l Dot check pattern print test
l Sensor level adjustment.
A pair of LEDs on each side of the board indicate the tests selected as well as indicating errors.
ADJUSTMENTS
The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following menu option for the
journal printer:
Menu Description
Printer Contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range 1 (lightest) to 30 (darkest). Default is 15.
Adjust Left Sets the position of the left margin. Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.)
Margin within the range of min -1.875mm (-0.075 in.) to max +1.875mm (-+.075 in.).
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.

This section describes the removal and replacement of the head assembly. The assembly is not
advocated as a Field Replaceable Unit, but is available as a spare part.

Head Assembly
1. Remove and retain the four screws securing the rear cover. Remove the cover.
2 on each side
2. Remove the thermal head’s black earth harness from the connector on one side of the frame.
3. Remove and retain the two screws securing the bottom cover. Remove the cover.
Cable Clamp
X2
4. Lift the cable clamp securing the harness. Lift harness slightly and slide the cover off.
5. Disconnect the thermal head connector from J5 on the board.

6. Remove and retain the two screws securing the print head.
1 on each side
7. Loosen the stop screw on the side of the printer until the head drops. Remove the head
assembly.
8. Disconnect the harnesses from the head assembly.

CABLING
None.
LED1 LED3 J5
J3
Fuse F3
CN2
J4
DSW1
CN1 SW1
J2
LED2 LED4 J1
CN1 USB J3 Feed motor

CN2 Power J4 Winding motor
J1 Winding jam, paper low, paper end sensors J5 Thermal head
J2 Cover open sensor SW1 Reset switch
Pin Assignments
USB Connector (CN1)
VBUS 1
D- 2
D+ 3
GND 4
Shield Shell
None.

USB RECEIPT PRINTER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB receipt printer of which there are the following variants:
l Single roll
l One-sided
l Two-sided
l Dual roll
l One-sided
l Two-sided
l Value Added Media (stamp).
Each variant is available with or without a capture bin, except the stamp variant.
The printers are fitted with line thermal print heads which print on either one or both sides of the
receipt, and on one side of valuable media such as stamps. The dual feed transport mechanism on the
dual roll variants has two infeeds fitted on the print engine to allow printing from two hoppers, either
for increased capacity or for a second media such as stamps.
4
3
2
1
Item Description Item Description

1 Transport 5 Rear paper hopper
2 Print engine 6 Front paper hopper
3 Dual feed mechanism 7 Capture bin
4 Value Added Media dual feed mechanism

DESCRIPTION
The USB receipt printer has the following features:
l Optional two sided printing

l Optional capture area (not on stamp variant)
l Optional dual feed
l Resolution 203 dpi
l Supports maximum receipt paper roll diameter of 228.6 mm (9 in.) for dual roll and 254mm
(10in.) for single roll
l Thermal printing
l Optional value added media printing, such as stamps.
Power Requirements
The printer requires power from the ATM power supply (+24V DC ±10%) and power consumption is up
to 10.0 A.
Paper Specification
The paper used in your printer must conform to the specifications given in NCR publication Consumable
Items for Self Service (B006-4992). The publication also provides ordering details of the ATM
consumables which should be purchased from NCR Systemedia.
Printable area
Black Mark Alignment
The printer will cut within the black mark according to adjustment parameters. Registration will be
automatically restored if lost.
Receipt Paper Low

Paper low is sensed when the paper roll outer diameter reaches 39 mm (1.53 in) and after a further 10
receipts are printed, the paper low condition is reported. When a set length of paper (default is 5000
mm) has passed through the printer after paper low is reported, the printer will report paper out if a
jam condition occurs after this point or if the printer is dual roll with hopper usage set as single supply.

Sensor Locations
See the table on the following page for a description of sensors.
One-sided Single Roll

Print Engine
Hopper
Cutter Transport
Motor
Transport
LF Motor Motor
HP
TJ Exit
Paper Low
PE
BD
CBF
CB
Two-sided Single Roll

Print Engine
Hopper
Cover Open Cutter Transport
Motor
Transport
Cutter HP Motor
Paper Low 2ST
PE
BD 1ST ENG Ex Exit
2ND TJ
TOF
LF Motor
CBF
CB
One-sided Dual Roll

Hopper Dual Feeder
DF_2a Print Engine
DF2 Motor
Cutter Transport
DF_2b Motor
Paper Low2 Transport
DF_1a
Motor
LF Motor HP
Paper Low1 Eng Ex TJ Exit
DF_1b
PE
BD
DF1 Motor
CBF
CB

Two-sided Dual Roll

Hopper Dual Feeder
DF_2a DF2 Motor

Print Engine
Paper Low 2 DF_2b Cutter

DF_1a Cover OPN
Motor
Transport
Paper Low 1 HP
DF_1b Transport
2ST Motor
TOF 1ST Eng
DF1 Motor PE BD EX TJ Exit
LF Motor
CBF
CB
Sensor ID Sensor Name Location Function

Paper Low Paper Low 1 Hopper Detects paper low.
1
Paper Low Paper Low 2 Hopper Detects paper low.
2
DF_1a Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End during reverse feed.
Unit
DF_2a Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper End during reverse feed.
Unit
DF_1b Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge during reverse feed.
Unit
DF_2b Dual Feed Dual Feed Detects which feeder is in use, acts as Paper Edge during reverse feed.
Unit
Cover Cover Open Engine Detects cover open. Stops all actions except cutter.
Open
PE Paper End Engine Detects paper end, but not used for paper positioning.
BD Black Dot Engine Black dot (mark) registration.
HP Home Engine Detects cutter home position.
Position
TJ Transport Transport Detects jam in transport.
Jam
Exit Exit Transport Detects paper presented to customer at exit. Activates capture if
paper not taken.
CB Capture Bin Transport Detects paper in capture bin.
CBF Capture Bin Transport Detects capture bin full and suspends capture function.
Full
Paper Low Paper Low Hopper Detects paper low.

Sensor ID Sensor Name Location Function

TOF Top of Form Engine Detects top of form.
2ST 2 Sided Engine Detects 2ST paper.
Paper
Engine Engine Exit Engine Detects paper at exit.
Exit
TROUBLESHOOTING
Faults can be diagnosed using the LEDs on the logic board, and by using the ATM error reporting system.
LEDs Location and Meanings

Two LEDs, one red and one green, are located on the logic board on single roll printers and on the dual
feed pcb in the hopper on dual roll printers. The LEDs can be used to diagnose the conditions shown in
the following table..
Single roll Dual roll
Red LED Red LED
Green LED Green LED
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty (standard or dual feeder bins empty)
Slow blink Off Paper low (standard or dual feeder bins near empty)
Off On Dual Feed jam
Off On Capture jam
Off On Transport jam
Off Fast blink Cutter jam, cover open or firmware error (ROM/RAM/EPROM)
Off Slow blink Black mark error

Green Red Meaning

Slow blink Off Capture bin full
Off Off Power off
Module Error Messages

The following error messages are reported by the receipt printer. Refer to the “Module Replacement”
section for detailed instructions on replacing modules, and “ Diagnostics” for details of running
diagnostic tests.
Error Messages Corrective Actions

Comms Error Check USB cable at the printer and at the hub. Check the power cable at the printer and at
the power supply. Re-connect or replace if necessary.
The printer may need to be re-set. Run self test.
Control Board Replace print engine.
Hardware Error
Under Voltage ATM power harnessing may be faulty - test power from module to distribution board to ATM
power supply. Replace harnessing if necessary.
ATM power supply may be faulty. Check and replace if necessary.
Knife Life Replace print engine.
Low/Out
Knife Jam Clear jam and reload paper. Run self test. If no jam:
l May be faulty sensor or connector. Check knife sensor and connector J9, run knife test.
Clean sensor/re-connect connector. If necessary replace knife or print engine.
l May be faulty knife motors - run knife test and observe motor and gears. If necessary
replace knife or print engine.
Print Head Life Replace print engine.
Low/Out
Over Check operating conditions and if necessary, replace print engine if printer is constantly over
Temperature temperature.
Black Mark Error Check that black mark paper is being used, the black marks are complete and the paper is
loaded correctly (i.e. black marks facing down).
Check black dot sensor is clean and unobstructed. Run Slew to Black Mark test.
Check the sensor connector (J7) is securely attached.
If necessary, replace print engine.
Print Unit Open If open, close cover. Run self test.
If closed, printer open sensor or sensor cable may be faulty - run Sensor Test, if this reports
printer open, replace printer.

Error Messages Corrective Actions

Paper Not Re-load paper if paper was incorrectly loaded, or clear jam.
Loaded/
Front Hopper Not
Loaded/
Rear Hopper Not
Loaded
Transport Jam on Clear jam from transport, at transport sensor.
Eject/on Capture If not jammed:
l May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test, observe motor/gears and belt
(may be slipping). Replace transport if necessary.
l May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor.
Replace print engine if necessary.
Exit Jam on Clear jam from transport, at exit sensor. Also check facia.
Eject/on Capture If not jammed:
l May be a motor/gear or belt failure: run Print Quality test, observe motor/gears and belt
(may be slipping). Replace transport if necessary.
l May be PCB or sensor fault: run looped Sensor test. Cover and uncover the sensor.
Replace print engine if necessary.
Capture Bin Full Empty capture bin. Check for paper blocking the capture bin full sensor.
If empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the
sensor. Replace transport if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.
Paper Low/Out Load paper. If not empty, may be a PCB or sensor failure: run looped Sensor test, cover and
Front Hopper uncover the sensor. Replace hopper if failed sensor or print engine if failed PCB.
Low/Out
Rear Hopper
Low/Out
Transport Not Unload paper. Check transport harness and reconnect if necessary. Run Transport Forward
Connected test.
May be a connector failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and disconnect connector. If
necessary, replace transport.
May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. Replace transport
if necessary.
Dual Feed Clear jam from dual feed.
Mechanism Jam Check transport harness. Run Paper Feed Motor Test to check motor and gears turn.
May be a sensor failure: run looped Sensor test. Connect and disconnect connector. If
necessary, replace dual feed.
May be faulty PCB. Run looped Sensor test, cover and uncover the sensor. If necessary,
replace dual feed.

General Checks
l Check that the power cable is connected securely at both ends.
l Check that the interface cables between the printer, the USB hub and the PC core are connected
securely.
l Check that the cable between the logic board (J3) to the drive board (J8) is connected securely at
both ends for 1ST printers.
l Check the cable between the logic board (J6) to the drive board (J15) is connected securely at
both ends for 2ST printers.
l Check the joint harness of the cutter motor is connected correctly.
l Check that the transport feed motor connector is correctly connected to the joint harness
underneath the dual roll engine block.
l Check that the interface cable for the module reporting a problem is connected securely:
Problem Check cable
Frequent knife jams Cutter motor cable (J9)

Paper low not detected/ Frequent paper empty messages Paper low sensor cable (J2)
Frequent black mark errors Black mark sensor (J7)
Frequent capture jams CB sensor cable (J7)
Frequent transport jams Feed motor cable (J6)
Paper not feeding correctly Feed motor cable (J6)
Poor printing or none at all Thermal head cable (J3)
Printer open message can’t be cleared Open sensor cable (J4)
l Check if the fuse on the logic board has blown

l Check that the sensors are not obscured by foreign objects/paper dust.
l Check the 24V power supply to the control board.
l Check that correct type of thermal paper is being used (one or two sided), and that it is not damp,
dirty or dusty.
l Check for foreign objects in the feed path / stuck to the paper feed rollers or paper guides. Clean
the areas carefully.
l Clean thermal elements in print head with alcohol if there are print quality problems.
l Clean the transport belts with alcohol if there are frequent jams.
l Clean the transport sensors using compressed air without removing them from the printer chassis.
If for any reason sensors are removed, they must be recalibrated. Refer to the "Recalibration"
section for detailed instructions.
l Check for wear or lack of tension in the transport belts, replace transport assembly if necessary.
l If an EEPROM error is detected, switch the printer off and on again to confirm the diagnostic
result. If there is no change, replace the print engine.
DIAGNOSTICS
section.

Level 0 Diagnostics
Level 0 diagnostic tests run on start-up and reset.
LED Diagnostic Displays

The following table shows the codes displayed by the LEDs in the event of an error.
Green Red Meaning

On Off On-line
Fast Blink Off IPL mode (firmware ready to download)
Off Fast blink Paper empty: single hopper or both dual feed hoppers
Slow Blink Slow Blink Paper empty: one of dual feed hoppers
Slow Blink Off Paper low: any hopper
Off On Paper jam
Off Fast Blink Firmware error (ROM, RAM or EPROM) or cover open or knife jam
Off Slow blink Black mark error
Slow blink Off Capture bin full
Off Off Power off
Device Diagnostics
All the Sys App device diagnostic tests that involve printing initialize the receipt printer in the following
manner:
l Top and bottom margins are set to 0 and 40

l Line spacing is set to 2.6 mm (1/9 in.)
l Top line position 25.4 mm (1 in.).
All the settings set on entry into diagnostics are restored on exit. Looping is allowed on all tests. Tests
that require paper out do not run if paper is left in, however, they still return a good response.
Note that all tests will be printed on the paper loaded into the print engine, so if there is valuable media
loaded in the rear hopper, it is advisable to unload it from the print engine prior to running diagnostics
tests.
Sensor Test
The Sensor test reports, in M_DATA, status and sensor information. There should be no movement of
the printhead during this test.
Print Quality Test

Available on single feed printers only. The test produces a produces a receipt with:

l the NCR logo

l a full character set printout, single wide
l a solid black rectangle
l a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.
If a 2ST printer is loaded with 1ST paper, the following statement will also be printed
l “Single-sided Paper on 2ST Printer”.
On 2ST printers the reverse side will have:
l the 2ST logo

l a solid black rectangle
l a “Check Solid Box For White Lines” statement.
Print Quality Test - Front Hopper

Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a receipt from the front hopper with the same
information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from Front Hopper”.
Print Quality Test - Rear Hopper

Available on dual feed printers only. This test produces a test print from the rear hopper with the same
information as for Print Quality Test and also the statement “Printed from Rear Hopper”.
Print Alignment Test

This test prints a sheet of paper with several vertical lines across the paper width, then cuts. The lines
allow confirmation that the paper is not skewed.
Slew Test
The Slew Test prints “START” on the first line, slews nine lines, and then prints “FINISH” and cuts.
Transport Forward Test

The test drives the transport for 5 seconds and then switches it off. Paper must be removed from the
printer for this test to run.
Paper Feed Motor(s) Test

The test drives the paper feed motor and the print head motor for 5 seconds. Paper must be removed
from the printer for this test to run.
Knife Cut Test

The cut test causes the knife to be actioned. There should be no paper in the printer for this test.
Fascia Alignment Test

The test prints a graphic to allow the Field Engineer to determine whether the fascia/receipt printer
alignment should be adjusted.
Slew To Black Mark Test

This test slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper.

Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper.
Cut And Capture Test

The printer slews to the next black mark and cuts the paper, then captures the receipt.
Note: This test is only offered on printers configured for black mark paper and with a capture bin.
Important note: all test receipts should be removed from the printer prior to putting the ATM back into
service.
Service Tallies
The tallies returned for the receipt printer are:
Tally Description
RECEIPTS The number of receipts issued. Incremented following a cut function.
CAPTURE The number of receipts captured.
MARK The number of times the device controller failed to detect the index mark on preprinted paper while
ERR performing a form feed to black mark.
KNIF JAM The number of knife jams.
EXIT JAM The number of exit jams (exit jam on capture/exit jam on eject).
TRAN The number of transport jams (transport jam on capture/transport jam on eject)
JAM
CAPT The number of capture jams (transport jam on capture/exit jam on capture)
JAM
HOURS The number of hours the printer has been switched on.
ON
PAP LEN The number of millimeters of paper that have passed under the printhead.
ERR The number of error recoveries.
RECO
OVER The number of times the printer has over-heated.
HEAT
FLSH CYC The number of flash cycles.
HEAD The number of times the head has been opened.
OPN
SUP The number of supply voltage anomalies.
VOLT
USB The number of USB communications faults.
COM
ILLEG The number of times an illegal sequence warning has occurred.
SEQ

Tally Description
KNIFE The number of knife cuts
CUT
DFEED The number of time a dual feed mechanism jam has occurred
JAM
STRAPPING
Fuse
There is a 10A fuse on the logic board (F3 - one sided printer) or (F1 - two sided printer).
ADJUSTMENTS
The Configuration menu in System Application (Sys App) displays the following options for the receipt
printer:
Menu Description
Form Feed Sets the printer to feed to either:
Form Feed (front l Black mark
hopper) l Fixed length (min. value 1, max value 500).
Form Feed (rear l Variable length, that is the length of printed date plus a margin (minimum value for
hopper) bottom margin is 77,
maximum value 500).
Printer Contrast Sets the printer contrast in the range:
0 (lightest) to 14 (darkest). Default value is 2.
Black Mark Cut Sets where within the black mark the form is cut.
Position Adjustment Minimum value is 0, maximum is 14. Default is 2.
Adjust Left Margin Sets the position of the left margin.
Adjustments are in steps of 0.125mm (0.005 in.) within the range of minimum -
1.875mm (-0.075 in.) to maximum +1.875mm (±075 in.)
Minimum value is 0, maximum is 30. Default value is 15.
Present Position Sets the position of the first line of print relative to the top of the page.
Adjustment Minimum value is 1, maximum is 30. Default is 15.
Colour Sets the printer to use 2-colour paper.
Printer Configuration Printout

To print out the current settings and functions, press and hold the feed button and press the reset
button. After the test is complete, reset the dip switch settings to OFF then either power off or press the
The printout can also be performed in on-line mode.

Printer Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

Sensors re-calibration process is required when sensors are replaced.
One–sided (1ST) Single Roll with or without Capture

Perform the following steps to re–calibrate the sensors:
1. Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
2. Power–up the printer with DIP switches under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.
3. If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.
4. Briefly press the Feed button three times to select sensor adjustment.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the status of the
LEDs during the self test.
Press Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
0 (power–up state) Off Off
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5.Press and hold the Feed button.

6.The firmware measures the level of sensors.
7.Load a BM paper roll into the hopper.
8.Press the Feed button.
9.The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin present, the paper is then captured. The
Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
10. If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment is
unsuccessful.
11. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.
Note: Black mark mode executes this procedure.
One–Sided (1ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture

1. Remove all paper from the transport or capture, feeders, and paper roll from both hoppers.
3. If the printer detects this status, two LEDs are off.

5. Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the status of the
LEDs during the self test.
Press Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
0 (power–up state) Off Off
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
6. Press and hold the Feed button.

7. The firmware measures the level of sensors.
8. Load BM paper rolls into both front and rear hoppers.
9. Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder and press the Feed button.
10. The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then captured. The
11. If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment is
unsuccessful.
12. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.
Note: Black mark mode executes this procedure.

Two–Sided (2ST) Single Roll with or without Capture

Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode
Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST ) test mode.
Set DIP Switch 1 and

2 ON, and 3 OFF
LEDs
Power-up Double side test mode
Briefly press the Feed

button Single side test mode

Double side test mode
button
Repeated pushing
alternates between 1ST
test and 2ST test
Press and hold the

To select 1ST or 2ST Feed button when Both LEDs are out
desired test is selected.
Sensor Re–calibration Procedure

1. Remove all paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
3. Select 1ST or 2ST mode.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the LED status
during the self test.
Push Feed button LED Status LED Display

Red Green Red Green
1 time Off On
2 times On Off


Red Green Red Green
3 times On On
5. Push and hold the Feed button.

7. Set a BM paper roll in the hopper.
8. Press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If a capture bin is present the paper is then captured.
The Sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
9. Remove all the paper roll from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll.
10. Press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. And then it is captured if capture bin present.
The 2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
11. If both LED is blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment is
unsuccessful.
12. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches OFF, and power the printer off and on.
Two–Sided (2ST) Dual Roll with or without Capture

Selecting Single Side Test Mode or Double Side Test mode
Perform the procedure below to select Single Side (1ST) test mode or Double Side (2ST ) test mode.
Set DIP Switch 1 and

2 ON, and 3 OFF
LEDs
Power-up Double side test mode

button Single side test mode

Double side test mode
button
Repeated pushing
alternates between 1ST
test and 2ST test
Press and hold the

To select 1ST or 2ST Feed button when Both LEDs are out
desired test is selected.
Sensor Re–calibration Procedure


1. Remove all the paper from the transport or capture, and paper roll from the hopper.
2. Power–up the printer with DIP switch under 1 and 2 to ON, and 3 to OFF condition.
3. Select 1ST or 2ST mode.
Two LEDs indicate the status of the self test. The table below lists and displays the LED status
during the self test.

Red Green Red Green
1 time Off On
2 times On Off
3 times On On
5. Press and hold the Feed button.

7. Set BM paper rolls in the front and rear hoppers.
8. Feed the BM paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut, and presented. If a capture bin is fitted, the paper is then captured. The
9. Remove all BM paper rolls from the printer, and replace with 2ST paper roll into the front
hopper only.
10. Feed the 2ST paper from front hopper to lower feeder, and press the Feed button.
The paper is loaded, cut and presented. If capture bin present, the paper is then captured. The
2ST sensor adjustment is performed during feeding.
11. If both LEDs are blinking, sensor adjustment is successful. If red LED is ON, sensor adjustment
unsuccessful.
12. After re-calibration, set all DIP switches off, and power the printer off and on.

The procedures in this section describe the removal and replacement of the following field replaceable
units:
l Transport
l Dual feed mechanism
l Print engine
l Hopper
l Paper low sensor.

Transport
1. Disconnect the two harnesses (three on a capture bin variant).
2. Remove and retain the single screw on each side.
3. Loosen the two screws underneath the transport. On the capture bin variant, a long blade
screwdriver will be required to reach through the frame.
4. Remove the transport.
Dual Feed Mechanism (Standard)

The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.
1. Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back to the dual
feed PCB in the hopper.
2. Remove the two screws (one each side) that secure the front hopper lifting bar and the two
fixing screws securing the pcb cover. Remove the cover then disconnect all the harnessing from
the PCB.
3. Remove the screws securing the pcb to its mounting.

4. a) For single-sided printers: Remove the retain the four screws (two each side) securing the dual
in-feed mechanism to the print engine.
Remove Screw (2 off)
Cable Comnnector
Remove Screw (2 off)
b) For two-sided printers: Remove and retain the two screws securing the dual feed mechanism
to the rear of the print engine. Loosen the screw on each side of the print engine.
Loosen Screw (2 off)

Remove Screws
5. Lift the in-feed mechanism clear of the print engine.
Dual Feed Assembly (Stamp)

The dual feed mechanism is supplied with the dual roll pcb and interconnection harness.
1. Remove the cable ties securing all harnessing from the dual feed mechanism back to the dual
feed PCB in the hopper.

2. Remove the screw securing the PCB cover to the underside of the printer, and remove the
cover.
3. Disconnect the 40-pin connector and all other harnessing from the PCB.
4. Remove the two spacer screws from the base of the dual feed assembly and tilt the assembly
over towards the hopper to remove it.
Print Engine
One-sided
1. Dual feed variants only: remove the dual feed mechanism as described in previous section.
2. Disconnect the earth straps on each side of the print engine, and disconnect the harness as
shown below.

3. Remove and retain the two screws (one on each side), securing the print engine to the frame.
Earth Strap x2
Harness
Screw x2
4. Disconnect the main sensor harness connector from the PCB.
Sensor Harness
5. Slide the engine lugs clear of the frame, and lift it up.

Two-sided
1. Dual feed variants only: remove the dual in-feed mechanism as described in previous section.
2. Disconnect the earth straps on the rear of the print engine, then two screws (one on each side),
securing the print engine to the frame then slide the engine lugs clear of the frame, and lift it off.
Remove screw x2
3. Remove the screw securing the control board cover beneath the print engine.
Remove screw
4. Disconnect the hopper low sensor harness from the PCB.
hopper low sensor harness

Fuse
One-sided Printer
The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, or for better access, first
remove the print engine as described above, then:
1. Remove the two screws on top and the single screw on the side securing the control boards
cover.
Control Board Cover Screw (2 off)
Control Board Cover Screw
2. The fuse is visible from the underside of the print engine.
Two-sided Printer
The fuse on the control board is accessible from the underside of the printer, as shown below. On dual
feed variants, the control board cover must first be removed.
Front Hopper
Single Roll
1. First remove the print engine and in-feed mechanism as described in earlier sections.
2. Cut the cable tie holding the paper low sensor harness to the hopper, then disconnect the
connector located below the print engine tray.

3. Remove the two screws securing the earth straps then the two screws securing the hopper
assembly to the print engine.
Remove Earth Strap

x2
Remove screws x2
Disconnect Harness
Dual Roll
1. Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then remove the
two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.
Control Board Cover
Fixing Screw Fixing Screw
2. Disconnect the rear hopper low sensor harness from the dual PCB and remove all harnessing
from the front hopper.
3. Remove the four screws (two each side) securing the PCB to the hopper and remove the PCB.

4. Disconnect the paper low sensor harness connector located below the print engine tray and
remove the lower two screws securing the earth straps to the hopper assembly and print
engine.
Disconnect harness
Remove screw x2
Remove earth strap x2
5. Remove the upper two screws securing the hopper assembly to the print engine and remove
the hopper.
Rear Hopper
1. Remove the four screws (two each side) that secure the two joining brackets between the front
and rear hoppers.
Hopper
Fixing Screws
Hopper

2. Remove the two screws securing the yellow lifting handle in the front hopper. Then remove the
two screws securing the dual feed PCB cover.
Control Board Cover
Fixing Screw Fixing Screw
3. Disconnect the rear hopper sensor low harness from the PCB and remove the rear hopper.
Hopper Low Sensor Harness

1. Release the harness from the cable ties.
2. Push out the two sensor pcb securing studs.

3. Disconnnect the harness from the control board.

Logic Board
One Sided
Top Side
J3
F3 J2
LED2 DSW1 SW1

LED1
J6
J8
Bottom Side J1
J4
J1 Not used J6 USB (Straight, type B)

J2 DRV Signal J8 Power
J3 Board to board connector

Two Sided
Top Side
J6
F3
LED2 DSW1 SW1

LED1
J5
J3
Bottom Side J2
J6 Board to board connector

J2 DIN power - 3 pins (RSD)
J3 Power - 2 pin (FSD)
J5 USB (Straight, type B)
Pin Assignments - USB connector (J6)

(One and Two Sided Printers)
VBUS 1
D- 2
D+ 3
GND 4
Shield Shell

Single Roll Drive Board

One-sided
J8
J3
J5 J1
J14
J4 J7 J6 J9 J2
J1 Not used J6 Feed motor

J2 Paper low & capture sensors J7 Black dot (mark) sensor
J3 Thermal head J8 Board to board connector
J4 Cover open sensor J9 Knife motor
J5 Paper end sensor J14 Logic signal
Two Sided
J15
J7
J6
J13 J11
J5 J10 J5
J4
J8 J2 J9 J1 J3
J1 Cutter motor J8 Exit sensor

J2 Combine Sensors J9 Feed Motor
J3 Transport/Hopper/Motor/Paper low sensor J10 TOF sensor
J4 PE Sensor J11 TOF LED
J5 RS232 J13 2ST PDET sensor
J6-7 Thermal Heads J15 Board to board connector

Dual Roll Control Board
J2
J4 J1
J8
J6
J5
J9 J7
J3
J1 Paper low (2nd Bin) J6 Control Signal

J2 Sensor LED (1st Bin) J7 Motor (1st Bin)
J3 Sensor (1st Bin) J8 Motor (2nd Bin)
J4 Sensor LED (2nd Bin) J9 Feed Switch
J5 Sensor (2nd Bin)
CABLING
The dual roll printer has a ribbon cable signal harness which goes from the control board to print engine.
None.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the USB Receipt Printer,
refer to the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

12. SCANNERS
Barcode Scanner 424

BARCODE SCANNER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter gives servicing information for the USB 2D bar code reader (UBAR).
Safety Compliance
The UBAR meets the requirements of paragraph 1.1 of IEC 60825-1, and therefore no safety labels are
required.
DESCRIPTION
The USB 2D bar code reader (UBAR) can be fitted to ATMs to extend banking services by automating bill
payment and merchant deposit transactions otherwise handled by front office tellers. The UBAR has a
USB 1.1 interface and can decode linear (such as Code 39), stacked linear (such as PDF 417) and matrix
(such as Maxicode) bar code standards.
On exterior products only, illumination is provided by two IR LED pcb’s which are triggered via
illumination controller board when the barcode reader is activated.
IR LED
Driver
Barcode
Reader PC
Module Core
IR LED
IR LED

The hardware consists of an imager, interface board and two UBAR IR LED pcb assemblies.
Interface PCB
IR LED PCB
Imager
IR LED PCB
The LEDs are controlled by the UBAR illumination IR LED driver board, shown below.
The UBAR interface board provides the USB interface between the bar code imager and the PC core and
also supplies dc power to the bar code imager. The UBAR interface board provides the trigger signal to
the UBAR illumination driver board.
The UBAR illumination driver board supplies the power and controls the firing of the UBAR IR LED pcbs.
Power Requirements
5V USB powered device.
Note: The UBAR is plug-and-play (PnP) capable and is not ‘hot-docking’ capable.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Module States
Condition SOH Message Action
Device disconnected INSPECT_NOW Check connections
30 consecutive read errors INSPECT_SOON Clean viewing window as described below
75 consecutive read errors INSPECT_NOW Replace barcode reader
Cleaning Viewing and Illumination Windows

If the UBAR is not successfully reading codes make sure the viewing and illumination windows on the
outside of the facia is scrupulously clean and also free from scratches or abrasions. If a window is
scratched a new moulding with window will have to be fitted.
DIAGNOSTICS
Reporting
The UBAR is a GO/NO GO device and either works or fails, therefore there are no extensive diagnostics.
Self Test
Selecting DEVICE SELF TEST from the System Application Main Menu and selecting bar code reader from
the Device Self Test Menu will display a screen prompt to “Scan a Barcode”. If a test bar code has been
successfully scanned within a 10 second period, the display will show that the self test was successful. If
no bar code has been scanned within 10 seconds, the display will show that the test is incomplete.
Level 3 Diagnostics
M_CODE Meaning
00H GOOD
02H ERROR
M_STAT Meaning
00 Operation successful
01 Bar code type not supported or data error
02 Bar code read error
04 Device inoperative

05 USB communications error

06 Format error
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.
Note: The UBAR is factory configured to recognize all bar code symbologies.

There are no serviceable parts within the UBAR.

CABLING
There is no internal cabling in the UBAR module but the following illustration shows the barcode
illumination harness.
2 1
B_CODE_B3
4 3
2 1
IRLED_P1
4 3
2 1
UBAR_P4
IRLED_P1
4 3
2 1
UBAR_P3
4 3
2 1
UBAR_P1
2 1
DIODE CONTROL (D3)

1 1
DIODE CONTROL (D4)
2 2
UBAR_P4 GND IRLED_P1
3 3
GND
4 4
DIODE CONTROL (D1)

1 1
DIODE CONTROL (D2)
2 2
UBAR_P3 GND IRLED_P1
3 3
GND
4 4
TRIGGER
1 1
UBAR_P1 GND B_CODE_B3
2 2
This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver board shown
below.

UBAR Illumination IR LED Driver Board
J1 J3
J4
J2
Connector J1
The connector (J1) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the Illumination IR LED
Driver board. The connector is a 2-way right-angled header, S-ROW microfit with the following pinout:
1 TRIGGER
2 GND
Connector J2 (Power)
The connector (J2) supplies the 24Vpower to the Illumination IR LED Driver board. The connector is a 2-
way right-angled header, mini-fit jnr with the following pinout:
1 +24V
2 GND
Connector J3
The connector (J3) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR LED board. The
connector is a 4-way right-angled header, microfit with the following pinout:
GND 3 1 DIODE CONTROL (D1)

Connector J4
The connector (J4) carries the signals from the UBAR Illumination driver board to the IR LED board. The
connector is a 4-way right-angled header, microfit with the following pinout:


UBAR Interface PCB

Connector J3
The connector (J3) carries the trigger signal from the UBAR interface board to the Illumination IR LED
Driver board. The connector is a Molex Microfit type with the following pinout:
1 TRIGGER
2 GND
Connector J2
The connector (J2) is the USB connector which carries the signals from the PC Core to the UBAR
interface board. The connector is a Molex PTH Mini-B USB type with the following pinout:
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
6 S1
The Barcode Reader Test Document (NCR Part No. 009-0017470).

13. DISPENSERS
S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser 432
Revision 502
Aria Pick Module 503
Revision 526
Revision 576
Revision 682
S2 Dispenser Cassette 683
Shutters 693

S1 BILL ALIGNMENT DISPENSER
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Front and Rear Access S1 currency dispensers which form bill stacks using the
bill alignment mechanism.
As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured post EU RoHS compliance guidelines it
can only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.
S1 Variants
The major area variants of the S1 Bill Alignment dispensers are:
l Mechanical:
l Rear Access (short transport)
l Rear Access (mid transport)
l Rear Access (long transport)
l Front Access.
l Electrical:
l The dispenser is available in 115 V and 230 V main motor variants
l The dispenser control board has USB connectivity.
l Software:
l Microsoft Windows XP and Aptra XFS 4.5 onwards.
Pick Modules
The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules. The Aria pick
modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter in the dispense section of this manual. The
description of the 56XX type is in chapter 17.6 of the Service Aids Mini‐Manual (FM-0547-A).
Note: Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules, then the Aria type must
always be used in the lower positions.

Single and Dual Configuration

The ATM is available in either single or dual cash configuration. Each dispenser can be configured to
recognise up to seven denominations, but is limited to dispensing up to four due to the maximum
number of cassettes it can hold. In an ATM configured with dual dispensers the total number of
denominations can be 14 of which a maximum of 8 can be dispensed at any one time.
WARNING
It is recommended that currency denominations in a dual dispenser are consistently
mapped to the same cassette types in both dispensers. This will ensure that the correct
denomination is inserted into the correct dispenser.
Operational Environment
The dispenser operates as an intelligent module under the control of its own on-board microprocessor.
It communicates with the ATM central processing unit using the USB Interface. Dispenser device control
firmware resident in the dispenser memory interfaces with the ATM transaction control and diagnostic
programs.
Variants
The S1 dispenser is available in the following variants:
l Front Access
l Rear Access
l Short Transport
l Mid Transport
l Long Transport.
The following options are available on all variants.
l 1, 2, 3 or 4 Standard width cassettes

l Standard Security
l Tamper Indicating Security
l Cash Security (Fluiditi/Axytrans)

l Open or latchfast purge bin
l 115 V version
l 230 V version
Containers
The dispenser is capable of using the wide currency cassettes developed to replace the obsolete
standard width cassette. A full description of the currency cassettes is given in the Currency Cassette
chapter of the Dispense section of this manual.

Note: Standard width currency cassette Type H8015-STD-01/02-08 are obsolete and are not
recommended for use with this dispenser.
Currency Cassettes
l Latch Fast security (Standard). The security method takes the form of a cable tie or similar through
the door latch.
l Tamper Indicating security (TI). The cassette has a mechanical indicator to signal any tampering via
colour change to the indicator. In addition the catch can be fitted with a seal.
l Fluiditi/Axytrans ATM security. The system protects currency cassettes when installed in the ATM
by injecting marking ink into the cassette upon the ATM being attacked. It is important that correct
handling procedures are observed when handling this type of cassette.
l Fluiditi/Axytrans Replenishment security. The system protects the cassette while in transit as well
as when installed in the ATM by injecting marking ink into the cassette. It is important that correct
handling procedures are observed when handling this type of cassette.
Purge Bins
l Open bin.
l Latch fast bin. The security method takes the form of a cable tie or similar through the purge bin
latch.
Note: An indicator is not available on the purge bin. A dispenser ordered with mechanical TI is supplied
with a latch fast purge bin.
Specifications
Power Requirements
The power requirement for the Control board is:
l Direct current:
l +24 V ± 10% 0.35 A
l +24 V Interlock.
l Alternating current:
l 115 Vac, 5.5 A r.m.s., 20.0 A surge
or
l 230 Vac, 3.0 A r.m.s., 10.0 A surge.
The S1 Control board supplies the following power:
l Direct current:
l +3.3 V ± 10% 0.5 A
l +5 V ± 10% 0.75 A
l +12 V ± 10% 0.5 A.

Weight
The weights of the component parts of the S1 dispenser are:
l Front Access Dispenser:

l Basic unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 38.9 kg (85.75 lb.)
l Presenter unit =20.9 kg (46.07 lb.)
l Rear Access Dispenser:
l Short unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.30 kg (80.02 lb.)
l Mid unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 36.90 kg (81.34 lb.)
l Long unit (2 double pick modules + presenter) = 39.10 kg (86.19 lb.)
l Presenter unit (Short) = 18.3 kg (40.34 lb.)
l Presenter unit (Mid) = 18.9 kg (41.66 lb.)
l Presenter unit (Long) = 21.1 kg (46.51 lb.)
l Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)
l Double pick module = 9 kg (19.84 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Plastic) empty = 2.16 kg (4.76 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Plastic) full = 6.62 kg (14.60 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Metal) empty = 3.48 kg (7.67 lb.)
l Currency cassette (Metal) full = 8.21 kg (18.10 lb.)
l Open purge bin empty = 0.28 kg (0.62 lb.)
l Open purge bin full = 0.42 kg (0.92 lb.)
l Latch fast purge bin empty = 0.82 kg (1.81 lb.)
l Latch fast purge bin full = 0.96 kg (2.12 lb.)
Dispenser Dimensions
The dimensions of the S1 dispenser with four pick modules (excluding ATM interface requirements) are:
l Front Access Dispenser:

l Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
l Height = 768 mm (30.24 in.)
l Depth = 750 mm (29.52 in.)
l Rear Access Dispenser:
l Width = 300 mm (11.81 in.)
l Height = 700mm (27.35 in.)
l Depth Short Nose = 726 mm (28.58 in.)
l Depth Mid Nose = 846 mm (33.30 in.)
l Depth Long Nose = 960 mm (37.79 in.)
DESCRIPTION
Bill alignment dispensers present a bunch of up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China version) in up
to four denominations of currency to the cardholder. A detect and purge system controls the
movement of currency along the transport. Misfed or damaged currency is bunched and driven into a
purge bin. The option is available, via application commands, to retract currency presented to the
cardholder but not taken, to the purge bin.
The following sections describe the operation of the dispenser’s mechanical, electrical/ electronic, and
firmware components.

Path of Notes
The dispensers are built with two, three, or four pick modules suspended below the presenter module.
The path of notes through the presenter is shown in the following diagrams:
Forming the Stack

Notes enter the presenter from the pick modules, pass the LVDT and are projected against the bill stop
gate of the bill alignment mechanism by the flicker shaft fingers. They then fall on to the top of the note
clamp transport where they form a stack.
S1 Front Access Stack
Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
Stack Sensor
From Pick
Note Stack Flicker Shaft
Modules
Stack Sensor
S1 Rear Access Stack
Stack Sensor Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
From Pick
Modules Note Stack
Flicker Shaft

Present
The note clamp transport is lifted up so that the note stack is held against the underside of the top set of
presenter transport belts. The belts are driven and the stack of notes is moved to the facia exit slot
where it is held for the cardholder.
S1 Front Access Present
Present Position of Stack Note Path Bill Alignment Assembly

(Down)
Cam
Note Clamp Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Present

Present Position of Stack Note Path (Down)
Note Clamp Cam
Note Stack
Reject
If the stack is not taken by the cardholder, or a mispick has been detected, then the presenter transport
is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin.
S1 Front Access Reject
Bill Alignment Assembly (Up)
Purge Bin
Note Stack

S1 Rear Access Reject
Purge Bin
Note Stack
Purge
If the stack is not presented after the stacking process or a mispick is detected, then the presenter
transport is driven in reverse and the notes are moved into the purge bin.
S1 Front Access Purge
Purge Bin
Note Stack
S1 Rear Access Purge
Purge Bin
Note Stack

Sensors
The position of the sensors that detect the movement of notes is shown in the diagrams below:
S1 Front Access Sensors
Transport Sensors TS4A & B*

Exit Sensors TS5A & B Stack SensorsTS2A & B
From Pick
Modules LVDT
Purge Overfill Sensors TS1A & B
* second TS4 and TS5 sensors in dual sensor systems only (polymer notes)
S1 Rear Access Sensors

Transport Sensors TS3A & B* Stack Sensors TS2A & TS2B
Exit Sensors TS5A & B
Purge Overfill Sensors TS1A & B
LVDT From Pick

Modules
Pick Module
The dispensers may be configured with two, three, or four pick modules hanging vertically below the
presenter module.
There are two types of pick module: the single pick module holds one currency cassette, and the double
pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The single and double pick modules used are the
Aria type 3 as described in Aria Pick Module chapter in the Dispense section of this manual.
Pick positions are numbered 1 to 4, with number one immediately below the presenter.
Note: If a mixture of Aria and 56XX enhanced pick modules are used, then the Aria type 3 pick module
is always in the lower position.
Presenter Module
The presenter module has the following functions:
l stack up to 40 bills/notes (50 bills for special China version) and present the stack to the
cardholder

l detect when the stack of bills is taken

l control the exit shutter behind the ATM facia
l provide a housing for the purge bin
l drive damaged, mispicked, or not-taken currency into the purge bin
l detect when the purge bin is full
l drive, through gearing, all the pick modules
l detect the movement of bills through the transport
l create the timing signal for the measurement of bill singularity
l supply the pick vacuum to all the pick modules.
The components of the presenter which achieve these functions are:
l linear variable displacement transducer (LVDT)

l main timing disk
l flicker shaft, anti-static brush, and deflectors
l bill alignment assembly and bill stop gate
l note clamp, note clamp sensors
l presenter transport and motor
l presenter timing disk
l transport sensors
l exit sensor
l shutter assembly (fascia mounted)
l purge bin location components
l purge transport
l purge sensor
l main motor and vacuum pump
l motor and sensing control circuits.
The following sections describe these components.
Linear Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT)
Ferrite Cores
Sensing Coils
Protective Cover
Bills passed up from the pick modules enter the presenter via the LVDT transport. This short transport is
the only one in the presenter that is driven by the main motor and is linked via a gear train to the first
pick module transport.

Note: Care should be taken with regards to the sensing coils and ferrite cores as these can be damaged
by inappropriate handling.
The LVDT is a sensing device, situated in the transport just before the flicker shaft, which gives an
electrical output proportional to the displacement of two movable roller assemblies caused by bills
passing between them and fixed reference rollers. The rollers are attached to ferrite cores which
project through sensing coils printed on a pcb. The output from the coils is digitized, integrated, and is
compared to the expected value (held in memory) for the currency being dispensed. In this way torn,
folded, or multiple bills are detected.
Note: There is no Pre-LVDT sensor on the bill alignment presenters. The timing of the calculation is
carried out by the LVDT itself.
Main Timing Disk

The main timing disk pulley is driven by a toothed belt from the main motor. Thirty-six holes around the
periphery of the timing disk create the timing pulses from an optoelectronic sensor. The output of the
sensor is used to measure the movement of the bills as far as the flicker shaft and as a reference in the
measurement of bill width. The interval between the interrupts represents a distance travelled by the
bill of approximately 1 mm.
Main Timing Disk - Rear Access
Main Timing Disk
Main Timing Disk - Front Access

Flicker Shaft, Anti-Static Brush, and Deflectors
The plastic fingers on the flicker shaft impart an extra impetus to the notes as they leave the LVDT
transport so that they are projected against the bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly. This action is
augmented by a second flicker shaft assembly with short flicker fingers. The longer flicker fingers also
drag the notes into the stack against plastic guides attached to the LVDT transport.
Just as the notes leave the LVDT transport they pass through an anti-static brush to remove any electric
charge that would hinder them forming into a stack. Above the antistatic brush two plastic note
deflectors are clipped between tie bars so that they brush across the upper surface of the note and
provide a light downward pressure to keep the trailing edge of the notes down and aid the action of the
flicker fingers.

The bill stop gate of the bill alignment assembly hangs down into the path of the notes as they are flicked
out of the LVDT transport. Notes strike the gate, bounce back from it, and fall down on to the top of the
note clamp transport where they are dragged into a stack by the action of the flicker fingers.
The neat formation of the stack of notes depends upon the bounce given to the notes by the gate which,
in turn, depends on the position of the gate. The gate hangs from a belt transport driven by a stepper
motor controlled by the dispenser firmware. The position for the width of notes being dispensed is
calculated by the firmware from the note width stored in the dispenser bill configuration procedure.
During a transaction, if the width of notes to be dispensed varies, the gate is moved to the new position
before the next size is dispensed. The recommended method of forming the stack is from the smallest
bills first, getting progressively larger, so that the bill alignment mechanism moves out to accommodate
each larger size. The zero reference position of the bill alignment mechanism is sensed by the stack
sensor which is interrupted by a flag on the bill stop gate when the mechanism has been driven fully
forward. This is done at the start of every dispense and the gate is driven from there to its calculated
position.
When the stack of notes is completed, the gate is driven back slightly towards the rear of the dispenser
to clear the stack and the note clamp transport is then raised. If the stack has been formed successfully,
the notes will be driven forwards by the presenter transport belts to be taken by the cardholder. If,
however, a fault has been detected, the notes will be driven to the purge bin. To achieve this, the
presenter transport drives the stack forward until its trailing edge just passes the stack sensor, then the
bill alignment mechanism is driven towards the rear of the dispenser. This action causes the bill stop
gate to be lifted out of the presenter belt transport by the action of passing over ramps attached to the
side frames of the presenter. The mechanism is sensed fully back and up by a second flag on the bill stop
gate interrupting the beam of the rear bill alignment sensor. The bill alignment mechanism remains in
this position during the purge cycle. The presenter transport is then driven rearward to deliver the stack
to the purge bin.

Bill Alignment Assembly - Front Access
Bill Stop Gate Stack Sensor Bill Align Up Sensor
Bill Alignment Assembly - Rear Access

Stack Sensor
Bill Align
Up Sensor
Bill Stop Gate
Note Clamp
The note clamp transport is a tray assembly that is raised and lowered by a semicircular cam driven by a
stepper motor via a gear train. The transport consists of a set of three belts held between two shafts at
either end of the metal tray. One of the shafts is driven by the presenter transport stepper motor via a
toothed belt and the other shaft is an idler. The transport belts run on crown pulleys on the shafts.

Also fixed to the clamp tray is the plastic stack tray. When the note clamp transport is in the down
position this stack tray is higher than the transport belts so that the notes can stack on its top surface. As
the transport is lifted by the action of the cam the idler shaft lifts in elongated holes in the stack tray so
that the belts are lifted up above the surface of the stack tray and lift the stack of notes from it. In this
way, when the notes are driven by the presenter transport they are not impeded by rubbing across the
stack tray. Part of the stack tray is shaped to project beyond the drive shaft to provide a support for
notes when being purged into the purge bin.
In its down position, the note clamp transport sits within a metal bracket, attached between the
presenter side frames, that has vertical plates to prevent notes from falling off the sides of the note
clamp transport. Fingers on the bill stop gate hang down through the slots in the stack tray to prevent
any notes from falling off the rear of the note clamp transport.
Note Clamp Sensors

The note clamp transport is sensed in its up and down position by two sensors that are interrupted by a
flag on the shaft attached to the clamp lifting cam. The stack of notes is sensed by the same sensor that
detects the forward position of the note, looking down through a hole in the tray of the clamp transport
to an LED attached to the metal bracket that provides the vertical side plates.
Clamp Up and Down Sensors
Bill Alignment Stepper Motor ClampCam Clamp Stepper Motor
Presenter Transport
The presenter transport consists of an upper set of three belts bearing against a lower set of three belts,
both sets driven by a stepper motor via toothed belts at the left hand side of the dispenser. The
transport belts pass across crown pulleys on the drive and tension shafts. The lower set of belts runs
from the exit of the dispenser to just above the LVDT transport and the upper set runs from the exit and
extends over the note clamp transport.
Just after the note alignment mechanism backs away from the stack of notes, the note clamp transport is
raised by the rotation of the semicircular cam. The clamp is lifted so that its belts press against the
underside of the top set of presenter transport belts and the note stack is held between both sets of
belts. The stepper motor then drives the presenter transport (and also through a gearwheel the belts on
the note clamp transport) so that the stack of notes is moved to the exit held between the upper and
lower presenter transport belts. The toggle shaft at the exit compensates for different thicknesses of
stack and permits the stack to be pulled from the dispenser by the cardholder.

Presenter - Front Access
Presenter - Rear Access

Presenter Timing Disk

An opto-electronic sensor controls the time that the presenter stepper motor has to be powered to
drive the transport and stop it with the bills projecting from the exit slot. The sensor beam is chopped by
the segments on a timing disk attached to the presenter transport drive shaft to produce interrupts
equivalent to travel of the stack of 1.6 mm.
Timing Disk
Transport Sensors
The progress of the notes through the presenter transport is monitored by a number of infra-red
sensors as shown in the illustrations below and also diagrams in the section “Path of Notes”.
The illustration of the Front and Rear access dispensers show the sensors T3 and T3A arranged across
the width of the transport. These sensors and their respective LEDs are wired in series to improve
detection of certain currencies that have a transparent section as part of the bill design.
Transport Sensors - Front Access

Transport Sensor TS3A & B*
Transport Sensor TS4A & B*
Exit Sensor TS5A & B

Transport Sensors - Rear Access

Transport Sensors TS3A & B
Exit Sensor TS5A & B*
Exit Sensor
The last sensor on the transport is the exit sensor T5 which sees the stack in the present position and
detects it being taken by the cardholder. There is an optional second exit sensor (TS5B) for dual sensor
systems (for polymer notes).
Purge Bin Location Components

The purge bin is held in the presenter so that it is accessible from the same position as the currency
cassettes. It is supported by guide rails and is locked in position by a latch. A microswitch is operated by
the inserted purge bin to inform the electronics system that the bin is in place.
When a latchfast purge bin is installed, a keyplate enters holes in the top front of a latchfast purge bin
and pushes the truck door up into the top. The rear door of the latchfast purge bin is secured by a
sealable latch.
Keyplate Foam Rollers Purge Overfill Sensor Foam Rollers
LED
Bin Present Microswitch

Purge Transport
The purge transport consists upper and lower foam roller shafts driven via toothed gears from the
presenter transport and upper and lower plastic guides. The extended portion of the note stack tray
forms the lower note support guides and an upper set of plastic guides is attached between the drive
shaft of the upper presenter transport belts and the upper foam roller shaft.
On a purge, either due to a mispick being detected or the stack of notes not being taken by the
cardholder, the direction of the stepper motor driving the presenter transport is reversed, (the bill
alignment mechanism having been previously driven to its rearmost and up position), thus moving the
stack into the note guides which direct the notes from the belts in between upper and lower foam roll
shafts. A friction clutch arrangement makes sure that the foam roll shafts only drive when the presenter
motor is reversed and the notes are driven in the direction of the purge bin. The foam rollers complete
the task of pushing notes into the bin.
Purge Sensor
The movement of the currency notes into the purge bin is detected by a sensor and LED that look across
the path of the notes at the foam rollers. This sensor also detects a bin overfill condition.
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed timing belts. It also drives the
vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir is located
near the pump to improve the system vacuum, and an air filter in the tubing above the first pick module
protects the pump from damage caused by ingress of grit particles. In both front and rear dispensers the
power is supplied in 115V and 230V options.
Rear Access
The dispenser the motor and pump assemblies for rear access dispensers is located in a separate
electronic box assembly that also houses the dispenser control board. This box is attached below the exit
transport nose of the dispenser.
Dispenser Motor
(In Electronics Box)
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box

Front Access
The dispenser motor and vacuum pump assembly for front access dispensers is located at the rear of
the presenter next to the LVDT transport. The dispenser control board is attached to the upper pick
module.

Currency Dispenser Control Board

The following illustration shows the Currency Dispenser Control Board.
J11 J9
Intelligent Cassette Security LVDT
J8
Transport
LED’s & Sensors
Diagnostic
LEDs
J5
Clamp Sensor
Diagnostic
Swtiches
J6
Motor Sensor
J17
+24V Connector
S W3
J4
Pick Modules
J13
Stepper
Motors
SW2 J2
USB Connector
J21 J20
J18 TTL Shutter 2
+24V Fascia I C
Connector
Interlock
The Control Board controls the operation of the currency dispenser. It is a Coldfire Processor based
control board, responsible for collating all sensor information and operating the individual pick modules,
the presenter, the ac motor and stepper motors, bill alignment and clamp motors and also
communicating commands and responses to the ATM core processor.
The Control Board is a mixed technology pcb employing both Surface Mount Technology (SMT) and
Plated Through Hole (PTH) components.
The functions of the Control Board can be summarised as follows:

1. To co-ordinate operation of the currency dispenser transport hardware including all motors,
sensors, and actuators.
2. To process instructions from and provide responses to the ATM core electronics via a USB
interface.
3. To provide a power and logic interface to the associated single and double pick modules.
Voltage and Current

The power requirement for the S1 (USB) Control board is:
l Direct current:
l +24 V ± 10% 0.35 A
l +24 V Interlock.
The S1 (USB) Control board supplies the following power:
l Direct current:
l +3.3 V ± 10% 0.5 A
l +5 V ± 10% 0.75 A
l +12 V ± 10% 0.5 A.
The S1 Control Board is fitted with a 32V Slow Blow 3 A surge protection fuse to protect the 24V supply
to the pick module control boards. In the event of the fuse failing new Control Board has to be fitted and
the Control Board Authentication procedure in this chapter has to be carried out.
Compatibility
The USB Currency Dispenser Control Board is designed for operation in the NCR S1 Currency Dispenser.
Dispensers Security Switch

Switch SW3 on the Control Board is used in the authentication process as required and to authorize
running level 1 diagnostic tests: STACK, PRESENT, and DISPENSE. Refer to Level 1 Diagnostic Tests.
Configuration Switches
Eight configuration switches provided for configuration use and Extended Level 0 Diagnostics.
Diagnostic LEDs
A bank of Eight LEDs are provided to display Operating System LED configurations. A second bank of
Four LEDs are show the Extended Level 0 Diagnostics information during start-up.

The illustration shown below shows the positions of Dispenser Security switch, Configuration switch and
the Diagnostic LEDs.
Operating
System
LEDs
Diagnostic
Swtiches
Dispenser
Security
Switch
Reset
Switch Level 0 Diagnostic
LEDs
Firmware Description
The Currency Dispenser Device Firmware provides device control, including full error recovery
procedures in the USB peripheral environment.
The firmware interface provides dispensing of up to four different currency denominations with a single
dispenser and up to eight denominations with dual dispensers. It accepts, executes, and returns status
information in response to device control commands from the next level process.
The firmware operates under control of the VxWorks real time kernel by soliciting commands from the
USB Secondary software and sending solicited and unsolicited responses to the USB secondary for
transmission to the host system.
The Currency Dispenser firmware will operate as a dual implementation module and is programmable.
New versions of firmware is downloadable via the USB Loader Service.
The Currency Dispenser firmware can be configured for up to eight cassettes in the operational
environment. The purpose of this is to allow up to eight cassettes to be present in a self-service terminal.
The USB dispenser has some new T_CODE, M_STATUS, SOH modules or message IDs. Some additional
M_DATA values have been added to indicate faults within new dispenser mechanisms.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Module State Table
Error M_ Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
Status
Note jam at pick sensor 5 Poor quality media. Check media Remove debris.
Poorly loaded cassettes. path for debris. Fill cassette.
Check cassette See also
Invalid pick sensor for poorly Troubleshooting
interrupt loaded bills. Procedures
section.
Cassette removed N/A Cassette 1/2/3/4 out Push cassette Insert cassette
fully home and
ensure latched
No magnets present Check magnets
present and in
correct order
Cassette empty 4 Cassette 1/2/3/4 empty Check cassette is Fill cassette
empty
Poor stack Check media Fill cassette
stack
Cassette parameters not 40 Media length and singularity values not Set media length Set parameters
configured set and singularity
values for each
cassette
Too many rejects 2 Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette
for damaged or
folded media
Unable to learn Poorly loaded media in cassette Check cassette Check cassette
to ensure media
loaded neatly
Too many pick failures 3 Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette.
for damaged or See also
folded media Troubleshooting
Procedures
section.
Poor stack Check media Check cassette
loaded in
cassette


Status
Purge bin removed 7 Purge bin removed Check purge bin Insert purge bin
present
Purge bin nearly full N/A Purge bin nearly full Clear software Check purge bin
count
Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette
for damaged or
folded media
loaded in
cassette
Purge bin full 8 Purge bin full Check purge bin Emptying purge
for damaged or bin
folded media
Poor quality media Check purge bin Check cassette
for damaged or
folded media
loaded in
cassette
Note jam in main 5 Media jam or debris Clear jam Check jam
transport at LVDT cleared.
See also
Troubleshooting
Procedures
section
Note jam between the 5 Poor quality media causing jam Clear Jam Clear jam.
pick module and the See also
LVDT Troubleshooting
Procedures
section.
loaded in
cassette
Main transport timing disk 16 Timing sensor dirty Clean sensor Clean sensor
failed


Status
Presenter timing wheel 29 Dirty sensor Clean sensor Clean sensor
failed Worn down gear Replace worn See
down gear Troubleshooting
Procedures
section
Note jam or transport 18 Media jam or debris Clear jam See
sensor failure Troubleshooting
Dirt on rollers or belts Clean Procedures
section
Interlock open 35 Interlock switch not made Check switch Make contact by
operation pushing
dispenser fully
home
Shutter jam open 13 Media jammed in shutter Check for Clear jammed
jammed media media
Shutter jam closed 14 Media jammed in shutter Check for Clear jammed
jammed media media
Pick module 41 A START/END EXCHANGE must be Disable MANIP in
deconfigured (when performed when manipulating the the service
performing a start cassettes to avoid a ‘deconfigured’ state, provider
exchange during resulting in the inability to learn bill registry.
manipulation of cassettes) parameters. Or
A START/END
exchange must
be incorporated
into the
application.
SNR transport open 64 SNR transport open Remove top Close transport
cassette check
SNR
USB serial number too - Build up of dirt on SNR - Clean SNR
many invalid characters camera.
See Adjustments
section.
USB serial number too - Build up of dirt on SNR - Clean SNR
many invalid serial camera.
numbers See Adjustments
section.


Status
Communications failure 64 Communications connection to SNR Check comms Re-connect
to SNR board disconnected connections to comms or repair
SNR board on cable
pick module
USB serial number reader 64 Control board failure - Replace pick
control board failure module
USB serial number reader 64 Fixed guide flex circuit not connected. Check flex circuit Re-connect flex
fixed guide camera Faulty camera or control board connection at circuit. Replace
failure (top CIS) fixed guide and pick module if
at control board. necessary.
USB serial number reader 64 oving guide flex circuit not connected. Check flex circuit Re-connect flex
moving guide camera Faulty camera or control board connection at circuit. Replace
failure (bottom CIS) moving guide pick module if
and at control necessary.
board.
Troubleshooting Procedures
Additional troubleshooting procedures for the following M_Status codes:
M_Status 3 - Pick Failure

l Inspect cassette - check how well the cassette is loaded (no bands/clips, cash is ATM-fit and neatly
stacked) then remove the cash and check that the cassette is clean, that the garage door is
undamaged and that the cassette is set to the correct height/width for the currency. Check that
the cassette can be inserted fully into the dispenser and that the latch is operational.
l Inspect pick module - check the pick arm assembly, filter and suction cups for wear or damage.
Replace if necessary. Check for white dust or noisy operation indicating worn gears. Check for
black dust indicating worn belts.
l Check the pick line vacuum - attach a vacuum gauge to the solenoid on the lowest tube and
perform a Clear diagnostic test. Check the vacuum reaches 800mBar (23.5 IN HG) and is held for 1
minute after the motor stops. If the test fails, then re-check at the air filter, if the test passes at the
air filter, replace all vacuum tubes and T-pieces. If the test fails at the air filter replace the motor
pump assembly (rear access) or the presenter (front access).
l Check the ‘D wheel’ timing within each pick module - the timing disk on the outside of the pick
module should be set to ‘D’ with the ‘D wheels’ inside the pick module set with a 0.5mm gap
before touching the drive roller. Use the D-wheel setting gauge to re-time if needed. Refer to the
Aria Pick Module chapter or the Preventive Maintenance chapter for more detail on timings.
l Check pick-to-pick module timing - the first pick unit on the upper pick module should be set to 1
on the timing disk and the second pick unit should be set to 2. The first pick unit on the lower pick
module should be set to 3 and the second pick unit should be set to 4. Refer to the Aria Pick
Module chapter or the Preventive Maintenance chapter for more detail on timings.
l Check the pick interface PCB - make sure that the cassette id pick interface PCB is fully located
against the side frame and is secure. Check that the pick interface connections are fully home.

M_Status 5 - Sensor Failure/Currency Jam in Main Transport

l All the procedures for M_Status 3 (above) also apply to M_Status 5, and in addition:
l Check for bill skew - inspect the cassettes to ensure that bills are not skewing when exiting
through the garage door. If the bills are skewing, check for poorly loaded cash or incorrect
cassette configuration. Run a single bill dispense test from each pick module multiple times while
observing for bill skew when entering the stacking area of the presenter. If bills are skewed,
inspect the belts and rollers in the pick module and the presenter, clean or replace as necessary. If
the bills continue to skew on exiting the pick module, replace the pick module; if they skew after
entering the presenter, replace the presenter.
M_Status 12 - Presenter Clamp/Alignment Mechanism Failure or Jam

l Clean and inspect the presenter clamping mechanism (bill alignment mechanism).
Check for binding in the mechanism. Run a dispense diagnostic test first with one bill then with 40
bills to verify proper operation. If the test fails, replace the presenter.
M_Status 13/14 - Shutter Jammed Open/Closed

l Check for signs of damage to the shutter which could indicate fraudulent activity.
l Run the dispenser shutter diagnostic test with halt on error enabled and looping 50 times (facia
should be in normal operational position). If the test fails, remove the shutter to clean it and
inspect it for binding when operated manually. Re-fit the shutter and re-run the test. If the test
continues to fail replace the shutter assembly.
M_Status 18 - Currency Jam in Presenter Transport/Sensor Failure

l Check for bills jammed in the presenter transport and for damaged or unfit bills in the purge bin.
l Check belt alignment: mark the presenter belts with a straight line then run a belt drive diagnostic
test, observe if the belts are still in line after the test. If they are out of alignment, clean the belts
and rollers then re-run the test. If they are still out of alignment replace the presenter.
l Check for bill skew: run a single bill dispense test from each pick unit multiple times while
observing for bill skew or delay on entering the stacking area of the presenter. If bills are skewed
or damaged during the dispense, inspect the belts and rollers in the pick module and the
presenter, clean or replace as necessary.
l If the bills are skewed during the stack part of the dispense operation, check for problems
in the LVDT area such as damage to belts, flickers, deflectors or badly located ESD brushes.
Also check for skewed bills coming from the pick module into the LDVT area - use the
troubleshooting procedures for M_Status 3 and 5.
l If the bills are skewed during the present part of the dispense operation, there may be an
issue with the stack table. Check the error log for M_Status 12 errors in the last 30 days, if
there are none try fitting shims to the stacking table or replace the presenter.
l If the bills are skewed after they have cleared the stack table, check the transport belts for
dirt.
M_Status 29 - Timing Disk/Motor Failure

l Check the Hardware Device Error Logs for M_Status 29 events. These may be of varying severity
and frequency and will typically be found as M_Data 06 34 XX, although other M_Data may also be
found in association with this problem.

l Check for worn gears:

l Check for white powder around the area of the gears on the Presenter side frame.
l Hold the gear in position and see if there is excessive movement or “play.”
l Replace worn gears. Before refitting a gear to a shaft, clean the shaft using a clean cloth.
Remove any existing gear wear white powder from around the Presenter side frame.
Some of the shafts will have a pin that drives the gear (Item 1 in the illustration below).
Ensure that the pin does not fall out. Start at the topmost gear (Item 1) and progress down
the gear train, replacing one gear shaft at a time. Gear 4 (Item 4) must be removed first to
replace the right hand gear 3 (Item 3). Refit in reverse order.
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic tests on the dispenser when installed in an NCR ATM are described in the following sections:
Level 0 Diagnostics
This chapter describes the Level 0 Diagnostic which are performed to verify the basic elements of the
control board fitted to the S1 Currency Dispenser module.
The tests are carried out after a power-up or hard reset. The device specific function sysGpioInit is
called up by the start-up code before any diagnostic tests are started.
Note: These tests are not performed after a soft reset.

Level 0 Tests and Result Codes

When the level 0 diagnostic tests are being performed the test ID is displayed on the bank of 4
programmable LED’s. If a failure occurs the result will be displayed on the LED’s for one second followed
by the test ID again for one second after the test has been completed. This action will continue until the
board is reset. If no failure is detected the system performs the next in the sequence until the entire
start up sequence is complete at which time the LED’s are cleared.
Once the Level 0 Diagnostics have been completed, any usage of the LED’s is now entirely device
specific.
Note: There are no switch selectable or run to run tests available.
Test 1 - Flash sum check

This is a checksum test to verify the contents of the Flash ROM. The USB bootloader is checked and the
Device Realtime Software (if present). If the USB bootloader checksum test fails an error code is
displayed and the board fails to boot up. If the Device Realtime Software sum check fails the
application_loaded flag is cleared and a forced download of new software is performed.
Test 1 Results
LED Code Status

0x0D Bootloader checksum fail
Test 2 - SRAM test

This test is to ensure that the SRAM is available and the following steps are performed:
l The data bus is initially tested by performing a walking 1’s test at address 0.
l The wiring for the bus is tested by performing a walking 1’s test on the address bit to check for
aliasing. The test will diagnose a single-bit address such as stuck-high, stuck-low, as well as shorted
pins.
l The physical memory integrity is tested by performing an increment/decrement test over the
entire region. Every storage bit in the device is tested as a zero and a one during the process.
Test 2 Results
LED Code Status

0x08 Data bus error
0x09 Address bus error
0x0A Internal data error
Test 3 - EEPROM test

This test is performed after the level 0 diagnostics have been completed. The test performs a basic
check on the EEPROM device (NVRAM#1). The test performs the following steps:
l The system attempts to read a known header in the top 4 bytes of the device. The location of a
header is defined as a pass for this test.

l If the system does not locate a header the test will the try to write and read back a header. If this
fails, the system indicates a faulty device.
Test 3 Results
LED Code Status

0x08 EEPROM write/read error
Level 1 Diagnostics
This section describes the level 1 diagnostics for the S1 currency dispenser, including the tamper
indicating variant which are accessed via the System Application menu.
The M_STATUS codes and M_DATA returned for currency handling modules are listed in the NCR
publication, B006‐6273‐A000 56xx/Personas Self‐Service Financial Terminals Diagnostic Status Code
Notebook and in the Status Code Translator - an application for PC or Blackberry - available from
www.infoprod.ncr.com
Tests on the Currency Dispenser Diagnostic menu are:
l Clear
l Set Notes
l Stack
l Present
l Dispense
l Main Motor
l Self Test
l Exit Shutter
l Sensor/Switch Status
l Presenter Bill Drive
l Learn Bill Parameters
l Presenter Clamp
l Pick Valve
l Run To Run
l Tamper Indication
l Get Serial Numbers
l Serial Number Read Sensors Status.
Looping is allowed on certain tests.
Clear
The Clear test drives any bills left in the transport into the purge bin.
Set Notes
The Set Notes test allows you to set the number of notes to be picked, from each cassette type present.
If the combined maximum number of notes is greater than 40 (50 bills for special China version), the
test fails and displays “Invalid number of notes”. You are then prompted to “Set notes for cassette X”.
A default of five notes is picked from each cassette type if no number is entered.

Stack
The Stack test picks a number of bills, from each cassette type, and stacks them for presentation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set Notes” option.
Note: This test is not offered unless there has been a change of state of the dispenser security switch
after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control menu is set ON.
Present
The Present test moves previously stacked bills to the exit slot for removal.
after entry to diagnostics.
Dispense
The Dispense test performs the Stack and Present tests in a single operation.
A default of five bills is picked, from each cassette type, unless changed using the “Set Notes” option.
after entry to diagnostics, and the “Cash Enable” option on the control menu is set ON.
Main Motor
The Main Motor test tests the vertical transport drive motor.
Self Test
The Self Test test picks one bill from each pick module with a cassette installed, moves the bills into the
purge bin and then activates/exercises the exit shutter.
Exit Shutter
The Exit Shutter test checks the exit shutter sensors while the shutter is energized (open) and again
when it is de-energized (shut).
Sensor/Switch Status
The Sensor/Switch Status test determines the state of all sensors and switches and reports them as M_
DATA. The sensor reading is taken with the LEDs on.
Presenter Bill Drive

The Presenter Bill Drive test activates the presenter bill drive at two speeds, fast and slow, in both the
forward and reverse directions.
Learn Bill Parameters

The Learn Bill Parameters test instructs the firmware to learn the bill parameters. The test is only
offered for configured cassettes. 5 bills are picked from a selected cassette, inspected for width and
singularity, and then deposited in the purge bin.
The bill width and singularity is returned as T_DATA.

Presenter Clamp
The Presenter Clamp test exercises and monitors the presenter clamp and the bill alignment
mechanism. Before the clamp test is performed the bill alignment mechanism will be moved to the
home position if required. The outcome of the test is returned as M_DATA.
The clamp test initially checks the position of the presenter clamp. If it is not in the home position, it is
driven until it reaches home. When it is home it is driven to the present position and then driven back to
home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.
The bill alignment test initially checks the position of the bill alignment mechanism. If it is not at home,
the mechanism is driven until it reaches home. When it is in the home position it is driven to the
smallest bill position and then driven back to home. Failure in any of these operations is reported.
Pick Valve
The Pick Valve test energizes the main motor and the pick valve of the pick module, inthe selected
position, for a period of 10 seconds.
Note: No feedback is provided for this test. You have to manually confirm the operation of the valve.
Note: All currency cassettes must be removed from the dispenser for this test to run.
Run-To-Run
The Run-To-Run test automatically performs, in sequence, the following tests:
l Clear
l Sensor/Switch Status
l Presenter Clamp
l Self Test
l Exit Shutter
l Dispense (only if the security switch has been operated, refer to “Dispense Test”)
l Clear.
Tamper Indication
The Tamper Indication test displays the status of the dispenser tamper indicator as M_DATA.
Get Serial Numbers

If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, then all serial number, denominations
and images will be displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense, Stack or Self Test command.
Serial Number Read Sensors Status

If Serial Number Read hardware is present in the pick module, this test returns the status of the Serial
Number Read image and SNR transport sensors.

Actual To Virtual Cassette Mapping

Error codes returned by a Self Test or Dispense test are mapped to the virtual type (VT) of the cassette.
This section enables you to determine which cassette type has returned which code.
The following algorithm is used:
l Map codes returned by physical cassette types 1 to 4, into the corresponding virtual type.
l Map physical extended types 5 to 7 into the unused virtual type entries in ascending order.
l Set any unused virtual type slots to their physical types.
The following examples explain how the error codes can be traced to the correct cassette position in
the dispenser.
Example 1
Step 1 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 1 2
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Note: In this example two cassettes are

Type 1. To achieve a code for each
Type 1 run the test with one removed
in turn.
Step 2 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 1 2 5
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Step 3 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 1 2 5 4
Position Type
1 5
2 1
3 2
4 1
Example 2
Step 1 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7

Step 2 Byte 0 1 2 3
VT 1 2 3 4
Physical 6 7 3 4
Position Type
1 3
2 4
3 6
4 7
Step 3 - No further mapping required. All fields by steps 1 and 2.
Level 3 Diagnostics
The level 3 diagnostics returned for the S1 currency dispenser are:
S_DATA
The S_DATA returned for the currency dispenser are:
S_DATA Meaning
00 GOOD (No error).
03 SUSPEND (Possible customer tampering).
04 FATAL (Requires immediate attention).
Tallies
The mnemonics for these tallies are accessed via the REPORT_TALLY_MNEMONICS command and are
not part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.
Tally Description
PKFAIL 1 Pick attempt failure. A dispense attempt reported a pick failure on virtual cassette number
1. This tally is not incremented if the cassette low media sensor is activated.
PKFAIL 2 As PKFAIL 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
SIZEERR1 Bill size errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one undersize,
oversize or extra bill was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
SIZEERR2 As SIZEERR1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DOUBLE1 Double bill errors. A dispense attempt was not successful because at least one double bill
was detected from virtual cassette number 1.
DOUBLE2 As DOUBLE1 for virtual cassette number 2.

Tally Description
REJECT1 Bills picked from virtual cassette number 1 and purged due to bill verification errors. This
count does not include good bills picked and purged during dispense by position.
REJECT2 As REJECT1 for virtual cassette number 2.
PICKED 1 Bills picked and successfully stacked from virtual cassette number 1 or successfully
diverted during dispense by position.
PICKED 2 As PICKED 1 for virtual cassette number 2.
DISP OPS Dispense, dispense by position or clear main transport operations attempted.
TRANSEN Dispenser transport sensor fault or transport jam. A dispense or zero dispense attempt
was not successful because a fault was detected on one of the dispenser transport
sensors:
The fault may have occurred for a number of reasons:
l Sensor blocked initially (jam or sensor fault).
l Bill not seen under sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
l Bill did not clear sensor at correct time (jam or sensor fault)
l Main motor timing disk failure (jam or sensor fault).
COMMINIT Reserved
COMMRET Reserved
COMMFAIL Reserved
RES 5070 Reserved for H-8010-5070-XX-08 currency dispenser.
EXITSHUT Exit shutter faults detected. The conditions causing this tally to be incremented are:
l Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter failed to open during a present operation.
l Exit shutter sensors indicate that shutter is not closed on initiation of a dispense,
dispense by position, clear dispense, purge, or present operation.
l EXIT_SHUTTER_TEST or DIAG_SHUTTER_TEST failed.
PRES OPS Present operations attempted.
PRSTROPS Other presenter operations attempted, for example, clamp or purge.
PRSTRJAM Presenter mechanism was not in the correct position or jammed during a dispense,
dispense by position, clear dispense, purge or present operation.
PRES_ERR Reserved
EXITSENS Reserved
PRESDISK Presenter timing disk failed to operate correctly.

Tally Description
PRESJAM Presenter bill jam was detected:
l Presenter transport sensors failed to block/clear while tracking bills
l Sensors failed static on/off test
l Sensors blocked initially on present or at end of purge.
SER READ Number of serial number scan operations.
INVNOTES Number of invalid notes scanned.
SERCHARS Number of serial number read characters.
INVCHARS Number of invalid characters.
SNROPERR Number of serial number read (SNR) transport open errors.
The Tally record types listed are defined in the Module Management Subsystem FS with the remaining
Tallies being part of the TMS Interface Support Area NVRAM.
The tally mnemonics listed are not reported by the firmware in any response message, but are included
for maintainability purposes due to them being used in the source code when operating with tally
values.

STRAPPING
Currency Dispenser Control Board
D1
Diagnostic
LEDs
D8
SW1
Diagnostic
Swtiches Dispenser
Security
SW8 Switch
Level 0 Diagnostic
LEDs
The strapping associated with the Currency Dispenser Control board has the following default position:
l First Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) - set switches 1 to 8 to OFF for normal operation.
l Second Dispenser command switch pack (SW1) - set switch 1 to ON and switches 2 to 8 to OFF for
normal operation.
l EPS2 functionality:
l Switch pack SW1, switch 4 down (ON) - EPS 2 Full Enable feature enabled.
This feature activates full EPS2 functionality, including ‘fatal on detection’ and ‘auto
present’, following attack detection.
l Switch pack SW1, switch 5 down (ON) - EPS 2 Auto-Purge feature enabled.
This feature provides EPS 2 full functionality with the exception of ‘auto-present’.
The Auto-Purge feature may be ordered in combination with EPS2 Full Enable feature.
l Switch pack SW1, switch 6 down (ON) - EPS 2.2 enabled.

ADJUSTMENTS
Drive Belt Tension
Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the intermediate
pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of dispenser.
l Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied to the mid
span of the drive belt.
l If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
l Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
l Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
l Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.
Drive Belt Arrangement - Rear Access
1.0 N (0.21 lb)
Motor Mounting Screws

(4 places)
Drive Belt Arrangement - Front Access
Motor Mounting
Screws
(4 Places)
1.0 N (0.21lb)
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure

Note: The S1 Currency Dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in the 58XX and
56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these are valid.

When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering organization must
establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be dispensed. These singularity values must
then be entered to every ATM dispensing that currency, upon initial installation or whenever the
dispenser control board or the LVDT has been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated dispenser.
Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated dispenser will give incorrect
results.
Calibrating the Dispenser

Note: Dispensers are shipped pre-calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is required if the
LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new version of firmware is download.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser control board. This
compensation factor allows for differences that exist between the singularities calculated by different
LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances. The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor
automatically as bills of a known singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual
average of good single bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the
singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly.
Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by
the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.
To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be dispensed after a power
reset. This may be local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on the XP
platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. For details of System Application, refer to NCR Self Service
Support, System Application User Guide (B006-6167).
Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to insert the field
engineer’s Service Key.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test currency, and
set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to currency cassette chapter in
the dispense section of this manual for details.
2. Load the test currency into the cassette.
3. Insert the cassette into the dispenser.
4. Put the ATM into supervisor mode.
5. Select the SELF-SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SUPERVISOR menu.
6. Then select the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
7. Then choose the USB CASH HANDLER option. The system will then instruct the CE to wait while
the Dispenser Transport is cleared.
8. The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Then choose the SET option.

10. The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown below.
The menu is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.
11. To start changing the note configuration activate the Reset option.
12. Enter Note Size for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
13. Enter the Singularity for Type 1. This is repeated for Types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
14. To accept all the changes made select OK.
15. The system will redisplay the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu shown below.
16. To finally confirm the changes activate the Toggle option to change the NO option to YES.
17. Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC option.
18. Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.
19. Operate the dispenser security switch.
20. Select SET NOTES option from the CASH HANDLER menu. The number of notes to be picked is
40 (50 for special China version) from cassette type 1
21. Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.
22. Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before stopping the
command.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as described in the
next section.

Establishing Singularity and Size

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40 (50 bills for
special China version) dispensed bills five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the
nature of the currency the singularity calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures shown
in the Parameters Option and take the average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number)
and the answers are the singularity and size values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same
currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should comprise of new bills.
Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the bills
into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside down (see the following
illustration). This makes sure that variations in inking are allowed for.
The singularity procedure is as follows:
1. Prepare cassettes to accept the denominations of currency you will normally be dispensing from
the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for the
method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer to currency
cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting.
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes and insert the
cassettes into the dispenser.
5. Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.
6. Select the SELF-SERVICE CONFIGURATION option.
7. Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.

8. Then choose the CASH HANDLER option. The system will display the following screen.
9. Then choose the LEARN option.

10. Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during the LEARN
process.
11. The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the cassette types available
(only those present in the ATM) as shown below.

12. Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu below which
allows you to change the number of bill to be dispensed.
13. Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.

14. The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.
15. The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

16. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette and type
selected or all cassette types if applicable. The figures are obtained through the Parameters
Option
17. Empty the purge bin as necessary.

18. Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each cassette type
loaded.
19. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average singularity and size
for each cassette type.
20. Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu
21. Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.
22. To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.
25. Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.

The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1 diagnostics and
dispense notes to test the validity of the singularity values. A minimum of one cassette full of used notes
and one cassette full of new notes of each denomination should be dispensed. New notes must be
loaded with alternate packs right way up and then upside down. Bowed notes must be loaded with the
bow towards the note pusher.
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per transaction. If
the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should be recalculated.
Calculation of Reject Rate

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills and total bills
picked are taken from tallies.
Total Number of Rejected Bills

Reject Rate = × 100%
Total Bills Picked + Total Number of Rejected Bills
Error Messages
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages described below.
Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION menu a CLEAR
command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation fails then the following error
screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed for five seconds before the next one is
displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

Change Parameter Errors

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected then the
error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is highlighted and you can re-enter a
correct value in the error position.
The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new parameter value
again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked, the main dispenser screen
reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake becomes apparent at this point then the user can
select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:
l ERROR - VALID RANGE XX - XXX - Parameter value is outside the permissible range. This applies to
bill sizes and singularity values
l DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE - A duplicate value has been entered in the presentation order
l ERROR - INVALID SEQUENCE - The user has input fewer than four values for the presentation
order.

Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular cassette type fails
then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried repeatedly until successful, or a fatal
error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the error screen shown below appears, and after five
seconds, you are returned to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error occurs while
learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point can not be written to the
dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION
menu.
Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error occurs which is not
fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a fatal error occurs. When a fatal
error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR screen showing one of the following messages
is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.
Unable To Read Parameters - A fatal error has occurred while reading data from the dispenser. Unable
to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can not continue with configuration.
Configuration Not Completed - Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser. The configuration data is
written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate dispenser calls. One sets the new bill sizes, one
sets the new singularity values and the third sets the new presentation order. Because the data is split
into three parts, if this type of error occurs then the dispenser configuration is incomplete.

Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras

The upper and lower SNR transport cameras should be cleaned as part of regular preventive
maintenance, especially in dusty environments. Cleaning will also be required to clear the states of
health ‘USB serial number read too many invalid characters’ or ‘USB serial number read too many invalid
serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number of invalid characters or invalid serial numbers
read reaches the configured thresholds (default 10% and 5% respectively).
Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained grime can be
removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol free wipe.
SNR camera
on fixed guide
SNR camera
on moving guide
SNR transport at rear of first pick
AUTHORIZATION AND AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE

Parts Validation
Parts Validation is a security protection mechanism that prevents unauthorized users replacing certain
critical parts on NCR ATMs.
The following procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an FRU item or
as part of a presenter swap.
1. Insert the USB Service Key. There may be a short delay while the key is recognized.
2. Open the System Application menu.
3. Select the Device Status List.
4. Select the Cash Dispenser status reporting Authorization Required.

5. Select the part requiring authorization:

l Authorize control board
l Authorize device
6. The USB Cash Dispenser test is performed.
7. If the USB Cash Dispenser test is successful, the part is authorized and the Device Status List is
displayed.
8. If the test fails, the part is not authorized and a summary report is displayed.
Do the following:
1. Check the USB Service Key is correctly inserted.
2. Check the key has the appropriate authorization security level.
3. Repeat steps 2 to 6.
Authentication
Authentication is a security protection mechanism that prevents fraudulent activity. The following
procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an FRU item or as part of a
presenter swap.
Dispense Protection Levels:
l USB - No action required. Authentication is automatic.

l Logical
l Physical
The following procedure must be carried out if the Dispense Protection Level of the ATM is Logical or
Physical.
1. Insert the USB Service Key (required for Logical Dispense Protection Level)
3. Select Self-Service Configuration.
5. Select USB Cash Dispenser.
6. Select Authenticate.
If the protection level is Logical, no further action is required.
If the protection level is Physical, complete one of the following actions within one minute:
l Toggle the dispenser security switch.
l If not occupied, insert a cassette in the bottom configured position of the dispenser.
l Remove the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the dispenser and re-insert within
5 seconds.
7. The result of the authentication function is displayed.
8. Select OK to return to the USB Cash Dispenser menu.
9. If authentication was not successful, repeat steps 6 and 7.

Dispense Protection Configuration

The Dispense Protection Level is set by the ATM system, not by a single component - changing the
dispenser control board will not change the protection level. The highest level set in the ATM system will
always be retained.
Dispense Protection Levels from low to high:
l USB
l Logical
l Physical
At the request of the ATM owner, the dispense protection level can be changed by doing the following:
1. Insert the USB Service Key.

5. Select USB Cash Dispenser.
6. Select Device Parameter Configuration.
7. Use the screen toggle button to select the required protection level.
8. Select OK.
9. Configure New Parameter
10. Select Yes using the toggle function.
11. Select OK.
12. If the level is being raised, complete one of the following actions within one minute:
l Toggle the dispenser security switch.
l Insert a cassette in the bottom configured position of the dispenser.
l Remove and insert the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the dispenser.
13. If the level change was not successful, select OK and repeat steps 6 to 12.
If it was successful, proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification if required.


Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)
On the Rear Access Currency Dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor and pump
assembly, solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a mounting place for the dispenser
control board. Its removal gives access to these components and also to the LVDT assembly.
Dispenser Motor
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
1. Disconnect the cable at the bottom left-hand side of the control board.
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable

2. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left-hand side of the control board
cover.
3. Loosen the two screws on the left-hand side of the control board cover.
4. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right-hand side of the control board cover.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
5. Remove the control board cover from the electronics box.

6. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness on to the electronics box.
7. Disconnect the cables from the lower right-hand side of the electronics box.
8. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. Check that each connector is labelled
with its control board connector number.
9. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.

10. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off the timing
belt.
11. Remove the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by pushing the rivet
centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of the timing disk.
Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor
12. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of the timing
disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
Timing Belt
Screws
(4 off)
13. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.
Screw
Earth
Strap

14. At the upper left-hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the earth strap to
the presenter.
15. Remove the air hose from the pump.
Air Hose
16. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the presenter.

17. Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the Upper Pick
Module.
18. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft, and lift it clear of the
dispenser.
Replacing the Electronics Box

Fitting the replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Control Board

Before removing the control board to resolve a dispenser performance issue (when Stack or Present
command are not working for example), perform the following to make sure that the board is in fact the
root cause:
1. Check the connections to the board are all seated correctly.

2. Check that the connectors are undamaged.
3. Set switches 3 and 8 to ON, then perform a reset to re-boot the system.
4. Re-calibrate the dispenser in System Application (Self Service Configuration menu), to set the
note configuration and parameters.
5. Authorise and authenticate the control board.
6. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Stack command with one note. Observe the note’s movement:
it should exit the stack table smoothly and should not hesitate at the interface between the stack
table and the presenter.
7. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Present command with one note. Observe the note’s
movement as it moves to the exit.
8. Use Device Diagnostics to issue a Clear (retract) command with one note. Observe the note’s
movement as it moves to the purge bin.
9. Repeat the Stack, Present and Clear commands for a 40 note stack.
10. Repeat the sequence of commands for a one note stack and then a 40 note stack a further two
times each.
11. During the tests, there should be no present errors such as skewing or splaying; no pick failures
(M_Status 3); no purges except for the ones under the Clear command; no sensor failures or
jams in the main transport (M_Status 5) or presenter transport (M_Status 18); or presenter
clamp/alignment mechanism problems (M_Status 12).
12. If after this process, the original error is still evident, proceed with removing and replacing the
control board.

Dispenser Control Board - Rear Access
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
Remove the control board as follows:
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw

3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right-hand side securing the control board cover
to the electronics box.
6. Disconnect the remaining cables from the control board. The strain relief fixing for the USB cable
must be released prior to removal.
7. Unscrew and remove the screws securing the heat sink to the left-hand side of the electronics
box.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics box and
then remove the control board.
Replacing the Control Board

Fitting the replacement Control Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Dispenser Control Board - Front Access

On the Front Access Dispenser the control board is attached to its mounting plate by four M4 Pozidrive
screws into stand-offs and a further two M3 screws through the heat sinks, as shown in the illustration
below.
The control board mounting plate is hung in slots in the presenter side frames and fastened by a screw
at each side in the positions indicated in the illustration below:
Slot
(Both Sides)
Screw
(Both Sides)
Removing the Main Motor

For the Rear Access Presenter procedure, see the section “Removing the Electronics Box”.

Front Access
Proceed as follows to remove the main motor from the front access:
SSR
Assembly
Cable
Guard
Main Motor
Screws Timing
(4 Places) Disk
Timing Disk
Sensor
Handwheel
1. Remove the cable guard (3 screws) at the left-hand side of the dispenser and let it hang free.
2. Remove two connectors from the SSR assembly and then the 4 screws (two at each side) and
remove the assembly.
3. Remove the green handwheel (2 screws).
4. Remove the circlip and retaining washer and slip off the timing belt between the handwheel and
main motor shaft.
5. Remove the plastic rivets holding the timing disk sensor and move the sensor clear of the timing
disk.
6. Slacken the four screws holding the main motor to the side frame.
7. Ease the timing belt off the timing disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
8. Remove the timing disk from its shaft and lift the timing belt off the main motor pulley.
9. Remove four motor screws, slackened in step 6, and lift the motor out of the slot in the side
frame.
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pump.
Removing the LVDT

Dispenser LVDT - Rear Access
In the Rear Access dispenser the LVDT assembly is attached between the side frames of the presenter
by two screws at either side. To remove the LVDT proceed as follows:
Note: There is no field adjustment on this LVDT version.
1. Make sure you have access to both sides of the dispenser.

2. Remove the electronics box as described in the previous procedure.
3. Remove the four screws attaching the LVDT assembly to the presenter side frames two at either
end.

Screws
Screws
4. Slide the LVDT forward and out via the space vacated by the electronics box, taking care not to
trap any wires.
Dispenser LVDT - Front Access

Remove the LVDT assembly from the Front Access dispenser as follows:
LVDT Shield Screws

(2 at each side)
LVDT Assembly Screws

(2 at each side)
LVDT Transport
Drive Shaft
1. Remove the main motor, refer to section “Removing the Main Motor”.
2. Remove the LVDT shield (2 screws in presenter side frames at both sides).
3. Remove the circlips inside and outside of the right-hand side frame, on the drive shaft of the
LVDT upper belt transport.

4. Slide the shaft out of the presenter right-hand side frame so that the tension is removed from
the transport belts.
5. Remove the screws from the LVDT assembly (2 screws in the presenter side frames at both
sides).
6. Ease the LVDT assembly out between the belts.
Replacing the LVDT

Fitting the replacement LVDT is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Electronic Verification of LVDT

The LVDT should be verified by following the Calibrating the Dispenser procedure section of this
chapter.
The only additional action required is to check that the LVDT calibration ratio returned in the last byte of
M_DATA is 80H ± 12.5%, that is between the following limits:
l Minimum: 50H
l Mean: 80H
l Maximum: B0H
Note: Values outside the range given above indicate that further investigation of the LVDT may be
necessary, but values less than 60H and greater than A0H should be investigated.
Pick Module Timing

The S1 dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick
modules and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to
be set. The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick module chapter of the dispense section of
this manual.
CABLING
Internal Cables
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Currency Dispenser. Refer to
the Aria pick module section of the Dispense Chapter of this manual Aria pick module internal cables.
Dispenser Main Motor

DISP AC
Motor
J18 Jumper
P1 J1
Main Motor
1 LIVE 3 3 4 2 1
Filter*
2 NEUTRAL 1 1 3 1 1 SSR SSR 2 2
3 GROUND 2 2
Jumper 3
1 2
Frame
Motor Run
Ground 1
Capacitor
SSR J1
1 3 SSR
2 4 SSR
* The filter is present only on OEM dispenser models

Dispenser Interconnection Diagram
AC Interlock Main
SSR
Motor
External S1 Devices
Sensors: Exit, Transport Sensors 3, 3A, 4,
5, Purge Overfill, Stack.
UNI
DC J1 J8 LEDs: Exit, Transport LEDs 3, 3A, 4,
M1 5, Purge Overfill, Stack.
Clamp Motor
USB J2 J13 Align Motor
Interface
Present Motor
Timing Disks - Main, Present, Clamp Sensors,

J6
Dispenser Control Board
Up, Down, Align Home
J9 Note Thickness Sensor/LVDT

Pick Sensor
Double Pick LED
J4 J1 J5 Solenoid Valve
Pick
Interface Pick Arm Timing
Disk
To Lower Pick
J4
Module I/F (P1)
J18 +24V Interlock
J5 Clamp Mid Sensor and LED
External S1 Devices
Exterior Shutter Motor
J5
2
Interior Shutter Motor
J20 J3 Fascia Shutter I C J1
To Power Supply
J4
J21 TTL Shutter (For Non S1 Dispensers)
J11 Fluiditi ATM Security
J17 +24V Power Supply

Front Access Presenters Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)

J8 P1
1 AC MOT ON (White) 1
SSR
2 +5V 2
3 TSEN1 (Green) G T1
5 TSEN1 + (White) W Sensor
4 T1LED + (Red) R
T1 LED
6 T1LED (Black) B
8 T2LED + (Red) R
T2 LED
10 T2LED (Black) B

13 W Sensor
LINK1 (Green) G T3A
TSEN3+ (White) W Sensor
12 T3LED + (Red) R
T3 LED
14 B
LINK2 (Black) R
T3A LED
T3LED (Black) B
16 TLED4 + (Red) R
T4 LED
18 TLED4 (Black) B
19 T5SEN (Green) G T5
21 T5SEN + (White) W Sensor
20 T5LED + (Red) R
T5 LED
22 T5LED (Black) B
23 GND C Purge Bin
24 PURGE INb NO Microswitch
Front Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 2 of 4)
J13
7 PRES A+ 4
8 PRES C+ 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ 2 Motor
2 PRES D+ 1
9 CLAMP A+ 1
10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4
11 ALIGN A+ 1
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
5 ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
6 ALIGN D+ 4
J20
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
Fascia
3 12C_SDA_BUF 3
Shutter
4 GND 4 PCB
4 12C_SCL_BUF 5
5 GND 6
External S1 Device


J6
1 Clamp Up LED (Red) R
Clamp
3 GND (Black) B
Up
5 +5V (White) W
Sensor
7 Clamp Up (Green) G
9 Clamp Down LED (Red) R
Clamp
11 GND (Black) B
Down
13 +5V (White) W
Sensor
15 Clamp Down (Green) G
2 Align LED (Red) R
Align
4 GND (Black) B

Home
6 +5V (White) W
8 Align Home (Green) G
10 Pres TDisk (Red) R
12 GND (Black) B Timing
Disk
14 +5V (White) W
16 Pres TDisk (Green) G
18 Main TD LED (Red) R
Main
20 GND (Black) B
Timing
22 +5V (White) W
Disk
24 Main TDisk (Green) G
19
17
23 Config1
21

J4 J1
1 CAS ID1b - 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2b - 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3b - 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4b - 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMPb - 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOWb - 30
12 GND 29
13 N/C 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 GND 25
Pick Interface Board

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLEb 22
20 COILENb 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1

Rear Access Presenter Cabling (Sheet 1 of 4)

J8 P1
1 AC MOT ON (White) 2
SSR
2 +5V (Black) 1
4 T1LED + (Red) R
T1 LED
6 T1LED (Black) B
8 T2LED + (Red) R
T2 LED
10 T2LED (Black) B

13 W Sensor
LINK1 (Green) G T3A
TSEN3+ (White) W Sensor
12 T3LED + (Red) R
T3 LED
14 B
LINK2 (Black) R
T3A LED
T3LED (Black) B
16 TLED4 + (Red) R
T4 LED
18 TLED4 (Black) B
19 T5SEN (Green) G T5
21 T5SEN + (White) W Sensor
20 T5LED + (Red) R
T5 LED
22 T5LED (Black) B
23 GND C Purge Bin
24 PURGE INb NO Microswitch
J13
7 PRES A+ 4
8 PRES C+ 3 Presenter
1 PRES B+ 2 Motor
2 PRES D+ 1
9 CLAMP A+ 1
10 CLAMP C+ 2 Clamp
3 CLAMP B+ 3 Motor
4 CLAMP D+ 4
11 ALIGN A+ 1
12 ALIGN C+ 2 Align
5 ALIGN B+ 3 Motor
6 ALIGN D+ 4
J5
CLAMP_MID_LED (RED) 3
GND (Black) 4
CLAMP_MID
+5V (White) 1
CLAMP_MID (Green) 2
J20
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
Fascia
3 2
1 C_SDA_BUF 3
Shutter
4 GND 4 PCB
4 12C_SCL_BUF 5
5 GND 6
External S1 Device


J6
1 Clamp Up LED (Red) R
Clamp
3 GND (Black) B
Up
5 +5V (White) W
Sensor
7 Clamp Up (Green) G
9 Clamp Down (Red) R
Clamp
11 GND (Black) B
Down
13 +5V (White) W
Sensor
15 Clamp Down (Green) G
2 Align LED (Red) R
Align
4 GND (Black) B

Home
6 +5V (White) W
8 Align Home (Green) G
10 Pres TDisk (Red) R
12 GND (Black) B Timing
Disk
14 +5V (White) W
16 Pres TDisk (Green) G
18 Main TD LED (Red) R
Main
20 GND (Black) B
Timing
22 +5V (White) W
Disk
24 Main TDisk (Green) G
19 Config 1a P87_J1 P87_P1
17 Config 1b
23 Config 2a MUD_J1 MUD_P1

21 Config 2b Link Open = P86
Link Closed = P87

J4 J1
1 CAS ID1b 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2b 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3b 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4b 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMPb 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOWb 30
12 GND 29
13 N/C 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 GND 25

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLEb 22
20 COILENb 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
This section includes pinouts of the connectors on the Currency Dispenser Control Board.
USB Connector
The USB Interface connector (J2) provides the USB interface to the USB dispenser control board. The
connector is a standard right-angled USB Type-B connector with the following pinout.
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D-
3 USB_D+
4 NC
5 GND

Transport LEDS and Sensors

The connector (J8) carries the signals to the currency dispenser transport LEDs and sensors 1 to 5, and
also provides interfaces to the purge bin and ac motor. This connector is a 24-way right-angle header
with the following pinout:
AC_MOTOR_ONb 1 2 +5 V
TSEN1 3 4 T1LED_POS
TSEN1_POS 5 6 T1LED
TSEN2 7 8 T2LED_POS
TSEN2_POS 9 10 T2_5LED
TSEN3 11 12 T3LED_POS1
TSEN3_POS 13 14 T3LED
TSEN4 15 16 T4LED_POS
TSEN4_POS 17 18 T4LED
TSEN5 19 20 T5LED_POS
TSEN5_POS 21 22 T2_5LED
GND 23 24 PURGE_INb
Pick Modules
The connector J4 provides the interface to the currency dispenser pick modules. It is a 40-way right-
angle latched header connector with the following pinout:
CAS_ID1b 1 2 GND
CAS_ID2b 3 4 GND
CAS_ID3b 5 6 GND
CAS_ID4b 7 8 GND
CAS_TEMPb 9 10 GND
CASLOWb 11 12 GND
N/C 13 14 LEDON_PICK
GND 15 16 GND
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLEb 19 20 COILENb
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 PICK_TXD
PICK_RXD 27 28 GND

GND 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
GND 33 34 GND
GND 35 36 GND
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V
Note Thickness Sensor/ LVDT

The connector (J9) provides the interface to the Note Thickness sensor (LVDT). This is a 10-way right
angled latch header connector with the following pinout:
+5 V 1 2 GND
STRAIN_REF 3 4 NTS1
NTS2 5 6 NULL_NTS
NULL_OK 7 8 N/C
LVDT_GAIN_SELb 9 10 N/C
Stepper Motors
The connector J13 provides the interface to the three stepper motors used in the currency dispenser.
This is a 12-way right-angled header with the following pinout:
PRES_A_POS 7 1 PRES_B_POS
RES_C_POS 8 2 PRES_D_POS
CLAMP_A_POS 9 3 CLAMP_B_POS
CLAMP_C_POS 10 4 CLAMP_D_POS
ALIGN_A_POS 11 5 ALIGN_B_POS
ALIGN_C_POS 12 6 ALIGN_D_POS
Intelligent Cassette Interface

The connector (J11) provides the interface from the USB dispenser control board to the ICS module. This
is a 10-way right-angle header with the following pinout:
+24 V 1 2 +24 V
GND 3 4 GND
+5 V 5 6 GND
ICS_TXD 7 8 ICS_RXD
GND 9 10 N/C

Clamp Middle Position Sensor

The connector (J5) provides the interface to the Clamp Tray Mid-Position sensor. The connector is a 4-
way right-angle header with the following pinout:
1 CLAMP_MID_LED
2 GND
3 +5V_MID-SEN
4 CLAMP_MID
Motor Sensors
The connector (J6) provides the interface to the stepper motor sensors. The connector is a 24-way right-
angle header with the following pinout:
CLAMP_UP_LED 1 2 ALIGN_LED
GND 3 4 GND
+5V_CLAMP_UP 5 6 +5V_ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_UP 7 8 ALIGN_HOME
CLAMP_DOWN_LED 9 10 PRES_TD_LED
GND 11 12 GND
+5V_CLAMP_DOWN 13 14 +5V_PRES_TDISK
CLAMP_DOWN 15 16 PRES_TDISK
CONF1 17 18 MAIN_TD_LED
GND 19 20 GND
CONF2 21 22 +5V_MAIN_TDISK
GND 23 24 MAIN_TDISK
+24V Connector
The connector (J17) provides the +24v power supply to the onboard regulators which generate +12v,
+5V and +3.3V. The connector is a 2 way right angled header with the following pinout:
+24V 1
GND 2
+24V_Interlock Connector
The connector (J18) provides the +24v interlock power supply to the motor drive and solenoid drive.
The connector is a 3 way right angled header with the following pinout:
+24V_INT 1
GND 2
+24V _INT 3

Fascia Shutter I2C Connector

The connector (J20) provides the I2C interface to the fascia shutter. The connector is a 6 way right
angled header with the following pinout:
GND 1
GND 2
I2C_SDA_BUF 3
GND 4
I2C_SCL_BUF 5
GND 6
TTL Shutter Connector

The connector (J21) provides the interface to the TTL shutter. The connector is a 4 way right angled
header with the following pinout:
1 SHUT_OPEN
2 GND
3 SHUT_ONb
4 Shut_LOCK
TEST ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

l Vacuum gauge and adaptor.
l Test notes.
For the preventive maintenance schedule and details of the required tasks for the S1 dispenser, refer to
the Preventive Maintenance section of this manual.

REVISION


ARIA PICK MODULE
INTRODUCTION
There are two types of Aria pick module; the single pick module holds one currency cassette, and the
double pick module holds two cassettes, one above the other. The term Pick Unit is also used in this
chapter to mean a cassette position, that is, there is one pick unit provided by a single pick module and
two pick units in a double pick module.
The Aria single pick module is shown in the illustration below.
The Aria double pick module is shown in the following two illustrations:

SPECIFICATIONS
Weight
The weights of the pick module and cassettes are:
l Single pick module = 6.3 kg (13.9 lb.)

l Double pick module = 9.7 kg (21.38 lb.)
l Currency cassette empty = 3.2 kg (7.05 lb.)
l Currency cassette full = 6.0 kg (13.2 lb.)
Voltage And Current

The Pick Interface Board circuits require the following voltages at the currents shown:
l +5 V 0.25 V at 0.2 A (maximum)

l +12 V 1.20 V at 0.1 A (maximum)
l +24 V 2.40 V at 0.5 A (maximum).
Function of the Pick Module

The functions performed by pick modules are to:
l provide support for currency cassettes

l identify the inserted cassettes
l open the front of the inserted cassettes
l lift (pick) bills one by one from the cassettes
l detect when currency is running lowv
l transport the bills to the pick module above or to the presenter.
The components of the pick modules and presenter to achieve the above functions are:
l cassette guides and latch

l cassette identity sensors
l pick module keyplate
l pick action:
l pick arms
l vacuum cups
l pick timing:
l timing disk
l pick solenoid
l pick sensor
l cassette low sensor
l belt transport
l main motor and vacuum pump
l pick interface boards
l serial number read.

Cassette Guides and Latch

The currency cassette rests on rails on the side frames of the pick module. Upper plastic guides on the
side frames and the spring loaded catch hold the cassette firmly in position.
Cassette Identity Sensors

A printed circuit board on the side of the pick module carries two sets of four encapsulated reed
switches. Each set of switches is in close proximity to an inserted currency cassette and is influenced by
the magnetic fields of small permanent magnets in a housing on the side of the cassette.
The magnets can be moved within the housing or left out so that certain combinations of reed switches
SW1, SW2, SW3, SW4, are operated. This achieves a binary code which is used to identify the cassette as
type 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. When the currency cassette is inserted into a pick module in any position in the
dispenser, it signals its identity via the reed switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is able
to select the proper one for dispensing bills of a specific denomination.
Pick Module Keyplate

When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick module keyplate enter the holes
in its base. The cassette door is pushed into the cassette base, leaving the front open to permit the
currency to be picked and dispensed.
Pick Action
The stack is formed by the action of the bill alignment mechanism, so the S1 dispenser does not require
the accurate presenter/pick module timing relationship that the 56xx stacker wheel type of presenter
does, however, the Aria pick module timing should still be set to ensure clean delivery of the bills from
the cassette into the pick module transport.
Pick Timing
The pick shaft gets its oscillating motion from the gear segment attached to a crank which is driven by a
cam follower riding in a track in the cluster drive cam. The cluster drive is driven from the transport
through an idler gear. The pick arms move continuously between a position where the pick vacuum
cups are above the D wheels to where the vacuum cups are pushing the currency back into the cassette.

Attached to the cluster drive cam is a plastic disk printed with timing marks. A cut out section of the disk
forms a timing arc which is detected by an optical switch and is used (ANDed with a signal from the
currency dispenser control board) to produce the electrical pulses that energize and de-energize the
pick solenoid valve. The solenoid valve is energized following a transition through sensor clear to sensor
blocked and it remains energized while the segment on the disk is obscuring the optical sensor. This
time corresponds to the time when the pick arms are just reversing away from the currency in the
cassette until they are above the D wheels.
When the solenoid valve is de-energized it closes off the pump section of tubing. The tubing to the pick
arm vents to atmosphere via backflow through the de-energized solenoid. The note drops off the
suction cups and is gripped by the D wheels and pinch rolls.
The letter D and numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 printed on the timing disk are used to set and check the timing of
individual pick modules and this adjustment is described in the “Adjustments” section of this chapter.
Pick Sensor
The pick sensor consists of two assemblies hard wired to the pick harness. A photo-transistor is on one
assembly and an infra-red light emitting diode is on the other. The light emitting diode is in the same
assembly as the cassette low sensor (see next section). The pick sensor and the LED are attached so that
they “look” across the path of the notes between the pick mechanism and the transport. When a note
blocks the light path, it is detected. The pick sensor output is converted into note width by monitoring
the number of interrupts while the sensor is blocked with the interrupts generated by the main
transport timing disk on the presenter. A difference of plus 3 or minus 5 timing wheel ticks in width
from the known width of the currency (stored in NVRAM) will cause the note to be rejected to the
purge bin and the pick to be attempted three more times.
Cassette Low Sensor
Keyplate
Reed Switch
and Pick LED
Assembly
The cassette low sensor consists of a reed switch attached to the pick module keyplate. The assembly
also houses the pick LED. The reed switch is held on a bracket which projects into the open door of the
cassette. It operates when a permanent magnet attached to the cassette currency pusher mechanism
approaches the front of the cassette as the currency is dispensed. In the plastic cassette, the position of
this magnet can be set in two positions to actuate the switch when 75 50 or 200 50 notes are left in the
cassette.

Belt Transport
In the pick module transport the D-Wheel shaft and the pinch wheel shaft are driven through a gear
train. The gear train of the top pick module meshes with the gear train of the presenter. In the Aria
double pick module, the gear train of the second pick position is driven by a toothed belt from the top
module.
Notes are driven from the D-Wheel/pinch wheel shafts into plastic note guides that deflect them into
the vertical transport. The vertical transport consists of three belts stretched between an upper (driven)
shaft and a lower idler shaft. These belts press the notes against smooth plastic skid plates while driving
them upwards into, either the transport of a higher pick module or the presenter transport. The top
shaft of the pick module vertical transport is driven by a toothed belt from a pulley wheel fixed to the D-
Wheel shaft.
Main Motor and Vacuum Pump

The dispenser main motor drives the LVDT transport and all pick modules via toothed timing belts. It also
drives the vacuum pump to provide a vacuum to the pick line via 6 mm bore tubing. A vacuum reservoir
is located near the pump to improve the system vacuum, and an air filter in the tubing above the first
pick module protects the pump from damage caused by ingress of grit particles.
The motor control circuits are located on the dispenser control board.
Pick Interface Boards

The boards act as an interface between the actuators and sensors in the currency dispenser pick module
and the currency dispenser control board.
The interface boards use mixed technology, with both Surface Mount Technology (SMT) and Plated
Through Hole (PTH) components. A ribbon cable harness connects the boards to cascaded pick interface
boards in two, three, or four cassette dispensers. All the control lines from the dispenser control board,
and the sensor information returning to that board, are routed via a parallel bus interface. Signals
between cascaded pick interface boards are boosted where necessary.
The following diagrams show a Single Pick Interface plus a Double Pick Interface board and two Double
Pick Interface Boards connected to the Currency Dispenser Control Board.

Single Pick Interface Board

The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of the single pick
interface board.

Double Pick Interface Board

The following illustration shows the layout of the components on the front and rear of the double pick
interface board.

Serial Number Read

The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti-fraud feature in the double pick module,
primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads the denomination and serial number of every
note as it passes from the pick to the presenter, and also takes an image.
Top SNR camera
Bottom SNR camera
There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.
CN2 CN3 CN4

CN1 Input CIS Head CIS Head
(not used) (SNR open sensor) (Moving guide) (Fixed guide)
CN5 CN6
DC Power Input USB HS
(to dispenser board) (to USB hub)

Note that the scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific control board by
serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out individually. The Field Replaceable
Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire pick module.
ADJUSTMENTS
Pick Module Timing
S1 dispensers use a bill alignment mechanism to form the note stack and do not require any timing
relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules and the presenter.
The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set. The adjustment
procedures in this section are described for single and double pick modules. The aim of these
procedures is to attach correctly timed pick modules below the presenter with the timing disks of the
pick units aligned to the timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4, reading from the topmost pick module to the
bottom.
1 High Dispenser 2 High Dispenser 3 High Dispenser 4 High Dispenser

Presenter Presenter Presenter Presenter
P1 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1 P2 Timing Disk = 1
Timing Disk = 2 Timing Disk = 2 Timing Disk = 2
P1 Timing Disk = 3 P2 Timing Disk = 3
Timing Disk = 4
P1 = Single Pick Module

P2 = Double Pick Module
Note: Where there is a mixture of Aria and 56XX type pick modules, then the Aria type must always be
the bottom pick module.
You must carry out the procedures in the order given:
l Separating the Pick Units of the Double Pick Module

l Pick Unit Internal Timing
l Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship
l Pick Module to Presenter Timing
l 1 High Dispenser
l 2 High Dispenser
l 3 High Dispenser
l 4 High Dispenser.

Separating the Pick Units of the Aria Double Pick Module

To adjust a double pick module you must first isolate the gear trains of the two pick units by removing
the timing belt shown in the following figure.
Retain the timing belt until required to reinstall it in the procedure “Joining the Pick Units of the Double
Pick Module”.
Pick Unit Internal Timing

The only relationship to be set in the pick unit is between the pick wheel and the cam driven vacuum
arm line.
Note: In a double pick unit make the adjustment on the upper pick unit first
The method of setting is as follows:

1. Position the teeth mesh between the drive segment and pick line so that the upper tooth of the
drive segment is above the upper tooth of the pick line.
2. Take off and retain the 26T idler gear directly below the pick line (left side of the module looking
from the currency cassette).
3. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the pick D wheel is free of its mating tension
wheel.
4. Rotate the drive cluster in a clockwise direction until the D timing mark on the timing disk lines
5. Rotate the gears of the pick module transport until the interrupted part of the pick D wheels is
away from the pick arms. Turn the gears until a gap of from 0.5 mm 0.5 mm (0.02 in. 0.02 in.)
exists between the leading edges of the pick D wheels and the tension wheels as shown in the
first figure above.
6. Replace the idler gear removed in step 2. Be careful not to dislodge the setting.
7. Carry out steps 1 to 6 on the lower pick unit.
Double Pick Module Pick Unit Relationship

When the internal timing of both pick units of the double pick module has been set, the pick units have
to be locked in a fixed timing relationship. Proceed as follows:
1. Rotate the gear train of the upper pick unit to move the timing disk in a clockwise direction until
the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
CAUTION
Always rotate the gear train in its normal direction of travel. The pick timing
disks should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and
forwards.
2. Rotate the gear train of the lower pick unit until the 2 timing mark on the drive cluster timing
disk lines up with the timing sensor body.

3. Place the timing belt (removed in the procedure “Separating the Pick Units of the Double Pick
Module”) around the pulley wheel of the lower pick position and put it on as many teeth as
possible of the pulley wheel of the upper pick position, taking care not to dislodge the settings.
Turn the upper gear train in the normal direction of travel (see Caution above) to ride the timing
belt fully on to the pulley wheel.
Presenter Timing
The S1 bill alignment dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of
the pick modules and the presenter.
PIck Module to Presenter Timing

Once the pick modules have been prepared, as in the previous procedures, the pick modules can be
assembled with a presenter to produce the complete currency dispenser. There are no timing
adjustments to the presenter.
CAUTION
The dispenser is heavy. Get help to lift it.
1 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module to move the timing disk in a clockwise direction
until the 1 timing mark on the drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor body (see
above illustration).

CAUTION
disk should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and
forwards.
2. Attach the pick module to the presenter.
3. Check that the 1 timing mark is in line with the timing sensor body.
2 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module to move the timing disks in a clockwise direction
until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing sensor
body.
CAUTION
forwards.
2. Check that the 2 timing mark on the lower drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing
sensor body.
3. Attach the double pick module to the presenter.
4. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1 and 2 should be in line with their
respective timing sensor bodies.
3 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the double pick module (observe the caution below) to move the timing
disks in a clockwise direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines
CAUTION
disk should turn clockwise. Do not move the gear train backwards and
forwards.
sensor body.
3. Attach the pick module to the presenter.

4. Rotate the gear train of the single pick module (observe the caution above) to move the timing
disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the cluster timing disk lines up with the
timing sensor body.
5. Attach the single pick module to the bottom pick module of the double pick module.
6. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, and 3 should be in line with their
respective timing sensor bodies and a presenter timing arrow should be next to the timing stud.
4 High Dispenser
1. Rotate the gear train of the first double pick module to move the timing disks in a clockwise
direction until the 1 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing disk lines up with the timing
sensor body.
CAUTION
forwards.
sensor body.
3. Attach the double pick module to the presenter.
4. Rotate the gear train of the lower double pick module (observe the caution above) to move the
timing disks in a clockwise direction until the 3 timing mark on the upper drive cluster timing
disk lines up with the timing sensor body.
sensor body.
6. Attach the double pick module to the bottom of the first double pick module.
7. Check that all the timing marks are aligned. Timing marks 1, 2, 3, and 4 should be in line with
their respective timing sensor bodies.
Note: For dispenser assembly the procedure can be carried out by building from pick unit 4 upwards
with the presenter added last.
Note: Re-configuration is required when downgrading from four to three or three to two pick modules.
The NVRAM must be cleared to de-configure the removed pick modules.
TEST TOOLS
None.
INTERNAL CABLES
The diagrams in this section are the schematics of the internal cables of the Aria single and double pick
modules.

Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)

J2
1 Sen1 - (Green) G
Pick_Sen1
Single Pick Interface Board 2 Sen1 + (White) W
3 TEMP1 Loop (White)
6 LED GND (Black) B
Cassette
5 LED Pick1 + (Red) R
Low &
7 CasLow1 - (White) 1
LED_1
10 GND (White) 2
11 LED PickArm1 - (White) 3
Timing
12 LED PickArm1 + (Black) 2
Disk 1
13 PickArm1 (White) 1
15 VLV1 ON - (TP White) Valve_1-2
16 +24V (TP Black) Valve_1-1
Aria Single Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)

J4 J1
1 CAS ID1 - 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2 - 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3 - 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4 - 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMP - 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOW - 30
12 GND 29
13 GULP - 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 25
Single Pick Interface Board
GND
17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLE - 22
20 COILEN - 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1

Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 1 of 2)

J5
1 Sen1 - (Green) G
Pick_Sen1
2 Sen1 + (White) W
Cassette
Low &
3 Loop1 (White) GND (Black) B
LED_1
5 GND (White) GND (White) 2
Splice 1
9 LED PickArm1 - (Black) B
Timing
10 LED PickArm1 + (Red) R
Disk 1
11 PickArm1 (Green) G
14 +24V Valve_1-2
13 VLV1 ON- Valve_1-1
17 Sen2 - (Green) G
Pick_Sen2
18 Sen2 + (White) W
Cassette
Low &
19 Loop2 (White) GND (Black) B
LED_2
21 GND (White) GND (White) 2
Splice 2
25 LED PickArm2 - (Black) B
Timing
26 LED PickArm2 + (Red) R
Disk 2
27 PickArm2 (Green) G
30 +24V Valve_2-2
29 VLV2 ON- Valve_2-1

Aria Double Pick Unit Harness (Sheet 2 of 2)

J1 J2
1 CAS ID1 - 40
2 GND 39
3 CAS ID2 - 38
4 GND 37
5 CAS ID3 - 36
6 GND 35
7 CAS ID4 - 34
8 GND 33
9 CAS TEMP - 32
10 GND 31
11 CASLOW - 30
12 GND 29
13 GULP - 28
14 LEDON_PICK 27
15 GND 26
16 GND 25

17 S0 24
18 S1 23
19 DISABLE - 22
20 COILEN - 21
21 PICK 20
22 PSEN1 19
23 PSEN2 18
24 PSEN3 17
25 PSEN4 16
26 PICKTXD 15
27 PICK RXD 14
28 GND 13
29 GND 12
30 +12V 11
31 +5V 10
32 +5V 9
33 GND 8
34 GND 7
35 GND 6
36 GND 5
37 +24V 4
38 +24V 3
39 +24V 2
40 +24V 1
STRAPPING
Fuse FS1
Fuse FS1 is in the 24 V dc line to the pick solenoid on each Single Pick Interface board. There is one fuse
on the double pick interface board, protecting the line to both pick unit solenoids. refer to the following
diagrams for location of the fuse.

The fuse is a 125 V, 1.0 A pigtail fuse, part number 007-9830118.
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
This section shows the pinouts of the connectors on the Single and Double Pick Interface boards and
explains the function of the signals.
Connector J1
Connector J1 on the Pick Interface Board provides an interface to the Currency Dispenser Control Board
and also to cascaded Pick Interface boards. The interface consists of power lines from the Currency
Dispenser Control Board or cascaded Pick Interface Board, control lines from the Currency Dispenser
Control Board, and sensor information and Cassette Data Bus signals to the Currency Dispenser Control
Board. Provision is also made for an Intelligent Cassette interface.

J1 is a dual 20-way connector with the following pinout:
CAS_ID1_OUT 1 2 Ground
TEMP_OUT 9 10 Ground
CASLOW_OUT 11 12 Ground
GULP- 13 14 LEDON
P0 15 16 P1
S0 17 18 S1
DISABLE- 19 20 COILEN
PICK 21 22 PSEN1
PSEN2 23 24 PSEN3
PSEN4 25 26 TXD
RXD 27 28 Ground
Ground 29 30 +12 V
+5 V 31 32 +5 V
Ground 33 34 Ground
Ground 35 36 Ground
+24 V 37 38 +24 V
+24 V 39 40 +24 V
The function of the signals on connector J1 are described in the following table:
Signal Name Function

Control lines from the Dispenser Control Board:
DISABLE- LO = disables the operation of the pick valve solenoid
P0, P1, S0, S1 Decoded on the pick interface board to select the appropriate pick unit to pick from.
PICK HI = enables the pick valve solenoid driver
LEDON HI = enables all LEDs associated with the pick sensors.
CAS_IDX_OUT- LO = magnet is next to ID reed switch X in selected cassette.
CASLOW_OUT- LO = currency is low in selected cassette.
COILEN, TXD, RXD Reserved for use with intelligent cassette interface
PSENX Analogue signal from bill picked sensor on Pick Module X.
TEMP_OUT- Pick module temperature low (below 10 deg.C) - See Note.

Note: Aria pick modules do not have the low temperature sensing thermistor that is fitted to 56XX pick
modules. The harness attached to connector J2 of the Single Pick Interface or J5 of the Double Pick
Interface, loops the TEMP1 signal to ground so that a logic 1 is produced by the circuit, representing
“temperature good”.
Connector J2 (Single Pick) and J5 (Double Pick)

Connector J2 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J5 (Double Pick I/F Board) provides the interface to the sensors
and actuators of the pick units.
Connector J2 has the following pinout:
SEN1- 1 2 SEN1+
TEMP1 3 4 N/C
LED_PICK1+ 5 6 Ground
CASLOW1- 7 8 N/C
GULP_FEED (Not Used) 9 10 Ground
GROUND_REF 11 12 PICKARM_1+
PICKARM_1 13 14 N/C
VLV1_ON- 15 16 +24V_FUSED
Connector J5 has the following pinout:
SEN1- 1 2 SEN1+
TEMP1 3 4 N/C
Ground 5 6 LED_PICK1+
CASLOW1- 7 8 N/C
Ground 9 10 LED_PICKARM1+
PICKARM_1 11 12 PICKARM_1+
GULP_FEED (Not Used) 15 16 Ground
SEN2- 17 18 SEN2+
TEMP2 19 20 N/C
Ground 21 22 LED_PICK2+
CASLOW2- 23 24 N/C
Ground 25 26 LED_PICKARM2+
PICKARM_2 27 28 PICKARM_2+

The function of the signals on connector J2/J5 are described in the following table:
Signal Function
Name
Sensors and Actuators
PICKARM1+ Provides voltage to optotransmissive switch transistor and LED.
PICKARM_1 Connects optotransmissive switch emitter to comparator to detect when switch blocked or clear
and enable the pick valve solenoid logic.
LED_ Provides voltage to LED anode of the cassette low sensor. The LED return is connected to ground
PICK1+ at connector J2.
CASLOWX- Signals a cassette currency low state.
SEN1+, Connection to the pick sensor optical transistor.
SEN1-
VLV1 ON- Switches the pick solenoid valve.
GULP_ Not used - see text below.
FEED
TEMPX Connected to ground by harness - see text below.
Gulp Feed Detector

The Aria pick modules do not have a gulp feed detector. If Aria and 56XX pick modules are mixed and a
gulp feed occurs on the 56XX type, then the GULP_FEED signal is still passed via the Aria modules to the
Currency Dispenser Control Board where it will immediately stop the dispenser main motor.
Low Temperature Thermistor

The Aria pick modules do not have a low temperature thermistor. The pick harness provides a short to
ground of signal TEMPX to pin 6 of connector J2 or to pins 5 and 21 of connector J5 so that the TEMP_
OUT- signal to the Control Board always indicates high (above 10 deg. C) temperatures.

Connector J4 (Single Pick) And J2 (Double Pick)

J4 (Single Pick I/F Board) or J2 (Double Pick I/F Board) is a dual 20-way connector which carries the bus
input lines to a cascaded Single Pick Interface board or Double Pick Interface board. It has the following
pinout:
+24 V 1 2 +24 V
+24 V 3 4 +24 V
Ground 5 6 Ground
Ground 7 8 Ground
+5 V 9 10 +5 V
+12 V 11 12 Ground
Ground 13 14 RXD
TXD 15 16 N/C
SEN4_IN 17 18 SEN3_IN
SEN2_IN 19 20 PICK_OUT
COILEN 21 22 DISABLE_OUT-
S1_OUT 23 24 S0_OUT
P1_OUT 25 26 P0_OUT
LED_ON_OUT 27 28 GULP-
Ground 29 30 CASLOW_IN-
Ground 31 32 TEMP_IN-
Ground 33 34 CAS_ID4_IN-
Ground 35 36 CAS_ID3_IN-
+24 V 37 38 CAS_ID2_IN-
+24 V 39 40 CAS_ID1_IN-
Connector J3 (Single Pick) and J3/J4 (Double Pick)

Connector J3 on the Single and Double Pick Interface Boards is provided for the intelligent cassette
interface. It has the following pinout:
+24 V 1 2 +24 V
Ground 3 4 Ground
+5 V 5 6 Ground
TXD1_OUT 7 8 RXD1_IN
INT1_PRES- 9 10 COILEN1

The Double Pick Interface Board has an additional identical connector (J4) for the intelligent cassette
interface for Pick Unit 2. The signal names are TXD2_OUT, RXD2_IN, INT2_PRES-, and COILEN2.
Control Signals
Control signals from the Dispenser Control board are output on connector J4/J2 via open collector
drivers to maintain signal levels. The table below lists the input signal alongside the equivalent output to
the cascaded board.
Signal from Control Board Signal to Cascaded Board

PICK PICK_OUT
LEDON LED_ON_OUT
S0 S0_OUT
S1 S1_OUT
DISABLE DISABLE_OUT
Sensor and Cassette Data Bus Signals

The signals from the transport sensors are buffered by unity gain operational amplifiers. The cassette bus
interface signals from the cascaded Pick Interface board are buffered on entry to higher position Pick
Interface boards. The table below lists the names of the incoming signals against those sent to the
Control board.
Signal from Cascaded Pick Interface Signal to Control Board

CAS_ID1_IN- CAS_ID1_OUT-
TEMP_IN- TEMP_OUT-
CASLOW_IN- CASLOW_OUT-
SEN2_IN PSEN2
SEN3_IN PSEN3
SEN4_IN PSEN4
The signals GULP-, RXD, TXD, and COILEN- are directly connected between the bus output and the bus
input connectors (J1 and J4/J2).

REVISION


CURRENCY CASSETTES
INTRODUCTION
NCR Currency Cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate, that are
designed to store and release currency under the control of the parent currency dispenser sub-system.
DESCRIPTION
The following versions of the currency cassette are available for use in ATMs:
l Wide currency cassette:

l standard security variant
l tamper indicating variant
l Fluiditi Replenishment Security variant
l Fluiditi ATM Security variant.
l 1000 Rupee wide cassette
l standard security variant
l tamper indicating variant
All variants of the cassettes can be mechanically adjusted to hold currency of different lengths and
widths and electro-mechanically adjusted to provide a currency denomination code.
The mechanical adjustments allow the cassette to be set to accept a world wide range of currencies. The
dimensions of the currency which can be used in the cassette vary depending on whether the cassette
is to be used in a 50xx, 56xx or Personas terminal.
Wide currency cassettes accept currency of the following dimensions:
l Minimum width and length 62 mm × 120 mm (2.44 in. × 4.72 in.)

l Maximum width and length 95 mm × 172 mm (3.74 in. × 6.77 in.)
1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette variant:
l Minimum width and length 62 mm × 120 mm (2.44 in. × 4.72 in.)

l Maximum width and length 95 mm × 177 mm (3.74 in. × 6.97 in.)
The electro-mechanical adjustments enable a cassette to be given a cassette identification code. Up to

seven codes are possible, with each code allowing a different currency denomination to be loaded into
a cassette. See “Cassette Identification Code” in this chapter.

Cassette Variances
Fluiditi currency cassettes use the small magnet housing but the side of the cassette is marked to accept
the longer housing, indicating that the cassette is the wide type.
Wide Currency
Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Location Moulding For

Long Magnet Housing
Fluiditi
Currency Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Location Moulding For
Long magnet Housing
1000 Rupee Wide Cassettes Distinguishing Features

The distinguishing features that enable you to tell wide cassettes from 1000 Rupee wide cassettes are
listed below:
No. 1000 Rupee Wide Cassette Wide Cassette

1 Warning Label N/A
2 Label N/A
3 Door shutter rib is cut off Standard shutter
4 Lid bracket N/A
5 Shutter guide (Colour-Gray) Standard shutter guide (Colour-Brown)
6 The head of clip magnet holder is Standard clip magnet holder
cut off
7 Note runner (Colour-Gray) N/A

Refer to the following illustrations:
Standard Security Currency Cassettes
5
7 6
1
2 F
G
3
A Seal Can Be 4
Attached To The 5
Hasp Of The Latch
6
7 A
B
C
D
E

The standard security cassettes are containers which offer the capability to seal the access lid. When the
cassette is inserted into the dispenser, a mechanism opens a door in the cassette to allow the currency
to be picked from the cassette and fed through the currency dispenser sub-system.
When the cassette is removed from the dispenser the door is automatically closed and latched. To gain
access to the cassettes interior, the optional seal is broken and the access lid opened and removed.
Tamper Indicating Currency Cassettes
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R
G
Insertion Counter
Window
The tamper indicating currency cassettes differ from the standard security cassettes in that they provide
evidence of unauthorized attempts to open the container or that the cassette has been removed from
the ATM and re-inserted.
The cassette contains a mechanism and a coloured indicator in addition to the provision for sealing the
access lid.
When the cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the mechanism is primed, with the
indicator showing that it is primed (colour green), the currency is loaded into the cassette and then the
access lid is closed and the seal fitted.
When the container is inserted into the ATM, then subsequently removed, a door is opened and closed
in the same way as for the standard cassette, however the mechanism causes the coloured indicator to
advance to show that the cassette has been inserted (colour white).
Should it be necessary to remove the cassette between replenishment operations, for example to clear
a jam, this can be done up to six times before the container needs to be reset (primed) again. The
indicator shows the insertions as 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
When the container is returned for replenishment it should be inspected according to local practice and
the indicator checked that a single insertion/removal has occurred. If the indicator shows that more than
one insertion/removal has occurred the circumstances must be investigated and verified. The access
seal can then be broken to gain access for emptying and refilling.

Fluiditi Currency Cassettes

Fluiditi
Currency Cassette
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Ink Injection Block
There are two types of Fluiditi currency cassettes: the Fluiditi ATM Security cassette and the Fluiditi
Replenishment Security cassette. Both are designed to fit into a security system that injects a marking ink
onto the currency within the cassette if the ATM is attacked. The currency is permanently stained and
therefore no longer of any use. Because of this, it is very important that the correct procedures be
observed when handling this type of cassette.
The Fluiditi ATM Security cassette looks exactly the same as a wide cassette, except for a small black
plastic block on the right hand side. This block allows the ink to be fed into the cassette from the ink
injection tank mounted on the side of the dispenser module.
Inside the cassette lid is a spray bar with a series of small holes, through which the ink is sprayed onto
the currency.
Spray Bar
(Fluiditi Only)

The Fluiditi ATM Replenishment cassette is the same as the ATM Security cassette except that is doesn’t
have a green carry handle. Instead, it has holes on the front of the cassette to accept the pins on the
Carrisafe hood that is used to remove and carry the cassette.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Once a cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can no longer be used and
should be disposed of in accordance with the appropriate instructions provided in Chapters “Fluiditi
ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
NCR recommends that only the service engineer should handle activated cassettes or clean spillages
inside the ATM. Care must be taken when handling activated cassettes, as the ink is corrosive and stains
permanently.
Cassette Components
The following illustrations show the open cassette (wide and standard types) looking from the rear
(handle) end towards the front (truck door) end.
Cassettes are moulded in high impact polycarbonate in three major parts: the body, the lid, and the
base.

Wide Plastic Cassette - Components

The illustration below shows the components of the tamper indicating wide plastic cassette.
Cassette Lid
Currency Width
Note Guide Lid Spacers
Spray Bar
(Fluiditi Variants)
Note Low
Spring Finger Block
Currency Length Spacers

Note Guide
Cassette
Body
1
2 Door
3
4
Shutter
5
6 Pusher
7 A
B
C
D Pusher
E
F
Pawl
NC NC
R GR
Ink Injection Block
(Fluiditi Variants)
Cassette Base
Spring Plunger Cassette ID Code
Magnet Housing
Insertion Counter Window (TI)
Tamper Indicators
All cassettes have the following features to indicate tampering:
l Door shutters have a notched section that breaks off when stressed
l Plastic roller door has a deformable strip.
The Cassette Body

The cassette body holds the currency. It contains a spring-loaded pusher mechanism that moves along a
slot in the bottom of the body, to push the currency stack to the front of the cassette into the pick
position. The currency stack is held between the left and righthand note guides. These adjust to suit
currency of different lengths. The front ends of the note guides have spring fingers that help to separate
the notes as they are picked from the stack.
Incorporated in the pusher is a note low block magnet to operate a reed switch in the pick module. This
magnet can be set in either of two positions. A housing on one side of the cassette body contains up to
four magnets which again operate reed switches on the pick module to signal the cassette identification
code.
Also in the body compartment are the left and right spring-loaded door shutters, the currency separator
brushes and fingers, and the anti-reset plunger. On the outside of the body are the lid latch and cassette
carrying handle, the projecting lug which is used to latch the cassette into the pick module, and the
embossed cassette identification code label.

The Cassette Lid

The lid hooks into locating slots at the front of the body and is latched at the rear. It holds note guides
and spacers which adjust to suit currency width. A spring plunger in the body compartment of tamper
indicating cassettes (refer to the illustration of the wide plastic cassette) is pushed down by the lid into
the insertion counter mechanism (see the section “Insertion Counter”). An internal baffle at the latch
end of the lid gives additional protection against an attempt to prise up the lid and fish for currency.
The lid is shaped so that it will not close properly if the pusher is not released or the cassette is
overfilled.
The Cassette Base

The illustration below shows the components inside the tamper indicating cassette base.
Door Link Lockout Lever Index Pawl Link Index Pawl
Reset Lever
Rubber Bumper
Truck Door Rachet Slide Rachet Lever Door Lockout Lever
The base of the cassette holds the truck door and its retraction mechanism, the pusher ratchet slide and
lever, and the insertion counter and window (TI cassettes). The shape of the base forms rails which slide
into the cassette guides in the pick module.

Cassette Operation
Keyplate
Cassette
Retaining
Catch
Currency Low
Reed Switch
Cassette
Stop
Cassette
Present and
ID Reed Switches
The above illustration shows the components of the dispenser pick module which mate with the
cassette. When the cassette is inserted into the dispenser the prongs of the pick module keyplate enter
the holes in the base of the cassette and push against locking pawls on the truck door. The door is
pushed into the cassette base, leaving the front open to permit the currency to be picked from the
cassette and dispensed.
Several other actions happen as the truck door is opened:
l The door shutters are disengaged from the door and are pushed back by the pick line
l The fingers next to the currency separator brushes drop down clear of the currency stack. The
function of these fingers is to prevent notes at the front of the stack being dragged down by the
opening door
l The ratchet slide attached to the door lowers the ratchet lever so that it disengages from the
pusher pawl
l On TI cassettes the insertion counter is advanced one place (see the section “Insertion Counter”).
As the currency is dispensed the pusher moves forward under spring pressure to keep the stack of
currency in position. The pick line has an eccentric motion which tends to push the currency stack back
into the cassette against the action of the pusher. It is to permit this to and fro motion that the ratchet
lever disengages from the pusher when the cassette is in the dispenser. When the pusher moves close
to the front of the cassette the magnet in its base comes alongside metal plates under the floor of the
currency compartment. These plates strengthen the magnetic field and transfer it to operate a reed
switch on the pick module keyplate. This switch signals that the currency in the cassette is running low.
Removal of the cassette from the dispenser automatically closes and latches the front door and the
interior of the cassette can only be reached by opening the top access lid. The ratchet is raised by the

action of the door closing and is again in a position where it will engage with the pusher pawl. In this way
the pusher is locked close to the currency stack so that the currency is held in place while the cassette is
being carried.
When the pusher is in its locked position the cassette lid can not be closed.
Pusher Operation
To load currency into the cassette the pusher is manually moved fully to the rear and locked until the
currency is put in. It is then released against the back of the currency stack to keep it under pressure.
Failure to release the pusher from its locked position will prevent the cassette lid from closing. You
move the pusher by lifting the pusher pawl arms, sliding it to the rear, and then holding it in that position
while lowering the arms so that the pusher pawl engages with the ratchet. There is one locking detent
on the extreme rear end of the ratchet.
CAUTION
Lift the pusher pawl arms - do not squeeze.
LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE
Pusher
Insertion Counter
Door Link Cam Lockout Spring Index Pawl Link Index Pawl
Pawl Spring
Door Lockout Lever Reset Lever

When the tamper indicating cassette is being prepared for insertion into the ATM, the mechanism is
primed by pressing the reset lever to the side and releasing it until the indicator shows green. The
currency is loaded into the cassette and then the access lid is closed and the seal fitted.
When the container is inserted into the dispenser, then subsequently removed, the front truck door is
opened and closed in the same way as the standard cassette. The door also pushes a link which turns a
cam linked to the index pawl engaged with the counter wheel. Each time the door is opened the wheel
is advanced by the index pawl one fourteenth of a revolution. The wheel is marked on the edge and top
with two sets of indications which show through two windows, one at the back of the cassette and one
in the bottom of the currency compartment. The indications count the insertions as Green (cassette
primed), White (first insertion), 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
On the sixth insertion a spring-loaded follower, pressing against the edge of the counter wheel, moves
into a detent in the wheel and locks it. This movement permits the springloaded door lockout lever to
move in front of the door link when the cassette is pulled out of the pick module preventing the cassette
from being used in the dispenser again until the insertion counter is reset. The anti reset plunger stops
any movement of the reset lever while the cassette lid is closed. When the lid is opened the plunger
spring lifts it clear of the lever mechanism and the counter wheel can be reset.
Further security is provided by the lockout lever which is driven out through the side of the cassette
base by the action of the door link when the door is opening. This lever engages with a stop on the side
frame of the pick module and prevents the cassette being pulled out of the pick module with the truck
door open.
Cassette Identification Code

Each currency cassette shipped with an ATM is set with a code that can be read by the ATM software so
that the cassette can be identified regardless of its position in the dispenser. The software matches the
cassette code to a specific denomination of currency. Cassettes with the same code will be loaded with
notes of the same value. Normally four cassette codes are recognized but up to seven codes are
possible where extended cassette IDs have been selected in software (see the section “Setting the
Cassette Identification Code”). Cassettes should be marked to show which code is set.
The identification code of a cassette is set by up to four magnets contained in a plastic housing attached
to the cassette side by a clip as shown in the illustration below of the Standard Width and Fluiditi
currency cassette.

The Wide Currency Cassette has space in the plastic housing for six magnets (positions A, B, 1, 2, 3 and 4)
as shown below, but only four (positions 1, 2, 3 and 4) are currently used.
Clips
The four magnets interact with four reed switches located on a printed circuit board attached to the
frame of the dispenser pick module associated with the cassette location in the dispenser subsystem.
Depending on whether a magnet is installed, or not, and the orientation of the magnet in positions 1, 2, 3
and 4, all four of the reed switches provide a code representing the cassette identification number.
When the currency cassette is inserted into a pick module in any position in the dispenser, it signals its
identity via the reed switches. The firmware identifies each cassette and so is able to select the proper
one for dispensing bills of a specific denomination.
Cassette Body to Lid Identification

The cassettes provided with an NCR four position dispenser could each be set to a different code, say
Code 1, Code 2, Code 3 and Code 4, to dispense four different denominations or these could be changed
so that, for example, the dispenser will dispense two different denomination notes from the four
cassettes, that is with two cassettes set to Code 1 and two to Code 2. Because, also, the cassette has to
be adjusted internally to accept a specific denomination of currency, lids and bodies of cassettes should
be marked so that they can be kept together.
The currency cassette can be identified by writing the currency denomination on the inside or outside
of both the body and lid, using an indelible ink pen.
The H-8015-STD1-01/02-08 Standard Plastic Cassette (shown below) has embossed numbers 1 to 5 on
the body that can be used to identify cassette codes.

The letters H and L marked against positions 1 and 2 do not apply to ATMs. The wide plastic cassette
has embossing on the body and lid as shown in the following figure
and identification may be made as follows:
l A: Colour coded stick-on labels 10 mm × 15 mm (0.4 in. × 0.6 in.) approx.

l B: Numerics for denoting cassette identification type
l C: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for attaching adhesive labels to
denote currency denomination, etc. at the discretion of the financial institution
l D: Alphas for denoting additional cassette identification types or, for same use as B
B 3 2
1
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Power Requirements
None.
TROUBLESHOOTING
No information available.

DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
Currency Length Adjustment
The currency length adjustment, which is, in effect, across the width of the cassette, is made by
repositioning two note guides and four spacers located in the base of the cassette.
Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from 120 mm (4.72
in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).
There are two types of spacers available for currency length adjustment; segment and fixed size.
Segment Type Note Adjustment Spacers

The note guides in the body of the cassette bear against spacer blocks known as E spacers. These blocks
have to be cut to certain lengths so that the note guides are supported the correct distance apart
corresponding to the length of the currency being dispensed.
A sharp knife and a medium size cross-head screwdriver are required to make these adjustments.

Fixed Size Note Adjustment Spacers

There are four fixed size spacers, also known as E spacers, which provide the same function as the
Segment Type spacers described above. The fixed size spacers must be changed to suit the currency
being dispensed, they can not be cut to size.
X
Spacer
Code
Note Low Sensing - In addition to the currency length and width adjustments, provision is also made to
change the note low sensing in a cassette. Two note low sensing conditions are available:
l 75 notes ± 50
l 200 notes ± 50.
Note Low Sensing Block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
Currency Width Adjustment

The currency lid holds note guides and spacers which adjust to suit currency width, which is, in effect,
the internal height of the cassette. There are two types of spacers available for currency width
adjustment; segment and fixed size.


The currency width adjustment is made by cutting the eight spacers between the upper note guides and
the lid. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E spacers and four are known as
yellow spacers (shown below).
2
3
4 11
5 1 0
6 9
7 8
8 7
6
9
0
1 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
A sharp knife and a medium size cross-head screwdriver are required to make these adjustments.

There are eight fixed spacers which provide the same function as the Segment Type spacers described
above. Four of these spacers are the same as the currency length E spacers and four are known as
yellow spacers (shown above). The fixed size spacers must be changed to suit the currency being
dispensed, they can not be cut to size.
Spacer Code

Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes

Wide Currency Cassette
A B
Note Guide
Left Hand
Side Right Hand
Side
E-Spacer
(4 off)
Truck Door End
Currency Length Note Guide E. Spacer

(mm/in.) L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
Note Guide B to left, A to right:
Note Guide Note Guide
B A
120 (4.72) B3 A2 E9 E10

121 (4.76) B3 A2 E9 E10
122 (4.80) B3 A3 E9 E9
123 (4.84) B3 A3 E9 E9
124 (4.88) B3 A3 E9 E9
125 (4.92) B4 A3 E8 E9
126 (4.96) B4 A3 E8 E9
127 (5.00) B4 A4 E8 E8
128 (5.04) B4 A4 E8 E8
129 (5.08) B4 A4 E8 E8
130 (5.12) B5 A4 E7 E8
131 (5.16) B5 A4 E7 E8
132 (5.20) B5 A5 E7 E7
133 (5.24) B5 A5 E7 E7

134 (5.28) B5 A5 E7 E7
135 (5.32) B6 A5 E6 E7
136 (5.36) B6 A5 E6 E7
137 (5.40) B6 A6 E6 E6
138 (5.44) B6 A6 E6 E6
139 (5.48) B6 A6 E6 E6
140 (5.52) B7 A6 N/R E6
141 (5.56) B7 A6 N/R E6
Note Guide A to left, B to right:
A B
142 (5.60) A5 B5 E5 E5
143 (5.64) A5 B5 E5 E5
144 (5.68) A5 B5 E5 E5
145 (5.72) A5 B5 E5 E5
146 (5.76) A6 B5 E4 E5
147 (5.80) A6 B5 E4 E5
148 (5.83) A6 B6 E4 E4
149 (5.87) A6 B6 E4 E4
150 (5.90) A6 B6 E4 E4
151 (5.94) A7 B6 E3 E4
152 (5.98) A7 B6 E3 E4
153 (6.02) A7 B7 E3 E3
154 (6.06) A7 B7 E3 E3
155 (6.10) A7 B7 E3 E3
156 (6.14) A8 B7 E2 E3
157 (6.18) A8 B7 E2 E3
158 (6.22) A8 B8 E2 E2
159 (6.26) A8 B8 E2 E2
160 (6.30) A8 B8 E2 E2
161 (6.34) A9 B8 E1 E2
162 (6.38) A9 B8 E1 E2
163 (6.42) A9 B9 E1 E1
164 (6.46) A9 B9 E1 E1

165 (6.50) A9 B9 E1 E1
166 (6.54) A10 B9 E E1
167 (6.58) A10 B9 E E1
168 (6.62) A10 B10 E E
169 (6.66) A10 B10 E E
170 (6.70) A10 B10 E E
171 (6.74) A11 B10 N/R E
172 (6.78) A11 B10 N/R E
(N/R - No E spacer required)

1000 Rupee Wide Currency Cassette
A B
Note Guide
Left Hand
Side Right Hand
Side
E-Spacer
(4 off)
Truck Door End
Currency Length Note Guide E. Spacer

(mm/in.) L.H. R.H. L.H. R.H.
Note Guide B to left, A to right:
B A
120 (4.72) B3 A3 E9 E9
121 (4.76) B3 A3 E9 E9
122 (4.80) B3 A3 E9 E9
123 (4.84) B4 A3 E8 E9
124 (4.88) B4 A3 E8 E9
125 (4.92) B4 A4 E8 E8
126 (4.96) B4 A4 E8 E8
127 (5.00) B4 A4 E8 E8
128 (5.04) B5 A4 E7 E8
129 (5.08) B5 A4 E7 E8
130 (5.12) B5 A5 E7 E7
131 (5.16) B5 A5 E7 E7
132 (5.20) B5 A5 E7 E7
133 (5.24) B6 A5 E6 E7
134 (5.28) B6 A5 E6 E7
135 (5.32) B6 A6 E6 E6

136 (5.36) B6 A6 E6 E6
137 (5.40) B6 A6 E6 E6
138 (5.44) B6 A6 E6 E6
Note Guide A to left, B to right:
A B
139 (5.48) A5 B5 E5 E5
140 (5.52) A5 B5 E5 E5
141 (5.52) A5 B5 E5 E5
142 (5.60) A5 B5 E5 E5
143 (5.64) A5 B5 E5 E5
144 (5.68) A6 B5 E4 E5
145 (5.72) A6 B5 E4 E5
146 (5.76) A6 B6 E4 E4
147 (5.80) A6 B6 E4 E4
148 (5.83) A6 B6 E4 E4
149 (5.87) A7 B6 E3 E4
150 (5.90) A7 B6 E3 E4
151 (5.94) A7 B6 E3 E4
152 (5.98) A7 B7 E3 E3
153 (6.02) A7 B7 E3 E3
154 (6.06) A8 B7 E2 E3
155 (6.10) A8 B7 E2 E3
156 (6.14) A8 B8 E2 E2
157 (6.18) A8 B8 E2 E2
158 (6.22) A8 B8 E2 E2
159 (6.26) A9 B8 E1 E2
160 (6.30) A9 B8 E1 E2
161 (6.34) A9 B9 E1 E1
162 (6.38) A9 B9 E1 E1
163 (6.42) A9 B9 E1 E1
164 (6.46) A10 B9 E E1
165 (6.50) A10 B9 E E1
166 (6.54) A10 B10 E E

167 (6.58) A10 B10 E E

168 (6.62) A10 B10 E E
169 (6.66) A11 B10 N/R E
170 (6.70) A11 B10 N/R E
171 (6.74) A11 B11 N/R N/R
172 (6.77) A11 B11 N/R N/R
173 (6.81) A11 B11 N/R N/R
174 (6.85) A11 B11 N/R N/R
175 (6.89) A11 B11 N/R N/R
176 (6.93) A11 B11 N/R N/R
177 (6.97) A11 B11 N/R N/R
(N/R - No E spacer required)

Currency Loading
This section describes the procedures that should be followed when replenishing a currency cassette.
Included are the procedures to:
l Open the cassette

l Remove any currency left in the cassette
l Prepare the new currency for loading into the cassette
l Reset the tamper indicating cassette
l Load the currency into the cassette
l Identify the cassette body to the cassette lid
l Close the cassette.
The procedures assume that the cassette has been removed from the dispenser and that Fluiditi
cassettes have also been removed from their secure transport hoods and sleeves.
CAUTION
Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can
no longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the instructions
provided in s66720 “Fluiditi ATM Security” and s66721 “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
Note: NCR recommends that only a service engineer should handle activated cassettes or clean spillages
inside the ATM.

Opening The Cassette
WARNING
Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes that have had the marking ink
released into them.
To open a currency cassette perform the following procedure:
1. Place the cassette on a flat table.

2. If the cassette is a tamper indicating variant, perform the recommended security procedures of
the financial organization’s control documentation.
3. Remove the latch seal.
4. Press the lower latch hasp down then pull the bottom of the latch towards you.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC G
R
5. Lift the latch up a small amount. Pull the top of the latch towards you then hinge it down.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G

6. Raise the lid and, applying slight pressure at the front of the lid to help disengage the tags,
remove the lid completely from the cassette base.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
Removing Unused Currency
WARNING
Wear protective clothing when handling Fluiditi cassettes which have had the marking
ink released into them.
If the cassette is fitted with pusher arms as shown in the following illustration, lift the pusher arms:
DO NOT SQUEEZE.The following procedures show the new pusher arm assembly.
Pusher Operation
The currency cassette may be fitted with either of the following types of pusher arm assemblies.
LIFT - DO NOT SQUEEZE
Pusher

Currency Release
To remove any unused currency remaining in the cassette, place the handle end of the cassette against a
suitable stop,such as a wall, then perform the following procedure:
1. Lift the pusher arms then move the pusher to the rearmost position by pushing with the right
hand against the pusher.
2. Latch the pusher in the rear position by applying gentle pressure near the base of the pusher,
then releasing the pusher arms.
3. Remove the remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with the financial
institution’s procedures.

Preparing Currency
Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:
Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes in one hand and
separating out with the other. While separating out, the currency should be checked for obvious defects
such as:

l Staples, pins,clips or any foreign matter attached to the currency
l Torn or limp notes with pin holes or missing sections in the body of the currency
l Tears exceeding 13mm (0.5 in.) from any edge of the currency
l Damage or tears to the leading edge (direction of travel) of the note
l Two or more notes stuck together
l Corner folds more than 13mm (0.5 in.) along any edge (straighten as required)
l Folded notes
New or uncirculated currency should be separated (fanned) out several times before loading into the
cassette. Any notes considered to be unacceptable should be removed.
The packaging of new currency can cause it to be set into a bow shape. This bow shape may be either
across the length or the width of the notes and can cause the notes to jam in the dispenser. Notes
bowed across the width have been specifically identified as causing jams in the Personas 86 dispenser
and it is recommended that these notes should be processed through a counting machine where
possible. If this is not possible then the notes should be manually fanned and flattened several times. If
the bow persists follow the instructions that are given in the section “Loading The Cassette” for notes
that are deformed in this way. Notes that are bowed by 3mm (0.125 in.) or more should be removed.
Note: Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency dispenser.
Resetting The Tamper Indicating Cassette

The tamper indicating version of the cassette has a mechanical device which, on insertion of the cassette
into the currency dispenser, moves the insertion counter and opens the currency exit door. On
withdrawal of the cassette from the dispenser the exit door is locked but the counter is not moved.
The indication on the counter depends on the number of times the cassette has been inserted into and
removed from the dispenser, that is White (one insertion and removal) 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Before loading the cassette the mechanism must be reset to give the number of insertions required (up
to six).

Operate the reset control by moving it to the right then releasing it the appropriate number of times
until the insertion counter indicates Green.
Loading The Cassette

When loading a cassette with currency, care must be taken to ensure that notes of the correct
denomination are loaded in accordance with the cassette identification code on the label attached to
the cassette.
CAUTION
Once a Fluiditi cassette has had the security marking ink released into it, the cassette can
no longer be used and should be disposed of in accordance with the instructions
provided in Chapters “Fluiditi ATM Security” and “Fluiditi Replenishment Security”.
To load a cassette with currency observe the “Pusher Operation” procedure given under the heading
‘Removing Unused Currency’ in this Chapter and proceed as follows:
1. Lift the pusher arms then pull the pusher to the rear of the cassette and lock in position.
2. Align the edges of the notes in both planes by holding a bundle loosely between the fingers and
thumbs of both hands and tapping lightly on a flat surface, then tapping the note ends.
3. It is recommended that the cassette be placed at an angle so that each note stack can be loaded
without it falling over. For example, stand the cassette at an angle, with the handle end at the
bottom, and against a wall as shown.

4. Align the first bundle of 100 notes by tapping it on both the long and short edges. Then place it at
the bottom of the cassette, between the plastic side guides. Continue to align and stack the
bundles in the cassette, alternating the orientation of the bundles from side to side.
20
20
Note: If the effective picking of the notes is compromised by the note design or bowing, the
bundle orientation should alternate from front to rear facing as well as from side to side.
5. Continue loading until the required amount is loaded, or a 295 mm (11.6 in.) stack is loaded. This
maximum stack size is indicated by the maximum load point label on the inside of the cassette.
Max. Stack

6. Lift the pusher arms and push the pusher and the note stack upwards until the currency stack
touches the front support, then release the pusher arms.
The currency should now remain between the front support and the pusher in an upright position,
neatly stacked between the cassette guides.
Closing The Cassette

Having loaded and, where required, reset the cassette, it should be closed as follows:
Note: Make sure that the pusher is not locked in the rear position before closing the cassette. The lid
can not be closed if the the pusher has not been released or the cassette has been overfilled.
1. Insert the tongues on the cassette lid into the slots in the cassette base then lower the lid on to
the cassette base.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G

2. Lift the latch up and forward until it hooks on to the lid latch block.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R G
3. Pull the latch down and forward until it clicks into the locked position.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
NC
R
G
4. Check that the insertion counter indicates green (tamper indicating versions only).
5. Seal the latch, if required, and complete the third party documentation.
The cassette is now ready for transportation to the ATM.
Setting The Cassette Identification Code

Note: When the denomination of the currency held in a cassette is to be changed the identification
code for the cassette may also have to be changed. It is also important to determine the opacity or
singularity value of the new currency and, if necessary, reconfigure the parent system with this value.

It is essential that the magnets are pointing in the correct direction. Therefore, each magnet has a
marked end, a painted dot, to indicate which way round it should be installed in the housing.
Painted Dot
Note: Early versions of the magnet are of square section, later versions are of round section.
The following table shows the location and orientation of the four magnets to produce the seven
cassette identification codes.
Magnet Positions
Code A (wide cassette only) B (wide cassette only) 1 2 3 4
1 (High*) not used not used X X 0 0
2 (Low*) not used not used X 0 0 X
3 not used not used X 0 X 0
4 not used not used X X X X
5 not used not used 0 X X 0
6 not used not used 0 X 0 X
7 not used not used 0 0 X X
Note: High* and Low* apply to the M80-05 Currency Dispenser. X indicates a magnet inserted in the
housing, 0 indicates magnet not present in the housing. The bar above or below the X indicates if the
magnet should be placed in the housing with the marked end up or down.
Note: Codes 5, 6, and 7 are recognized only in ATMs where extended cassette IDs have been enabled in
software. The following illustration shows magnets in place for code.

No
Magnet
No
Magnet O
X
O
X
Painted Dot
Changing Cassette Identification Code

When it is required to change the identification code of a cassette, say as in this example, to change the
setup of a cassette from code 1 to code 2, so that two cassettes can dispense notes of the same
denomination, perform the following procedure:
1. Open and remove the cassette lid.

2. Release the clip(s) holding the plastic housing to the cassette side frame and remove the plastic
housing complete with the magnets from the cassette.
1
3 2
5 4
7 6
A
Clips
B
1 C
D
2 E
F
G
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
3. Remove the magnet from positions 2.

4. Replace the magnets in the housing so that they are positioned and orientated for the code
required as shown. For example, to set the cassette to Code 2 a magnet should be inserted in
position 1 with the dot end up. Another magnet should be inserted in position 4 with the dot end
down. No magnets should be inserted in positions 2 and 3.
5. Attach the housing complete with the magnets to the cassette frame using the clip(s) released in
step 1. The housing should be inserted with the longer of the two legs towards the handle end of
the cassette.
6. Close the cassette lid.
7. Mark the cassette body and lid with the currency code according to local practice.
Mechanical
The standard security, Fluiditi, and tamper indicating variants of the currency cassette can be adjusted to
hold currencies of different lengths and widths and to change the note low sensing facility.
Note: The terms “left” and “right” in the following adjustments and setting tables apply to the cassette
when looked at from the front (truck door) end.
gth
Len
cy
rren
Cu
Right Hand Side

Currency
Width
$
Left Hand Side
l The length adjustment is made by changing the position of two note guides located in the base of
the cassette.
l The width adjustment is made by changing the height of the spacers located between two more
note guides and the cassette lid.
l The note low sensing adjustment is made by changing the note low block position in the base of
the cassette.

The locations of the note guides, spacers and the note low block are shown in the illustration below.
Lid Spacers
Currency Width
Note Guide
Note Low Block
Spacers
Currency Length
Note Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Currency Length Adjustment

The currency length adjustment is made by first establishing the length of the currency to be loaded into
the cassette then using this measurement to determine the position of two note guides in the base of
the cassette.
Adjustment is provided to allow the cassette to accommodate currency of lengths from 120 mm (4.72
in.) to 177 mm (6.97 in.).
Once the length of the currency is known, this is used to determine a guide code and the length of a
spacer, which together, are used to determine the position of two note guides located along the floor of
the cassette compartment.
The two note guides are installed along the left-hand and right-hand sides of the cassette, as viewed
from the front (that is, the truck door end) of the cassette. A triangular pointer on the front of the guide
and a triangular mark at the rear line up with numbers embossed on the floor of the cassette
compartment. This number is part of the guide code.
The other part of the guide code is a letter, A or B, which is embossed on the note guides, A on one note
guide and B on the other. The A or B note guides can be installed along either the right or left hand side
of the cassette floor (as shown) depending on the guide code but must always be installed with the
spring finger end of the guide pointing to the number embossed at the front end of the cassette.
Note Guide Note Guide Note Guide Note Guide

A B B A
OR
Cassette Floor


The segment type spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and the numbers 1 to 15 and is
known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap into position without the use of tools.
The following example shows how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120 mm (4.72 in.).
1. Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).
2. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes for
the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to determine the guide code and the E
spacer setting for the currency. For this example the left hand guide (L.H.) will have a guide code
of B3 and the right hand guide (R.H.) a code of A3. The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both
the left hand guide and the right hand guide.
Note: The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to the left and which
to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when looking on the front of the cassette (the
end with the truck door). The number 1 to 12, after the letter, corresponds to the numbers embossed
on the floor of the currency cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the note guide and the
triangular mark at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the table.
3. Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:
l Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the cassette
base as shown.

l The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are fitted,
unscrew and remove them as shown.
l Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.
l Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette and, at the
same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the cassette as shown. Take
care not to damage or bend the spring fingers.
l Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.
Note: The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be turned through 90
degrees before pulling upwards.

4. Prior to fitting in the cassette, set four new E spacers to the spacer code for the new currency
for example, E9 for the left hand guide and E9 for the right hand guide as follows:
l Hold the spacer so the letter E and the numbers 1 to 15 can be read.
l Using a strong sharp knife, cut the spacer just above the number, for this example 9. You
should be left with a spacer, similar to that in the following illustration, that has the letter E
and the number 9 on it.
l Remove any burrs left after cutting.
5. Snap-in the four new E spacers into the slots in the cassette base.
6. Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the guide are
pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the left hand guide (B)
should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the number 3 and the right hand guide
(A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The following illustration shows an example of the left
hand guide. To lock the guide in place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of
the cassette.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7. Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the green plastic
clamps if these are fitted.

The spacer is embossed on one side with the letter E and a number from 1 to 15 (E1, E2, E3 etc.) and is
known as the E spacer. The E spacer is designed to snap-in to position without the use of tools.
X
Spacer
Code
Note: The following is an example of how to adjust a cassette for currency of length 120 mm (4.72 in.).
1. Determine the length of the new currency (in this case 120 mm (4.72 in.)).
2. Use the tables given under the heading “Currency Length, Note Guide and “E” Spacer Codes for
the Wide Currency Cassette” at the end of this section to determine the guide code and the E
spacer setting for the currency. For this example the left hand guide (L.H.) will have a guide code
of B3 and the right hand guide (R.H.) a code of A3. The spacers will have a setting of E9 for both
the left hand guide and the right hand guide.
Note: The letters A and B in the tables indicate which note guide should be placed to the left and
which to the right. Remember that right and left are considered when looking on the front of the
cassette (the end with the truck door). The number 1 to 12, after the letter, corresponds to the
numbers embossed on the floor of the currency cassette. The triangular pointer at the front of the
note guide and the triangular mark at the rear should line up with the same number as given in the
table.

3. Remove the two note guides from the cassette base as follows:
l Unscrew and remove the screws and flat washers securing the note guides to the cassette
base as shown.
l The note guides may be secured in position with green plastic clamps. If these are fitted,
unscrew and remove them as shown.
l Slide the pusher back to reveal the front edge of the guides.
l Remove each note guide by pushing the guide towards the rear of the cassette and, at the
same time, raising the rear end of the guide then lifting it out of the cassette as shown. Take
care not to damage or bend the spring fingers.
l Unclip and remove the four E spacers from the base of the cassette as shown.

Note: The two E spacers located near the handle end of the cassette should be turned through 90
degrees before pulling upwards.
4. Snap-in the four new E spacers in to the slots in the cassette base.
5. Insert the note guides back into the cassette so that the pointers at either end of the guide are
pointing at the code numbers for the new currency. For this example the left hand guide (B)
should be inserted with the triangular pointer pointing at the number 3 and the right hand guide
(A) pointer pointing at the number 3. The following illustration shows an example of the left
hand guide. To lock the guide in place, press down on the guide and slide it towards the front of
the cassette.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

6. Replace the flat washers and screws in the base of the cassette or screw in the green plastic
clamps if these are fitted.
Currency Width Adjustment

The currency width adjustment is made by first establishing the width of the currency that the cassette is
to hold then using this measurement to determine the setting of spacers located between two note
guides and the cassette lid. The setting of the spacers can be adjusted to accommodate currency of
varying widths:
l Minimum width 62 mm (2.44 in.)

l Maximum width 95 mm (3.74 in.).
As with the length adjustment there are two types of spacers:
l Segment type
l Fixed size.

Cassette Lid - E and Yellow Spacer Locations - Depending upon the type of cassette, the lid will be fitted
with two yellow spacers and either three or two E spacers. Newer lids are designed to accept the spray
bar of the Fluiditi system and this occupies the position formerly taken by a central E spacer. Both types
of lids are shown in the following illustrations.

Spacer Screws
(10 off )
Note Guide Welding Peg

( Non TI Lid -
see text )
"E" Spacers (6 off )
Yellow
Spacers
(4 off )
Note Guide
Cut-Outs
To Outside
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
The E spacers are the same as the E spacers used when adjusting the currency length. Each E spacer is
attached to the lid note guides by a cross-headed screw.
The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers (shown below), and are designed to clip into the
cassette lid. Each Yellow spacer is also attached to the lid note guides by a cross headed screw.
2
3
4 11
5 1 0
6 9
7 8
8 7
6
9
0
1 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
The following example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency of width 67 mm (2.64 in.) on a lid
with two E spacers and two yellow spacers.

Proceed as follows:
1. Open the cassette and remove the lid.

2. Using a cross-head screwdriver, remove the two note guides from the lid by undoing the cross-
head screws from the two Yellow spacers then use the same screwdriver to remove the E
spacers from the note guides.
3. Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each spacer then
pushing them out of the lid.
4. Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).
5. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of this section
to determine the spacer code for the currency:
6. Set the four new Yellow and four (or six) new E spacers to their spacer codes. For this example
the Yellow spacers should be set to C8 and the E spacers to E10. The procedure to set the E
spacer is the same as that when adjusting for currency length, that is, cut the spacer above
segment 10. The procedure to set a Yellow spacer to its spacer code is as follows:
l The Yellow spacers are embossed on one side. Looking at this side, you see two sets of
numbers 1 to 12 reading in opposite directions. One end has the letter C on it and the other
has the letter D.
l The Yellow spacer code is C8 so count from the C end to segment 8 and, using a sharp knife,
cut the spacer just above the number 8 so that you are left with a spacer that has C and
segments 1 to 8, refer to following illustration.
l Fit a locking wedge into the first gap in the cut Yellow spacer as shown. Remove any burrs left
after cutting.
5
6
7 8
8 7
9 6
10 5
11 4
12 3
2
1
C
7. Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the spacer together
and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of the spacers should be
pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.
8. Using the cross-head screwdriver, attach the new E spacers to the lid note guides.

9. Using the cross-head screwdriver, attach the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make sure the
cut outs on the note guides are facing towards the outside edges of the cassette lid as shown in
the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside

Cassette Lid - E and Yellow Spacer Locations
Depending upon the type of cassette, the lid will be fitted with two yellow spacers and either three or
two E spacers. Newer lids are designed to accept the spray bar of the Fluiditi system and this occupies
the position formerly taken by a central E spacer.
In this section the example shows how to adjust the cassette for currency width on a lid with two E
spacers and two yellow spacers. Older cassettes will require another E spacer to fit in the central
position of each note guide.
The fixed size E spacers are the same as those used when adjusting the currency length. Each E spacer is
clipped in to the lid note guides - see the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside

The other four spacers are known as Yellow spacers, and are designed to clip into the cassette lid. Each
Yellow spacer is also clipped in to the lid note guides - see the following illustration.
Spacer Code
The following example explains how to adjust a cassette for a currency of width 67 mm (2.64 in.).
Proceed as follows:

2. Unclip and remove the two note guides from the lid then remove the E spacers from the note
guides.
3. Remove the Yellow spacers from the lid by pressing in the two spring legs of each spacer then
pushing them out of the lid.
4. Determine the width of the new currency (in this case 67 mm (2.64 in.)).
5. Use the table given under the heading “Currency Width Spacer Codes” at the end of this section
to determine the spacer code for the currency.
6. Select four new Yellow and four new E spacers by their spacer codes. For this example the
Yellow spacers should be C8 and the E spacers E10.
Spacer Code
Spacer Code
X
X
7. Install the four new Yellow spacers in the cassette lid by pressing the legs of the spacer together
and pushing them into the apertures in the cassette lid. The legs of the spacers should be
pointing towards the centre of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.
8. Clip the four new E spacers to the lid note guides.

9. Clip the lid note guides to the cassette lid. Make sure the cut outs on the note guides are facing
towards the outside edges of the cassette lid as shown in the following illustration.
Note Guide
Yellow Spacers
‘E’ Spacer
‘E’ Spacer
Note Guide
Cut-outs
To Outside
Currency Width Spacer Codes

Currency Width Yellow Spacer E Spacer Code Currency Width Yellow Spacer E Spacer Code
mm (in.) Code mm (in.) Code
62 (2.44) C9 E11 79 (3.11) D3 E4
63 (2.48) D8 E10 80 (3.15) C3 E4
64 (2.52) D8 E10 81 (3.19) C3 E4
65 (2.56) C8 E10 82 (3.23) D2 E3
66 (2.60) C8 E10 83 (3.27) C2 E3
67 (2.64) D7 E9 84 (3.31) C2 E3
68 (2.68) C7 E9 85 (3.35) D1 E2
69 (2.72) C7 E9 86 (3.39) C1 E1
70 (2.76) D6 E8 87 (3.43) C1 E1
71 (2.80) C6 E7 88 (3.46) D E1
72 (2.83) C6 E7 89 (3.50) C N/R
73 (2.87) D5 E7 90 (3.54) C N/R
74 (2.91) C5 E6 91 (3.58) C N/R
75 (2.95) C5 E6 92 (3.62) N/R N/R
76 (2.99) D4 E6 93 (3.66) N/R N/R
77 (3.03) C4 E5 94 (3.70) N/R N/R
78 (3.07) C4 E5 95 (3.74) N/R N/R
(N/R - Spacer or guide not required)

Note: On H-8015-STD1-01/02-08 non-tamper indicating lids, when the yellow spacer is set to C or D, cut
off the two welding pegs at both sides of the lid at the opposite end to the latch. (Refer to the following
illustration). This permits the note guides to sit level.
Spacer Screws
(10 off )
Note Guide Welding Peg

( Non TI Lid -
see text )
"E" Spacers (6 off )
Yellow
Spacers
(4 off )
Note Guide
Cut-Outs
To Outside
There are no welding pegs on Wide Plastic cassettes.
Note Low Sensing Adjustment

The cassette contains a note low block that provides the parent ATM with an indication of a note low
condition. The block can be set to give two note low settings:
l 75 ± 50 notes
l 200 ± 50 notes.
The settings are indicated by spherical pips on the block such that if the pips are towards the truck door
end of the cassette, it is set for the 75 note setting. If the pips are set to the rear of the cassette then it is
set for the 200 setting. Refer to the following illustration for the location of the pips.
Spherical Pips

To change the note low setting proceed as follows:

2. Press the flaps of the note low block together and then pull the block upwards and out of the
pusher body.
3. Turn the block around so that the pips face the opposite way then insert the block back into the
pusher.
4. Press down firmly until the block clicks into place.
CABLING
None.
None.

TOOLS
l A sharp knife,
l A medium size cross-head screwdriver.

REVISION


CAUTION
INTRODUCTION
The S2 Currency Dispenser is also referred to as the USB Media Dispenser.
Carriage Single Note Transport

Carriage
Umbilical (SNT)
Presenter Core
Nose
Bill Aligner Module
(BAM)
Main Motor & Pump

Assembly
Purge Bin
Status Indicator
Lights
Currency Cassettes
4–High Pick Support Frame
Single Pick Module
Double Pick Module

5–High Pick Support Frame
DESCRIPTION
The dispenser, upon command from the ATM processor, selects bills from the cassettes; tests for
singularity and irregularities, stacks them into a single bunch then presents the bunch to the customer.
The presented bunch will remain in the present position until removed by the customer or retracted
under application control.
S2 Dispenser modules and cassettes are not interchangeable with earlier designs of dispenser.

The dispenser is an assembly of the following:
l Presenter Core - front or rear access

l Nose
l Carriage - front or rear access
l Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
l Single Note Transport (SNT)
l Main Motor and Pump Assembly
l Double Pick Module(s)
l Pick Support Frame
l Currency Cassettes
l Purge Bin - open, latchfast, lockable latchfast
l Status Indicator Lights
l Main Control Board
l 5/6 Hi Expansion Board (optional)
l Single Pick Module (optional)
l Serial Number Read (optional)
Weight
The weight of the basic 4-high unit with empty currency cassettes is 61.5 kg (136 lb).
Presenter Core
Carriage Cam
(Primary)
Carriage Umbilical Flex
Purge Bin
Sensors
Cam Motor
Vacuum
Sensor
Vacuum
Reservior
Module Latch
Sensor
24VDC
Interlock
Switch
Purge Bin
Carriage Position CIC
Switch
Cam CIC Sensor
Carriage Cam
Purge Bin (Secondary)
LED Interface
Purge Bin Latch

Sensor

Nose
Carriage Present Flag
Variants:
l 144.5 mm Front Access

l 154.0 mm Front Access
l 172.0 mm Rear Access

Carriage
Chassis Cover
CIC Sensor Target
Front Access Rear Access

Closed Closed
Lower Plate
Carriage Position
Sensor Front Access
Open
Exit/Pre-Exit & Bunch
Sensors
Rear Access
Open
Pre-Exit Sensor Bunch Sensor
Exit Sensor
Timing Disk
Belt Motor
Carriage with chassis cover removed

Bill Aligner Module (BAM)
Finger Rack
Edge Register
Motor
Sensor
Single Note Transport (SNT)

Media Deflector Sensors
Divert Gate
Media Deflector
Fingers
Stack Entry Sensor

(PurgeSen)
Flickers
Divert Entry Sensor
Divert Gate
Sensor
Width Sensor
Line 2 Timing Sensor Hall Effect Thickness Sensor

(TimeDiscSen) (HETS)

Main Motor and Pump Assembly

Main Motor
Vacuum Pump
Double Pick Module
Suction
Cup
Note Low
Sensor Pick Sensor
LED Pick Sensor(s)*
* Second pick sensor in dual sensor systems only
(polymer notes)
Pick Arm
Motor
Quad CIC Board
Key Plate
Pick Arm D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensors Position Sensors
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Hose

Single Pick Module
Suction
Cup
Note Low
Sensor Pick Sensor
LED
Pick Sensor(s)*
* Second pick sensor in dual sensor systems only
Key Plate (polymer notes)
Pick Arm
Motor
Dual CIC Board
Pick Arm
Position Sensor
D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensor
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Hose
Currency Cassette
Refer to the NCR S2 Dispenser Cassettes Operator Guide (B006-6966) and the S2 Currency Cassette
chapter in this service manual.

Purge Bin
Open Purge Bin
Latchfast Purge Bin
Lockable Latchfast Purge Bin
Retract Reject
Divert
Purge Bin Areas
Height Width Length

Open Purge Bin 142 mm (5.6 in.) 218 mm (8.6 in.) 361 mm (141.2 in.)
Latchfast Purge Bin 140 mm (5.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.) 361 mm (141.2 in.)
Lockable Latchfast Purge Bin 140 mm (5.5 in.) 237 mm (9.3 in.) 368 mm (141.5 in.)

Status Indicator Lights

The status indicator lights can be configured by the owning authority.
The default configuration is:
Indicator Light Possible Root Cause

Solid Red Dispenser in service.
Action is required before dispenser can be racked in.
Flashing Red Dispenser out of service.
Action required before dispenser can be brought into service.
Solid Amber Dispenser in service.
Action required to repair dispenser.
Flashing Amber Dispenser in service.
Action required to replenish dispenser.
Solid Green Dispenser in service.
No action required.
Vacuum System
Vacuum Sensor
Vacuum Pump
Vacuum Reservoir Main Motor
Air Filter
Pick Arm Motor
T Connector
Suction Cup
Pick Line Solenoid Valve

Main Control Board
J16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
J15
J6
J7
J8
J9
J14 J25
J18
J13 J12 J19 J11 J10
Number Harness Number Harness

J1 Presenter Harness J11 Lower Pick Module Harness
J2 Presenter Harness J12 Lower Dual cassette ID Harness
J3 SNT Harness J13 SOH Harness
J4 SNT Harness J14 Upper Dual cassette ID Harness
J5 Main Motor J15 SOH Harness
J6 USB Mini Cable J16 RJ45 Cable to shutter PCB
J7 +24VDC Power J18 Interface Harness
J8 Upper Pick Module Harness J19 Interface Harness
J9 Upper Pick Module Harness J25 BAM Harness
J10 Lower Pick Module Harness

5/6 Hi Expansion Board
J1 J2
J3
J6
J7
Number Harness
J1 Interface Harness
J2 Interface Harness
J3 Single or Double Pick Module Harness (Motor and Vacuum Solenoid)
J6 Single or Double Pick Module Harness (PA/DW PCB Sensor)
J7 Single or Dual Cassette ID Harness

Serial Number Read

The serial number read (SNR) transport is an optional anti-fraud feature mounted in pick 1 of the upper
double pick module, primarily for the China market. A pair of scanners reads the denomination and
serial number of every note as it passes from the pick to the presenter, and also takes an image.
SNR Camera on
fixed guide
SNR Camera on
moving guide
There is an SNR control board mounted on the side of the pick module.
CN 3 CN 4
CN 1 CN 2 CIS Head CIS Head
(not used) (not used) (Moving guide) (Fixed guide)
CN 5 CN 6
DC Power Input USB HS
(to dispenser board) (to USB hub)
Note that the scanners are calibrated by the manufacturer and matched to a specific control board by
serial numbers, so boards and scanners must not be swapped out individually. The Field Replaceable
Unit for the Serial Number Read function is the entire pick module.

Electrical System
K
Media Deflector Motor
Carriage Sensor A J
B Purge Bin Sensors
Presenter Carriage PCB Vacuum

Timing Disc J1 Sensor Purge Bin LEDs Interface
J5 HETS
Sensor J2 J4 J3 Carriage Position
Sensor 24VDC Presenter
J2 Interlock CIC
J3 J1 Switch
Presenter Relay PCB Carriage
Purge Bin
Motor Motor Width Sensor
Switch
F/A Flex Interface R/A Cam Purge Bin Latch Sensor Divert Gate
C Motor Solenoid
J3
J2
J1
Module Latch Sensor
BAM Motor
J4
Shutter PCB SNT Sensor Board

E
Status Indicator
J16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
D Main Motor
(optional) (Exit/Entry)
J15 USB Hub Divert/Transport Sensor
J6
H
+24VDC Main PSU
J7
Divert Gate Flag Sensor
BAM CIC
J8 Pick1 Motor
Timing Disc Sensor

J9
J14
J25 J18
G Quad CIC
F Pick2 Motor
J13 J12 J19 J11 J10
Pick1 Sensor Pick1
Dual Cass ID CIC Solenoid Value
for Cassettes 1 & 2 G L
Pick1 LED
F
Dual Cass ID CIC Pick Module Pick2 Sensor

for Cassettes 3 & 4 for Cassettes 3 & 4 Pick2
Pick2 LED Solenoid Value
L
J1 J2
A Umbilical Flex Harness E SNT Harness J Purge Bin Interface Harness

B Carriage Position Sensor Harness F Dual Cassette ID Harness K Purge Bin Interconnect Harness
C Presenter Harness G Double Pick Module Harness L Interface Harness
D State of Health Harness H BAM CIC Harnes

5/6 Hi Expansion Board - 5 High

Main Control Board
J19 J18
L L
J1 J2
J3
Motor Dual CIC
M
J7 J6
Sensor
N Solenoid Value
5/6 Hi Expansion LED
Board
Single Cass ID CIC
L Interface Harness
M Single Cassette ID Harness
N Single Pick Module Harness

Sensors
Front Access Carriage
Carriage Open Carriage Closed
Presenter Timing Disc

Sensor Carriage Flag
Rear Access Carriage Carriage Position
Sensor
Bunch Pre-Exit Exit
Purge Bin Sensors

Carriage CIC
Nose Media Deflector Sensors Nose
(Front Access) Stack Entry Sensor (Rear Access)
BAM CIC
Purge Bin
Latch Sensor Clamp Cam
Purge Bin CIC
Present Sensor Divert Entry Sensor Width Sensor
Vacuum Sensor
Pick Sensor
HETS
Cassette Latch Sensor

Pick 1
Cassette ID Sensor
Note Low Sensor
Pick Sensor LED
Pick 2
Double Pick Module
(typical)
Pick Line Pick Line

Position Sensor Position Sensor
D Wheel Shaft
D Wheel Shaft
Position Sensor
Position Sensor
Quad CIC Board
Dual CIC Board
Single Pick Module Pick Sensor
Cassette Latch Sensor

Pick 5
Cassette ID Sensor
Note Low Sensor
Pick Sensor LED
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Messages
The following error messages are reported by the module. Refer to the sections 'Module Replacement'
and 'Adjustments' for detailed instructions on FRU actions. To de-code specific M_Status and M_Data use
the Status Code Translator Tool available from http://www.infoprod.ncr.com or refer to Diagnostic
Status Code Notebook Volume 1
(B006-6273).

Control Board
Module ID: 1
Error M Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution

Status
NVRAM access failure 1 NV RAM corrupt Inspect control Replace control
Faulty control pcb board board
USB comms failure 2 Check USB connections Inspect harness Push connector
home
Faulty USB harness Replace USB
harness
No power to device Push connector
home
Faulty control PCB Replace PCB
I2C comms failure 3 Faulty I2C connections Inspect harness Inspect harness
connections connections
Faulty I2C harness Inspect harness Replace
harness
No power to device Inspect power Inspect power
harness harness
Faulty shutter Run SysApp Replace shutter
diagnostic test
Instance ID not configured 6 Dual dispense instance not N/A Configure
configured instance in
SysApp
Non authorised dispenser 8 Non authorised dispenser Authorise
control board fitted control board fitted device in
Device not authenticated 9 Device not authenticated at SysApp
installation or control pcb
replacement
All cassettes empty or removed N/A Cassettes empty or removed Inspect All cassettes
cassettes replenished
All cassettes empty, removed or N/A Cassettes empty, removed or Inspect All cassettes
badly loaded badly loaded cassettes replenished

Pick Module
Module ID: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

Status
ICS activated – 4 ICS activated Confirm ICS Replace affected modules
replace all affected triggered
parts
Pick sensor failed 25 Jam under pick sensor Inspect pick Clear jam
(p1) sensor
26 Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp Replace pick module
(p2) diagnostic test
27 Pick sensor not calibrated Configure pick module
(p3) Faulty control PCB Replace control PCB
Pick arm sensor fault 28 Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp Replace pick module
29 Faulty pick module Replace pick module
(p5) Incorrectly fitted pick PCB Inspect pick Re-seat pick PCB
30 PCB
(p6) Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace control PCB
diagnostic test
D-wheel sensor fault Faulty harness / PCB Run SysApp Replace pick module
Faulty pick module diagnostic test
Incorrectly fitted pick PCB Inspect pick Re-seat pick PCB

PCB
Faulty control PCB Run SysApp Replace control PCB
diagnostic test
Pick arm motor fault 45 Poor cassette loading Check cassette Re-load cassette and run
(p1) loading multiple test notes
46
(p2)
47 Faulty pick arm motor Run SysApp Replace pick module
48
(p4)
49 Faulty control PCB Run multiple Replace control PCB
(p5) test notes
50
(p6)


Status
Bill jam at pick 64 Poor media quality/ cassette Inspect pick clear jam/reload
sensor (p1) loading or foreign object module and cassette/remove foreign
65 present cassette object
(p2) Faulty pick transport Inspect pick Replace pick module
66 module
(p3)
67 Faulty cassette Inspect Replace cassette
(p4) cassette
68
(p5) Faulty pick sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
69 diagnostic test
(p6)
Media detected at 74 Foreign object at pick sensor Inspect pick Clear foreign object
pick sensor at wrong (p1)
time 75 Poor cassette loading Check cassette Re-load cassette
(p2) loading
76
(p3)
77 Faulty pick sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
78
(p5) Faulty cassette Inspect Replace cassette
79 cassette
(p6)
Pick sensor dirty N/A Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Pick unit missing Faulty harness Inspect harness Replace harness
Faulty CIC sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
diagnostic test
Pick unit tamper N/A
Pick unit not Faulty CIC sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
configured diagnostic test

Cassette
Module ID: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13

Status
Cassette not latched 6 Cassette not latched correctly Inspect Rack cassette into device
correctly cassette latch
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick frame
diagnostic test
Faulty cassette latch Inspect latch
Cassette parameters 7 Cassette parameters not N/A Configure cassette in
not configured configured SysApp
Cassette ID sensor 25 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
fault (p1) diagnostic test
26 Missing CIC target Inspect Replace cassette
(p2) cassette CIC
27 target location
(P3)
28 Faulty CIC target Run SysApp Replace cassette
(p4) Faulty control PCB diagnostic test Replace control PCB
Cassette latch sensor 29 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick frame
fault (p5) diagnostic test
30
(p6) Faulty cassette latch Inspect latch
Cassette low sensor Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace pick module
fault Faulty cassette diagnostic test Replace cassette
Pusher Plate Stalled 81 Poor cassette loading Inspect Re-load cassette
82 cassette
83 contents
84 Faulty cassette Inspect Replace cassette
85 cassette
86


Status
Cassette empty 81 Cassette empty Inspect Replenish cassette
Too many bad media (p1) Incorrect or poor quality or cassette Re-load media / Replenish
items picked 82 poorly loaded media in cassette contents with correct media
(p2)
83 Incorrect cassette configuration Check note Set note configuration i
(p3) configuration in SysApp
84 SysApp
(p4) HETs not calibrated Confirm Configure singularity in
85 correct SysApp
(p5) singularity
86 Faulty SNT Run SysApp Replace SNT
Unable to learn Incorrect or poor quality or Inspect Re-load media / Replenish
media parameters poorly loaded media in cassette cassette with correct media
contents
Faulty SNT Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Too many Incorrect or poor quality or Inspect Re-load media / Replenish
consecutive mis- poorly loaded media in cassette cassette with correct media
picks contents
Faulty / worn suction cups Inspect Replace suction cups
suctions cups
Vacuum filter blocked Run SysApp Replace vacuum filter
Vacuum system fault diagnostic test Replace motor / pump
module
Faulty pick module Replace pick module
Faulty pressure sensor Replace presenter
Cassette removed N/A Cassette removed Inspect Insert cassette
cassette
location
Cassette low Cassette low Inspect Replenish cassette
cassette
contents
Cassette not N/A
configured

Purge Bin
Module ID: 14

Status
Bin removed 6 Bin removed Inspect bin Insert bin
location
Faulty bin present switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Bin not latched Bin not inserted fully Inspect bin Rack bin into device
correctly latch
Faulty bin latch Run SysApp Replace presenter
Faulty bin latch sensor diagnostic test
Divert Area
Module ID: 15
Error M Status Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution

Bin full 91 Bin compartment full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
compartment compartments)
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Bin nearly full N/A Bin compartment full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
Reject Area
Module ID: 16
Error M Status Possible Root Causes Isolation Resolution

diagnostic test
Retract Area
Module ID: 17


Status
Bin retract 6 Bin compartment full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
operations limit compartment compartments)
exceeded
diagnostic test
Carriage
Module ID: 18
See also ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ for detailed guidance on diagnosing the cause of faults in the
carriage.

Status
Carriage bunch 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor fail Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace carriage
diagnostic test
Jam in carriage Inspect Clear jam
Foreign object in carriage carriage Clear foreign object
Faulty carriage Run SysApp Replace carriage
Faulty umbilical diagnostic test Replace umbilical
Carriage pre-exit 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
diagnostic test


Status
Carriage exit sensor 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
fail Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace carriage
diagnostic test
Carriage position 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
diagnostic test
Foreign object in carriage Inspect Clear foreign object
carriage
Faulty umbilical Run SysApp Replace umbilical
diagnostic test
Carriage home 22 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
position sensor fail Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Missing target Inspect Replace carriage
carriage target
location
Faulty target Run SysApp
Faulty control PCB diagnostic test Replace control PCB
Carriage belt timing 22 Broken timing disk Run SysApp Replace carriage
disk fail diagnostic test
Carriage drive motor 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
fail Faulty carriage Run SysApp Replace carriage
Faulty motor / harness diagnostic test
Faulty presenter tracks Inspect tracks Replace presenter

Foreign object in presenter Inspect Clear foreign object
presenter
diagnostic test


Status
Carriage belt motor 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
fail Jam in carriage Inspect Clear jam
carriage
Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace carriage
diagnostic test
Faulty carriage timing disk Inspect timing
disk
diagnostic test
Carriage Jammed 42 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
Faulty presenter tracks Inspect tracks Replace presenter or nose

Foreign object in presenter Inspect Remove foreign object
presenter
diagnostic test
Media jam at the 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’

bunch sensor Jam or foreign object in carriage Inspect Clear jam or remove
carriage foreign object
Media jam at the 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
pre-exit sensor Jam or foreign object in carriage Inspect Clear jam or remove
Media jam at the exit 62 Review ‘Troubleshooting Procedures.’
sensor Jam or foreign object in carriage Inspect Clear jam or remove


Status
Bunch sensor is dirty N/A Sensor dirty Run SysApp Clean sensor
Pre-exit sensor is diagnostic test
dirty
Exit sensor is dirty
Carriage tamper N/A
Too many N/A Poor quality currency Inspect Replenish cassette
consecutive splays in cassette
carriage contents
Splay threshold set incorrectly Check splay Set splay threshold
threshold
Foreign object in carriage Inspect Remove foreign object
carriage
diagnostic test

Single Note Transport

Module ID: 19

Status
HETS sensor fail 21 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
Faulty control PCB diagnostic test
Width sensor fail Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
Sensor not calibrated Run SysApp Calibrate device
ulty harness / sensor diagnostic test Replace SNT
Main timing disk Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
sensor fail Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Faulty SNT timing disk Inspect SNT
Stacker entry sensor Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
failed Foreign object in SNT Clear foreign object
diagnostic test
diagnostic test
Divert bin entry Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
sensor failed Foreign object in SNT Clear foreign object
diagnostic test
diagnostic test
Media deflector 21 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
home sensor failed Foreign object in SNT Clear foreign object
diagnostic test
Faulty SNT diagnostic test


Status
extended sensor Foreign object in SNT Clear foreign object
failed
diagnostic test
Divert gate fail / 21, Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam
divert gate sensor 41 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
fault diagnostic test
Faulty SNT solenoid
failed Foreign object in SNT Clear foreign object
Divert Gate Jam at Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

Divert Foreign object in SNT Clear foreign object
Unrecoverable 61 Jam in SNT Inspect SNT Clear jam

media jam in the SNT Misaligned belts Re-seat belts
Damaged belts Replace SNT
Unrecoverable Jam in vertical transport Inspect vertical Clear jam
media jam between transport
pick modules and Misaligned belts Inspect SNT Re-seat belts
SNT and Pick
Damaged belts Replace SNT / Pick


Status
Media detected at 70 Poor cassette loading Inspect Re-load cassette
HETS sensor at cassette
wrong time contents
Foreign object in SNT / Pick Inspect SNT / Remove foreign object
Pick
Media detected at Poor cassette loading Inspect
width sensor at cassette
wrong time contents
Foreign object in SNT / Pick Inspect SNT / Clear jam
Pick
HETS calibration out N/A Wrong media loaded Inspect Replenish cassette
with acceptable cassette
range contents
Wrong singularity configured Confirm Configure singularity in
correct SysApp
singularity
Faulty HETs sensor Run SysApp Replace SNT
diagnostic test
Stacker entry sensor Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
is dirty
Divert bin entry
sensor is dirty
Width sensor is dirty
HETS sensor is dirty
SNT tamper N/A N/A N/A
Presenter
Module ID: 20

Status
Interlock 5 Device not fully racked into safe Inspect device Rack device into safe
disconnected Faulty interlock switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty module rack Inspect module Replace module rack
rack
Presenter 7 Presenter learn routine N/A Run learn hardware in
configuration required SysApp
unknown


Status
Clamp sensor failed 8 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Missing CIC target Inspect Replace cassette
cassette CIC
target location
Faulty CIC target Run SysApp
Faulty motor / harness diagnostic test Replace presenter
Faulty carriage Inspect Replace carriage
carriage
Purge entry sensor 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
fail compartments)
Foreign object over sensor Inspect sensor Clear foreign object
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Purge entry sensor 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
fail compartments)
diagnostic test
Retract entry sensor 8 Bin full Inspect bin Empty bin (all
fail compartments)
diagnostic test
Module unlatched 8 Device not fully racked into safe Inspect device Rack device into safe
Faulty interlock switch Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty module rack Inspect module Replace module rack
rack
Clamp motor failed 9 Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty carriage Inspect Replace carriage
carriage
Faulty clamp sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test


Status
Main motor failed 9 Faulty motor / harness Run SysApp Replace presenter
diagnostic test
Faulty SNT timing disk Inspect SNT Replace SNT
Faulty presenter Inspect Replace presenter
presenter
Purge entry sensor is N/A Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
dirty
Retract entry sensor Sensor dirty Inspect sensor Clean sensor
is dirty
Presenter tamper N/A N/A N/A
Exit Shutter
Module ID: 21

Status
I2C communications 3 Check I2C connections Inspect harness Re-plug harness
fault connections
Faulty I2C harness Inspect harness Replace I2C harness
Faulty shutter Run SysApp Replace Shutter
diagnostic test
No power to device Inspect power Replace power harness
harness
Shutter jam – open 44 Shutter jam Inspect shutter Clear jam
Shutter jam – closed
Shutter tamper N/A N/A

Suction Cups
Module ID: 22

Status
Suction cups on pick N/A Suction cups damaged / worn Inspect suction Replace Suction cups
module 1 must be cups and check
replaced soon pick counter
Suction cups on pick
module 2 must be
replaced soon
module 3 must be
replaced soon
module 4 must be
replaced soon
module 5 must be
replaced soon
module 6 must be
replaced soon
Media Aligner
Module ID: 23

Status
Media Aligner sensor 31 Jam in carriage Inspect Clear jam
fail Foreign object in carriage carriage Clear foreign object
Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace Media Aligner
Faulty carriage Replace carriage

Media Aligner motor 51 Jam in carriage Inspect Clear jam
fail Foreign object in carriage carriage Clear foreign object
Faulty motor / harness diagnostic test Replace Media Aligner

Vacuum System
Module ID: 24

Status
Vacuum sensor fault 32 Faulty harness / sensor Run SysApp Replace presenter core or
diagnostic test main PCB.
Vacuum system fail 52 Faulty vacuum pipe work Replace presenter or
pneumatic tubing or equal
T connector or 90 degree
vacuum connector or air
filter.
Vacuum system N/A Faulty vacuum pipe work Replace presenter or
failing pneumatic tubing or equal
T connector or 90 degree
vacuum connector or air
filter.
Faulty vacuum pump Replace motor and pump
assembly.
Serial Number Read

Module ID: 25

Status
SNR Transport open N/A SNR Transport not latched Inspect SNR Close SNR Transport
Transport
USB Serial Number Build up of dirt on SNR Inspect SNR Clean SNR Camera
too many invalid Camera
characters
USB Serial Number
too many invalid
serial numbers
USB Serial Number N/A
reader de-
configured


Status
Communication 96 Communications connection to Check comms Reconnect comms or
failure to SNR device SNR board disconnected connections to repair cable
SNR board on
pick module
USB Serial Number Control board failure Replace SNR device
Reader control
board failure
USB Serial Number Fixed guide flex circuit not Check flex Reconnect flex circuit.
Reader fixed guide connected. Faulty camera or circuit Replace pick module if
camera failure (top control board. connection at necessary.
CIS) fixed guide and
at control
board
USB Serial Number Moving guide flex circuit not Check flex
Reader moving guide connected. Faulty camera or circuit
camera failure control board. connection at
(bottom CIS) moving guide
and at control
board
Too many Build up of dirt on SNR Camera Inspect SNR Clean SNR Camera
consecutive count Camera
mismatches
Additional troubleshooting checks and resolutions for carriage errors (M_STATUS 22, 42, 43 or 62).
Carriage Alignment
Incorrect alignment can be indicated by carriage drive motor failures (M_STATUS 42), carriage jams
(M_STATUS 62) and presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS 43).
l Delivery failures may also occur due to carriage not being correctly positioned in the present
position.
l Check that the carriage tie bar is parallel to the dispenser nose. Anything more than 2mm
deviation when the tie bar is level with the dispenser nose is not parallel. If not, remove and re-
insert the carriage, referring to ‘FRU Module Removal and Replacement’ section. While the
carriage is removed, carry out the checks listed in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from

Presenter’.
Carriage Motor Cover

An incorrectly fitted or missing motor cover can be indicated by carriage jams between park and
present (M_STATUS 42, Byte 3 0A).
l Check that the motor cover does not collide with the presenter nose.
l Ensure that the cover is snapped into place around all the edges and that the screws are fitted.

Carriage Umbilical Cable

A damaged or incorrectly fitting umbilical in the carriage will be indicated by carriage motor failures (M_
STATUS 42) or carriage sensor failures (M_STATUS 22).
l Check for damage to the umbilical, replace if necessary.
l Check that the umbilical is fitted correctly in the connectors in the presenter and in the carriage.
Also check that it is fitted into the correct connector in the carriage.
Front access connector Rear access connector
Carriage Plates Parallel When Open

Incorrect carriage plate opening can be indicated by presenter clamp jams (M_STATUS 43).
l Check that the front edge of the lower carriage plate is parallel to the upper plate when the
carriage opens. Use the ‘Clamp (with Carriage at Home Position)’ diagnostic test and observe the

movement. The lower plate should not be more than 20mm from parallel with upper plate.
l If it does not open evenly, carry out the following checks:

l Is the carriage aligned correctly? - see Carriage Alignment in this section.
l Are the carriage magnets configured correctly? Re-configure them if possible, o replace
the carriage is magnets are missing.
Closed cam
(driven) side
Open cam
(non-driven)
side
If the carriage still does not open evenly following the above checks, remove the carriage from the
presenter - refer to ‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section - and follow
the instructions in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’.
Carriage Movement
Problems with the movement of the carriage can be indicated by carriage jam (M_STATUS 42).
l Slowly move the carriage manually along the full length of the presenter track in both directions.
Check that the carriage runs smoothly along the track and does not collide with any components.
Remove any obstructions.
l Check that the carriage is aligned correctly - refer to ‘Carriage Alignment’ in this section.

l Ensure that the Single Note Transport is fitted correctly and that all three mounting screws are
tightened to prevent the carriage colliding with the SNT. Refer to ‘Replacing the SNT’ in the FRU
Removal and Replacement section.
If the carriage still does not move smoothly following the above checks, remove the carriage - refer to
‘Removing the Carriage’ in the FRU Removal and Replacement section - and then follow the instructions
in section ‘Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter’
Checks with Carriage Removed from Presenter

l Are there any damaged or dislocated links or arms on the carriage? If so, replace the carriage.
l Is there any damage on the lower link mount? If so, replace it (part number 445-0757100 ‘service
assy - lower linkage mount with carriage lower linkage’).
l Are there any loose, damaged or missing screws in the lower plate shaft? Replace any missing
screws (check none have fallen into the carriage). Tighten screws to 0.45 Nm.
l Rotate the green thumbwheel to check that all the belts on both the upper and lower plate rotate.
If they do not, check that the carriage belt drive shafts and pulleys are all in place and are not

damaged. Replace any damaged components if possible, or the carriage.
UPPER PLATE LOWER PLATE
Pulley
Belts Belts
Pulley and drive

shafts
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
The Control Board LEDs are not used for diagnostics.
There are no switches on the Control Board.

Level 1 Diagnostics
Test Description
MENU This displays a menu of the all the other Applets to allow the user to select one.
CLEAR Performs the default Clear operation.
CLEAR TO Performs a Clear operation with the destination set to Retract area.
RETRACT AREA
SET NOTES Allows the user to set the number of bills to be picked from each cassette. Only prompts for
configured cassettes. If the total number of bills exceeds the currently configured maximum
the command fails. A default of 5 bills for each configured and present cassette is used if no
number is entered
STACK Performs a Stack of the bills configured via Set Notes (above).
PRESENT Performs a Present of bills previously stacked.
DISPENSE Performs Stack and Present operations consecutively. The number of bills picked is
configured via Set Notes.
LEARN NOTE Performs a Learn Measurements operation for the specified cassette type. (Only configured
PARAMETERS cassettes are offered for selection). 40 bills are picked and the parameters measured, with
the new and existing parameters being returned in T_DATA.

Test Description
SINGLE NOTE Performs the SNT Diagnostic test.
TRANSPORT
SELF TEST Performs a Self Test operation. Menus are displayed to allow the destination to be selected
and which pick units to pick from. The shutter is then operated if requested.
SHUTTER The Shutter Diagnostic test is performed.
SENSOR/SWITCH A Read Sensors Diagnostic test for all sensors is performed. The following options are offered:
STATUS Normal reading with LEDs on
A/D reading of sensors in the on state
A/D blocked threshold values
CARRIAGE The Carriage Diagnostic test is performed.
GUIDANCE This test enables the various LED states / configurations to be exercised via Set Guidance Light
LIGHTS commands. Menus are provided to allow LED and flash rates to be selected.
CLAMP The Clamp Diagnostic test is performed. The following options are offered:
Clamp test with carriage at home
Clamp test with carriage in safe position
PICK VALVE The Pick Valve Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.
PICK ARM The Pick Arm Diagnostic test is performed for the selected pick unit.
DIVERT GATE The Divert Gate Diagnostic test is performed.
MEDIA The Media Deflector Diagnostic test is performed.
DEFLECTOR
PREPARE FOR The Prepare for shipment command is executed.
SHIPMENT
RUN TO RUN Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clear (not performed when looping)
l Sensor / Switch Status (default operation)
l Carriage
l Self Test
l Dispense
l Clear
RUN TO RUN 2 Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clamp Test
l Carriage Test
RUN TO RUN 3 Performs the following sequence of tests:
l Clamp Test
l Stack
l Present
l Half Retract (when looping on does Present/Half Retract 100 times)
l Retract

Test Description
PERFORMANCE Offers a menu with the following options:
l FRU Performance
l Device Performance.
On selecting FRU Performance the following are displayed for each FRU:
l Media Dispensed
l Fatal Errors
l Routine Errors
l Media per Fatal Error
l Media per Routine Error
On selecting Device Performance the following are displayed for the overall device:
l Media Dispensed
l Fatal Errors
l Routine Errors
l Media per Fatal Error
l Media per Routine Error
NOTE IMAGES If SNR hardware is present then all serial numbers, denominations and images will be
displayed for the notes picked from the prior Dispense, Stack or SelfTest command.
RUN TO RUN 4 Performs a clamp diagnostic test followed by a carriage diagnostic test. When in looping
mode, every 50th test also tests the carriage belts.
The Stack, Present, Retract and Dispense tests are not offered unless the lowest cassette has been
removed and re-inserted (after The Menu Applet, AppletId=0, has been displayed). This also applies to
the Dispense test on a Run to Run test, which is by-passed unless these conditions have been met.
Action Requests
This section describes the mechanism sequence following an action request (command) during normal
dispenser operation.
The action requests are:
l Clear
l Stack
l Present
l Retract
l Self Test
l Learn Measurement
l Set Guidance Lights
l Prepare Shipment
l Enable Stack ready
Clear
This causes the device to be cleared of any media which may have been left in the transport.
The media is transported to the destination requested in the operation, or to the default location if no
destination is provided. Possible destinations are:

l Reject compartment in the purge bin (default)

l Retract compartment in the purge bin
l Present position
Media detected in the single note transport prior to the divert gate will be stacked before being moved
to the required destination.
Media detected in the divert transport path, will be transported to the divert compartment.
If media has been delivered to the purge bin, the carriage will return to its idle position, ready for the
next operation.
If media has been delivered to the present position, the carriage will return to its idle position once the
media has been taken and the Media Taken event sent.
Stack
This causes the number of media items requested to be picked and stacked in the device ready for
presentation to the card holder.
Media which are to be rejected during the operation will be diverted from the main path via the divert
gate and transported to the divert bin. This is done on an individual basis with good media remaining in
the main transport until they reach the stack area.
If Pre-Present is enabled, after a good stack, the media is clamped in the carriage and moved to the pre-
present position in readiness for the next operation.
If Pre-Present is disabled, after a good stack, the media will be left in the stack position to allow
subsequent stack operations to add media to the bundle.
Present
This causes the media which have been previously stacked in the carriage to be moved to a position
where the customer can remove them.
With the exit shutter closed the carriage is driven forward until it reaches the present position, where it
is stopped and the shutter opened. If this is successful the media is driven forward to be taken by the
customer.
When the bundle has been taken, the carriage is returned to its idle position and the shutter closed.
If a fault occurs which stops the media from reaching the customer, an attempt is made to clear the
media to the reject bin.
Note: The present command may be issued when media is in the half retract position having previously
been retracted there.
Retract
This will cause the media to be drawn back into the carriage and the carriage driven to the location
specified.
The location can be one of the following:

l Retract compartment in the purge bin

l Reject compartment in the purge bin
l Half retract position, if enabled
If media is retracted to the purge bin, the carriage will return to the idle position in preparation for the
next operation.
If media is retracted to the half retract position, the carriage will remain there until a subsequent
present or clear request is invoked.
If no media is detected by the carriage sensors, the carriage will return to the idle position in
preparation for the next operation.
Self Test
The test starts with the carriage in the home position. If it is not in the home position, the carriage will
move to the home position before proceeding.
The following mechanisms are exercised:
l Divert gate
l Pick arms of any pick units not involved in the picking operation
l Pick valve test
l Clamp test if no items are requested from any pick unit
l Carriage diagnostic test
l Shutter, if requested (Shutter is always requested in diagnostics).
l Single Note Transport if no items are requested from any pick unit
l Media deflector test if no items are requested from any pick unit (Items are always requested in
diagnostics).
Any requested media is picked and stacked.
If a bad item is detected, it is diverted by the divert gate to the divert bin and the pick operation is
retried.
The media destination can be either:
l Retract compartment
l Reject compartment
l Half retract position, if enabled
l Present position
l Divert compartment
If media destination is set to Divert, all items (good and bad) will be diverted by the divert gate to the
divert bin. Otherwise they will be stacked and the carriage will be closed and driven to the media
destination.
The carriage will then return to the idle position in preparation for the next stack request.
Learn Measurement
This allows the software to learn the values of the widths and singularities of media at a specified
position.

Media will be picked and transported to the stacker before being transported to the location specified
by the destination attribute.
Refer to the section Currency Evaluation and Qualification Procedure for details of the procedure.
Set Guidance Lights

There is a red, amber and green status LED that can be individually set to off, on solid or flashing. This
request allows the state of the individual status LEDs to be set.
If the ‘Enable Default Lights’ device setting is set, the command is not performed and the default LED
signalling is performed.
Prepare for Shipment

This request prepares the dispenser hardware for shipment.
The following steps are taken:
l All pick arms are moved to a suitable angle for shipment

l The carriage is moved away from home
l The clamp cam is moved to its shipping position
l The carriage is moved back to home
On the next operation which attempts to open the clamp (e.g. clear), the carriage will be moved off
home and the cam returned to the normal present position, to allow the clamp to be opened.
Enable Stack Ready

This will enable the dispenser hardware for a stack command.
The following steps are taken when enabling stack ready:
l Move carriage to home position

l Open clamp
The command can also be used to cancel the enable stack ready request.
The following steps are taken when cancelling:
l Close clamp
l Return to idle position
Calibrate Sensors
This will re-calibrate sensors when an Field Replacement Unit (FRU) has been replaced. As the actual
readings of the sensors are used to calibrate, the device must be clear of media.
Diagnostics Tests
This section describes all the diagnostic tests that can be used to exercise different components of the
dispenser.
The tests are:

l Pick Arm
l Pick Valve
l Shutter
l Divert Gate
l SNT
l Carriage
l Clamp
l Media Deflector
l Read Sensors
Pick Arm Test

Tests the pick arm operation for the specified pick unit.
The test is performed by moving the pick arm through a complete cycle, determined by the current pick
profile, and measuring its position via its CIC sensor. The pick arm is moved at the same speed as it is
moved during a real pick cycle.
The 5 phases of the pick cycle are:
l Move to initial home position

l Move to each of the 4 positions (finishing at home)
The CIC sensor reading and Pick Arm position in degrees are reported for each phase in the resulting
event.
Cassettes do not need to be removed to perform this test.
Pick Valve Test
Pump
Vacuum
Sensor
Pick
Valves Presenter
Pick Lines Filter Zone
Test point
Downstream Upstream
Zone Zone
This will test for leaks and faulty parts in the vacuum system.
During the test, the dispenser interlock must be in the override position; cassettes can remain in the
dispenser.

First check the presenter zone:
1. Disconnecting the tubing just below the filter and seal the opening in the filter assembly with
your finger. Make sure no dust from the filter falls down into the tubing.
2. In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from media, and
run the test.
3. The following results will indicate a leak in the presenter zone:
l Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.
l The Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0, but the Closed Running
Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.
l The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running Pressure is more
than 100.
If a leak in the presenter zone is detected, replace the motor and pump assembly.
4. The following results will indicate an electronics fault that will require a replacement of the
presenter or main control board:
l There is no difference between the local atmospheric pressure reading and the closed
running pressure reading, but there is suction detected at the filter.
l After running the same test again, there is variation in the local atmospheric pressure
readings.
If there are no issues with the presenter zone, reconnect the hose to the filter and check for leaks in the
upstream zone:
1. In the test menu, select First Pick Module, then Test pressure ‐ pick arm away from media, and
run the test.
2. The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:
l Either the Closed Running Result or the Closed Static Result is 1.
l Both the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are 0, but the Closed Running
Pressure is above 75% of the Local Atmospheric Pressure.
l The difference between the Closed Static Pressure and the Closed Running Pressure is more
than 100.
3. If a leak in the upstream zone is detected, it can be isolated by disconnecting the tubing at each
pick valve in turn, starting at the lowest point, and seal the end of the tubing with your finger.
Then re-run the test for that pick valve.
4. The following results will indicate a leak in the upstream zone:
l If the Closed Running Result and the Closed Static Result are both 0 and the difference
between the Closed Static Pressure and Closed Running Pressure is less than 100, the location
of the leak has been found. Replace the damaged hose and re-run the test.
If there are no issues with the upstream zone, reconnect all hoses and check for leaks in the
downstream zone:
1. Place a very good quality note in the cassette so that the suction cups will seal against it during
the test.
2. In the test menu, select the pick line and then Test pressure ‐ pick arm in contact with media.
3. After running the test, if either the Open Valve Result is 0 or the Open Valve Result is 1 but the
difference between Open Valve Pressure and Closed Static Pressure more than 300, there is a
leak in the downstream zone between the pick valve and the media.
Either, re-seat suction cups, replace suction cups or replace pick module FRU.

Pick Valve Test Results
Value Description
Local Local Atmospheric Pressure (mbar).
Atmospheric
Pressure
Closed Running 0 = Base pressure reached
Result 1 = Base pressure not reached
Closed Running Time (ms) to reach Closed Running Pressure in milliseconds
Time
Closed Running Base pressure (mbar) or lowest pressure reached. Base pressure is the point at which the
Pressure rate of change in pressure has not fallen for 200 ms.
Closed Static 0 = Vacuum retained
Result 1 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure.
Closed Static Time (ms) to reach Closed Static Pressure with all valves closed, motor and pump stopped.
Time
Closed Static Pressure (mbar) reached during Closed Static Time.
Pressure
Open Valve 0 = Vacuum leaked, reached local atmospheric pressure
Result 1 = Vacuum retained
Open Valve Time Time (ms) to reach Open Valve Pressure with selected valve open and all other valves
closed, motor and pump stopped.
Open Valve Pressure reached during Open Valve Time with selected valve open and all other valves
Pressure closed, motor and pump stopped.
Shutter Test
This tests the shutter hardware operation by driving it to both open and closed positions.
The initial state for the shutter is the closed position, so an attempt will be made to put the shutter into
its initial state prior to test start.
The test is performed by driving the shutter in the open direction, measuring the length of time taken to
move between closed and open; the shutter position sensors are then read and verified in this position.
After a two second delay the shutter is driven in the close direction, measuring the length of time taken
to move, and the position sensors again read and verified.
Divert Gate Test

This test verifies the divert gate operation.
The test is performed by driving the divert gate to the divert position, measuring the length of time
taken to move between stack and divert. The divert gate position sensor is then read and verified in this
position. After a two second delay the divert gate is allowed to return to the stack position, measuring
the length of time taken to move, and the position sensor is again read and verified.

SNT Test
This test verifies the operation of the SNT. The motor is driven in normal operating direction only.
The test is performed by measuring the number of timing disk and D-Wheel interrupts over a 2 second
period. The transport speed is stabilised by running it up to speed for an initial period of 2 seconds
before the measurement starts.
If the observed number of interrupts is outwith the expected by more than ± 1, the test will fail.
Carriage Test
This test verifies the operation of the carriage for diagnostic purposes. It tests the carriage movement to
different locations, records flag opacity and on-board sensors at each, and tests the carriage belt drive
motor.
It is recommended that the test only be performed when there is no media in the carriage, as it will not
be managed appropriately.
When the request is received, the carriage and clamp cam will be driven accordingly to set the carriage
in the home position with clamp closed in preparation for the test to begin.
The test is performed by driving the carriage from the HOME to PRESENT, then to RFP, then to REJECT
positions at normal operating speed, coming to rest momentarily at each location. The time taken to
move between positions, the opacity of the flag and the onboard sensors values are measured at each
location.
At each of PRESENT, RFP and PURGE positions, the carriage belt drive motor can be enabled in one of
the following ways, by changing the Command Data:
l No belt drive
l Full Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in each direction and repeated at a fast speed,
counting the number of timing disk interrupts for each phase (default).
l Min Belt Drive Test – at a slow speed for 2 seconds in the reverse direction only, counting the
number of timing disk interrupts
There will be 3 carriage diagnostic events as a result of sending this request, one for each phase of the
test.
At the end of the test, the carriage will be returned to its HOME position, in readiness for the next
operation.
Clamp Test
This test verifies the operation of the clamp. The clamp mechanism consists of:
l Carriage
l Cam, stepper motor and CIC sensor,
l Media Aligner, stepper motor and CIC sensor.
The Clamp open operation consists of:

l Retract the Media Deflector

l Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.
l Drive the Cam to its open position and verify via its CIC sensor.
l Drive the Media Aligner to its extended position and verify via its CIC sensor.
This Clamp close operation consists of:
l Retract the Media Deflector

l Retract the Media Aligner to its home position and verify via its CIC sensor.
l Drive the Cam to its closed position and verify via its CIC sensor.
The test can be performed as described in the following sections.
Default Clamp Test

The default test is performed with the carriage at the HOME position. The carriage will be moved
automatically to this position if it is not already there.
The clamp is closed, opened and closed again. Each stage of the operation is verified via the CIC sensors.
Without carriage at home

This test operates the clamp in the same manner as the default test, but does not require the carriage at
the HOME position. It does not verify the operation of the lower carriage plate. It does not exercise the
BAM.
The carriage will be moved automatically out of the way before the test is started if necessary. The
carriage is not returned to HOME at the end of this test to allow the test to be looped.
No Media Aligner Test

This test operates the clamp in the same manner as the default test, but does not exercise the Media
Aligner except for retracting it to home if necessary at the start of the test.
Media Deflector Test

This test verifies the media deflector operation for diagnostic purposes.
The test is performed by driving the deflector to the extended position, measuring the length of time
taken to move between the home and extended positions. The media deflector position sensor is then
read and verified in this position. After a two second delay the deflector is driven to the home position,
measuring the length of time taken to move, and the position sensor is again read and verified.
Read Sensors Test

This command reads the state of all sensors and switches on the dispenser.
Sensors can be read as follows:
l normally – with LEDs switched on

l following a sensor reset and a delay of 250 ms
l when the LEDs have been switched on for a short time then off
l the A/D sensor reading can be returned
l the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level

The reset operation will recalibrate the sensors to obtain the blocked threshold regardless of the
current threshold level.
Sensor Can be reset Can be Switched on/off

Pick sensors Yes Yes
Main motor timing disk sensor No Yes
Stack entry sensor Yes Yes
Single note divert entry sensor Yes Yes
Width measurement sensors Yes Yes
Deflector sensors No Yes
Carriage sensors Yes No
Purge and RFP entry sensors Yes No
Diver gate position sensor Yes No
The sensors can be reported in individual groups as specified in the sensor group attribute or all groups
reported. On receipt of this request the sensors are read by the software, then the event for an
individual group is (or events for each group are) sent. See T_Data below for details of responses to
sensor requests.
In the case of the A/D blocked threshold or PWM drive level operation, some sensors have a fixed
threshold with variable PWM LED drive. For these sensors, the PWM LED drive level is reported. These
sensors are:
l Pick Sensors
l Stack entry sensor
l Single note divert entry sensor
l Width measurement sensors
In this case the Carriage position sensor will report the threshold value which is the upper limit of the
sensor clear state. The other thresholds for this sensor are constant in the firmware and cannot be read.
Note: The Read Sensors request is provided for diagnostic purposes only and should not be used during
a transaction to determine status. The status of the device is determined by issuing a Get Information
request

T_Data
Single Note Transport Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0-1 HETS left A/D value from left-hand thickness sensor. Range 0 - 1023.
2-3 HETS right A/D value from right-hand thickness sensor. Range 0 - 1023.
4-27 HETS compensation factor Internal HETS compensation factor per cassette type, left then
right. Range 0 to 255.
28 Note width sensor left Range 0 to 255.
29 Note width sensor right Range 0 to 255.
30 Stack entry Range 0 to 255.
31 Divert bin entry Range 0 to 255.
32 Main timing disk Range 0 to 255.
33 Divert gate position Divert gate position CO sensor:
0 = stack position
1 = divert position
2 = neither position.
34 Media deflector home Value of deflector home position sensor:
position 0 = at home position
1 = not at home position.
35 Media deflector extended Value of deflector extended position sensor:
position 0 = at extended position
1 = not at extended position.
36 5 volt supply to SNT Voltage supply to SNT (fused) in units of 0.1 V. Range 0 to 255.

Presenter Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0 Purge bin latch 0 = latch open
1 = latch closed.
1 Purge bin 0 = bin removed
present 1 = bin present
2-5 Purge bin entry Value of sensor at entry to purge bin. The four bytes contain the value
sensor of each of the four physical sensors. Range 0 to 255.
6-7 Clamp position Clamp CIC sensor position in degrees:
sensor 270 = closed/at present position
235 = open/at stack position
170 = at parked position.
Any other values indicate in -between positions.
8-9 Clamp position Clamp CIC sensor amplitude. Range 0 to 65535.
sensor
10 - 11 Media Aligner Media Aligner CIC sensor position in millimetres. This is a (signed) INT16
position sensor value. Range 0 to 65535.
12 - 13 Media Aligner Media Aligner CIC sensor amplitude. Range 0 to 65535.
position sensor
Carriage Sensor Values Event
Byte Sensor Value

0 Carriage belts timing disk 0 = clear
1 = blocked.
1 Carriage position sensor 1 = at purge position
2 = at present position
3 = at retract position
4 = between flags (clear).
2-3 Carriage home sensor Carriage home CIC sensor position in millimetres. This
is a (signed) INT16 value. Range 0 to 65535.
4-5 Carriage home sensor Carriage home CIC sensor amplitude.
6 Bunch 0 = clear
1= blocked.
7 Pre-exit 0 = clear
1= blocked.
8 Exit sensor 0 = clear
1= blocked.

Peripheral Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0 Interlock status 0 = interlock closed
1 = interlock open.
1 Module latched status 0 = module latched
1 = module unlatched.
2 ICS status 0 - ICS ok
1 = ICS fired.
3 Shutter open sensor Status of shutter open sensor.
4 Shutter closed sensor Status of shutter closed sensor.
5 Pick module supply voltage Status of 5V supply to pick uinits (fused) in units of
0.1V. Range 0 to 128.
6 Board ID Board hardware revision identifier. Range 0 to 15.
7 Ambient temperature Value of ambient temperature sensor on control
board in degree Celsius. Range o to 255.
8 Power supply Status of 24V supply (fused). Value 0 to 1.
9 - 10 Vacuum level Value of vacuum sensor in mbar. Range 0 to 255.
11 Presenter configuration Type of nose fitted to presenter chassis:
01 = R/A 411 mm
02 = R/A 297 mm
03 = RA 179 mm
11 = F/A 162 mm
12 = F/A 144 mm.
12 Carriage configuration Type of carriage fitted in presenter:
1 = front access
2 = rear access.

Pick Unit Sensors
Byte Sensor Value

0 Pick unit position Position of pick unit reported. 1 = top.
1 Pick sensor Pick sensor reading. Range 0 to 255.
2-3 Pick arm position sensor Pick arm CIC position reading in degrees.
4-5 Pick arm position sensor Pick arm CIC amplitude reading.
6-7 D wheel position sensor D wheel CIC position reading in degrees.
8-9 D wheel position sensor D wheel CIC amplitude reading.
10 - 11 Cassette ID sensor 0 = not present
1 to 12 = valid cassette id.
12 - 13 Cassette ID sensor Cassette ID CIC sensor amplitude.
14 Cassette low sensor 1 = low.
15 Cassette latch sensor 1 = latched.
Error Codes
M_Status and M_Data
To de-code the data use the Status Code Translator Tool (available from www.infoprod.ncr.com) or refer
to Diagnostic Status Code Notebook (B006-6273).
Tallies
Tally Description
PICKED 1 Number of items successfully picked from pick position 1.
PKATMPT1 Number of times a pick attempt failed from pick position 1.
PKFAIL 1 Number of times a pick fail occurred from pick position 1.

Tally Description
SIZEERR1 Number of times an item of media was rejected because a size error was detected from pick
position 1.
position 2.
position 3.
position 4.
position 5.
position 6.
DOUBLE 1 Number of times a double was detected and rejected from pick position 1.
REJECT 1 Total number of items picked and rejected from pick position 1.
STACKOPS Total number of stack operations attempted including stacks as part of self test and learn
measurements operations.
PRESENTS Total number of present operations attempted.
RETRACTS Total number of retract operations attempted.
CLEAROPS Total number of clear operations attempted.
CAR OPS Total number of carriage operations attempted.

Tally Description
CAR FAIL Total number of times carriage failed to reach desired position.
BELT OPS Total number of carriage belt operations attempted.
BELTFAIL Total number of failed carriage belt operations.
CAM OPS Total number of CAM operations (lower, raise, rotate).
CAM FAIL Total number of failed CAM operations.
SHUT OPS Total number of shutter operations attempted.
SHUTFAIL Number of times a shutter fault has been detected.
COMM TRY Number of communications attempts between the core driver and the device.
COMM RTR Number of communication attempts which required a retry before succeeding.
COMMFAIL Number of communications attempts which failed after retries were exhausted.
SER READ Number of Serial Numbers Scan Operations
INVNOTES Number of Invalid Notes Scanned
SERCHARS Number of Serial Number Read Characters
INVCHARS Number of Invalid Characters
STRAPPING
There are no strapping or DIP switches on this device.
ADJUSTMENTS
Pick Module Timing Procedure
4–High Dispenser
Place the upper double pick module on the pick support frame and close the two latches securing the
module to the presenter core.
1. Move the top timing gear to the number 1 position. This will align the lower timing gear to the
number 2 position as shown below.
2. Place the lower double pick module on the pick support frame.
3. Hang the lower double pick module from the upper module without closing the two latches.
4. On the lower double pick module, move the top timing gear to the number 3 position. This will
align the lower timing gear to the number 4 position.

5. Make sure the four timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4).
6. Close the two latches securing the lower double pick module to the upper double pick module.
5–High Dispenser
1. Follow steps 1 to 5 of the Pick Module Timing Procedure for 4–High Dispenser.
2. Place the single pick module on the pick support frame.
3. Hang the single pick module from the lower double pick module without closing the two latches.

4. Make sure the five timing gears are correctly aligned from top to bottom (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).
6. Close the two latches securing the single pick module to the lower double pick module.
Cleaning Serial Number Read Transport Cameras

If SNR is fitted, the SNR transport cameras mounted on the fixed guide and on the moving guide should
be cleaned as part of regular preventive maintenance, especially in dusty environments. Cleaning will
also be required to clear the states of health ‘USB serial number read too many invalid characters’ or
‘USB serial number read too many invalid serial numbers’ which are triggered when the number of
invalid characters or invalid serial numbers read reaches the configured thresholds (default 10% and 5%
respectively).
Clean the cameras using compressed air or a soft thin brush or cotton bud. Ingrained grime can be
removed using a lint free cloth moistened with soapy water or an alcohol free wipe.
S2 Carriage Offsets for Open and Latchfast Purge Bins

USB Media Dispenser 02.01.00 or above.

The following DWORD registry settings have been defined for the carriage offsets. Registry location -
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/NCR/APTRA Self Service (NCR
Features)/USBMediaDispenser/Operational Parameters.
Registry Setting Open Bin Latchfast Bin

Purge Offset Reject Front 0 35
Purge Offset Retract Front 0 40
Purge Offset Reject Rear 0 29
Purge Offset Retract Rear 0 10
l All registry values in decimal.

l Carriage offsets may be dependent on the size/material of the currency and may need to be
adjusted from those in the table above as required based on local testing. Every increase or
decrease of 1 in value corresponds approximately to 1 mm of travel of the carriage.
l Maximum Media Size:

No RFP Divider With RFP Divider No RFP Divider With RFP Divider
Reject (PFS) -
85 x 177 85 x 177 85 x 177 85 x 177
Maximum Size
Retract (RFP) -
N/A 85 x 160 N/A 85 x 160
Maximum Size
Latchfast Bin Latch

The bin latch should be adjusted to ensure minimum movement in the bin's position which will ensure
correct latching and minimise jams at the divert entry.
Loosen the two screws securing the bin latchplate as shown below and adjust the latchplate to reduce
the gap shown as much as possible. Hand-tighten the screws then remove and reinsert the bin to test
that the latch still drops easily into position. Increase the gap slightly if necessary and test again. When
the optimum position is achieved, secure the screws.

JAM CLEARANCE
Refer to the NCR S2 Dispenser Operator Guide (B006-6889) for jam clearance of the pick module, SNT,
carriage and shutter.
CAUTION
Do not move the carriage while it is in the open (stack) position.
How to move the Carriage to the Closed position

1. Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.
2. From inside the purge bin space, manually retract the BAM.
Media Deflector Fingers

retract position
BAM
retract position
3. Manually retract the Media Deflector Fingers on the SNT.

4. Manually move the primary cam wheel clockwise to the CLOSED position.
CL
OS
PEN
ED
OPEN CLOSED O
OPEN Position CLOSED Position
HETS CALIBRATION
Note: Dispensers are shipped pre-calibrated by the manufacturing plant and are selfcalibrating on an
ongoing basis.

The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the main control board. This
HETS assemblies due to mechanical tolerances.
The dispenser adjusts the HETS compensation factor automatically as bills of a known singularity value
are dispensed. While bills are dispensed, the average of good single bill singularities is measured over 50
bills. This average is compared to the singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation
factor is adjusted accordingly. Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this
is changed automatically by the dispenser and updated every 50 bills.
Dispensers will only be calibrated correctly if the correct width and singularity for each type of currency
being dispensed has been entered as described in the Setting Note Parameters section.
SETTING NODE PARAMETERS

Each currency type being dispensed has a specific width and singularity value that must be entered in to
every ATM dispensing that currency. This applies to initial installation or whenever the main control
board has been changed. The local Professional Services organisation will provide values for new and
existing currencies.
1. Select Self‐Service Configuration option from the Supervisor menu.

2. Select Set Device Configuration option.
3. Select USB Media Dispenser option.
4. Select Note Configuration option.
5. Select SET option.
6. The system will then display the Note Configuration set up menu shown below. The menu is
spread over multiple pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.
7. The system will then display the Note Configuration set up menu shown below. The menu is
spread over multiple pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.
8. Enter Note Widths for all Types.
9. To accept all the changes made select OK.

10. The system will display the menu shown below.
To finally confirm the changes, select the ‘Toggle’ side tab to change the NO option to YES and then
select ‘OK’.

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected, the error
message is shown.
Possible error messages:
l ‘Invalid Size: Valid Range 54-85’ - Width is outside the permissible range
l ‘Invalid Singularity: Valid Range 0-254’ - Singularity is outside the permissible range
After five seconds the error message is replaced by the Note Configuration screen, allowing a valid value
to be entered.
CURRENCY EVALUATION QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE

Note: The currency width and singularity values previously calculated for the S1 Dispenser are valid for
the S2 Dispenser.
The local Professional Services organization must establish the width and singularity values for each type
of currency to be dispensed. The currency evaluation qualification procedure should only be performed
on a calibrated dispenser. Attempting the procedure on an un-calibrated dispenser will give incorrect
results.
To ensure a dispenser is calibrated, at least 50 bills of a known width and singularity must be successfully
dispensed. These bills may be local currency or test media.
Establishing Singularity and Width

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and width of 40 dispensed bills
five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity

calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures shown in the Parameters Option and take the
average (divide by five and round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and
width values you enter to the ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure, the currency loaded for this procedure should comprise of new
bills. Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the
bills into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside down (see the following
illustration). This allows for the variations in inking.
the ATMs. Refer to the S2 Currency Cassette chapter in the Dispense section of this manual for
the method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes.
3. Insert the cassettes into the dispenser.
5. From the ATM opening menu, select System Application > Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device
Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Note Configuration.
6. The system will display the following message:
Clearing Dispenser Transport. Please Wait.
7. Select Learn option.

8. The system will display the Note Configuration menu showing the types available as shown
below.
Note: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.
1. There is the option to select each single type in turn, or select All Types.
2. Select Type 1 or All Types.
3. The system will perform the test and display the message:
Learning Cassette Type 1. Please Wait.
If All Types was selected, a message for each type will be displayed.
4. Select Learn.
5. Select Parameters.
6. The system will return to the Note Configuration menu.
7. Record the singularity and width figures for the cassette and type selected or all cassette types if
applicable.
8. Select Cancel to return to the Note Configuration screen.
10. If you selected an single type, repeat steps 11 to 21 until you have five readings of singularity and
width for each cassette type loaded.
11. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average singularity and width
12. Select the Set option from the Note Configuration menu
13. Modify as appropriate using the average singularity and width figures obtained in step 23.
14. To accept all the changes made, select OK.
15. The system will display the Note Configuration menu.
16. To finally confirm the changes, select the Toggle side tab to change the NO option to YES and
then select OK.
17. Select OK to return to the System Application Main menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the Utilities menu you can now enter level 1 diagnostics and
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 bills per transaction. If
the reject rate is greater than this, the singularity and width values should be recalculated.


The reject rate is calculated using the following formula.

Reject Rate = X 100%
The numbers for rejected bills and total bills picked are taken from tallies. Take a note of the tallies
current values before starting and use the difference, before and after, in the calculations. There are
different tallies for each Pick/cassette.
Error Messages
Any fatal error messages will need to be cleared in the normal manner.
AUTHORIZATION AND AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE

Parts Validation
Parts Validation is a security protection mechanism that prevents unauthorized users replacing certain
critical parts on NCR ATMs.
The following procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an FRU item or
as part of a presenter swap.
1. Insert the USB Service Key. There may be a short delay while the key is recognized.
3. Select the Device Status List.
4. Select the Cash Dispenser status reporting Authorization Required.
5. Select the part requiring authorization:
l Authorize control board
l Authorize device
6. The USB Cash Dispenser test is performed.
7. If the USB Cash Dispenser test is successful, the part is authorized and the Device Status List is
displayed.
8. If the test fails, the part is not authorized and a summary report is displayed.
Do the following:
1. Check the USB Service Key is correctly inserted.
2. Check the key has the appropriate authorization security level.
3. Repeat steps 2 to 6.

Authentication
Authentication is a security protection mechanism that prevents fraudulent activity. The following
procedure may need to be carried out if the control board is replaced as an FRU item or as part of a
presenter swap.
Dispense Protection Levels:
l USB - No action required. Authentication is automatic.

l Logical
l Physical
The following procedure must be carried out if the Dispense Protection Level of the ATM is Logical or
Physical.
1. Insert the USB Service Key (required for Logical Dispense Protection Level)
5. Select USB Media Dispenser.
6. Select Authenticate.
If the protection level is Logical, no further action is required.
If the protection level is Physical, complete one of the following actions within one minute:
l Remove the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the dispenser and re-insert within
5 seconds.
7. The result of the authentication function is displayed.
8. Select OK to return to the USB Cash Dispenser menu.
9. If authentication was not successful, repeat steps 6 and 7.

The Dispense Protection Level is set by the ATM system, not by a single component - changing the
dispenser control board will not change the protection level. The highest level set in the ATM system will
always be retained.
Dispense Protection Levels from low to high:
l USB
l Logical
l Physical
At the request of the ATM owner, the dispense protection level can be changed by doing the following:
1. Insert the USB Service Key.

5. Select USB Media Dispenser.
6. Select Device Parameter Configuration.

7. Use the screen toggle button to select the required protection level.
8. Select OK.
9. Configure New Parameter
10. Select Yes using the toggle function.
11. Select OK.
12. If the level is being raised, complete one of the following actions within one minute:
l Remove and insert the cassette from the bottom occupied position of the dispenser.
13. If the level change was not successful, select OK and repeat steps 6 to 12.
If it was successful, proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification if required.

Motor & Pump
Assembly
Carriage Single Note Transport
(SNT)
Carriage Umbilical
Harness
Nose
Bill Aligner Module

(BAM)
Presenter
Core
Double Pick Module
Main Control Board

Pick Support Frame
Single Pick Module

Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
l Carriage Umbilical Harness (front access or rear access)

l Carriage (front access or rear access)
l Nose (including nose, tracks, purge and present flags)
l Motor and Pump Assembly
l Double Pick Module
l Single Pick Module
l Main Control Board
l 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
l Pick Support Frame

l Latchfast Security Plate

l Presenter Core
l Presenter Assembly (front access or rear access)
If replacing the entire dispenser, follow the instructions to remove the pick modules then the presenter
assembly.
Tools:
l Long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver

l Spring hook (603-9000063)
Note: Throughout these FRU removal and replacement procedures make sure that all connectors are
replaced securely and harnesses are routed correctly and neatly. Replace and make good all cable ties,
check for fouling conditions and replace all cable identification labels damaged or lost during servicing.
CAUTION
Do not use the dispenser nose to rack, lift or move the dispenser.
WARNING
Remove power from the dispenser before carrying out any of the FRU removal and
replacement procedures.
Carriage Umbilical Harness
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical harness during the removal and
replacement procedure.

Removing the Carriage Umbilical Harness

1. Fully rack out the dispenser.
2. Release the carriage umbilical harness from the side track by gently pushing the white latch
towards the harness.
3. Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the carriage chassis cover.
Securing Screws
Chassis Cover
4. Remove and retain the carriage chassis cover.

5. Release the carriage umbilical harness from the carriage by gently pushing the white latch
towards the cable, while supporting the PCB with your other hand.
Replacing the Carriage Umbilical Harness

The procedure for replacing the carriage umbilical harness is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Check that the replacement harness is undamaged before using it.

Be sure to fit the replacement harness to the correct connector and to fit it securely in the connector:
check that the white screened lines on either end are vertical and in line with the latch.
CAUTION
Check the umbilical harness has enough clearance as the carriage moves along the track.
Carriage
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the carriage umbilical cable during the removal and
replacement procedure.
Removing the Carriage
2. Release the carriage umbilical cable by gently pushing the latch towards the cable.
3. On front access units, remove the nose, as described later in this section.

4. Remove and retain the two screws securing the tie bar, then remove and retain the tie bar.
5. Move the carriage to the end of the presenter and lift the carriage clear of the dispenser.
6. If the carriage is to be shipped with the presenter frame, use two cable ties to secure the
carriage to the sides of the presenter frame.
Replacing the Carriage

Before fitting the new carriage, check that:
l there is no damage or cracks on the carriage lower link mount or the links and arms.
l the carriage lower plate shaft screws are correctly fitted and undamaged.
l all carriage belt rotate and the belt drive shafts and pulleys are in place and are undamaged.
UPPER PLATE LOWER PLATE
Pulley
Belts Belts
Pulley and drive

shafts

1. Insert the carriage into the end of the presenter.

Note: Make sure the carriage is aligned correctly and all four gearwheels are engaged in the
tracks.
2. Replace the tie bar and secure with two screws.

3. Make sure gearwheels are correctly positioned on the tracks by checking that the rear of the
carriage is parallel with the tie bar.
4. Push the carriage chassis towards the presenter tracks at the point shown below to assist with
correct alignment of the carriage.
5. Insert the carriage umbilical cable into the zero insertion force connector. Gently pushing the
latch away from the cable to engage the connector. Check the cable is not damaged and is
securely fitted in the correct connector: check that the white screened lines on the end are
vertical and in line with the latch.
6. Check that:
l the carriage is correctly aligned in the presenter
l the carriage moves freely along the presenter tracks
l the carriage lower plate is level when opened
l the carriage magnets are correctly configured
l the carriage motor cover is fitted correctly.
See ‘Troubleshooting Procedures’ section for details on these checks.
7. In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser >
Carriage Replaced.
This will reset all the carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors.
8. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

Nose
Removing the Nose
2. If fitted, remove and discard the two screws (or plastic plugs on later units) that join the track
segments together (one on each side).
3. Remove and retain four screws on each side (two on later units) that fix the nose to the
presenter core.
CAUTION
Take care not to dislodge the flags located along the inner track.

4. Slide the nose out of the side frame.

5. Remove and retain the nose.
Replacing the Nose

Note: This procedure is used when replacing a nose with one of the same length. If the replacement
nose is of a different length, after replacement use SysApp to force the firmware to re-learn the new
hardware configuration by selecting Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media
Dispenser > Presenter Replaced.
When replacing the nose, take care not to snag any cables.
1. Align the nose and presenter track segments.

2. Do not refit the two screws that joined the geared track segments together.
3. Fit the eight screws securing the nose to the presenter.
Bill Aligner Module (BAM)

Special tool: Spring hook.
Removing the BAM

2. If the carriage is obstructing access to the BAM and the primary cam is in the ‘OPEN’ position, go
to the Jam Clearance section and follow the procedure for moving the carriage to the ‘CLOSED’
position.
3. Remove the purge bin from the dispenser.
4. Gently move the carriage away from the BAM.
5. Use a spring hook to unhook the two edge register extension springs from the base of the BAM.
Make sure the springs remain attached to the edge register.

6. Remove and retain the BAM cantilever and securing screw.
7. Slide the edge register along about one inch, then turn the edge register slightly clockwise to
disengage it from the slots in the base of the BAM.
8. Remove the Edge Register from the dispenser.

9. Remove and retain the two screws (M4 Pozidriv) securing the BAM mounting to the presenter
frame.
10. Disconnect the BAM motor harness at the flex interface (J4).
11. Remove any cable ties securing the BAM CIC harness to the inside of the presenter.
12. Disconnect the BAM CIC harness at the connector on the side of the presenter.
13. Four lugs locate the BAM mounting base to the presenter framework. Move the base slightly
away from the SNT to clear the lugs and lift the base out of the dispenser.
Replacing the BAM

The procedure for replacing the BAM is the reverse of the removal procedure.

In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Media
Aligner Replaced.
This will reset all the BAM (Media Aligner) variables.
Single Note Transport (SNT)
The SNT can be removed with the Bill Aligner Module (BAM) in place.
The SNT FRU includes the SNT interface harness.
Removing the SNT

2. Remove the purge bin.
3. Three M4 x 10 combi screws (captive screws on later units) secure the SNT to the presenter
framework. Move the divert skid plate slightly away from the SNT to allow access to the first
screw. Using a long magnetised #2 pozidrive screwdriver, remove SNT mounting screw from the
location shown below.

4. Now remove second SNT mounting screw from the location shown below. Access to this screw
is blocked by a drive-belt. A second screwdriver can be used to gently move the belt to one side
while removing the screw.
5. Remove and retain the third screw from the location shown below.
6. Disconnect the SNT harness from the main control board at J3 and J4.

7. Release the SNT harness from the two cable clamps securing the harness to the side of the
outside of the presenter.
8. Guide the SNT harness through the hole in the side of the presenter framework as you lift the
SNT out of the dispenser.
Replacing the SNT

The procedure for replacing the SNT is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Note: There are four potential SNT mounting points, but only three are used. The three locations are
shown below and the screws should be refitted in the order shown.
3
1
In SysApp, select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser >
SNT/HETS Replaced.
This will reset the HETS variables and recalibrate the HETS sensors.
Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
Main Motor and Pump Assembly

Note: If the dispenser is a rear access variant with a short or medium length nose, the whole dispenser
will need to be removed from the ATM as the safe door will block access.
Removing the Motor and Pump Assembly

2. Complete the SNT removal procedure before removing the pump motor assembly.
3. Disconnect the power cord at J5 on the main control board.
4. If not already done, disconnect the SNT harness at J3 and J4 on the main control board.
5. Unscrew and retain the three screws securing the hand wheel.
6. Remove and retain the hand wheel.
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the vacuum sensor connector located on the outside of the
presenter.

7. Disconnect the vacuum tube at the junction shown below.
8. Remove and retain the three screws and three nuts securing the pump motor assembly to the
presenter framework.
9. Remove the pump motor assembly from the dispenser.
Replacing the Motor and Pump Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pump Motor Assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Take care not to overtighten the plastite screws that secure the green hand wheel.
There is no torque requirement for the motor securing screws.
Replace the motor in the correct orientation.
When refitting the vacuum hose at the Y junction, make sure the hose is fully inserted.
Double Pick Module

The pick module assembly includes the pick module harness.

CAUTION
The pick module assembly must be carried by the base plate and/or the upper tie bar.
Note: This procedure is used when replacing a double pick module. If the number of pick modules in
the dispenser is changed, use SysApp to force the firmware to re-learn the new count by selecting Self‐
Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Pick Units Added/Removed.
This will prompt a reboot. Calibrate each Pick Module by running 50 notes.
Removing the Double Pick Module Assembly

2. Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.
3. Disconnect the two upper and two lower pick module cables from the main control board.
4. If serial number read (SNR) is fitted, disconnect the power and USB harness from the SNR board
located on the side of the pick module.
5. Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the four pick valves shown below. This can be done by pushing
the ring fully home, then pulling the tube out of the valve.

6. Remove the two screws securing the vertical Tamper Indication plate, if fitted, then remove and
retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement pick module.
Dual Pick
Vertical Tamper
Indication Plate
7. If the dispenser is configured with two double pick modules, unlatch and lower the lower pick
module.
8. Unlatch the top pick module from the presenter core.

9. Lift the top pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.
10. If you need to remove the lower pick module, lift the lower pick module off the pick support
frame and clear of the dispenser.
11. Remove the two screws securing the horizontal Tamper Indication plate, if fitted, then remove
and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement pick module.
Horizontal Tamper
Indication Plate

12. If a clear plastic cover is fitted to the pick gears, remove the single screw securing it then
remove and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement pick module.
Replacing the Double Pick Module Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remember to fit any retained parts (gear covers or tamper indication plates) to the replacement pick
module. The horizontal plate must be fitted before the pick module is fitted to the dispenser.
Pick Units Replacement Menu.
2. Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and
recalibrate the pick unit sensor.
3. Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.
Single Pick Module

Removing the Single Pick Module Assembly
2. Remove all currency cassettes from the dispenser.

3. Disconnect the two single pick module cables from the 5/6 hi expansion board.
4. Disconnect the vacuum tubing at the pick valve. This can be done by pushing the ring fully home,
then pulling the tube out of the valve.
5. Remove the two screws securing the vertical Tamper Indication plate, if fitted, then remove and
Single Pick
Vertical Tamper
Indication Plate
6. Unlatch and lift the single pick module off the pick support frame and clear of the dispenser.

7. If a metal cover is fitted to the pick gears, remove the single screw securing it then remove and
Replacing the Singe Pick Module Assembly

The procedure for replacing the Pick Module Assemblies is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remember to fit any retained parts (gear covers or tamper indication plates) to the replacement pick
module.
Pick Units Replacement Menu.
2. Select the appropriate pick unit from the list. This will reset the pick unit variables and
recalibrate the pick unit sensor.
3. Calibrate the Pick Module by running 50 notes.
Main Control Board

Removing the Main Control Board
2. Disconnect all harnesses from the Main Control Board.
3. Unscrew and retain the four screws securing the Main Control Board cover, then remove the
cover.
4. Unscrew and retain the five outer screws that secure the Main Control Board.
5. Unscrew and retain the last central screw that secures the Main Control Board.
6. Remove the Main Control Board from the dispenser.
Replacing the Main Control Board

The procedure for replacing the Main Control Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Note: The note parameters for all currency types must be re-entered after replacing the main control
board. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.


Removing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
2. Disconnect all harnesses from the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.
3. Unscrew and retain the two screws securing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board cover, then remove the
cover.
4. Unscrew and retain the four outer screws that secure the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board.
5. Remove the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board from the dispenser.
Replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board

The procedure for replacing the 5/6 Hi Expansion Board is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Pick Support Frame

Removing the Pick Support Frame
1. Remove the cash cassettes from the dispenser.
2. Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.
3. Disconnect the vacuum tube at the vacuum filter.
4. Remove the Main Control Board as described previously.

5. Remove the Pick Support Frame.
Replacing the Pick Support Frame

The procedure for replacing the Pick Support Frame is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Latchfast Security Plate

Removing the Latchfast Security Plate
1. Remove the four M4 countersunk screws securing the security plate to the presenter.
2. Remove the Latchfast Security Plate.
Replacing the Latchfast Security Plate

The procedure for replacing the latchfast Security Plate is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Presenter Core
Removing the Presenter Core
1. Remove the Latchfast Security Plate (if fitted) as described previously.
2. Remove the Carriage as described previously.
3. Remove the Single Note Transport (SNT).
4. Remove the Double Pick Modules as described previously.
5. Remove the Pick Support Frame as described previously.
6. Remove the IGUS chain bracket from the side of the presenter frame. The type of bracket will
vary, depending on the ATM.
7. Remove the Presenter Nose as described previously.

8. A temporary yellow lifting handle is attached to the frame of new Presenter Core. Remove the
lifting handle from the new core and attach it to the top of the core that is still attached to the
dispenser rails. This handle will be used to lift the core off the rails.
9. Remove the four screws securing the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails (two each side).
10. Move the end of the rails to the mid-point of their travel. Using a marker pen, make a mark on
top of the rails to align with a suitable detail on the top of the presenter frame. This will indicate
if the rail ends have moved during lifting of the Presenter Core.
11. Standing on one side of the presenter and hold the presenter by the two yellow lifting points. Lift
up the side of the presenter furthest away from you and free it from the far-side rail - at the
same time use your fingers to push the far-side rail away from the presenter.

12. Retract the far-side rail inwards and clear of the presenter.
13. Make sure the near-side rail has not moved and the marker is in the correct position.
14. Lift and free the near-side of the presenter from the near-side rail and remove the presenter
core from the ATM.
15. If fitted, remove the clear plastic presenter gears cover by first removing the green handle
secured with three screws and then the cover secured with one screw. Re-fit the green handle
and retain the cover to be re-fitted to the replacement presenter.
16. If fitted, remove the two black plastic latchfast bin actuators (one on left and one on right-hand
side) from the ceiling of the latchfast bin position in the presenter. Retain them to be re-fitted to
the replacement presenter.
17. If fitted, remove the metal divert key plate from the floor of the latchfast bin position in the
presenter. Note in initial units the plate is secured with two screws from above, in later units it

will be secured from below. Retain the plate to be re-fitted to the replacement presenter.
Replacing the Presenter Core

Replacing the Presenter Core is the reverse of the removal procedure. Remember to re-fit any retained
parts (gear cover, security plates, divert key plate) to the replacement presenter.
When attaching the Presenter Core to the dispenser rails, use the following table to select the correct
dispenser rail ‘T’ lug position for your ATM.
Dispenser Rail ‘T’ Lug

Presenter Core
A B
Product Access Location

2012 Front A
Rear B
6622 Front or Rear B
6625 Rear A
6626 Rear A
6628 Front A
6632 Front A
Rear B
6634 Rear A
6637 and 6638 Front A
642 Front A
Remove the temporary lifting handle from the old Presenter Core frame and re-fit it to the new
replacement Presenter Core. After the new replacement Presenter Core is attached to the dispenser
rails, the lifting handle must be removed and re-fitted to the old Presenter Core for returning to the
rework centre.

After the dispenser has been fully re-assembled, use SysApp to force the firmware to relearn the new
hardware configuration.
Select Self‐Service Configuration > Set Device Configuration > USB Media Dispenser > Presenter Replaced.
The presenter variables will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated.
Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.
Presenter Assembly
The Presenter Assembly includes the following:
l Presenter Core
l Carriage
l Motor and Pump Assembly
Removing the Presenter Assembly

1. Remove the Latchfast Security Plate (if fitted).
2. Secure the carriage to the presenter frame using two cable ties.
3. Follow the ‘Remove the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.
4. Follow the ‘Remove the Presenter Core’ instructions (steps 3 to 13) as described in the
‘Presenter Core’ section.
Replacing the Presenter Assembly

1. Follow the ‘Replacing the Presenter Core’ instructions as described in the ‘Presenter Core’
section.
2. Follow the ‘Replacing the Nose’ instructions as described in the ‘Nose’ section.
3. After the dispenser has been fully assembled, remove the two cable ties securing the carriage to
the presenter frame.
4. Replace the Latchfast Security Plate (if fitted).
Presenter Assembly Replaced.
This will force the firmware to re-learn the new hardware configuration. The presenter variables
will be reset and the presenter sensors recalibrated. This will also reset the HETS variables and
recalibrate the HETS sensors, reset all the carriage variables and recalibrate the carriage sensors,
and reset all the Media Aligner (BAM) variables.
6. Dispense at least 50 notes to ensure the dispenser is calibrated.

CABLING
Presenter Harness
Presenter CIC 24VDC
Interlock Switch
Purge Bin Interface Purge Bin

Switch
P1
Cam Motor
Purge Bin Latch Sensor

P2
Carriage Flex Interface Module Latch Sensor
Main Control Board V acuum Sensor
1 PURGE_BIN1_LED+ (white) 1
2 LED_RTN_1 (white) 2 Purge Bin Interface
3 PURGE_BIN1_SEN+ (white) 3 (P_BIN)
4 PURGE_BIN1_SEN (white) 4
5 PURGE_BIN2_LED+ (white) 5
7 PURGE_BIN2_SEN+ (white) 8
8 PURGE_BIN2_SEN (white) 6 1
(white) 7
24VDC Interlock Switch

GND_5
(Interlock_GND)
13 PURGE_BIN_PRESb (white)
Purge Bin Switch
(PB_Pres1 &
14 GND_4 (white) PB_Pes2)
P1
1 21
15 Module_LED (red)
Module Latch
2 22 16 Module_LED_RTD (black)
Sensor
17 Module_SEN+ (white)
(Module_Latch)
18 Module_SEN (green)
9 PBLATCH_SEN+ (white)
Purge Bin Latch
10 PBLATCH_SEN (green)
Sensor
11 PBLATCH_LED+ (red)
(PB_Latch)
12 PBLATCH_(GND_1) (black)
(white) Cam Motor

22 CAM_PHASE_1B 1
(CAM_Phase)
20 PA_PHASE_1A (white) 3
21 CAM_PHASE_2B (white) 4
19 PA_PHASE_2A (white) 6
1

Vacuum Sensor
1 5V 1 (Vac_Sen)
3 Vacuum Level 3
4 GND_1 4
1
24VDC Interlock Switch

5 NO
(Interlock)
Purge Bin Interface

6 GND_2 7 (P_BIN)
Presenter CIC
15 SIN_CAM 1
(Pre_CIC)
13 COIL_BIAS 2
11 COS_CAM 3
9 EXPREF_CAM 4
7 EX_PRES_1 5 1 2 3 45
P2 Carriage Position CIC

12 COS_CARPOS 1
1 31 (CAR_POS)
14 COIL BIAS 2
16 SIN_CARPOS 3
2 32 10 EXPREF_CARPOS 4
8 EX_PRES_2 5
1
17 LED_RTN 1
18 8V 2
19 CAR_TD_SEL0 3
20 CAR_TD_SEL1 4
21 CAR_TD_SEL4b 5 Carriage Flex Interface
22 CAR_SENSORS 6 (CAR_interface)
23 CAR_MOTOR_SEL0 7
1 15
24 CAR_TIMING_DISC 8
25 CAR_MOTOR_SEL1 9
26 24V 10 2 16
27 CAR_TYPE 11
28 GND_3 12
29 CAR_PHASE_2A 13
30 CAR_PHASE_2B 14
31 CAR_PHASE_1A 15
32 CAR_PHASE_1B 16

Interface Harness
J18 J2
J19 J1
Main Control Board 5/6 Hi Expansion Board
1 +24V 1
2 GROUND 2
3 SPII_MOSI 3
4 SPII_SCK 4
5 CIC2_SPII_CSB 5
6 RESET_CIC2 6
7 CIC2_MISO 7
8 RSTb 8
9 SDA 9
10 SCL 10
J19 11 OPEN_ALL_VALVES 11 J1
1 27 12 5TO6_PA_FLAG 12 1 27
13 5TO6_DW_FLAG 13
14 5TO6_FLAGI 14
2 28 2 28
15 CASSLATCHED5 15
16 CASSLATCHED6 16
17 CASSLOW_AMR5B 17
18 CASSLOW_AMR6B 18
19 PICKSEN5_RTN 19
20 PICKSEN6_RTN 20
21 VALVE_ON 21
22 ENABLE_LEDSb 22
23 ID_SEL0 23
24 ID_SEL1 24
25 ID_5TO6_SELB 25
26 PA_DW_SEL0 26
27 PA_DW_SEL1 27
28 PA_DW_5TO6_SELB 28
1 24V_RLY 1
2 PICK_MOTOR_5B 2
3 PICK_MOTOR_6B 3
J18 4 GROUND 4 J2
1 11 5 PA_PHASE_1A 5 1 11
6 PA_PHASE_1A 6
7 PA_PHASE_1B 7
2 12 8 PA_PHASE_1B 8 2 12
9 PA_PHASE_2A 9
10 PA_PHASE_2A 10
11 PA_PHASE_2B 11
12 PA_PHASE_2B 12
S2 Double Pick Module Harness

The first (upper) double pick module harness is illustrated below, other double pick module harnesses
are similar.

Pick2 Sensor Pick1 LED
Pick2 LED
Pick1 Motor
Pick1 Sensor
Pick2
Solenoid Value
J8 or J10 Pick2 Motor
J9 or J11 Pick1
Solenoid Value
Main Control Board
Quad CIC
1 PA_PHASE2.A 1
2 PA_2_PHASE2B 3 Pick2 Motor
3 PA_PHASE1.A 4 (PA_2)
4 PA2_PHASE1B 6
5 PA_PHASE2A 1
J8 or J10 6 PA1_PHASE2B 3 Pick1 Motor
7 PA_PHASE1A 4 (PA_1)
8 PA1_PHASE1B 6
1 Pick 2
9 VACSOL2b Solenoid Value
(Val_2.1)
10 24V_2 (Val_2.0)
Pick 1
(Val_1.0)
12 24V_1 (Val_1.1)

1 EX_DW (white) 1
2 SIN_PA1 (white) 2
3 EXREF_DW_1 (white) 3
4 COIL_BIAS (white) 4
5 COS_DW1 (white) 5
6 COS_PA1 (white) 6
7 COIL BIAS (white) 7
8 EXREF_PA_1 (white) 8
9 SIN_DW1 (white) 9 Quad CIC
10 EX_PA (white) 10 (Quad_CIC)
11 EX DW (white) 11 1 19
12 SIN_PA2 (white) 12
13 EXREF_DW_2 (white) 13
2 20
14 COIL__BIAS (white) 14
15 COS_DW2 (white) 15
16 COS_PA2 (white) 16
17 COIL___BIAS (white) 17
J9 or J11
18 EXREF_PA_2 (white) 18
1 31 19 SIN_DW2 (white) 19
20 EX__PA (white) 20
2 32
Pick 1 LED
23 CASSLOW_AMR1B (white) 1 (PLED_1)
24 GROUND (white) 2
21 5V_SUPPLY_PICK_1 (white) 3
22 PICKLED1_RTD (white) 4
1
25 PICKSEN1+ (white) Pick 1 Sensor

26 PICKSEN1_RTD (green) (PSEN_1)
29 CASSLOW_AMR2B (white) 1 Pick 2 LED

30 GND (white) 2 (PLED_2)
28 PICKLED2_RTD (white) 4
1

32 PICKSEN2_RTD (green) (PSEN_2)

Single Pick Module Harness

Pick5 Sensor
Dual Cass ID CIC
Pick5 LED
J3
J6 Pick5
Solenoid Value
Pick5 Motor
1
2
3
4
5 PA_PHASE2A 1
J3
6 PA5_PHASE2B 3 Pick5 Motor
7 PA_PHASE1A 4 (PA_5)
8 PA5_PHASE1B 6
1
9
10
Pick 5
(Val_5.0)
12 24V_5 (Val_5.1)

1 EX_DW (white) 1
2 SIN_PA5 (white) 2
3 EXREF_DW_5 (white) 3 Dual Cass CIC
4 COIL_BIAS (white) 4
5 COS_DW5 (white) 5 1 9
6 COS_PA5 (white) 6
7 COIL BIAS (white) 7
8 EXREF_PA_5 (white) 8 2 10
9 SIN_DW5 (white) 9
10 EX_PA (white) 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J6 17
18
1 31 19
20
2 32
Pick 5 LED
23 CASSLOW_AMR5B (white) 1 (PLED_5)
24 GROUND (white) 2
22 PICKLED5_RTN (white) 4
1

26 PICKSEN5_RTN (green) (PSEN_5)
29
30
27
28
31
32

Carriage Position Sensor Harness

J1
Carriage Position Sensor
Carriage PCB
1 White
J1 2 Green Carriage Position Sensor
(J_CPS) 3 Red (CPS)
4 Black
Dual Cassette ID Harness
J12 or J14 Dual Cassette ID
Main Control Board
1 COIL_BIAS1 1
2 SIN_ID1 2
3 COS_ID1 3
4 CASSLED_RTD 4
5 EXREF_ID1 5
Dual Cassette ID
J12 or J14 6 LATCHLED1+ 6 (Cass_ID)
1 15 7 EXID1 7
8 CASSLATCH1 8 1 15
9 SIN_ID2 9
2 16 10 CASSLATCH2 10 2 16
11 COIL_BIAS2 11
12 LATCHLED2+ 12
13 COS_ID2 13
14 CASSLED2_RTD 14
15 EXREF_ID2 15
16 EX_ID2 16

Single Cassette ID Harness

J7
Single Cassette ID
1 COIL_BIAS 1
J7
2 SIN_ID5 2
1 7 3 COS_ID5 3
4 CASSLED5_RTN 4
5 EXREF_ID5 5 Single Cassette ID
2 8 6 LATCHLED5+ 6 (Cass_ID)
7 EX_ID 7
1 15
8 CASSLATCH5 8
9
10 2 16
11
12
13
14
15
16

SNT Harness
Divert Gate Flag Sensor Timing Disc
Sensor
Divert Gate Width Sensor

Media Deflector Motor
Solenoid
Divert/Transport Sensor
J4
HETS
J3
SNT Sensor Board
Main Control Board
1 BOARD1+ 1
2 BOARD1_LED_RTN 3
J4 3 BOARD1_SEN 2 SNT Sensor Board
4 BOARD2+ 4 (BoardSen)
1 9
5 BOARD2_LED_RTN 6
6 BOARD2_SEN 5
2 10 7 SNT_LED_SUPPLY 7
8 SNT_STACK_LED_RTD 10
9 SNT_STACK_SEN+ 8 1
10 SNT_STACK_SEN 9

1 5V Ref (white) 1
2 NTS_A (white) 2 HETS
3 NTS_GND1 (white) 3 (HETS)
4 NTS_B (white) 4 1 7
5 NTS_GND2 (white) 5
6 24V (white) 6
2 8
7 WIDTH_SENA (white) 7
8 WIDTH_SENB (white) 8
Width Sensor
(WidthSen)
9 WIDTH_LEDB_RTN (white) 3
10 WIDTH_LEDA_RTN (white) 2
1 2 3
11 SNT_LED_SUPPLY (white) 1
12 SNT_LED_SUPPLY (white) 1 Purge Sensor

13 SNT_PURGE_LED_RTN (white) 2 (PurgeSen)
14 SNT_PURGE_SEN+ (white) 3
J3
15 SNT_PURGE_SEN (white) 4
1 29 1
16 DIVERT_GATE_LED+ (red)
2 30
17 DIVERT_GATE_LED_RTN (black) Divert Sensor
18 DIVERT_GATE_SEN+ (white) (DivertSen)
19 DIVERT_GATE_SEN (green)
20 TIM_DISC_SEN (green)
Timing Disc
21 TIM_DISC_SEN+ (white)
Sensor
22 TIM_DISC_LED+ (red) (TimeDiscSen)
23 TIME_DISC_LED_RTN (black)
Divert Gate
24 DIV_A_DRV (white) 1 Solenoid
25 DIV_COMON (white) 2
26 DIV_B_DRV (white) 3
1
27 BM_PHASE1A (white) 1
28 BM_PHASE1B (white) 3 Motor
29 BM_PHASE2A (white) 4 (Board_Mot)
30 BM_PHASE2B (white) 6

BAM CIC Harness
J25 BAM CIC
Main Control Board
J25 1 EX_PRES 1 1 EX_PRES 5 BAM CIC

1 9 3 EXREF_BAM 2 2 EXREF_BAM 4 (JBAM)
5 SIN_BAM 4 4 SIN_BAM 1
7 COIL_BIAS 5 5 COIL_BIAS 2
2 10 9 COS_BAM 6 6 COS_BAM 3 1
JBAM-1 PBAM-1
Purge Bin LEDs Interface
J1 J3
Purge Bin LEDs Interface Purge Bin Sensors
1 5V 1
2 SEN1 2
J1 3 SEN2 3 J3
4 SEN3 4
5 SEN4 5
Purge Bin Interface Harness
J2 J4
Presenter Harness Purge Bin LEDs Interface
1 GND 1
2 GND 2
3 PURGE BIN2 SEN 3
4 PURGE BIN2 LED 4
J2 J4
5 PURGE BIN1 SEN 5
6 PURGE BIN1 SEN+ 6
7 LED RTN 1 7
8 PURGE BIN1 LED+ 8
State of Health Harness
J15 Status Indicator
Main Control Board

1 Red 1
J15 2 Amber 2 Status Indicator
(Con_SOH) 3 Green 3 (J_SOH)
4 5V 4
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT TOOLS

Test media:
US Dollar Size Example

Part number Denomination
009-0030295 1
009-0030296 5
009-0030297 10
009-0030298 20
009-0030299 50
009-0030300 100
Euro Size Example

009-0030302 20
009-0030303 50
009-0030304 100
009-0030305 5
Double Test Example

009-0030376 double

GLOSSARY OF TERMS
A/D Analogue to Digital converter
BAM Bill Aligner Module
CIC CambridgeIC - developer of non-contact position sensing technology
HETS Hall Effect Thickness Sensor – used to count thickness of bills in SNT
RFP Retract from present. Retraction of presented media back into the dispenser
Singularity Calculation of number of bills passing through the HETS
SNR Serial Number Read
SNT Single Note Transport - part of transport which transports single bills (not bundles)
SOH State of Health

REVISION


S2 DISPENSER CASSETTE
INTRODUCTION
NCR cassettes are portable containers, moulded in high impact polycarbonate, that are designed to store
currency and other media such as postage stamps in the dispenser.
The cassette can be configured to hold currency of different lengths and widths, and to indicate a code
for the denomination it contains.
Currency length range: 120 to 177 mm (4.7 to 7.0 in.)

Currency width range: 62 to 85 mm (2.4 to 3.4 in.).
The following variants of cassette are available:
l Standard security cassettes: the lid is secured with a latch and an optional seal, such as a cable tie.
l Lockable cassettes: the lid is secured with a keylock in addition to the latch.
l Tamper indicating cassettes: tracks the number of times that a cassette has been inserted and
removed from the dispenser, to detect unauthorised activity. After six insertions, the cassette is
‘locked out’ and needs to be reset. Both standard and lockable cassettes can have the tamper
indicator.
Tamper Indicator
The counter on tamper indicating cassettes is initially green, and moves to white on the first insertion of
the cassette into the ATM, then moves to show numbers 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 for subsequent insertions. After
six insertions the cassette will no longer be accepted into the dispenser until the counter has been reset.
Each time the cassette is removed for routine replenishment, the counter should be reset by repeatedly
sliding the stud then releasing it until the indicator shows green.
Reset stud
Internal insertion counter
External insertion counter

Cassette Identification Code

Each cassette has a identification code which is read by the ATM software so that regardless of its
position in the dispenser, the cassette can be identified and selected to dispense notes of a specific
denomination. The code can be changed for different currencies and denominations.
Clip
Window
To change the cassette identification code, first remove the yellow clip inside the cassette, then take off
the cassette identification casing from the side of the cassette. Remove the indicator wheel from the
casing and reposition it so that the required number is aligned with the window. Refit the casing and
secure with the clip.
Cassette Body and Lid Marking

Once the cassette has been configured to a particular currency, it is advisable that the body and lid are
visually identified to avoid a mismatch of bodies and lids configured for different currencies.
There are two recommended methods:
l Indelible ink marking: mark the currency denomination on the inside or outside of both the body
and lid, using an indelible ink pen
l Colour coded labels: assign a different colour for each currency denomination and use matching
labels on the body and lid.
Other identification methods may be employed, and can make use of the panels of numbers and letters
moulded into the cassette body and lid.

A: Recessed areas for either marking with indelible ink pens or for adhesive labels
B and C: Numbered panels.
Cleaning
Clean the cassettes with a cloth dampened with water. For stubborn marks and grease try a clean cloth
dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Do not use any other cleaning agents or abrasives.
CASSETTE CONFIGURATION
The internal height and width of the cassette can be configured to fit the dimensions of the currency
being used.
note length
e width =
Cassett
Cassette
height =
note width
Cassette Height
The internal height of the cassette is adjusted for the width of the notes using combinations of spacers
fitted between the lid and the note guides.
Note guide
Spacers

Refer to the table below for the combination of lid spacers required for your currency.
Currency Lid position Lid position Lid position Lid position

width A B C D
(mm)
No. of white + Spacer No. of white + Spacer No. of white + Spacer No. of white + Spacer
spacers colour spacers colour spacers colour spacers colour
62 4 Orange 4 Blue 4 Yellow 4 Black
63 3 Black 4 Orange 4 Blue 4 Yellow
64 3 Yellow 3 Black 4 Orange 4 Blue
65 3 Blue 3 Yellow 3 Black 4 Orange
79 No spacers, secure note guides in lid with two screws each.
80-85 No spacers, remove note guides from lid.
Note guide fixing screws if no spacers used
A D
B C
B C
A D

To fit the lid spacers:
1. Consult the table for the combination of spacers needed for the width of the currency to be
loaded in this cassette.
2. Fit the required spacers together starting with the white ones, by stacking one on top of the
another then turning it a quarter turn (90°) clockwise. Repeat until the required stack is built.
3. Place the stack of spacers at each location A, B, C and D on each side of the cassette. Align the
stack as shown, then turn it a quarter turn (90°) clockwise to secure it. Do not turn beyond the
stop position at 90°.
4. Place the note guides on top of the stack of spacers and secure with a screw at each location A,
B, C and D.
Cassette Width
The internal width of the cassette is adjusted for the length of the notes using the movable ‘L’ shaped
guides which can be fixed to either side of the cassette. Side spacers are used to brace the guides.
Left hand Right hand

side side
A B
The note guides are marked A or B and each end has a triangular indicator to line up with a numbered
scale on the cassette floor. Refer to the table below for the correct position of the note guides and the
required size of the side spacers.

Note Size Left hand side Right hand side

(mm) (refer to illustration above)
Guide Setting Spacer Guide Setting Spacer
120 - 121 B3 E9 A2 E10
122 - 124 B3 E9 A3 E9
125 - 126 B4 E8 A3 E9
127 - 129 B4 E8 A4 E8
130 - 131 B5 E7 A4 E8
132 - 134 B5 E7 A5 E7
135 - 136 B6 E6 A5 E7
137 - 139 B6 E6 A6 E6
140 - 141 B7 - A6 E6
142 - 143 B7 E5 A7 E5
144 - 145 A5 E5 B5 E5
146 - 147 A6 E4 B5 E5
148 - 150 A6 E4 B6 E4
151 - 152 A7 E3 B6 E4
153 - 155 A7 E3 B7 E3
156 - 157 A8 E2 B7 E3
158 - 160 A8 E2 B8 E2
161 - 162 A9 E1 B8 E2
163 - 165 A9 E1 B9 E1
166 - 167 A 10 E B9 E1
168 - 170 A 10 E B 10 E
171 - 172 A 11 - B 10 E
173 - 177 A 11 - B 11 E
To fit the guides:
1. Remove and retain the screws and washers securing the note guides at the handle end of the
cassette.
2. Lift the end of the guide nearest to the cassette handle and slide a guide towards the handle to
disengage it, then lift it out of the cassette. Repeat with the other guide.

3. Reposition the guides so that the triangular indicators are pointing to the correct numbers
according to the table above. Then press the slides in and slide them away from the handle end
of the cassette to engage them.
Note: The metal clips on the guides must always be at the end of the cassette without the
handle.
4. Replace the screws and washers to secure the guides in position.

5. Cut the side spacers to size, according to the table. Use a strong, sharp knife to cut the spacer so
that the required number of segments are left on the spacer. Make sure that the cut edge is flat
by removing any jagged cut edges.

6. Fit the side spacers to brace the note guide on each side of the cassette: one in the slot in the
centre of the note guide and one in the slot near the rear of the cassette (opposite end to the
handle). The side of the spacer with the numbered segments should be against the guide.
REPLENISHING CASSETTES
Preparing Currency
Good currency preparation will enhance the performance of the currency dispenser.
Before loading the currency into a cassette it must be prepared correctly as follows:
l Remove the bands or other packaging from the bunches of notes.

l Used currency should be prepared by holding a bundle of approximately 100 notes and fanning
them to separate them out. New currency repeat this several times.
l While separating out, the currency should be checked for obvious defects such as:
l Staples, pins or any foreign matter attached to the currency
l Torn or limp notes with pin holes
l Two or more notes stuck to each other
l Corner folds (straighten as required)
l Folded notes.

Loading the Cassette

1. Remove the seal (if fitted) from the cassette latch. Or unlock the cassette (lockable variant only).
2. Press down on the lower latch tab and pull the bottom of the latch off the tab. Then lift the latch
up and off the top tab.
3. Remove the lid from the cassette.

4. Press down in the green cup while sliding the pusher to the handle end of the cassette.
5. Remove any remaining currency and balance the transaction in accordance with your in-house
procedures.
6. To help re-load notes neatly, rest the cassette on the handle end and support it at an angle,
leaning against a wall for example. This stops the note stack falling over while it is being built in
the cassette.
7. Separate the currency, which has been prepared as described at the start of this section, into
bundles of approximately 100 notes.
8. Align the first bundle of notes by tapping it on both the long and short edges. Then place it at the
bottom of the cassette.

9. Continue to align and stack the bundles in the cassette, alternating the orientation of the
bundles.
20
20
10. Push down in the green cup to release it. The pusher may move the note stack a short distance
until it is pushed against the end of the cassette.
11. Insert the tabs on the lid into the slots in the cassette then close the lid.
12. Hook the top of the latch over the top tab then press the bottom of the latch onto the lower tab.
13. Seal the latch if required or, on lockable variants, lock the cassette. The cassette is now ready for
use in the dispenser.

SHUTTERS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the shutters used in NCR ATMs behind the openings of the media dispense and
deposit modules.
DESCRIPTION
There are two types of shutter assembly: stepper motor driven shutters and the solenoid driven shutter
used on the Check Processor.
Stepper Motor Driven Shutters

The shutter assemblies include a motorised shutter control PCB which responds to open and close
commands from the control board of the following modules: Media Dispenser, Envelope Depository and
Dispenser (PPD), Cash Acceptor and Recycler (GBRU) and the Bunch Note Acceptor. This drives a 24 V
stepper motor to open or close the shutter. The shutter control board also returns the state of the
shutter (either opened or closed) to the module control boards.
There are two basic types of stepper motor driven shutter assemblies:
l Upper motor (located left-hand side or right-hand side)

l Lower motor (located left-hand side or right-hand side).
Note: The GBRU, BNA and PPD modules have additional brackets fitted to the basic shutters which
control the infeed alignment.
Both type of assembly use a similar motorised shutter control board.
Upper Motor Shutter Assembly (LHS) Upper Motor Shutter Assemblies (RHS)
Lower Motor Shutter Assembly (LHS) Lower Motor Shutter Assembly (RHS)

Shutter Assembly
The motor drives the shutter via a worm drive. As the worm drive turns, the shutter is driven open or
closed. The fully closed or open position is detected when the beam of the upper or lower opto-
transmissive switches on the shutter control board is interrupted by a flag incorporated in the shutter
blade.
The following illustration shows the mechanical arrangement of the shutter.
Lower Motor Shutter Assembly Upper Motor Shutter Assembly
Stepper Motor
Control Board
Stepper Motor Shutter Blade Shutter Blade

Shutter Flag
Control Board
Shutter Flag
Control Board
2
I C Shutter Control Board
J2
J3
J1 J5
Y1
1 1 U1 U2
D3
1
1
D1
+
_
1
+ L1
J4
U3 D2
J5
Upper stepper motor connection.
J1
Lower stepper motor connection.
Solenoid Driven Shutter

The shutter assembly includes a shutter control PCB which responds to open and close commands from
the check processor control board to drive the solenoid arm to open or close the shutter blade.

Shutter Assembly
Control Board
Micro Switch (2 off)
Solenoid Arm
Shutter Blade
Control Board
1
J3 J1
CPM Shutter I/F

Y1
J2
J5
J4
U2
U3 L1
U4
J6
U1
J3
Micro switch harness connection.
J2
Solenoid harness connection.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the relevant device chapter for information on troubleshooting.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0 Diagnostics
There are no level 0 diagnostic tests associated with the shutters.
Level 1 Diagnostics
Refer to the relevant device chapter for information on level 1 diagnostic tests.
STRAPPING
None.

ADJUSTMENTS
None.

Stepper Motor Driven Shutters
The following instructions depend on whether:
A - The whole shutter assembly is being replaced by an NCR supplied kit, with the shutter preset to the
closed position, or
B - Only the motor is being refitted, or
C - In exceptional circumstances, if the whole shutter assembly is being replaced by an NCR supplied kit,
but fitted with the shutter in the open position for special service access conditions.
A - Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter preset to the closed

position
Note: The shutter assembly is preset to the closed position when shipped from the factory. Do not alter
the rotational position of the shutter before fitting.
1. Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running (this
avoids the lengthy re-boot period associated with a full re-start).
2. Remove the existing shutter assembly.
3. Position the new shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing bracket.
4. Push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding and using moderate
force remove the backlash from the shutter gears.
5. Any gap under the shutter should be within acceptable limits, parallel and a consistent size. It
should not be possible to fit the card of a magnetic card reader through any gaps.
6. While still pressing downwards, tighten the screws.
7. Use the CE switch to resume power to the ATM.
8. Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test (approx. 50 cycles) to ensure that the shutter is still
operational.

B - Refit of motor only

3. Remove and refit the motor on its mounting bracket.
4. Manually wind the worm drive into the closed position so that the flag of the shutter is central to
the sensor on the PCB.
5. Position the shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing bracket.
6. Push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia moulding and using moderate
force remove the backlash from the shutter gears.
operational.
C - Refit of complete shutter assembly with shutter in open position

Note: Fitting the shutter in its open position is an exceptional circumstance to aid access to the module
in difficult service conditions.

3. Manually wind the worm drive of the new shutter assembly into the open position.
4. Position the new shutter assembly over the mushroom studs located on the facia fixing bracket.
5. In its highest possible position, tighten the screws.
7. Perform a level 1 diagnostic shutter test to drive the shutter into its closed position.
8. Use the CE switch to remove power from the ATM whilst keeping the PC core running.
9. Loosen the fixing screws and push the shutter downwards until the blade contacts the facia
moulding.
10. Using moderate force, remove the backlash from the shutter gears.
operational.
CABLING
Stepper Motor Driven Shutter - Internal Cabling
Control Board Motor
J1 or J5
3 Motor A3 Brown
1 Motor A1 Black
2 Motor B1 Orange
4 Motor B3 Yellow

Solenoid Driven Shutter - Internal Cabling

1
Control Board
1 2
2 4
4
J3 P3
1 W1 Open
2 W3 Common
3 W2 Closed
Micro Switch Harness
Control Board
Solenoid Harness
J2 P2
1 Solenoid A black
2
3 Solenoid B black
4

14. SECURITY
Alarms 701
Skimming Protection Solution (Dip Card Reader) 710
Skimming Protection Solution 727
Revision 751

ALARMS
INTRODUCTION
The alarm system provides an interface between a series of alarm sensors and an external environment,
such as a bank’s existing alarm scheme. There are three types of alarm systems:
l Basic
l Enhanced
l High security.
Location
The following diagrams show the locations of the installations within the safe:
Basic Alarm System
PRIMARY LOCK
SECONDARY
LOCK

Enhanced Alarm System
PRIMARY LOCK
SECONDARY
LOCK

High Security Alarm System
SECONDARY
PRIMARY LOCK
LOCK
DESCRIPTION
All Alarm Systems offer status reporting. This feature reports the status of the alarm signals to the ATM
application program.
A silent alarm, operated by a special combination lock, is an option.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
Level 0
None.
Level 1
Alarms

The test Offered on the Alarms Diagnostic menu is the Determine Sensor Status test.
Determine Sensor Status
Reports the status of the safe’s six sensors.
Level 3
None.
STRAPPING
If the silent alarm is not fitted, the following turnaround plug (NCR part no. 445-0591539) will be
installed in connector J1 on the alarm termination panel:
l 1 x 009-0006439, connector 2 x 3 plug

l 2 x 009-0006427, terminal #18 (female)
l 50 mm x 006-5830020, wire #18 white.
6 5 4
3 2 1
ADJUSTMENTS
The vibration detector will normally be adjusted for optimum performance by the representative of the
alarm company responsible for connecting the ATM to a local alarm system (they have the expertise and
local knowledge to adjust the unit for a particular site). For test purposes, however, NCR presets the unit
to an initial adjustment as follows:
l Using a spring gauge, centred level with the contact in the direction of the arrow, adjust the screw
until the force necessary to open the contact is approximately 5 g. Recommended range is 5 g
minimum to 25 g maximum.
l If a gauge is not available an approximate adjustment can be made as follows:
l Loosen the adjustment screw until the contact is open
l Tighten the screw until the contact is just closed
l Tighten the screw a further one eighth (1/8) of a turn. (This is the equivalent of the 5 g setting.)


CABLING
None.
Alarm Termination Panels
Basic
C7 R5
R20
R21
R6 U1 R12
R23 Q2 D5
R4 VR1
D3 R30
C4
J3
SW1
J1 RLY1 RLY2 RLY4
C5
J2 R28 C6
D1 D2 R16 R25
J4
R18
Basic and Enhanced/High Security
Silent Alarm Connector, J1C

N/C 4 1 N/C
+12V 5 2 N/C
N/C 6 3 SREL

Door Switch Connector, J2

+12v 3 1 N/C
DREL 4 2 N/C
Alarm Output Connector, J3

TAL_NC 1 2 DAL_NO
TAL_CM 3 4 DAL_CM
N/C 5 6 DAL_NC
N/C 7 8 SAL_NO
N/C 9 10 SAL_CM
N/C 11 12 SAL_NC
N/C 13 14 CAL_NC
CSTS_CM 15 16 CAL_CM
DSTS_CM 17 18 CAL_NO
SSTS_CM 19 20 CSTS_N/C
TSTS_CM 21 22 DSTS_NC
N/C 23 24 SSTS_NC
N/C 25 26 TSTS_NC
N/C 27 28 +12V
GND 29 30 N/C
Vibration Sensor Connector, J4

N/C 1 2 N/C
N/C 3 4 N/C
N/C 5 6 N/C
N/C 7 8 N/C
N/C 9 10 N/C
VIB 11 12 N/C
N/C 13 14 N/C
N/C 15 16 GND

Enhanced
Basic and Enhanced/High Security
Silent Alarm Connector, J1

N/C 4 1 N/C
+12V 5 2 N/C
N/C 6 3 SREL
Door Switch Connector, J2

+12V 3 1 N/C
DREL 4 2 N/C
Alarm Output Connector, J3

TAL_NC 1 2 DAL_NO
TAL_CM 3 4 DAL_CM
TAL_NO 5 6 DAL_NC
TAL_OUT 7 8 SAL_NO
TAL_IN 9 10 SAL_CM
N/C 11 12 SAL_NC
N/C 13 14 CAL_NC

CSTS_CM 15 16 CAL_CM
DSTS_CM 17 18 CAL_NO
SSTS_CM 19 20 CSTS_N/C
TSTS_CM 21 22 DSTS_NC
CTST_OP 23 24 SSTS_NC
CTST_OUT 25 26 TSTS_NC
CTST_IN 27 28 +12V
GND 29 30 N/C
Composite Attack Connector, J4

N/C 1 2 +12V
N/C 3 4 N/C
N/C 5 6 CTST_OP
N/C 7 8 CTST_OUT
N/C 9 10 CTST_IN
VIB 11 12 CAL_OUT
TAL_OUT 13 14 N/C
GND 15 16 GND
I/O Panel Alarm Output Connector

The alarm output connector, located on the ATM I/O connector panel, has the following arrangement of
pins which are allocated for basic and enhanced systems as shown in the diagram:

A spring gauge (optional).

SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION (DIP CARD

READER)
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti Skimming Module (ASM)
for Dip Card Readers.
The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices such as card
skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or Dip Card Reader bezel.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The SPS consists of the following elements:
l Control box containing the SPS control PCB (ASM control board).
l SPS dip card bezel assembly with integrated sensors and connecting harnesses.
l Drill mat, (if fitted) - also known as the penetration mat.
l Interconnecting harnesses.
Functional Elements
The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.
Door Switch Drill Mat

SPS Replenishment
Harness (If fitted)
Door Status - J6
SPS Control PCB

(ASM Control Board)
Sensor
PCB Assembly
The base functionality of the SPS is to:

l Detect card skimming technology

l Detect attacks on the detection technology
l Report an entry into the ATM.
SPS uses capacitive sensing to detect a skimming device. The capacitive sensing device is integrated into
the Dip card reader bezel. Its function is to detect and create an alert whenever a fraudulent device
such as a card skimmer is fitted to the exterior of the card path or Dip card reader bezel.
Power Requirements
SPS Control PCB power requirements: 24V ±10%: 3A maximum
Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:
l 5V ±5%: 250mA maximum

l -5V ±5%: 250mA maximum.
SPS Control PCB

ERROR MESSAGES
Module Error M_ Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution
State Status
USB 1 USB cable has been Check cable connection Reconnect the USB cable or replace if
Communication disconnected or is at the SPS, PC Core or at faulty.
Failure faulty. the powered HUB.
SPS firmware is
faulty.
SPS is faulty.
USBASM 2 SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Power cycle the SPS.
Control
Check no LEDs are on. Power cycle the SPS.
Electronics
Fault If above steps fail, replace the device.
Device not 3 Different SPS Requires authorisation.
authorised connected. No more test required.
Download 4 Firmware file on the - Restart the ATM and allow the
candidate disk is corrupted. firmware loader service
firmware to download the compatible device
checksum firmware.
invalid
Resident 5 Firmware file on the - Restart the ATM and allow the
firmware device is corrupted. firmware loader service to download
checksum the compatible device firmware. If it
invalid fails again, then replace the hardware.
Not found 6 SPS not attached SPS not attached before Connect device and restart the ATM.
during start up before service start. service start.
USB cable is Check USB cable Reconnect the USB cable.
disconnected. connection at the SPS, PC
Core, or at the powered
HUB.
USB cable is faulty. - Replace the USB cable.
SPS firmware is not Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS.
running.
SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Replace SPS.

Module Error M_ Possible Root Cause(s) Isolation Resolution

State Status
I2C 7 I2C cable Check LED D2 is flashing. Reconnect I2C cable.
Communication disconnected Note: see Cabling section
Fault between the primary
card reader bezel
sensor and the SPS.
Faulty I2C cable.
Out of range 9 Primary card reader Check around the Do NOT remove any suspicious
temperature bezel sensors have primary card reader object, but instead, inform the
been sprayed with bezel sensor for any necessary authorities i.e.bank
freezer spray. foreign objects of a security.
Possible skimming suspicious nature.
attack.
Unusual object 12 Additional material in Inspect the area around Do NOT remove the hardware or any
detected proximity to the the sensor for any suspicious object.
capacitive sensor. suspicious object.
Possible skimming
attack.
Penetration 16 Drill mat has been - Carefully replace the drill mat.
detected penetrated.
Drill mat has been
removed.
Door open 17 Door opened. - Close the door.
Note: After any repair activity - not just SPS - carry out instructions in the Configuration section to Re-
Baseline Sensor.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Recommendations for troubleshooting false alerts on 662x, 663x and 201x products can be found in the
SPS DIP Troubleshooting Guide (B006-7728) at:
http://www.infoprod.ncr.com/hardware/troubleshooting.php
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
Diagnostic LEDs
LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report detailed faults. Refer
to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.

Led’s
1
2
3
4
Condition LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

USB CONNECTED ON - - -
USB DISCONNECTED RAPID FLASH FLASH - -
HEALTHY ON - FAST FLASH -
CAPACITIVE SENSOR DISCONNECTED - - SLOW FLASH -
Device Diagnostics
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.
Test Description
Menu Displays a menu of all the other tests to allow the user to select one.
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following:
Device Variant
Device Serial Number
Main Firmware Version
FPGA Firmware Version
Device Name.
Display The test will display the current sensors status.
Status When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Primary Card Reader Bezel Capacitive No Alert
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open

Test Description
Transfer This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set to TRUE
Logs (configurable via Property Page).
NOTE: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in sequence:
1. The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media detected on the
system for user selection.
2. Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the ATM serial
number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the ATM serial number and
xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.
3. The logs will be copied into newly created directory.
4. The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect any device
related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.
This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process it does not
communicate with the device.
The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is inserted later
on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.
The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this applet because we
may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.
Display Cap The test will display the current sensors status.
Status When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Run This test performs the re-baselining of the sensors. See Configuration section for instructions
Sequence details of the Re-Baseline Sensor post repair test.
Test 1
Device Self Test

The following options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Self Test The device self test will execute the following command:
l This test executes the Determine state command.
l End of test.

Tallies
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS The total number of communication operations done on the device.
COM_FAIL The total number of communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM The total number of USB cable disconnections.
DEV_ARR The total number of USB cable connections.
CAP_COMM The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.
CAP_OBJ The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.
DRIL_PEN The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.
DOOROPEN The total number of door state sensor open.
DOOR_CLS The total number of door state sensor close.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration options are available via the System Application.

Test Description
Device The test will display the following:
Information l Device Variant
l Main Firmware Version
l FPGA Firmware Version
l Device Name.
Display The test will display the current sensors status.
Status This test executes ‘Determine State’ command to get sensor status and when all sensors are
healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Re-Baseline This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and flags. The ‘Re-
Sensor baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset to a new environment level for
all sensors. The environment level is the baseline for the sensors. The test will be performed in the
below sequence:
1. Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign objects present
before executing the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command.
2. Execute the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment level.
3. Display sensor information after this test.
Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB dongle key.
Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.
Drill Mat The test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If configured, it will display
Status any sensor alerts.
Configure The test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Drill Mat
Deconfigure The test will deconfigure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Drill Mat
Note: Configuration setting will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be modified.

Post Repair Test: Re-Baseline Sensor/Run Sequence Test 1

The SPS sensor should be re-baselined after every repair, using the trigger test tool (part number 445-
0743656, or 445-0749153 for 6691 ATMs). Place the trigger test tool around the bezel when prompted,
ensuring that it does not move during re-baselining but do not hold it in place with your hand as this will
affect the result of the test.
Use only the correct trigger tool for the ATM:
Trigger tool for 66xx ATMs except 6691
Trigger tools for 6691 Cantilever and 6691 Head-on
Note: On rear access units, you must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order to carry out
this test.
1. Choose ‘Re-baseline Sensor’ from Device Configuration menu. ‘Run Sequence Test 1’ from the
Device Diagnostics menu.
2. Then choose option ‘Run Sequence Test 1’.

3. The status of the device will be displayed for information.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ place the trigger test tool
around the bezel.

5. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3.

6. A final screen will display the test status.
7. Remove the trigger test tool at the end of the post repair sequence test exercise.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

The Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) within SPS are:
l SPS dip card reader bezel moulding assembly (containing capacitive sensor driver, electrode PCBs,
ASM shield ground harness and associated harnesses).
l SPS control box
l Control PCB
l Drill mat assembly (if fitted)
l Interconnecting harnesses
l SPS dip driver PCB to control PCB linker harness
l SPS dip top electrode harness
l SPS dip bottom electrode harness
l SPS replenishment harness
l Penetration mat harness

SPS Bezel and Driver Assembly

There are no serviceable parts within the bezel and driver assembly. If faulty, replace the bezel and
driver assembly - example shown below.
Interconnecting Harnessing
There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.
Drill Mat
The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM supports this
functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs. The one shown below is for
illustration only.
CAUTION
Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro-switch is easily damaged.

Drill Mat Connector
Mylar Strip Micro-switch
1. Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat assembly.
2. Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the delicate
micro-switch.
Tip: if a spare protective strip is not available, use a piece of sticky tape to protect the switch
during installation, with a folded end to make it easy to remove afterwards.
3. Secure the assembly with the retained screws.
4. Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro-switch.
SPS Control Box

SPS Control PCB
1. Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control box.

2. Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control PCB.
3. Remove the four M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.
4. Remove the control PCB.
CABLING
The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.
Penetration Mat Drill

* MISCIF Switch Set Harness Mat
MINI MISC SPS Replenishment Long Short J1
MIDI MISC Harness
Note: Linkage to the MISCIF only when Auto-Supervisor is fitted.
Door Status - J6 Drill Mat In - J4
SPS Dip Card Bezel Low Power

24V In - J1 DC Dist.
USB - J7 USB Type A

to Mini-B
SPS Dip Driver PCB to Control PCB
Capacitive Sensor - PCB Electrode Linker Harness Cap Sensor - J9
Shield
SPS Control PCB

Earth Wire Harness

SPS DIP Driver PCB to Control PCB Linker Harness
Low Power DC Distribution Harness
USB Type A to Type Mini B High Speed Cable Assembly
Penetration Mat Harnesses

Short
DMAT_J1 DRILL_FEMALE
Long
IFD_J4
Drill_MALE
DMAT_M
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness

Note: The type of replenishment harnesses used will depend on the ATM model.

To IFD PCB
To MISC Board Supervisor To Supervisor Harness
Bezel Assembly
ASM Shield Ground Harness
SPS Dip Bottom Electrode Harness
SPS Dip Top Electrode Harness

SPS Control PCB Connectors
Penetration Mat Replenishment USB

Low Power DC (J4) (J6) (J7) Electrode Linker
(J1) (J9)
The trigger test tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any repair activity, not
just on SPS:
SPS SelfServ Dip Trigger, NCR part number 445-0743656 or Moulding Assy - Dip Trigger, NCR part
number 445-0749153 for 6691 ATMs.
None.

14. SECURITY: SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION
SKIMMING PROTECTION SOLUTION
INTRODUCTION
This chapter details the Skimming Protection Solution (SPS), also known as Anti Skimming Module (ASM),
or Intelligent Fraud Detection 2 (IFD2). Note that some components such as harnessing use ASM or IFD2
in their names, these have been preserved in this manual for easier identification for re-ordering and
replacement.
The SPS feature uses sensors to detect and create an alert whenever fraudulent devices, such as card
skimmers are fitted to the exterior of the card path or MCRW bezel.
CAUTION
DESCRIPTION
The SPS consists of the following elements:
l Control box containing the SPS control PCB (ASM control board) and SPS daughter PCB (ASM
control daughter board).
l SPS IMCRW bezel moulding assembly with integrated sensors and connecting harnessing.
l Drill mat, if fitted - also known as the penetration mat.
l Interconnecting harnessing.
The diagram below shows the functional elements of the SPS feature.
Door Switch
SPS Replenishment Drill Mat
Harness (If fitted)
Door Status - J6
SPS Daughter PCB

(ASM Control
Daughter Board)
Sensor
PCB Assembly
SPS Control PCB
(ASM Control Board)
UIMCRW or
IMCRW Card Reader - Width
and Shutter Switches
The base functionality of the SPS is to:

l Disrupt the magnetic read capability of card skimming technology
l Detect card skimming technology
l Detect attacks on the disruption and detection technology
l Report an entry into the ATM.
SPS uses the following technologies to prevent a skimming device from capturing data from a card’s
magnetic stripe at an ATM or Kiosk.
Capacitive Sensing
The capacitive sensing device is integrated into the IMCRW bezel. Its function is to detect and create an
alert whenever a fraudulent device such as a card skimmer is fitted to the exterior of the card path or
MCRW bezel.
Magnetic Field ‘Jammer’

The magnetic field jammer which disrupts card skimmers is located in the IMCRW bezel moulding. Its
function is to render the data obtained by a skimmer useless by disrupting the magnetic card data being
read by the skimmer. It does not raise an alert at the presence of a skimmer, but blocks it from reading a
card successfully during each transaction.
Note that the jammer in the bezel is not a jamming transmitter.
Electrical
Power Requirements
SPS Control PCB power requirements:
l 24V ±10%: 3A maximum
SPS Control PCB to the Daughter PCB requirements:
l 24V ±10%: 1.5A maximum

l 5V ±10%: 50mA maximum.
Power supplied to the SPS PCB peripherals:
l 5V ±5%: 250mA maximum

l -5V ±5%: 250mA maximum.

SPS Control PCB
SPS Daughter PCB

The SPS Daughter PCB which attaches directly to the SPS control PCB, provides a stepdown power supply
and can support two inductor coils.
Daughter PCB
Connectors
SPS Control
PCB

TROUBLESHOOTING
Module Error State Messages
The following error messages are reported by the device.
Module Error M- Possible Root Cause Corrective Action

State Status
USB 1 USB cable has been Check cable connection at the SPS, PC Core or at the powered
Communication disconnected or is HUB.
Failure faulty. Reconnect the USB cable or replace if faulty.
SPS firmware is
faulty.
SPS is faulty.
USBASM 2 SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Power cycle the SPS.
Control
Check no LEDs are on. Power cycle the SPS.
Electronics
Fault If above steps fail, replace the device.
Device not 3 Different SPS Requires authorisation.
authorised connected. No more test required.
Download 4 Firmware file on the Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to
candidate disk is corrupted. download the compatible device firmware.
firmware
checksum
invalid
Resident 5 Firmware file on the Restart the ATM and allow the firmware loader service to
firmware device is corrupted. download the compatible device firmware. If it fails again, then
checksum replace the hardware.
invalid
Not found 6 SPS not attached Connect device and restart the ATM.
during start up before service start.
USB cable is Check USB cable connection at the SPS, PC Core, or at the
disconnected. powered HUB. Reconnect the USB cable.
USB cable is faulty. Replace the USB cable.
SPS firmware is not Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS.
running.
SPS is faulty. Check LED D2 is on. Replace SPS.

State Status
I2C 7 Harnesses Check LED D2 is flashing. Reconnect cable(s).
Communication disconnected Note: see Cabling section
Fault between the primary
card reader bezel
sensor and the SPS.
Faulty I2C cable.
Out of range 9 Primary card reader Check around the primary card reader bezel sensor for any
temperature bezel sensors have foreign objects of a suspicious nature.
been sprayed with Do NOT remove any suspicious object, but instead, inform the
freezer spray. necessary authorities i.e. bank security.
Possible skimming
attack.
Primary card 10 Primary card reader Do NOT remove the hardware or suspicious object.
reader bezel bezel capacitive
capacitive sensors have been
sensor moved away from
displaced the card reader slot.
Possible skimming
attack.
Width-Shutter 11 Width-Shutter switch Reconnect the Width-Shutter switch harness.
switch harness harness has been
displaced disconnected.
Unusual object 12 Additional material in Inspect the area around the sensor for any suspicious object.
detected proximity to the Do NOT remove the hardware or any suspicious object.
capacitive sensor.
Possible skimming
attack.
FPGA weak 13 Faulty primary card Replace the primary card reader bezel.
signal reader bezel jammer
FPGA strong 15 Additional material in Inspect the area around the primary card reader bezel jammer
signal proximity to the for any additional material.
primary card reader Do NOT remove any additional material.
bezel jammer.
Possible skimming
attack.
Penetration 16 Drill mat has been Carefully replace the drill mat. See FRU removal section.
detected penetrated or
removed.
Door open 17 Door opened. Close the door.

State Status
Device in 21 USB cable Check USB cable connection at the SPS, PC Core, or at the
bootloader disconnected during powered HUB. Reconnect or replace the USB cable.
mode firmware download, Check LED D1 is off. Power cycle the SPS. Check LED D2 is on.
or is faulty. USBASM Replace SPS.
firmware is not
running or is faulty.
FPGA 23 Jammer is not Use the Test Device Tool - Place the tool in the bezel and with
programming configured properly. SysApp open, view Jammer On State - Use the key disk to loop
fault the test and to view the jammer toggle.Restart the ATM and
allow the firmware loader service to download the FPGA
firmware. If it fails again, then check if the FPGA candidate
firmware file is current or replace the hardware.
Jammer signal 26 Non-NCR primary Replace the primary card reader bezel.
long range card reader bezel
invalid jammer attached.
Note: After any repair activity - not just on SPS - and after re-baselining carry out a Post Repair Test, see
instructions in the Diagnostic section.
Check for Jamming
The ‘jamming’ signal is triggered by any movement in the card reader bezel, such as a card being
inserted. The signal can be detected by a quiet electronic noise.
Check for Detection

While running Device Diagnostics test ‘Display Cap Status’ with looping, place an object anywhere on the
card reader bezel and within 30 to 120 seconds the Cap Sensor will show an alert. The alert will clear
around 15-20 seconds after the object is removed.

False Jammer Alert or SPS Constantly On
Perform a Rebaseline Sensor test from the System Application Configuration Menu.
Check that the cables are connected correctly: red to lower switch and black to upper switch, as shown.
It is vital that the bezel assembly ground wires are all properly grounded to ensure that the SPS is
reliable.
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
Diagnostic LEDs
LED’s are an indication of the general operation of the device. They do not report detailed faults. Refer
to the System Application Menu for detailed fault reporting.
Condition LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

USB CONNECTED ON - - -
USB DISCONNECTED RAPID FLASH FAST FLASH - -
HEALTHY ON - FAST FLASH -
DISRUPTOR ON - ON - -
DISRUPTOR OFF - OFF - -
SENSOR(S) OR - - SLOW FLASH -
DISRUPTOR COILS DISCONNECTED

LED flash rates are defined as:
RAPID = on and off for 50 milliseconds

FAST = on and off for 150 milliseconds
SLOW = on and off for 1 second.
Note: Jammer has a duty cycle when the USB is disconnected. LED 2 follows the Jammer ON/OFF
condition.
Led’s
1
2
3
4
In boot loader mode LED 1 only will be on to indicate the device is in bootloader mode and will flash to
indicate firmware is being downloaded.
Device Diagnostics
In System Application the SPS feature is called USB Anti-Skimming Module and the disruptor is referred
to as the jammer.
Note: Looping is allowed on all tests except on Transfer Logs.
Test Description
Identification Performs an identification command and displays the following:
l Device Variant
l Device Name.

Test Description
Display The test will display the current sensors status and tries to check and clear the jammer weak or
Status strong signal error. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will be displayed in the following
format:
Sensor State
Primary Card Reader Jammer No Alert - Jammer ON/OFF
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat or sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed
as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Transfer This test is available on the ATM only if ‘Allow Transfer Logs Diagnostic Applet’ is set to TRUE
Logs (configurable via Property Page).
Note: Some banks collect logs from the ATM remotely.
If the configuration is set to TRUE, then the test will perform the operations below in sequence:
1. The test will first display the menu which will contain all the removable media detected on
the system for user selection.
2. Create a directory under the root directory if not present and name it using the ATM serial
number and Site I.D. e.g. 12345678_XXXXXXXX where 12345678 is the ATM serial number
and xxxxxxxx is the actual Bank ATM ID.
3. The logs will be copied into newly created directory.
4. The user will be prompted about the success or failure of the activity.
This applet will copy the log files to the removable media. The user must not expect any device
related MStatus or error code on the execution of the applet.
l This applet copies the device logs to the removable media and during this process it does not
communicate with the device.
l The removable media must be loaded before executing this applet. If the media is inserted
later on, then, it will not be reflected in the media selection menu.
l The logs will not be deleted from the disk after the successful execution of this applet
because we may need to transfer the logs again from the ATM later.

Test Description
Display Cap The test will display the current sensors status. When all sensors are healthy, then the status will
Status be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat or sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status will be displayed
as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open
Run This test should be carried out after every repair on the ATM. It verifies the operation of the
Sequence Capacitive Sensor, FPGA status (strong or weak signal). Part of the test involves re-baselining the
Test 1 sensors. See detailed description below.
Post Repair Test: Run Sequence Test 1

This test should be carried out after every repair, not just on SPS, using the trigger insert tool:
l part number 445-0738402 for ATMs with wider card slot (e.g. 6625, 32/4/8)
l part number 445-0749196 for ATMs with narrower card slot (e.g. 6623/7, 6683/7 and 6691).
The tool has 3 numbered test surfaces and must inserted into the card entry slot when prompted, so
that the number of the surface required is visible to the user when fully inserted.
Note: You must transfer the interface to the front of the ATM in order to carry out this test.

1. Choose ‘Run Sequence Test 1’ from Device Diagnostics menu.
2. The status of the device will be displayed for information.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions. When prompted to ‘place insert 1’ insert the trigger tool so
that surface number 1 is visible when the tool is fully inserted into the card entry slot.
4. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 1.

5. Then follow the instructions when prompted to remove insert 1 and place insert 2 i the card
entry slot. Make sure you insert the tool so that surface number 2 is visible when the tool is fully
inserted.
6. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 2. Follow the on-screen instructions when
prompted to remove insert 2.
7. When prompted to ‘place insert 3’ insert the trigger tool so that surface number 3 is visible
when the tool is fully inserted into the card entry slot.
8. A screen will be displayed to show the result of insert 3. Follow the on-screen instructions when
prompted to remove insert 3.

9. A final screen will display the test status.
10. Remove the trigger tool at the end of the test.
Service Tallies
Tally Description
ATTEMPTS The total number of communication operations done on the device.
COM_FAIL The total number of communication failures reported by the device.
FAIL_ATT The total number of communication retries done on communication failures.
DEV_REM The total number of USB cable disconnections.
DEV_ARR The total number of USB cable connections.
CAP_COMM The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor communication failures.
CAP_OBJ The total number of card reader interface capacitive sensor unusual object detected.
JAMMER_ON The total number of card reader interface Jammer ON.
JAMMROFF The total number of card reader interface Jammer OFF.
DRIL_PEN The total number of drill mat sensor penetrations detected.
DOOROPEN The total number of door state sensor open.
DOOR_CLS The total number of door state sensor close.

Device Self Test

The following options are available via System Application.
Test Description
Device Self Test The device self test will execute the following command:
l This test executes the Determine state command.
l End of test.
CONFIGURATION
Configuration options are available via the System Application.
Test Description
Device The test will display the following:
Information l Device Variant
l Device Name
Display Status The test will display the current sensors status and tries to check and clear the
jammer weak or strong signal error. When all sensors are healthy, then the status
will be displayed in the following format:
Sensor State
Drill Mat No Alert
Door State Closed
When the drill mat or sensor is affected and the door is opened, then the status
will be displayed as:
Sensor State
Drill Mat Alert
Door State Open

Test Description
Re-Baseline This applet allows the user to reset the SPS device and clear all error counts and
Sensor flags. The ‘Re-baseline Sensor’ command will cause the SPS hardware to be reset
to a new environment level for all sensors. The environment level is the baseline
for the sensors. The test will be performed in the below sequence:
1. Perform a check of the SPS system sensors and confirm there are no foreign
objects present before executing the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command.
2. Execute the ‘Re-Baseline Sensor’ command to reset the new environment
level.
3. Display sensor information after this test.
Note: This applet will be visible when the user entered SysApp through the USB
dongle key.
Note: Rebaseline must be performed from the front of the unit.
SPS Device Setting This applet allows the user to set the jammer settings:
1. Signal Drift for Jammer Activation. The acceptable range is 50 to 1000. The
default is 50.
2. Jammer Activation Timeout. Acceptable range is 1 to 10. The default is 1.
Drill Mat Status This test will display the status of the drill mat: either configured or not. If
configured, it will display any sensor alerts.
Configure Drill Mat This test will configure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Deconfigure Drill This test will deconfigure the drill mat, after which the ATM must be re-booted.
Mat
Rain This test will display the status of rain compensation:whether it is enabled or
Compensation disabled.
Status
Enable Rain This test is used to enable rain compensation, after which the ATM must be
Compensation rebooted. It can be enabled if problems are seen as a result of rain causing
excessive amounts of false alerts.
Disable Rain This test is used to disable rain compensation, after which the ATM must be
Compensation rebooted.
Note: Configuration settings will be remotely viewable by default. They cannot be modified.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.


l SPS IMCRW bezel moulding assembly (containing coil, capacitive sensor driver and electrode PCBs
inside the bezel) plus harness assembly containing shield, shield ground harness, sensor and coil
assembly plus associated harnesses.
l SPS control box
l Control PCB
l Daughter PCB
l Drill mat assembly (for ATMs with card orientation windows only)
l Interconnecting harnesses
l IFD2 (SPS) control PCB to IMCRW linker harness
l SPS replenishment harness
l IFD2 (SPS) short linker harness
l IFD2 (SPS) control PCB to coil linker harness
l IFD2 (SPS) control PCB to IMCRW electrode linker harness
l Penetration mat harness.
SPS Bezel Moulding and Harness Assembly

There are no field replaceable parts within the bezel moulding assembly. If faulty, replace the bezel
moulding assembly - example shown below.
Drill Mat
The drill mat assembly comprising the drill mat and bracket is mandatory where the ATM supports this
functionality. There are different drill mat assemblies for different ATMs: the one shown below is for
illustration only

CAUTION
Take care when replacing the drill mat assembly as the micro-switch is easily damaged.
1. Remove and retain the four screws (three on the SelfServ 34) securing the drill mat assembly.
Remove the defective mat.
2. Carefully position the replacement drill mat assembly, taking care not to damage the delicate
micro-switch.
Tip: if a spare protective strip is not available, use a piece of sticky tape to protect the switch
during installation, with a folded end to make it easy to remove afterwards.
3. Secure the assembly with the retained screws.
4. Carefully remove the protective Mylar strip over the micro-switch.

SPS Control Box

Daughter PCB
1. Loosen the M4 nut and remove the control box cover plate from the SPS control box.
2. Disconnect the IFD (SPS) Coil Linker harness from the daughter PCB.
3. Remove and retain the M3 x 20 M/C comb screw securing the daughter PCB to the SPS control
PCB.
4. Remove the spacer between the daughter PCB and the SPS control PCB.
M3 x 20
Screw
Spacer

5. Squeeze the end of the plastic stand-off together to free the PCB from the stand-off.
6. Carefully remove it by gently prizing it from the control board connectors.

Note: When removing the daughter PCB, ensure it is kept parallel with the main SPS control PCB
to prevent damage to the connectors.

SPS Control PCB
1. Disconnect the USB cable and any other cable connections from the SPS control PCB.
2. Remove and retain the plastic snap-on stand-off.
Stand-off
3. Remove the three M3 x 6 screws securing the control PCB to the metal frame.
4. Remove the control PCB.
Interconnecting Harnessing
There are no serviceable parts on the harnessing. If faulty, replace the harness.

SPS Control PCB Connectors
Penetration Mat Replenishment USB
Low Power DC (J4) (J6) (J7) IMCRW Electrode Linker
(J1) (J9)
IMCRW Linker
(J12)
Daughter PCB Connectors
IMCRW Coil Linker

Harness
CABLING
The following diagram shows the harness connections on the SPS.

Penetration Mat Drill
* MISCIF Switch Set Harness Mat
MINI MISC SPS Replenishment Long Short J1
MIDI MISC Harness
Note: Linkage to the MISCIF only when Auto-Supervisor is fitted.
Door Status - J6 Drill Mat In - J4
SPS Bezel IFD2 Control PCB Low Power

Jammer - PCB Jammer - J1 24V In - J1
to Coil Linker DC Dist.
SPS Daughter PCB USB - J7 USB Type A

to Mini-B
Capacitive Sensor - PCB IFD2 Control - IMCRW Cap Sensor - J9

2
Electrode Linker (1 C cable)
Shield
IFD2 Control PCB
IMCRW - IN - J12
- IMCRW Linker
Earth Wire Harness
SPS Control PCB
IFD2 Harness
Short Linker
IMCRW
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Linker Harness (J12 SPS Control
PCB)
To IFD Control PCB To FDI Jammer Harness
IFD2 (SPS) Harness - IMCRW Short Linker Harness (on IMCRW)

Card Reader Power Header To MCRW Linker Long Harness
Shutter_SW
Width_SW
Card Reader Power Harness
IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to Coil Linker Harness (J1 Daughter PCB)

IFD2 (SPS) Control PCB to IMCRW Electrode Linker Harness (J9 SPS
Control PCB)
ATM Facia J9 Control PCB
Penetration Mat Harness (J4 SPS Control PCB)

Short
DMAT_J1 DRILL_FEMALE
Long
IFD_J4
Drill_MALE
DMAT_M
SS ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)

To IFD PCB
To MISC Board Supervisor To Supervisor Harness

ASM (SPS) Replenishment Harness (J6 SPS Control PCB)

DMAT_F
SW1-NO_M
SW1-NO_F
To IFD PCB J6 SW1-CM_F
SW1-CM_M
The trigger insert tool must be used to perform repair exit tests at the conclusion of any repair activity,
not just on SPS and after re-baselining:
SPS SelfServ MCRW Trigger, NCR part number 445-0738402 (wide card slot) or 445-0749196 (narrow
card slot).

14. SECURITY: REVISION
REVISION


15. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
Product Environment Heaters 753
Revision 755

PRODUCT ENVIRONMENT HEATERS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the product environment heaters. The heater assembly is designed to keep the
internal temperature of an enclosure regulated above a minimum temperature of 10° centigrade.
DESCRIPTION
A product environment heater consists of a fan heater assembly, a control thermostat plus associated
harnessing and connectors. Also included is a product mounting plate and a thermostat mounting
bracket.
Fan Heater Assembly
Control Thermostat
Thermostat
Mounting Bracket
Product
Mounting Bracket
IEC Connector
Product environment heaters are available in the following voltages:
l 240 V and 120 V ATMs - 200 W

l 240 V and 120 V ATMs - 300 W
l 240 V and 120 V ATMs - 400 W.
Temperature Control
The heater is thermostatically controlled to keep the temperature inside the ATM within normal
operating limits. When the temperature at the thermostat drops below 15°C ± 4°C, the thermostat will
close and switch on the heater. The heater heats the air being drawn into the fan which then transfers
the warm air throughout the ATM. The thermostat will switch the heater off when the temperature rises
above 24°C ± 3°C.
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.

DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable modules within the heater assembly.
CABLING
There is no field replaceable internal cabling.

REVISION


16. MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
Revision 784
S1 Currency Dispenser Removal and Replacement 810

SELFSERV 23 MODULE REMOVAL

Note: To play the video clips in this chapter in Adobe Reader, set all media players to ‘Always’ in the
trust options in Edit menu > Preferences > Multimedia Trust (legacy).
ACCESS TO LOWER FACIA ITEMS

1. Remove the screws securing the motorised card reader and/or the receipt printer as
appropriate then move the device(s) further back in the tray.

2. Remove the two screws on each side securing the facia to the brackets.
3. Lift the facia off the two bracket hooks, lower it slightly and replace on the bracket with the
lower hook in the upper slot on the facia. Make sure that harnessing is not snagged or strained.

REMOVE KEYPAD
1. Lower the facia to gain access to the rear of the keypad assembly (see ‘Access to Lower Facia
Items’ instructions).
2. Remove the two screws securing the keypad assembly, then lever the tangs on the bracket off
the clips to allow the assembly to be removed.
3. Disconnect the keypad harness and remove the four screws securing the keypad to the bracket.

4. When replacing the keypad assembly, make sure the bracket is correctly snapped into place on
the clips on the facia before replacing the screws.
KEYPAD MEI
1. Lower the facia to gain access to the rear of the keypad assembly (see ‘Access to Lower Facia
Items’ instructions).
2. Unclip the MEI and disconnect the harness.
MCRW MEI/FACIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT

1. Lowering the facia is optional (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).
2. Remove the screw securing the motorised card reader, then remove the card reader.

3. Remove the two screws securing the MCRW MEI bracket.
4. Remove and replace the required part:

a. MCRW MEI: Remove the MEI from the bracket and disconnect the harness.
b. MCRW decal holder: Slide the decal holder out of the facia.

c. MCRW facia insert: Remove the four screws securing the insert.
5. When the required part has been replaced, re-secure the MCRW MEI bracket assembly with the
two screws. Note that there is a choice of 4 screw holes in case of thread wear.

RECEIPT FACIA INSERT & MEI

1. Lowering the facia is optional (see ‘Access to Lower Facia Items’ instructions).
2. Remove the two screws securing the receipt printer, then remove the printer.
3. Remove the four screws securing the receipt facia insert.

4. Remove the insert and then either replace the whole assembly, the inner or outer parts of the
insert or unclip and disconnect the MEI on the facia.
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE
1. Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface (misc. I/F) to the facia. Then slide the
misc. I/F. to the right and remove it.
2. Disconnect the harnesses. Then remove and retain the four screws securing the misc. i/f. to the
bracket. Re-fit the bracket to the replacement misc. i/f.

15 INCH TOUCHSCREEN
Removal
1. Remove the screws securing the motorised card reader and the receipt printer then move them
further back in the tray.
2. Loosen the screw securing the miscellaneous interface (misc. i/f.) to the facia. Then slide the
misc i/f to the right and remove it.
3. Remove the two screws securing the camera (if fitted) to the top of the facia, and leave the
camera hanging from the harnessing.

4. Carefully open the white clamps retaining the ribbon cables on the touchscreen controllers: two
cables at the top and one on the right-hand side of the display.
Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the clamps.
5. Remove and the four screws securing the touchscreen.
6. Some earlier units have an additional screw securing the facia on each side, visible through an
access hole in the facia bracket. If these screws are present:

8. Lift one side of the facia only off the bracket and remove the screw securing the touchscreen
through the access hole. Replace the facia onto the bracket and re-secure it with the two
screws. Then repeat this step on the bracket on the other side. Note that the two touchscreen
screws do not need to be refitted later.

9. From the front of the ATM, slide the touchscreen up slightly to release it then lift it off the facia.
10. Follow the reverse of these instructions to fit the new touchscreen.
Note: When replacing the touchscreen take care to feed the ribbon cables through the
holes in the facia without trapping or folding them.
Note: Make sure there is no gap between the refitted touchscreen and the lower facia.
Apply pressure to all edges to ensure a tight fit.

Note: When re-fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the
ribbon cables are level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have been
pushed back into place. The right-hand ribbon is particularly difficult to re-connect, so to
make access easier, try removing the controller from the display and bending open the
cover.
Replacement
Refitting the 15 inch touchscreen is the reverse of this process.
19 INCH TOUCHSCREEN
Removal
1. Unlock and rack out the module tray and the fascia. (See ‘Accessing the Modules’ instructions).
2. Isolate the ATM power. (See ‘Power Isolation' instructions).

3. Disconnect the ribbon cables from the touchscreen controllers: carefully open the white clamps
retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers on the right-hand side of
the display. (Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the clamps.)
4. Remove the four screws securing the touchscreen to the fascia.
5. Gently push the touchscreen upwards to release it from the fascia. Remove the touchscreen
from the fascia.

Replacement
Refitting the 19 inch touchscreen is the reverse of this process.
15 INCH DISPLAY
Removal
1. Disconnect the three harness connectors (USB, power and signal) on the display.
2. If the ATM has a touchscreen, the touchscreen controllers can be removed without
disconnecting the ribbon cables. Loosen the screws securing the touchscreen controllers in the
keyhole slots then carefully lift the controller assemblies off the display. (Tip: Use a loose screw
in the facia frame to hold the smaller board in place, use tape to hold the larger board to the
camera mounting.)

If it is necessary to disconnect the controllers: carefully open the white clamps using a small flat
head screwdriver, retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers.
3. Loosen the four screws (two each side) securing the display to the facia. Then lift the display off
the screws and slide it out from behind the top-box latch bracket.
Note: on early units, the screws may have to be removed completely, not just loosened.
4. If the touchscreen controllers have been disconnected, loosen the screws securing them in the
keyhole slots then lift the controller assemblies off the display. Retain the controllers and their
covers and harnesses, to be fitted to the replacement display.
Note: When re-fitting the ribbon connectors make sure that the white stripes on the ribbon cables are
level and only just visible once the white retaining clamps have been pushed back into place. The right-
hand ribbon is particularly difficult to re-connect, so to make access easier, try removing the controller
from the display and bending open the cover.

Replacement
Refitting the 15 inch display is the reverse of this process.
19 INCH DISPLAY
Removal
1. Remove the touchscreen. (See ‘19 Inch Touchscreen - Removal’ instructions).
2. Disconnect the DVI cable and power connector from the back of the display.
Power connector
DVI cable

3. Remove the five nuts securing the display to the fascia.
4. Remove the display from the fascia.
Replacement
Refitting the 19 inch display is the reverse of this process.

FDKS AND SCREEN

1. Disconnect the FDK harness from the miscellaneous interface. Loosen the screw securing the
miscellaneous interface to the facia, then slide the misc. i/f. to the right and remove it.
2. Remove the thirteen screws securing the rear of the facia: four each side, three at the top and
two in the lower edge.

3. Move the rear of the facia back and rest it over the module tray.
4. Remove the upper four screws on each side of the facia frame (leave the lower two which
secure the shelf).

5. Remove the three screws above the display.
6. From the front of the ATM, lift the screen off the facia.
7. You can now replace the screen or gain access to the FDK assemblies.
FACIA
1. Disconnect all facia to top-box harnessing, including to MEEIs, facia hub, display power and USB.
The audio and misc. i/f USB should be disconnected at the core and the dispenser MEI should be
disconnected so that they remain with the facia when it is removed.

3. Lift the entire facia off the brackets.

4. Remove functioning facia devices and re-fit them to the replacement facia.
FACIA SHELF
1. Disconnect all lower facia to top-box harnessing, including to MEIs.
2. Remove the thirteen screws securing the rear of the facia: four each side, three at the top and
two in the lower edge.

3. Remove the lower two screws on each side of the facia frame, securing the shelf.
4. Remove the shelf, then remove any undamaged device inserts and re-fit them to the
replacement shelf.
PC CORE
1. Disconnect the DC power harness from the rear of the PC core.
2. Disconnect the USB retaining clips and unplug all the USB connectors and audio jack from the
side of the core. Take careful note of the order of the connections as they must be plugged back
into the same ports.

3. Remove the two screws securing the PC core cover and the single screw securing the PC core to
the mounting bracket.
4. Slide the whole core towards you slightly to disengage it from the slots in the module tray, then
tilt it up so that you can slide the cover off.
5. Disconnect the two LVDS harnesses and feed them carefully out through the back of the PC
core, one at a time.
6. The PC core can now be lifted out of the ATM along with the mounting and USB retention
assembly, which can be separated from the core by removing the two screws.
7. Refer to the Mini PC Core service chapter for instructions on how to remove the FRUs within the
PC core.

GPS ANTENNA & TRACKER

1. Unlock and open the topbox.
2. Rack out the module tray and fascia until the slides are fully extended.
3. Turn the mains switch to the OFF position.
4. Unlock and open the security enclosure door.
5. Rack out the safe module until the slides are fully extended.
6. Loosen the M4 screw securing the GPS assembly to the side wall. Lift the GPS assembly up off
the fastener and unhook the service loop from the cable clamp.
With Alarms
Without Alarms
7. Disconnect the GSM and GPS antenna cables. Disconnect the Dual DC power cable from the PCB.
DC
GPS GSM
Antenna Antenna
8. To remove the antenna cables, remove the cable ties securing the three cables to the ATM
cables.
9. Carefully peel the GPS Tracker away from the 3MTM Dual LockTM fastening strips securing it to
the mounting plate. If any of the 3MTM Dual LockTM fastening strips on the mounting plate are
damaged or loose then replace them. Otherwise reuse the strips.

Note: The GPS Tracker is supplied with new 3MTM Dual LockTM fastening strips
attached for use.
10. In the topbox, loosen the M6 screw securing the antenna bracket to the top of the security
enclosure.
11. Extract the antenna assembly carefully pulling the cables up through the hole in the top of the
security enclosure. Disconnect the dual DC power cable from the PSU.
Note: The antenna is bonded to the bracket with adhesive tape which cannot be re-used.
Replacement
Fitting the replacement antenna or tracker is the reverse of this process.
Note: Ensure that the power switch on the new tracker is switched ON before installing.
ON - OFF
Power Switch Inside
Note: If an alarms bracket is installed on the ATM, fit the assembly between the bracket and the wall of
the security enclosure.
Note: When re-routing the device cables the service loop may need to be re-established.
To establish the correct service loop proceed as follows:
1. Align the single end of the dual DC power cable with the ends of the antenna cables.
2. Cable tie these three cables together for approximately 700mm (27.5 in.) from the end point.
3. The last cable tie becomes the datum point for alignment to the corner of the security
enclosure.
4. Tie back any cable excess above the datum point.

5. Coil the cable service loop neatly and secure it into the cable clip on top of the tracker assembly.
Datum point for Service

Loop 700mm (27.5 in.)
6. Restore ATM power and check that the battery charge LEDs on the tracker are illuminated.
7. You must now contact 3SI Security Systems to inform them that the tracker is now active.
Contact details:
Email: info@3sisecurity.com
Tel.: (USA) +1.800.433.1173
DISPENSER
S1 dispenser: Refer to the S1 Bill Alignment Dispenser Removal and Replacement chapter in this section.
S2 dispenser: Refer to FRU Removal and Replacement in the S2 Dispenser chapter in the Dispense
section.

REVISION


SELFSERV 27 MODULE REMOVAL
ACCESS TO FASCIA ITEMS

1. Open the topbox rear door. (Remove the door if access is restricted)
2. Disengage the module tray latch and fully extend the module tray.
KEYPAD
1. Remove the two screws securing the keypad assembly, then lever the tangs on the bracket off
the clips to allow the assembly to be removed.

2. Disconnect the keypad DC and USB cables. Remove the four screws securing the keypad to the
bracket.
3. When replacing the keypad assembly, make sure the bracket is correctly snapped into place on
the clips on the fascia before replacing the screws.

KEYPAD MEI
1. Unclip the MEI and disconnect the harness.
MCRW MEI/FASCIA INSERT/DECAL INSERT

1. Remove the two screws securing the MCRW MEI bracket.
2. Remove and replace the required part:

a. MCRW MEI: Remove the MEI from the bracket and disconnect the harness.
b. MCRW decal holder: Slide the decal holder out of the fascia.
c. MCRW fascia insert: Remove the four screws securing the insert.

3. When the required part has been replaced, re-secure the MCRW MEI bracket assembly with the
two screws. Note that there is a choice of 4 screw holes in case of thread wear.
RECEIPT FASCIA INSERT & MEI

1. Remove the four screws securing the receipt fascia insert.

2. Remove the insert and then either replace the whole assembly, the inner or outer parts of the
insert or unclip and disconnect the MEI on the fascia.
MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE

1. Loosen the screw securing the Midi Miscellaneous Interface (Midi Misc. I/F.) to the fascia. Then
slide the Midi Misc. I/F to the right and remove it.
2. Disconnect the harnesses. Then remove and retain the four screws securing the Midi Misc. I/F.
to the bracket. Re-fit the bracket to the replacement Midi Misc. I/F.
PC CORE
1. Disconnect the LVDS and LVDS Power connections from the rear of the display. Detach the
cables from any strain relief and anchor point on the rear of the display.

2. Disconnect the Audio Jack Socket from the front of the core. Note the position and disconnect all
the USB cables from the front of the Core.
3. Remove the USB cables from their strain relief clips on the front of the core.
4. Unscrew and disconnect the DVI cable from the front of the core.
5. Disconnect the LAN cable from the front of the core.

6. Disconnect the DC cable from the underneath the core.
7. Remove the cables bundles from the cable management clips under the core.
8. Remove and retain the M4 shipping screw from the core top bracket.

9. Partially remove the other M4 screw in the core top bracket (keyhole slot).
10. Unhook the screw from the top bracket, lower the front of the core to clear, then disengage
from the two rear locating brackets.
11. Refer to the Mini PC Core service chapter for instructions on how to remove the FRUs within the
PC core.

PSU
1. Turn the PSU switch to the off position (0).
2. Disconnect all of the AC and DC cables from the rear of the PSU.
3. Partially remove the two M4 nuts from the PSU.
4. Remove the PSU.
SHUTTER
Note: If access to inside the safe is available, then rack out the cash dispenser for better access to the
shutter.
1. Remove the cowl M6 screw from the top of the safe.
2. Remove the cowl and remove the harnessing from the cable management clips.
3. Remove the Card Reader MEI assembly. (see ‘MCRW Fascia Insert and MEI’ instructions).

4. Disconnect the shutter I2C and DC cables from the shutter.
5. Remove and retain the three M4 screws securing the shutter.
Note: Older versions of the shutter assemblies have open slots and the screws
need only be partially removed.
6. Remove the shutter from the fascia.
Fitting is the reverse except leave the shutter screws loose. Run diagnostics to establish the shutter
blade home position before fully tightening the shutter screws to the fascia.
CCTV CAMERA
1. Disconnect the cables from the camera.
2. Partially remove the two M4 screws from the CCTV camera mounting bracket.

3. Remove the camera and mounting bracket from the fascia.
FASCIA REMOVAL
From the rear of the unit:
1. Disconnect the LVDS (USB, Power and Comms) cables from the rear of the display.

2. Remove the cables from the clips on the rear of the display.
3. Disconnect the Audio Jack Socket from the front of the core.

4. Disconnect the Midi Misc I/F USB from the front of the core (USB port 2).
5. Remove the Audio and Midi Misc I/F USB from the cable management clips underneath the
core.
6. Disconnect the Cash Dispenser MEI.
7. Remove the Keypad (See ‘Keypad Removal’ instructions)
8. Remove the CCTV, CCR and Biometric devices.
9. Disconnect the SPS cables from the device, if installed.
10. Disconnect the RIO and Alarms to Midi Misc I/F cables, if installed.
11. Disconnect the Autosupervisor cables from the switch.
12. Disconnect the Display Air Duct Tube from the airflow cover.
13. Check harnessing is not tied in to prevent fascia removal.

14. Remove the six M4 nuts from the rear of the fascia. Three down the left-hand side and three
down the right-hand side.
15. Partially remove the M4 screw from the fascia retaining bracket.
16. Turn the retaining bracket 180 degrees to allow fascia removal.

From the front of the unit:
17. Use the keypad aperture and the top edge of the fascia as hand holds and pull the fascia carefully
outwards and clear of the unit. Take care not to snag any harnessing.
18. Place the fascia on a clean flat surface.
DISPLAY
1. Disconnect the three harness connectors (USB, power and signal) on the display.
2. If the ATM is fitted with a touchscreen, carefully open the Zero Insertion Force connector (ZIF)
retaining the ribbon cable connectors on the touchscreen controllers: two cables at the top and
one on the right-hand side of the display.

Tip: Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently prise open the connector.
3. Loosen the four screws (two each side) securing the display to the fascia. Then lift the display off
the screws and slide it out from behind the top-box.
Note: on early units, the screws may have to be removed completely, not just loosened.
4. Loosen the screws securing the touchscreen controllers in the keyhole slots. Then lift the
controller assemblies off the display. Retain the controllers and their covers and harnesses, to be
fitted to the replacement display.
cover.

TOUCHSCREEN
1. Remove the fascia and place on a clean flat surface. (See ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).
2. Remove the display assembly from the fascia. (See 'Display Removal’ instructions)
Note: Take care not to leave finger prints or debris on the display and or filter surfaces.
3. Remove the two pan head plastite screws from the airflow cover.
4. Remove airflow cover moulding.
5. Partially remove the two pan head plastite screws from the top corners of the fascia.

6. Remove the eight pan head plastite screws from the top and sides of the fascia.
7. Remove the six M4 screws from the insides of the fascia brace.

8. Disengage the bezel tabs and screws from the locating slots. Separate the touchscreen bezel
from the shelf by first sliding up and then out.
9. Follow the reverse of these instructions to fit the new touchscreen.
Note: When replacing the touchscreen take care to feed the ribbon cables through the
holes in the fascia without trapping or folding them.
Note: Make sure there is no gap between the refitted touchscreen and the lower fascia.
Apply pressure to all edges to ensure a tight fit.
cover.
FDK BEZEL
1. Remove the fascia and place on a clean flat surface. (See ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).
2. Remove the display assembly from the fascia. (See ‘Display Removal’ instructions)

3. Remove the two pan head plastite screws and the airflow cover.
4. Partially remove the four pan head plastite screws (keyholes slots) from the left and right hand
side of the mounting plate.
5. Partially remove the three pan head plastite screws (keyholes slots) from along the top of the
mounting plate.

6. Remove the pan head plastite screw from along the top of the mounting plate (below the
speaker).
7. Remove the three M4 screws from along the left-hand side of the mounting plate edge.
8. Remove the three M4 screws from along the right-hand side of the mounting plate edge.

9. Remove the display mounting bracket.
10. Remove the FDK bezel.
11. Place the bezel on a clean flat surface.

12. You can now replace the screen or gain access to the FDK assemblies.

FASCIA SHELF
1. Remove the Fascia from the unit. (see ‘Fascia Removal’ instructions).
2. Remove the Receipt Printer Interface moulding and MEI. (see ‘Receipt Fascia Insert and MEI’
instructions).
3. Remove the Card Reader Interface moulding and MEI. (see ‘MCRW Fascia Insert and MEI’
instructions).
4. Remove the Cash Camera device if fitted.
5. Remove the Bar-code reader device if fitted.
6. Remove the Contactless Card Reader module if fitted.
7. Remove the three pan head plastite screws from the top, the five pan head plastite screws from
the bottom and the four pan head plastite screws from the sides.
8. Remove the airflow cover moulding.

9. Remove the shelf from the fascia assembly.
DISPENSER
S1 dispenser: Refer to S1 Dispenser Removal and Replacement procedure in this section.
S2 dispenser: Refer to the FRU removal section of S2 Dispenser chapter in the Dispense section of this
manual.

S1 CURRENCY DISPENSER REMOVAL AND

REPLACEMENT
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the removal and replacement of the Front and Rear Access currency dispensers
from the SelfServ range of ATMs.
As this type of dispenser has been developed and manufactured to meet EU RoHS compliance
guidelines it should only be serviced using appropriate RoHS compliant parts.
Presenter Options
The following variants of presenter are available:
l Rear Access (short transport)

l Rear Access (mid transport)
l Rear Access (long transport)
l Front Access.
Pick Modules
The Dispenser can use the Aria or the 56XX enhanced single and double pick modules. The Aria pick
modules are described in the Aria pick module chapter of the dispense section of this manual. The
description of the 56XX type is in the Aria Pick Module section of the Dispense chapter of this manual.

The SelfServ range of ATMs can be configured with either Single or Dual Dispenser. The removal
instructions are the same for single and dual configurations.
It is advisable that prior to the removal of any pick module that the currency cassettes be removed so as
to reduce the weight of the module.
The currency dispenser is removed by dismantling it into manageable sections as described below.
1. Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers.

2. Removal of Lower Pick Module.
3. Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access).
4. Removing the ICS Module.
5. Removing the Control Board.
6. Removal of Upper Pick Module.
7. Removing the Presenter Module.

The dispenser replacement is described below.
1. Replacing the Presenter Module.

2. Replacing the Upper Pick Module.
3. Replacing the Electronics Box
4. Replacing the Lower Pick Module.
5. Replacing the Control Board.
6. Replacing the ICS Module.
7. Control Board Authentication.
8. Dispense Protection Configuration.
9. Replacing the In Service Replenishment Covers
10. Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure.
11. Diagnostics.
12. Adjustments.
Removal of In Service Replenishment Covers

It may be necessary to remove in service replenishment covers as appropriate to gain access to the
various parts of the dispenser prior to removal. Any cover and fixing screws removed should be
retained for refitting after the dispenser has been reassembled.
Removal of Lower Pick Module

1. The lower pick module for either front or rear access presenters is removed by firstly
disconnecting the inter pick harness between the two pick modules as shown below.

2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing which supplies the lower pick unit by pushing the upper vertical
tube fully home and squeezing the yellow ring and then pulling the vertical tube out of the tee
connector.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the lower pick module by inserting a flat bladed screw driver
and lifting in the direction of the arrow to release the latches.
4. Carefully disengage both latches on one side and allow the pick module to swing down and hang
on the other two.
5. The next step is to carefully lift the pick module off the two remaining latches.
Replacing the Lower Pick Module

Fitting a replacement lower pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Electronics Box (Rear Access)

On the rear access currency dispenser the electronics box contains the main motor and pump assembly,
solid state relay, and motor run capacitor. It also provides a mounting place for the dispenser control
board. Its removal gives access to these components and also to the LVDT assembly.

Dispenser Motor
Dispenser Control
Board
Electronics Box
Remove the electronics box as follows:
2. Push out the cable ties holding the harness to the top and left-hand side of the control board
cover.
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
4. Unscrew and remove the screw at the bottom right-hand side of the control board cover.
7. Disconnect the cables from the lower right-hand side of the electronics box.

must be carefully released prior to removal.
Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
9. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the green turning wheel in position.
10. Remove the green turning wheel from the presenter drive wheel and then ease off the timing
belt.
Screws
Timing Belt

11. Remove and retain the two plastic rivets securing the timing disk sensor in position by pushing
the rivet centre on the timing disk side of sensor. Move the sensor clear of the timing disk.
Plastic Timing Disk

Rivets Sensor
12. Loosen the four main motor mounting screws and ease the timing belt off the rear of the timing
disk gear towards the presenter side frame.
13. Lift the timing belt over the timing disk.
Timing Belt
Screws
(4 off)
14. At the upper left-hand side of the electronics box remove the screw attaching the earth strap to
the presenter.
Screw
Earth
Strap

15. Remove the air hose from the pump.
Air Hose
16. Remove the two top screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the presenter.
17. Remove the two bottom screws (1 each side) holding the electronics box to the upper pick
module.

18. Lift the electronics box to release its hooks from the presenter tie shaft and lift it clear of the
dispenser.
Replacing the Electronics Box

Fitting a replacement electronics box is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removing the Control Board

Dispenser Control Board - Rear Access
Screw
Harness
Control Board
Cover
Screw
Cable
3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right-hand side securing the control board cover
to the electronics box.

Dispenser
Harness
Cables
Screw
7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting bracket.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the electronics box and
Removal of Fluiditi Security Module

If the dispenser is fitted with a Fluiditi security system (also known as ICS) then it must be
decommissioned prior to its removal. The decommisioning information is contained in the Fluiditi
Replenishment Security and Fluiditi ATM Security chapters in the security sections of these manuals.
The Fluiditi module should be removed and refitted as per agreed procedures.

The system should be commissioned at the appropriate time during the replacement of the dispenser.
Dispenser Control Board - Front Access

3. Unscrew and remove the screw on the bottom right hand side securing the control board cover
to the pick module.
4. Remove the control board cover from the pick module.
5. Push out the cable ties holding the dispenser harness.

7. Unscrew and remove the two screws securing the IC heat sink to the mounting bracket.
8. Unscrew and remove the four screws securing the control board to the mounting bracket and
Replacing the Control Board

Re-fitting the existing control board is the reversal of the removal procedure.
The only additional actions required to verify the new board are: Control Board Authentication, Control
Board Authorisation and Currency Evaluation Qualification procedures.

Removal of Upper Pick Module

Rear Access
1. The upper pick module for the rear access presenter is removed by firstly disconnecting the
inter pick harness between the presenter and the pick module as shown below.
2. Disconnect the vacuum tubing which connects the pick module to the presenter at the first tee
connector as shown below by pushing the pushing the yellow ring towards the Tee-piece while
pulling the filter in the opposite direction.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed screwdriver
on the other two.

Front Access
On the front access ATM the control board is attached to the upper pick module.
1. The interpick harness and the vacuum tubing are disconnected in the same manner as the rear
access version.
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from the control board as described in the Removing the
Control Board section to release the control board from both the harness and the presenter
module. Remove the two fixing screws that hold the control board mounting assembly to the
upper pick module and then remove the control board and mounting assembly.
3. Loosen the four toggle latches on the upper pick module by inserting a flat bladed screwdriver
on the other two.
Replacing the Upper Pick Module

Fitting a replacement upper pick module is the reverse of the removal procedure.

Removing the Presenter Module

Rear Access
The presenter module is removed as follows:
1. Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter module as
shown by the two arrows below.
2. Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.
Front Access
The presenter module is removed as follows:
1. Remove the two securing screws that lock the presenter slides to the presenter module as
shown by the two arrows below.
2. Carefully slide the presenter module location studs off the slides and remove.
Replacing the Presenter Module

Fitting a replacement presenter module is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Control Board Authorisation

The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the dispenser
unit or separately as an FRU item. The following steps require the Parts Replacement Service Key for
activation.

1. Select the DEVICE STATUS LIST option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.
2. Select the device status reporting AUTHORISATION REQUIRED on the Cash Dispenser option.
3. Select the required part to be authorised.
4. The system will display a screen confirming the test is being performed.

5. If the part is authorised the following screen is displayed.
6. Once authorisation is complete the DEVICE STATUS LIST screen is redisplayed.

7. If the part is not authorised the system will display a summary report screen stating the test has
failed.
8. If the authorisation fails then repeat steps 1 to 6 after ensuring that the service key being used is
correctly inserted and has appropriate authorisation security level.

Control Board Authentication

The dispenser has the following levels of dispense protection:
l USB
l Logical
l Physical.
To authenticate a control board when configuration is physical or command is accessed through System
Application via the Parts Replacement Service Key with a logical configuration. The following procedure
must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the dispenser unit or separately as an FRU
item. The procedure must also be carried out if the PC Core and/or hard disk are replaced or if the hard
disk has been reformatted or ghosted.
Note: If configuration is logical use all steps except 5 and 6. If the configuration is physical use all steps. If
the configuration is USB no action is required.
1. Select the SELF-SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu.
3. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.
4. Then select the AUTHENTICATE option.
5. The AUTHENTICATE option will display the following screen.

6. The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove/replace the
cassette located in the lowest configured and populated position of the dispenser unit, or insert
a cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the dispenser unit within 1 minute to
make the system attempt to authenticate the board.
7. If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.
8. The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH DISPENSER
menu and repeat steps 4,5 and 6.
9. If the system verifies the board the following screen is displayed.
10. Once the board has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION menu and
proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure if required.


The following procedure must be carried out if the control board is replaced as part of the dispenser
unit or separately as an FRU item. The procedure must also be carried out if the PC Core and/or hard
disk are replaced, or if the hard disk has been reformatted or ghosted.
Note: Dispense configuration comes in three versions ie: USB dispense, logical dispense and physical
dispense.
To change dispense configurations as listed below use all the following steps except 7:
l USB to logical
l logical to physical
l USB to physical
To change security configurations as listed below use all the following steps:
l physical to logical
l logical to USB
l physical to USB
3. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option.
4. Then select the DISPENSE PROTECTION CONFIGURATION option.

5. The system will display the following screen.
6. Use the toggle option to select the appropriate dispense protection level required. Once the
correct option has been selected use OK option to display the following screen.
7. The user should change the state of the dispenser security toggle switch or remove the cassette
located in the lowest configured and populated position of the dispenser unit, or insert a
cassette into the lowest possible configured position of the dispenser unit within 1 minute to
change configuration.

8. If the system fails to verify the control board the following screen is displayed.
9. The user should select the OK button which will return them back to the USB CASH DISPENSER
menu and repeat steps 4 to 7 inclusive.
10. Once the configuration has been verified the user should return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION
menu and proceed with the Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure if required.
Currency Evaluation Qualification Procedure

Note: The currency dispenser is calibrated in the same way as the other dispensers in the 58XX and
56XX ranges of ATMs and singularity values previously calculated for these are valid.
When the first dispenser is received in each country the local Field Engineering organization must
establish the singularity values for each type of currency to be dispensed. These singularity values must
then be entered to every ATM dispensing that currency, upon initial installation or whenever the
dispenser control board or the LVDT has been changed or repaired.
The currency evaluation qualification procedure can only be performed on a calibrated dispenser.
Attempting the procedure on an uncalibrated or incorrectly calibrated dispenser will give incorrect
results.
Calibrating the Dispenser

Note: Dispensers are shipped pre-calibrated by the manufacturing plant. Calibration is required if the
LVDT or control board are replaced or NVRAM is corrupted or a new version of firmware is down
loaded.
The dispenser maintains an internal compensation factor in NVRAM on the dispenser control board. This
LVDT assemblies because of mechanical tolerances. The dispenser adjusts the LVDT compensation factor
automatically as bills of a known singularity value are dispensed. While bills are dispensed the actual
average of good single bill singularities is measured over 255 bills. This average is compared to the
singularity figure typed in at installation time and the compensation factor is adjusted accordingly.
Initially the compensation factor is set to 80H (equivalent to 1.00) and this is changed automatically by
the dispenser and updated every 255 bills.

To achieve dispenser calibration at least 255 bills of a known singularity must be dispensed. This may be
local currency or test media.
The following procedure describes how to calibrate a dispenser on a terminal running on the XP
platform using SYSTEM APPLICATION. If configuring dual dispensers you will use the SYSTEM
APPLICATION on NT and should refer, for details to the publication B006-6167-A000, “Self‐Service
Platform Software, Personas (PLATFORM For Windows XP), System Application User Guide”.
Level 1 diagnostic tests are required to dispense cash and for this reason you need to insert the field
engineer’s Service key.
The procedure is as follows:
1. For each cassette type, adjust the cassette guides if necessary to accept the test currency, and
set the cassette magnets for the required cassette type. Refer to currency cassette chapter in
the dispense section of this manual for details.
2. Load the test currency into the cassettes.
5. Select the SELF-SERVICE CONFIGURATION option from the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN MENU.
7. Then select the USB CASH DISPENSER option. The system will then instruct the CE to wait while
the dispenser transport is cleared.
8. The system with display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Then choose the SET option.
10. The system will then display the NOTE CONFIGURATION set up menu as shown below. The menu
is spread over two pages which is navigated using page up and page down options.
11. To start changing the note configuration, select the Reset option.
12. Enter note size for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
13. Enter the singularity for type 1. This is repeated for types 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
14. To accept all the changes made, select OK.

17. Return to the SYSTEM APPLICATION main Menu and select the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC option.
18. Select the CASH HANDLER option from the DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC menu.
19. Operate the dispenser security switch.
20. Select SET NOTES option from the USB CASH DISPENSER menu. The number of notes to be
picked is 40 from cassette type 1
21. Change the Loop Off option to Loop On.
22. Select the DISPENSE option and allow the loop count to reach at least 7 before stopping the
command.
The dispenser is now calibrated and you can evaluate the currency to be dispensed as described in the
next section.
Establishing Singularity and Size

In this procedure you have to cause the ATM to calculate the singularity and size of 40 dispensed bills
five times for each currency you wish to evaluate. Due to the nature of the currency the singularity
calculated may vary for each attempt. Add the five figures and take the average (divide by five and
round to the nearest whole number) and the answers are the singularity and size values you enter to the
ATM and to all ATMs using the same currency.
To achieve a good singularity figure the currency loaded for this procedure should comprise of new bills.
Load the currency so that the same side of each bill is facing the truck door of the cassette. Put the bills
into the cassette in 50 bill bunches, alternately right way up and upside down (see the following
illustration). This makes sure that variations in inking are allowed for.

the ATMs. Refer to currency cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for the
method of adjusting cassettes to currency size.
2. Set the cassette magnets to indicate cassette types 1, 2, 3 and 4 as required. Refer to currency
cassette chapter in the dispense section of this manual for this setting
3. Load at least 200 bills of each denomination of the currency into the cassettes.
6. Select the SYSTEM APPLICATION option from the ATM opening menu.
8. Then choose the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION option.
9. Then choose the USB CASH DISPENSER option from the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu. The
system will display the following screen.
10. Select the NOTE CONFIGURATION option.

11. Then choose the LEARN option.
12. Select the SET NOTES option to change the number of bills to be dispensed during the LEARN
process.

13. The system will display the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu showing the types available as shown
below.
Note: The menus only show the cassette types present in the ATM.
14. Select Type 1 from the menu shown below and the system will display the menu below which
allows you to change the number of bills to be dispensed.
15. Return to NOTE CONFIGURATION menu and activate Type 1.

16. The system will perform a test and return the message shown below.
17. The system will return to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.

18. Make a note of the singularity and size figures on the screen against the cassette and type
selected or all cassette types if applicable.
20. Repeat steps 11 to 18 until you have five readings of singularity and size for each cassette type
loaded.
21. Add each set of five figures and divide the total by five to obtain an average singularity and size
22. Select the PARAMETER option from the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
23. Modify as appropriate the parameters you require to change.
24. To accept all the changes made select OK and the changes will be accepted.
27. Return the system to the SYSTEM APPLICATION MAIN menu.
The procedure is now complete. From the UTILITIES menu you can now enter level 1 diagnostics and
A reject rate less than 1.5% must be achieved when dispensing an average of 2.5 notes per transaction.
If the reject rate is greater than this the singularity and size values should be recalculated.

The reject rate is calculated using the following formula. The numbers for rejected bills and total bills
picked are taken from tallies.

Reject Rate = × 100%
Error Messages
Errors occurring during bill configuration procedures result in the error messages described below.

Dispenser Clear Transport Error

When the DISPENSER BILL CONFIG option is selected from the CONFIGURATION menu a CLEAR
command is sent to clear the transport of any bills. If the clear operation fails then the following error
screens shown below are displayed. Each screen is displayed for five seconds before the next one is
displayed. You return to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION menu.

The currency parameters are checked for errors as they are entered. If an error is detected then the
error message shown below is displayed. The incorrect entry is highlighted and you can re-enter a
correct value in the error position.

The message is shown for five seconds and then you are prompted to enter the new parameter value
again. Once all the parameter values have been changed and checked, the main dispenser screen
reappears with the new parameter values. If a mistake becomes apparent at this point then the user can
select CHANGE again.
The dispenser parameter error messages are as follows:
l ERROR - VALID RANGE XX - XXX - Parameter value is outside the permissible range. This applies to
bill sizes and singularity values
l DUPLICATE VALUE IN SEQUENCE - A duplicate value has been entered in the presentation order
l ERROR - INVALID SEQUENCE - The user has input fewer than four values for the presentation
order.
Learn Parameter Errors

Cassette Errors During Learn - If an attempt to learn the parameters from a particular cassette type fails
then, providing the error is not fatal, the operation will be tried repeatedly until successful, or a fatal
error occurs. Should a fatal error occur then the error screen shown below appears, and after five
seconds, you are returned to the NOTE CONFIGURATION menu.
Dispenser Error During Learn - The following screen appears if a fatal dispenser error occurs while
learning parameters from the dispenser. Any changes made up to this point can not be written to the
dispenser therefore you are returned to the CASH HANDLER menu via the SET DEVICE CONFIGURATION
menu.

Dispenser Read/Write Errors - If, while communicating with the dispenser, an error occurs which is not
fatal, then the operation is tried repeatedly until it is successful or until a fatal error occurs. When a fatal
error is encountered then a DISPENSER COMMS ERROR screen showing one of the following messages
is displayed. The CONFIG MENU activator on the screen returns you to the configuration menu.
l UNABLE TO READ PARAMETERS - A fatal error has occurred while reading data from the
dispenser. Unable to read the currently configured dispenser parameters so can not continue with
configuration.
l CONFIGURATION NOT COMPLETED - Fatal error while writing data to the dispenser. The
configuration data is written to the dispenser NVRAM using three separate dispenser calls. One
sets the new bill sizes, one sets the new singularity values and the third sets the new presentation
order. Because the data is split into three parts, if this type of error occurs then the dispenser
configuration is incomplete.
Pick Module Timing

The dispenser does not require any timing relationship to be set between the action of the pick modules
and the presenter. The pick module to pick module relationship does, however, still require to be set.
The adjustment procedures are described in Aria pick module chapter of the dispense section of this
manual.
DIAGNOSTICS
None
STRAPPING
None
ADJUSTMENTS
Drive Belt Tension
Proceed as follows to adjust the tension of the drive belt from the main motor to the intermediate
pulley. Refer to the illustrations following the procedure for each type of dispenser.
l Check for a deflection of 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) when a force of 1.0 N (0.21 lb.) is applied to the mid
span of the drive belt.
l If the tension is wrong, loosen the four motor mounting screws.
l Move the main motor to adjust the belt tension.
l Tighten the screws and check the tension again.
l Repeat the adjustment until the correct tension is achieved.

Drive Belt Arrangement - Rear Access
1.0 N (0.21 lb)
Motor Mounting Screws

(4 places)
Drive Belt Arrangement - Front Access
None.

17. MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES AND INTERFACES
Miscellaneous Interface and Remote Input/Output Boards 841
Media Entry/Exit Indicators 852
USB DVD RW Slimline Drive 855
Midi Miscellaneous Interface 861
Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive 870

MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE AND REMOTE

INPUT/OUTPUT BOARDS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the Miscellaneous Interface board (Misc I/F board) installed in the facia, and the
Remote Input/Output board (RI/O board) installed in the security enclosure. These boards provide the
following miscellaneous interfaces to NCR 663X ATMs:
The Misc I/F and RI/O boards carry out the following functions:
l Provide control and status circuitry for:

l Media entry/exit indicators
l Public and private audio
l Facia light
l Advert Light
l Function display keys (FDKs)
l Customer display and power control status
l Provide a USB 1.1 compliant interface to communicate to the PC core
l Provide control and status circuitry for security and remote device functions such as remote
indicators, remote relay, alarms status, and night deposit function
l Provide area of non-secure persistent memory to store information such as product class and
serial number
l Perform a watchdog function and provide a reset to the PC core.
The Misc I/F board provides the main functionality and the RI/O board provides the security and remote
device functionality.
DESCRIPTION
The Misc I/F board is a four-layer printed board with surface mounted components that provide
breakout connections for the link to the RI/O board and USB link to the PC core. The RI/O board is a two-
layer printed board providing a link to the Misc I/F board via a 20-way connector.
Miscellaneous Interface Board

The board contains the following subsystems:
l MCF5272 processor
l Flash ROM
l SRAM
l EEPROM
l Power regulator
l Background debug mode (BDM) interface
l Debug interfaces

l Diagnostic LEDs
l Reset
l USB interface
l MEEI interface
l Audio interface
l FDK interface
l Auto supervisor
l Watchdog
l Power control
l Advert/facia light control.
Remote Input/Output (RI/O) Board

The RI/O board contains the following subsystems:
l Remote indicator
l Alarms
l Remote relay, deposit solenoid, night deposit 1 (bag) and night deposit 2 (door)
l Reserved I/O port (2 off).
Night Safe Service

The night safe depository service is responsible for the access and control of a Night Safe Depository
device situated next to the ATM. Three types of NSD device are supported:
l The night safe supports monitoring of the bag drop switch only during a deposit
l The ATM:
l Controls the door bolt
l Monitors the bag drop switch during a deposit
l The ATM:
l Controls the door bolt
l Monitors the bag drop switch during a deposit
l Senses that the door has been closed after the deposit.
Alarms Service
The alarms service senses and reports changes in the state of the four security enclosure sensors. The
service polls the input lines and returns an unsolicited response if a change of state is detected which
lasts for at least 200 ms.
Indicators Service
The indicators service is responsible for access and control of the following:
l Remote status monitor

l Remote relay
l In-service indicator
l Facia light
l Remote power on/off

l Watchdog reset.
l Media Entry/Exit Indicators Service
l The media entry/exit indicators service controls media entry/exit indicators as follows:
l Cash dispenser
l Statement printer
l Receipt printer
l Envelope dispenser
l Card reader
l Depository/DPM
l Passbook printer
l Spare.
Board Layouts
The main components on the Misc I/F board are identified in the following illustration:
J2 J1
J3 J5
D1
D2
D3 J4
D4
U37
J7
D8
Diagnostic LEDs Power Indicator LED
The main components on the RI/O board are identified in the following illustration:
J3 J4 J5
REMOTE I/O
SUPPLY
J2 J1

Power Requirement
Typical voltage and current requirements for the Misc I/F board are:
l +24V ± 2.4V @ 1.5A maximum

l +5V auxiliary ±0.5V @ 1.0A maximum
l 3.3V 0.33V @ 1.5A maximum (generated on board from the 5V auxiliary supply).
Typical voltage and current requirements for the RI/O board are:
l +24V ±2.4V @ 2A maximum

l +3.3V ±0.33V @ 100mA maximum (from the Misc I/F).
Note: The above currents do not include external loads.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error message: REPLACE_NOW or INSPECT_NOW Device fault or comms error None Replace
DIAGNOSTICS
Diagnostic LEDs
Four diagnostic LEDs are fitted to the Misc I/F board.
J2
D1
D2
Diagnostic LEDs
D3
D4
During level 0 diagnostics after a power-up or hard reset (not after a soft reset) the test ID is displayed
on the programmable LEDs. Once the test is complete, if a failure has occurred, the test result is
displayed on the LEDs for one second followed by the test ID again for one second. This sequence
continues until the board is reset. If no failure occurs, the next test in the sequence is performed until
the entire start-up sequence is complete and the LEDs are cleared. Once level 0 diagnostics are
complete, usage of the LEDs is device specific.
Note: There is no switch selectable or run-to-run tests provided.

The following table gives the status for the LED codes:
LEDs
Status
D1 D2 D3 D4
On Off On On Bootloader Checksum Fail
Off Off Off On Data Bus Error
On Off Off On Address Bus Error
Off On Off On Internal Data Error
Poly-Switches
The devices powered from the Misc I/F and RI/O boards are protected by resettable poly-switches.
There are no fuses on the boards.
Note: The poly-switches are reset after the fault is cleared and the power in the circuit is removed.
Normal operation is resumed after the device has cooled and the fault has been cleared. No manual
resetting or replacement is required.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

Information not available.

CABLING
Interconnect Diagram
Line Out Facia and Advert Light
MISC I/F Power Control and Status
PC CORE BOARD Public Audio
Private Audio (Headphone + Jack Detect)
USB
FDKs
MEEIs
Display Status
Auto Supervisor
REMOTE I/O Alarms Status

BOARD Remote Status Indicators
Optional Night Deposit
Remote Relay
RIO Enable Harness
RIO MISC_IF P7
RIO MISC_IF P7
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
2
1
2
1
5 5
6 6
3
4
3
4
7 7
8 8
5
6
5
6
9 9
10 10
7
8
7
8
11 11
10
10
9
9
12 12
13 13
12
11
12
11
14 14
15 15
14
13
14
13
16 16
17 17
15
16
15
16
18 18
17
18
17
18
19 19
20 20
20
20
19
19
RIO MISC_IF P7

Miscellaneous Interface Board Connectors
+24V DC Power Connector (J5)
This is a 2-way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 +24V DC
2 GND
USB Connector (J2)

This is a 5-way right angle USB mini B-type connector:
Pin Signal
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D-
3 USB_D+
4 N/C
5 GND
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1)

This is a 3-way 3.5 mm PCB mount audio jack socket:
Pin Signal
1 SCREEN
2 PC AUDIO RIGHT
3 N/C
4 N/C
5 PC AUDIO LEFT
Every Unit Item Connector (J3)

Signal Pin Pin Signal

+5V_AUX_RTN 1 2 +5V_AUX
FDK2_TOP 3 4 FDK_CONF1
FDK2_LW_MD 5 6 FDK2_UP_MD
FDK_CONF2 7 8 FDK2_BOT


FDK1_TOP 9 10 FDK2_GND
FDK1_LW_MD 11 12 FDK1_UP_MD
FDK_BOT 13 14 FDK1_GND
MEEI5 15 16 +24V
MEEI6 17 18 +24V
MEEI7 19 20 +24V
MEEI8 21 22 +24V
MEEI1 23 24 +24V
MEEI2 25 26 +24V
MEEI3 27 28 +24V
MEEI4 29 30 +24V
FACIA_LIGHT_CTL 31 32 FACIA_LIGHT_CTL_RTN
WDOG_RESET 33 34 WDOG_RESET_RTN
POWER_SHD2 35 36 POWER_SHD2_RTN
POWER_SHD1 37 38 POWER_SHD1_RTN
POWER_STAT_2 39 40 POWER_STAT_2_RTN
POWER_STAT_1 41 42 POWER_STAT_1_RTN
DISP_STAT_D1 43 44 DISP_STAT_D1_RTN
DISP_STAT_D0 45 46 DISP_STAT_D0_RTN
LEFT_OUT+ 47 48 LEFT_OUT-
RIGHT_OUT+ 49 50 RIGHT_OUT-
Feature Connector (J4)


HP_SPK_LEFT 1 2 HP_SPK_LEFT_RTN
HP_SPK_RIGHT 3 4 HP_SPK_RIGHT_RTN
HP_VOL_ADJUST 5 6 HP_VOL_ADJUST_RTN
HP_JACK_DET 7 8 HP_JACK_DET_RTN
AUD_FEAT_DET 9 10 AUD_FEAT_DET_RTN
MEEI9 11 12 +24V
MEEI10 13 14 +24V
MEEI11 15 16 +24V
MEEI12 17 18 +24V


MEEI13 19 20 +24V
MEEI14 21 22 +24V
MEEI15 23 24 +24V
MEEI16 25 26 +24V
ADVERT_LIGHT_CTL 27 28 ADVERT_LIGHT_CTL_RTN
AUTO_SUP_SW 29 30 AUTO_SUP_SW_RTN
AUTO_SUP_DET 31 32 AUTO_SUP_DET_RTN
RESERVED_OUT1 33 34 RESERVED_OUT1_RTN
Remote I/O Interface Connector (J7)


RS_PWR 1 2 CSTS
LED0 3 4 CSTS_RTN
LED1 5 6 DSTS
LED2 7 8 DSTS_RTN
REMOTE_RELAY 9 10 SSTS
DEP_SOLENOID 11 12 SSTS_RTN
ND_BAG 13 14 TSTS
ND_DOOR 15 16 TSTS_RTN
RESERVED_01_RTN 17 18 RESERVED_01
Remote Input/Output Board Connectors

+24VDC Power Connector (J1)
Pin Signal
1 +24V DC
2 GND

Miscellaneous I/O Connector (J2)


RS_PWR 1 2 CSTS
LED0 3 4 CSTS_RTN
LED1 5 6 DSTS
LED2 7 8 DSTS_RTN
REMOTE_RELAY 9 10 SSTS
DEP_SOLENOID 11 12 SSTS_RTN
ND_BAG 13 14 TSTS
ND_DOOR 15 16 TSTS_RTN
Alarms Status Connector (J3)

This is an 8-way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 CSTS
2 GND
3 DSTS
4 GND
5 SSTS
6 GND
7 TSTS
8 GND
Reserved I/O Connector (J4)

Pin Signal
1 RESERVED_01
2 RESERVED_01_RTN
3 RESERVED_02
4 RESERVED_02_RTN

Remote Relay and Remote Indicator Connector (J5)

Pin Signal
1 RS_PWR
2 LED 0
3 LED 1
4 LED 2
5 REMOTE RELAY 1A
6 REMOTE RELAY 1B
7 REMOTE RELAY 2A
8 REMOTE RELAY 2B
9 DEPOSIT SOLENOID PWR
10 DEPOSIT SOLENOID RTN
11 ND_BAG
12 NIGHT DEPOSIT BAG RTN
13 ND_DOOR
14 NIGHT DEPOSIT DOOR RTN
No special tools are required to install the boards.

MEDIA ENTRY/EXIT INDICATORS
INTRODUCTION
The Media Entry/Exit Indicators (MEEIs) are located next to media entry/exit slots on the fascia of the
ATM. They act as prompts to the customer during specific entry or exit services.
DESCRIPTION
The MEEI comprises of a series of LEDs mounted on a PCB. Variants of the MEEI can be linear strips or
non-linear profiled boards. The MEEIs are controlled through the Miscellaneous Interface.
For some entry/exit slots the MEEI may be mounted on a carrier moulding.
MEEI PCB
Carrier Moulding
TROUBLESHOOTING
None.

DIAGNOSTICS
Device Diagnostics
ID
0 Menu This displays a menu of all the other Applets to allow an operator to select one.
1 Set Speed Input Blink Speed:
Test 1. Quarter Hz
2. Half Hz
3. One Hz
4. two Hz
5. Four Hz
6. Continuous.
2 Indicator This test will flash all of the installed MEEI together for verification then stop flashing for
Test verification.
For the 668X product range, the card slot MEEI has an earth connection which is vital to prevent MEEI to
Skimming Protection System (SPS) interference.
Two connectors are utilised depending on the product.
Male two way connector.
Pin Description
1 24V
2 GND
668X - Male 6 way connector.
Pin Description
1 24V
2 GND
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC

STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

None.
CABLING
None.
None.

USB DVD RW SLIMLINE DRIVE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the USB DVD RW Slimline Drive.
The drive is a DVD-RW and CD-RW drive which has a USB 2.0 interface that supports DVD video and CD
audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD-ROM and CD-ROM disks complying with following
ECMA standards:
l ECMA–130
l ECMA–267
l ECMA–279
l ECMA–337
l ECMA–338
l ECMA–349
l ECMA–359
l ECMA–371
The drive writes to any standard DVD-R/RW and CD-R/RW disks complying with the same ECMA
standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk load and unload. Disks may be
loaded or unloaded with the drive in either vertical or horizontal orientation.
The drive is powered from the USB cable, but requires an additional 5V dc supply from the product if
the drive is used for writing to disks rather than just reading from them.

DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.
Dimension Measurement (excluding the front bezel)

Height 12.7 mm
Width 128 mm
Length 126.1 mm
Mass 172 g or less
Mounting Orientation
The USB DVD RW Slimline drive can be mounted either vertically or horizontally.
Note: The mounting screws are M2, and should not exceed 5.0 mm from the surface of both sides or
the bottom of the drive.
30° or less 30° or less 30° or less 30° or less
Disk Clamp System

To secure and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp system.

Tray Ejecting
The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.
The tray can be ejected through either of the following options:
l Manual Eject Button

l Emergency Eject Hole
l ATAPI command
Manual Eject Button

This button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at power on and may be
disabled by software commands.
Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or unload a disk.
Manual Eject Button
Emergency Eject Hole

For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel to eject the
tray.
ATAPI Command
A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.
Supported Disk Types

The table below lists the disk types that the DVD RW Slimline drive supports .
Readable Disks Recordable Disks

DVD–ROM DVD–R
DVD–R DVD–R DL
DVDR DL DVD–RW
DVD–RW DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)
DVD+R DVD+R


DVD+R DL DVD+R DL
DVD+RW DVD+RW
DVD–RAM CD–R
CD–DA CD–RW
CD–ROM
CD–R
CD–RW
Read and Write Speed

The table below lists the read and write speed of the drive.
Drive Read Speed Write Speed

DVD-RW 8x CAV 4, 680rpm 2 - 6x(ZCLV)
2 - 4x(ZCLV)
2x (CLV)
1x (CLV)
CD-RW 24x CAV 5, 160rpm 10–24x(ZCLV)
10–20x(ZCLV)
10–16x(ZCLV)
10x(CLV)
4x(CLV)
Power Requirements
The USB DVD RW Slimline drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5Vdc, ±5% (4.75 to
5.25V).
The table below lists the current consumption of the DVD RW drive.
Mode Average Current (A) Peak Current (A)

Standby 0.18 -
Sleep 0.17 -
USB Suspend 0.06 -
Write 24x (CD–R) 1.1 -
Active 1.0 -
Random access (Duty 100%) 1.2 1.3
During starting seek - 1.5
During eject - 1.0

ERROR MESSAGES
The DVD RW Slimline drive does not send out error messages. If the drive fails to operate, perform the
following:
1. Check the USB cable connection to the USB hub or Core.

2. Check the disk if it is damaged or scratched. Make sure the drive supports the disk that is loaded.
3. If the drive fails to write, check the 5 V dc supply to the drive. The drive requires additional 5 V
supply when writing to disks.
4. If the drive still does not operate, replace the DVD drive with a new one.
DIAGNOSTICS
None.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable units in the drive.
CABLING
None.
The following illustration shows the rear view of the drive:
DC 5V IN CONNECTOR
USB MINI INTERFACE
PIN 1

USB Mini Interface

The table below lists the pin assignments for the USB mini interface.
Pin Type
1 VCC
2 D-
3 D+
4 ID
5 GND
DC 5 V In Connector
This connector is a 4.0 mm x 1.7 mm, EIAJ RC5320A TYPE2 connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments for the 5 Vdc In connector.
Pin Type
Inner +5 Vdc
Outer Ground
None.

MIDI MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the USB Midi Miscellaneous Interface board (Midi-Misc Board).
DESCRIPTION
The Midi-Misc Board is a hardware variant of the Mini-Misc Board with upgraded features. The micro-
controller connects to the host PC Core via an integrated USB 2.0 compliant full speed USB link. The
micro-controller firmware is updated automatically from the host PC via the USB link.
The Midi-Misc Board contains the following I/O interfaces:
l Media Entry/Exit Indicators - 16 MEEIs, maximum of 3 at one time, not auto-detect, brightness
controlled (“throb”).
l Public Audio (“beep”) - Stereo, software enable.
l Private Audio - Stereo, software enable, feature detect, jack detect and volume control inputs
l Function Display Keys - 8 FDKs, feature detect.
l TTL DIP card reader
l Alarms Status - 4 lines supported.
Board Layout
The main components on the Midi-Misc Board are identified in the following illustration:
Power Requirement
The Midi-Misc Board is powered from the USB Vbus supply. The board must be powered from either a
root hub or a self powered hub, it cannot be powered from a bus powered hub.
The board requires the following DC voltages:

l USB Vbus +5v nominal

l +5.25v max
l +4.50v min
Required current is:
l Vbus = 0.5Amps (maximum rms – dependent on board population)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Message Possible root causes Isolation Resolution
REPLACE_NOW Device Fault None Replace Device
INSPECT_NOW Comms Error None Connect Device
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
Diagnostic LED
The diagnostic LED fitted to the Midi-Misc Board is for development use only and mirrors MEEI4 in
normal operation.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in the device.

CABLING
Interconnect Diagram
In-Circuit Debug Cable
The In-Circuit Debug Cable connects between Midi-Misc J11 and the Microchip MPLAB ICD2
debug/programming tool.
Midi-Misc Board Connectors
Audio Line I/P Connector (J1)
This is a 3.5mm right angled PCB Audio Jack socket:
Pin Signal
1 Screen
2 PC Audio Right
3 Not Populated
4 Not Populated
5 PC Audio Left

Public Audio (“beep”) Connector (J2)

Pin Signal
1 BEEP_L_A
2 BEEP_L_B
3 BEEP_R_A
4 BEEP_R_B
MEEI (5-10) Connector (J3)

Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 +5V
8 MEEI10_DRV
9 +5V
10 MEEI9_DRV
11 +5V
12 MEEI8_DRV
13 +5V
14 MEEI7_DRV
15 +5V
16 MEEI6_DRV
17 +5V
18 MEEI5_DRV

USB Connector (J4)

This is a 5-way right angled USB mini B-type connector:
Pin Signal
1 BUS_PWR
2 USB_D-
3 USB_D+
4 NC
5 GND
Private Audio Connector (J5)

Pin Signal
1 GND
2 NC
3 GND
4 HP_FREAT_DETb
5 GND
6 HP_VOL_ADJ_BUT
7 GND
8 HP_JACK_DETECT_SW
9 HP_SPK_LEFT
10 HP_SPK_RIGHT
FDK Connector (J6)

Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 FDK2_BTb
4 FDK2_CONFb
5 FDK2_UMb
6 FDK2_LMb
7 GND
8 FDK2_TPb

Pin Signal
9 FDK1_BTb
10 FDK1_CONFb
11 FDK1_UMb
12 FDK1_LMb
13 GND
14 FDK1_TPb
Alarms Status Connector (J7)

This is an 12-way right angle connector:
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 TSTS
6 GND
7 SSTS
8 GND
9 DSTS
10 GND
11 CSTS
12 GND

Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 GND
8 NC

Pin Signal
9 +5V
10 MEEI4_DRV
11 +5V
12 MEEI3_DRV
13 +5V
14 MEEI2_DRV
15 +5V
16 MEEI1_DRV

Pin Signal
1 NC
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 +5V
10 MEEI16_DRV
11 +5V
12 MEEI15_DRV
13 +5V
14 MEEI14_DRV
15 +5V
16 MEEI13_DRV
17 +5V
18 MEEI12_DRV
19 +5V
20 MEEI11_DRV

Auto Supervisor Connector (J10)

Pin Signal
1 AUTO_SUP_SW
2 GND
3 AUTO_SUP_DET
4 GND
5 NC
In-Circuit Debug/Programming Connector (J11)

This is a 6-way right-angled header that provides in-circuit debug and programming access to the micro-
controller:
Pin Signal
1 MCLRb/VPP
2 +5V
3 GND
4 IC_PGC
5 IC_PGD
6 IC_PGM
Note: This connector will be fitted during board development but may be removed for production
boards subject to Production Test agreement.
TTL Card Reader Connector (J12)

Pin Signal
1 +5V
2 0V
3 CR_DATA2
4 CR_CLK2
5 CR_DATA1
6 CR_CLS
7 CR_REAR_SENSOR
8 CR_CLK1

None.

SLIM DVD SATA SUPER MULTI DRIVE
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information on the Slim DVD SATA Super Multi Drive.
The drive is a DVD–RW and CD–RW drive which has a Serial ATA interface that supports DVD video and
CD audio playback capability. It reads any standard DVD–ROM and CD–ROM disks complying with the
following ECMA standards:
l ECMA–130
l ECMA–267
l ECMA–279
l ECMA–337
l ECMA–338
l ECMA–349
l ECMA–359
l ECMA–371
The drive writes to any standard DVD–R/RW and CD–R/RW disks complying with the same ECMA
standards. The drive uses a tray mechanism which is spring loaded for disk load and unload. To secure
and hold the disk, the drive uses a Ball Clamp as its disk clamp system.
DESCRIPTION
Dimensions
The table below lists the physical properties of the drive.

Height 12.7 mm
Width 128 mm


Depth 129.4 mm
Mass 172 g or less
Tray Ejecting
The drive uses a spring loaded tray mechanism for loading and unloading a disk.
The tray can be ejected through the following options:
l Manual eject button

l Emergency eject hole
l ATAPI command
Manual Eject Button

The eject button transmits an electrical signal to the eject mechanism. It is enabled at power on and may
be disabled by software commands.
Press the Manual Eject button located at the front bezel to eject the tray, and load or unload a disk.
Manual Eject Button

For emergencies, push a pin through the emergency eject hole located at the front bezel to eject the
tray.
ATAPI Command
A standard ATAPI command may also eject the tray.

Supported Disk Types

The table below lists the disk types that the DVD drive supports.

DVD–ROM DVD–R
DVD–R DVD–R DL
DVD–R DL DVD–RW
DVD–RW DVD–RAM (4.7 gb)
DVD+R DVD+R
DVD+R DL DVD+R DL
DVD+RW DVD+RW
DVD–RAM CD–R
CD–DA CD–RW
CD–ROM
CD–R
CD–RW
Read and Write Speed

The table below lists the read and write speed of the DVD drive.
Drive Read Speed Write Speed

DVD–RW 8 x CAV 4, 680 rpm 2 - 6x (ZCLV)
2 - 4x (ZCLV)
2x (CLV)
1x (CLV)
CD–RW 24x CAV 5, 160 rpm 10 - 24x (ZCLV)
10 - 20x (ZCLV)
10 - 16x (ZCLV)
10x (CLV)
4x (CLV)
Power Requirements
The DVD drive powers up with an input voltage in the range of 5 Vdc, ±5% (4.75 to 5.25 V).

The table below lists the current consumption the drive.
Mode Average Current (A) Peak Current (A)

Standby 0.049 -
Sleep 0.049 -
Write 24x (CD–R) 0.8 -
Active 0.7 -
Random access (Duty 100%) 1.0 1.3
During starting seek - 1.5
During eject - 0.7
ERROR MESSAGES
None.
DIAGNOSTICS
section.
STRAPPING
None.
ADJUSTMENTS
None.

There are no field replaceable parts in this device.
CABLING
The DVD Super Multi drive uses the following cables to connect to the terminal.
l Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout

l Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA

Kiosk eSATA Core Breakout
eSATA 7P
SATA 7P
1 Drain 1 1
2 2
3 3
eSATA 7P 4 Drain 2 4 SATA 7P
Drain 3
5 5
6 6
7 Drain 4 7
Kiosk DVD eSATA + Power to Slimline SATA
Slimline SATA 13P (7P + 6P) eSATA
5 V Power
1 Drain 1 1
2 2
3 3
Slimline SATA 7P 4 Drain 2 4 eSATA
Drain 3
5 5
6 6
7 Drain 4 7
Shield (screen)
1
2 +5 V 3
Slimline SATA 6P 3 (red) 1 5 V Power
4 4
5 GND (black) 2
6

The illustration below shows the rear view of the drive with the connector and pin assignments.
Pitch Slimline Serial ATA
Pin P1 Pin S1
The DVD Super Multi drive uses a 1.00 mm, 1.27 mm Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug with 13 pins as its
interface connector.
The table below lists the pin assignments of the Pitch Slimline Serial ATA Plug.
Pin Name Type Description

S1 GND
S2 A+ Differential Signal Pair A
S3 A-
S4 GND
S5 B- Differential Signal Pair B
S6 B+
S7 GND
P1 DP Device Present
P2 +5 V
P3
P4 MD/DA Manufacturing Diagnostic/Device Attention
P5 GND
P6
None.

REVISION
February 2014 A.1 New Publication
March 2014 A.2 Updated - PM Currency Dispenser
Updated - PM Receipt Printer
Updated - USB IMCRW
Updated - Receipt Printer
Updated - S1 Dispenser
April 2014 A.3 Corrected Product ID 7265 was 7625
May 2014 A.4 Removed - Mini Misc I/F
Added - Midi Misc I/F
January 2015 A.5 Updated - Introduction
Updated - PM Schedule
Added - PM S2 Currency Dispenser
Updated - Updated 6623 Product Cabling
Added - 6627 Product Cabling
Updated - PC Core
Added - 15" Touchscreen
Added - 15" Display
Added - S2 Dispenser
Added - S2 Currency Cassette
Added - USB Barcode Reader
Added - 6623 Module Removal
April 2015 A.6 Added - PM Security Enclosure Heaters
Added - PM Barcode
Added - UPS
Added - USB Hub
Added - USB Smart DIP Card Reader (Sankyo)
Added - Chine EPP
Added - UEPP3
Added - Backlight Displays
Added - Thermal Management 15" Display
Added - Alarms
Added - SATA DVD
Added - Product Environment Heaters
Updated - 6623 Module Removal
Added - 6627 Module Removal


February 2016 A.7 Updated - USB IMCRW
Updated - Dynamo Display
April 2017 B.1 Publication Format Conversion
June 2017 B.2 Updated - Mini PC Core
Updated - S2
September 2017 B.3 Updated - 6623 Cabling
Updated - 6627 Cabling
Updated - Mini PC Core
Added - USB Cash Camera
Added - Colour Portrait Camera
December 2017 B.4 Updated - 6623 Cabling
Updated - Mini PC Core
Updated - 6623 Module Removal
Added - WVA Display
Added - 19" PCAP Touchscreen
January 2018 B.5 Updated - 6623 Cabling
May 2018 B.6 Updated - 6623 Cabling
Updated - UPS


SelfServ 6623_6627-B006-7265-B000 (1)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SelfServ 6623_6627-B006-7265-B000 (1)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SelfServ 6623_6627-B006-7265-B000 (1)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NCR SelfServ 6623/27 ATMs

It is the policy of NCR Corporation to improve products as

All features, functions and operations described herein may not

Therefore, before using this document, consult with your NCR

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

6623 ATM Schedule 9

Security Enclosure Heaters 18

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

USB 2D Barcode Reader (UBAR) 20

USB Receipt Printer 23

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

6627 Product Cabling 99

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

UNINTERUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 135

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

6. CORE AND COMMUNICATIONS

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Mini PC Core 153

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

USB Smart Dip Card Reader 263

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

USB Smart Dip Card Reader (Sankyo) 268

USB Contactless Card Reader 272

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Card Recycler Module 280

8. KEYBOARDS AND ENCRYPTORS

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

China Encrypting Pin Pad (USBCPIN) 296

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Universal Encrypting Pin Pad (III) 305

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

15 Inch Dynamo Displays 319

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

15 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch 329

19 inch Wide Viewing Angle Display 349

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

19 inch USB Projected Capacitive Touch Screen 353

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Colour Portrait Camera (USB) 367

DView Camera 372

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

USB Receipt Printer 393

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Aria Pick Module 503

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

Currency Cassettes 527

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

S2 Currency Dispenser 577

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

NCR - CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

S2 Dispenser Cassette 683